Ume Ingepac Ef CB Eng

CAPACITOR BANK PROTECTION
INGEPAC EF-CB
User Manual
UME_INGEPAC_CB_eng Rev. G (11/19)
© All rights reserved. No part of this publication

may be reproduced, by whatever means, without
the prior written permission of Ingeteam
Technology.
Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the right to

make changes without prior notice.
INDEX 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 10

1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 10
1.2 MODEL ENCODING ................................................................................................................................................ 11
1.3 USER INTERFACE .................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.4 INTERCONNECTIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 13
1.4.1 CPU ...................................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.4.2 Power supply ....................................................................................................................................................... 14
1.4.3 Input/output cards .............................................................................................................................................. 14
1.4.4 Analogue inputs .................................................................................................................................................. 17
2. HARDWARE...................................................................................................................................... 20
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES .................................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.1 Half chassis (½ 19”) ............................................................................................................................................. 20
2.1.2 19” chassis ........................................................................................................................................................... 21
2.2 REAR TERMINALS................................................................................................................................................... 21
2.2.1 Configuration options ......................................................................................................................................... 21
2.2.2 Half chassis (½ 19”) ............................................................................................................................................. 21
2.2.3 19” chassis ........................................................................................................................................................... 22
2.2.1 Closed Terminals ................................................................................................................................................. 23
2.2.2 Wire section ........................................................................................................................................................ 23
2.3 FRONT INTERFACE ................................................................................................................................................. 24
2.3.1 Half chassis (½ 19”) ............................................................................................................................................. 24
2.3.2 19” chassis ........................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................................................... 25
2.4.1 Power supply voltage .......................................................................................................................................... 25
2.4.2 Digital outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 26
2.4.3 Digital inputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 27
2.4.4 IRIG-B input and PPS ........................................................................................................................................... 27
2.4.5 Analogue ouputs ................................................................................................................................................. 28
2.4.6 RTD Inputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 28
2.4.7 Current and voltage circuits ................................................................................................................................ 29
2.4.8 Front communication .......................................................................................................................................... 31
2.4.9 Rear communications ......................................................................................................................................... 31
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................. 33
2.5.1 Tropicalized ......................................................................................................................................................... 34
2.6 TESTS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 34
2.6.1 Climatic test ........................................................................................................................................................ 34
2.6.2 Insulation and electrical safety tests ................................................................................................................... 34
2.6.3 Mechanical tests ................................................................................................................................................. 34
2.6.4 Electromagnetic tests.......................................................................................................................................... 35
3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................. 36
3.1 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................ 36
3.1.1 General Signals .................................................................................................................................................... 36
3.1.2 Commands .......................................................................................................................................................... 37
3.2 CURRENT UNITS ..................................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2.1 General overcurrent description ......................................................................................................................... 38
3.2.2 Directional characteristics ................................................................................................................................... 42
3.2.3 Phase overcurrent ............................................................................................................................................... 62
3.2.4 Neutral overcurrent ............................................................................................................................................ 64
3.2.5 Sensitive neutral overcurrent ............................................................................................................................. 65
3.2.6 Unbalance overcurrent ....................................................................................................................................... 66
3.2.7 Correction of the unbalance functions proceeding ............................................................................................ 67
3.2.8 Broken conductor................................................................................................................................................ 68
Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

User Manual III
INDEX 
3.2.9 Undercurrent ...................................................................................................................................................... 70

3.3 VOLTAGE UNITS ..................................................................................................................................................... 72
3.3.1 General description ............................................................................................................................................. 72
3.3.2 Phase overvoltage ............................................................................................................................................... 75
3.3.3 Zero sequence overvoltage ................................................................................................................................. 77
3.3.4 Negative sequence overvoltage .......................................................................................................................... 78
3.3.5 Phase undervoltage............................................................................................................................................. 79
3.4 FREQUENCY UNITS................................................................................................................................................. 81
3.4.1 Frequency............................................................................................................................................................ 81
3.4.2 Frequency rate of change ................................................................................................................................... 84
3.5 FUSE FAILURE ........................................................................................................................................................ 88
3.6 BREAKER FAILURE .................................................................................................................................................. 90
3.7 TRIP LOGICS ........................................................................................................................................................... 92
3.7.1 General trip logic ................................................................................................................................................. 92
3.7.2 Trip permission masks ......................................................................................................................................... 93
3.7.3 External trips ....................................................................................................................................................... 94
3.8 CT MONITORING .................................................................................................................................................... 95
4. BREAKER .......................................................................................................................................... 96
4.1 BREAKER LOGICS ................................................................................................................................................... 96
4.1.1 Breaker status ..................................................................................................................................................... 96
4.1.2 Breaker failure and operating logic ................................................................................................................... 100
4.1.3 Locking logic ...................................................................................................................................................... 101
4.2 Breaker operation supervision ............................................................................................................................. 103
4.3 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS supervision ................................................................................................................ 106
5. AUTOMATISMS .............................................................................................................................. 109
5.1 Battery connection/ disconnection automation .................................................................................................. 109
5.1.1 Topology ............................................................................................................................................................ 109
5.1.2 Automation state .............................................................................................................................................. 110
5.1.3 Automation by calendar.................................................................................................................................... 111
5.1.4 Modes of Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 117
5.1.5 Open due to voltage lack: voltage 0.................................................................................................................. 120
5.1.6 Converter failure detection ............................................................................................................................... 120
5.1.7 Supervision for lost time ................................................................................................................................... 120
5.1.8 Alarm due to excessive manoeuvres of the automation .................................................................................. 120
5.1.9 Double battery usage ........................................................................................................................................ 120
5.1.10 Trip function with blocking (86) ...................................................................................................................... 123
5.2 RECLOSER ............................................................................................................................................................ 125
5.2.1 Settings and signals ........................................................................................................................................... 125
5.2.2 General operation ............................................................................................................................................. 132
5.2.3 General trip masks ............................................................................................................................................ 134
5.2.4 Trip permission masks ....................................................................................................................................... 135
5.2.5 Post-trip reclosure permission mask................................................................................................................. 136
5.2.6 Fault type selection ........................................................................................................................................... 140
5.2.7 Breaker open timeout ....................................................................................................................................... 140
5.2.8 Number of reclosures available ........................................................................................................................ 140
5.2.9 Reference voltage monitoring .......................................................................................................................... 141
5.2.10 Re-initiation of reclosure time ........................................................................................................................ 142
5.2.11 Pausing of reclosure time ................................................................................................................................ 142
5.2.12 Incomplete sequence block ............................................................................................................................ 142
5.2.13 Synchronism monitoring ................................................................................................................................. 143
5.2.14 Closure block by trip circuit monitoring .......................................................................................................... 143
5.2.15 52 closure timeout .......................................................................................................................................... 143

User Manual IV
INDEX 
5.2.16 Recloser statuses............................................................................................................................................. 144

6. MONITORING ................................................................................................................................. 153
6.1 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY MONITORING ............................................................................................................ 153
6.2 TEMPERATURE MONITORING .............................................................................................................................. 154
6.3 DIS BLOCKING BY LACK OF VAUX ......................................................................................................................... 155
6.4 INTERNAL BATTERY FAILURE MONITORING ......................................................................................................... 155
6.5 UNIT CHECKS ....................................................................................................................................................... 156
7. CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................ 159
7.1 CID ....................................................................................................................................................................... 159
7.1.1 Data Storage ...................................................................................................................................................... 159
7.1.2 Updating CID ..................................................................................................................................................... 159
7.2 GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................................. 159
7.3 FRECUENCY, MEASUREMENT AND TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................................ 161
7.3.1 Current .............................................................................................................................................................. 161
7.3.2 Frequency and voltage ...................................................................................................................................... 162
7.3.3 Power and energy ............................................................................................................................................. 163
7.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................................................................................................ 163
7.4.1 Inputs ................................................................................................................................................................ 164
7.4.2 Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................. 164
7.4.3 Treatment of digital input flicker ...................................................................................................................... 165
7.5 LEDS..................................................................................................................................................................... 166
7.5.1 Via GEN/IHMI node ........................................................................................................................................... 166
7.5.2 Via CTRL/IHMI node .......................................................................................................................................... 166
7.6 CONFIGURATION WITH INREF ............................................................................................................................. 167
7.7 GENERIC COMMAND ........................................................................................................................................... 167
7.8 NAMES ................................................................................................................................................................ 167
7.9 IPRV nodes configuration .................................................................................................................................... 168
7.9.1 General IPRV settings ........................................................................................................................................ 168
7.9.2 IEC 61850 clients IPRV settings ......................................................................................................................... 169
7.10 Measurement’s range automatic configuration ................................................................................................. 169
8. SYNCHRONIZATION ........................................................................................................................ 171
8.1 GENERAL SETTINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 171
8.2 IEEE 1588v2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 173
8.2.1 Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 173
8.3 IRIG-B .................................................................................................................................................................. 173
8.4 SNTP .................................................................................................................................................................... 173
8.4.1 Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 174
8.5 QUALITY FLAGS IEC 61850 ................................................................................................................................... 177
9. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................... 178
9.1 STATUS REPORT ................................................................................................................................................... 178
9.2 PRIMARY MEASUREMENTS REPORT .................................................................................................................... 181
9.3 FAULT REPORT ..................................................................................................................................................... 182
9.4 INCIDENT REPORT ................................................................................................................................................ 184
9.5 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT .................................................................................................................. 185
9.6 STATISTICAL DATA REPORT.................................................................................................................................. 187
9.7 MAXIMETER/MINIMETER REPORT ....................................................................................................................... 188
9.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY .................................................................................................................................................. 189
10. USB ACCESS.................................................................................................................................... 193
10.1 DOWNLOADING REPORTS ................................................................................................................................. 193
10.2 LOADING CID ..................................................................................................................................................... 194

User Manual V
INDEX 
10.3 LOADING FIREWALL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 194

10.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE ........................................................................................................................................... 194
10.5 USB ENABLING ................................................................................................................................................... 195
11. FTP ACCESS .................................................................................................................................... 196
11.1 ACCESS CONTROL .............................................................................................................................................. 197
12. MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND METERS ...................................................... 198
12.1 SIGNALS ............................................................................................................................................................. 198
12.1.1 Type A signals .................................................................................................................................................. 198
12.1.2 Type B signals .................................................................................................................................................. 199
12.1.3 Type C signals .................................................................................................................................................. 200
12.1.4 Type D signals .................................................................................................................................................. 201
12.2 MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................... 202
12.3 COUNTERS ......................................................................................................................................................... 204
13. LOGICS ........................................................................................................................................... 205
13.1 CONTROL LOGICS ............................................................................................................................................... 205
13.2 PROTECTION LOGICS .......................................................................................................................................... 206
13.3 DATABASE SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................................... 207
13.4 output data upon power-up .............................................................................................................................. 207
14. IEC 61850 COMMANDS.............................................................................................................. 210
14.1 RUNNING IEC 61850 COMMANDS ............................................................................................................. 210
14.1.1 DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1) .......................................................................................................... 213
14.1.2 SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2) ............................................................................................................... 213
14.1.3 DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3) ....................................................................................................... 214
14.1.4 SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) ............................................................................................................ 214
14.2 COMMAND BLOCKS .................................................................................................................................... 216
14.2.1 Command blocks by inconsistent parameters ........................................................................................ 216
14.2.2 Command blocks by switching hierarchy ................................................................................................ 216
14.2.3 Command 1 of n blocks.............................................................................................................................. 221
14.2.4 Command blocks by mode (Mod/Beh) ..................................................................................................... 221
14.2.5 Command blocks by Heatlh ....................................................................................................................... 222
14.2.6 Command blocks by Interlocking .............................................................................................................. 222
14.2.7 Commands blocks due to invalid/reached position ................................................................................ 222
14.3 COMMANDs for other positions ................................................................................................................. 223
14.4 COMMAND SADDRESS ............................................................................................................................... 223
15. RIO MODULES ................................................................................................................................ 225
15.1 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................................... 225
15.2 OPERATION ....................................................................................................................................................... 225
16. CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE ................................................................... 227
17. RECEPTION GOOSES ....................................................................................................................... 228
17.1 GOOSE SUBSCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................. 228
17.2 GOOSE SIMULATION .......................................................................................................................................... 229
17.3 TEST MODE ................................................................................................................................................... 231
17.3.1 Logical devices management hierarchy .................................................................................................. 231
17.4 SERVICE TRACKING .................................................................................................................................... 232
17.5 SUBSTITUTION MODEL ............................................................................................................................... 235
17.6 FILE TRANSFER ................................................................................................................................................... 236
17.7 EDITION1 SUBSCRIPTION. LGOS MODEL. ........................................................................................................... 236
17.7.1 Configuration values ....................................................................................................................................... 237
17.7.2 Supervision values ........................................................................................................................................... 238

User Manual VI
INDEX 
17.7.3 Checked values ................................................................................................................................................ 238

18. TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 239
18.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 239
18.2 COMMUNICATIONS REDUNDANCY .................................................................................................................... 240
18.2.1 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP) ..................................................................................................... 240
18.2.2 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR) ...................................................................................... 240
18.2.3 SWITCH MODE ................................................................................................................................................ 241
18.2.4 LINK FAILOVER REDUNDANCY ......................................................................................................................... 241
18.3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT NETWORK CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 241
18.4 GOOSES ............................................................................................................................................................. 242
18.5 FIREWALL ........................................................................................................................................................... 242
19. KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 243
19.1 GENERAL OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................ 243
19.1.1 Display structure ............................................................................................................................................. 243
19.1.2 Organization of the pages ............................................................................................................................... 243
19.1.3 Treatment of the functional keys .................................................................................................................... 244
19.1.4 Graphics pages ................................................................................................................................................ 246
19.1.5 I/O pages ......................................................................................................................................................... 248
19.1.6 Event pages ..................................................................................................................................................... 249
19.1.7 Protection event pages ................................................................................................................................... 250
19.1.8 Alarm pages .................................................................................................................................................... 251
19.1.9 Device status pages ......................................................................................................................................... 252
19.1.10 Fault pages .................................................................................................................................................... 256
19.1.11 Measurement pages ..................................................................................................................................... 260
19.1.12 Menu to other screens page ......................................................................................................................... 262
19.1.13 Shortcut menu page ...................................................................................................................................... 263
19.2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION MENUS PAGES ...................................................................................................... 264
19.2.1 Operation of the menus .................................................................................................................................. 264
19.2.2 Password management ................................................................................................................................... 269
19.3 NETWORK CONFIGURATION .............................................................................................................................. 271
19.3.1 Ethernet Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 271
19.3.2 Gateway Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 275
19.4 OTHER SCREENS ................................................................................................................................................. 277
19.4.1 Contrast setting ............................................................................................................................................... 277
19.4.2 USB treatment................................................................................................................................................. 277
19.4.3 System Information ......................................................................................................................................... 278
19.4.4 CID validation .................................................................................................................................................. 279
19.4.5 Security Logs ................................................................................................................................................... 279
19.4.6 Test Screens .................................................................................................................................................... 279
19.4.7 Other Communications Menu Screens ........................................................................................................... 280
20. WEB APPLICATION ......................................................................................................................... 281
20.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 281
20.2 WEB application login ........................................................................................................................................ 281
20.2.1 Login ................................................................................................................................................................ 281
20.3 Tabs ................................................................................................................................................................... 282
20.3.1 Reports ............................................................................................................................................................ 282
20.3.2 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 285
20.3.3 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................... 286
20.3.4 SW/Configuration ........................................................................................................................................... 287
20.3.5 Logout ............................................................................................................................................................. 288
21. DNP PROTOCOL.............................................................................................................................. 289

User Manual VII
INDEX 
21.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 289

21.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................... 289
21.3 TABLES ............................................................................................................................................................... 294
21.3.1 Digital status table .......................................................................................................................................... 294
21.3.2 Analog values table ......................................................................................................................................... 294
21.3.3 Counters table ................................................................................................................................................. 295
21.3.4 Commands table ............................................................................................................................................. 295
21.4 DEVICE PROFILE ................................................................................................................................................. 297
21.4.1 OBJECT TABLE.................................................................................................................................................. 298
22. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL ............................................................................................................ 300
22.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 300
22.3 Tables ................................................................................................................................................................ 303
22.3.1 Digital signals table ......................................................................................................................................... 303
22.3.2 Measurements table ....................................................................................................................................... 304
22.3.3 Commands table ............................................................................................................................................. 304
23. SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL .......................................................................................................... 305
23.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 305
23.3 TABLES ............................................................................................................................................................... 307
23.3.1 Digital status table .......................................................................................................................................... 307
23.3.2 Analog values table ......................................................................................................................................... 307
23.3.3 Counters table ................................................................................................................................................. 308
23.3.4 Commands table ............................................................................................................................................. 308
24. MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL ........................................................................................................ 309
24.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 309
24.3 DATA TYPES ....................................................................................................................................................... 311
24.3.1 Digital signals .................................................................................................................................................. 311
24.3.2 Measurements ................................................................................................................................................ 311
24.3.3 Counters .......................................................................................................................................................... 312
24.3.4 Commands ...................................................................................................................................................... 312
24.3.5 Request of events to Ingeteam Power Technology devices ........................................................................... 312
24.3.6 Synchronization ............................................................................................................................................... 312
24.4 IMPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 313
24.5 RTU TYPES ......................................................................................................................................................... 313
24.6 SW CONFIGURATION TOOL ................................................................................................................................ 314
24.6.1 Fields to be configured .................................................................................................................................... 314
24.6.2 Configuration example .................................................................................................................................... 322
24.7 SERIAL MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................................. 324
24.7.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................................. 324
24.7.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................................... 325
25. MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL ............................................................................................................ 329
25.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 329
25.3 PROTOCOL PROFILE ........................................................................................................................................... 332
25.3.1 Implemented functions in Modbus RTU ......................................................................................................... 332
25.3.2 Implemented functions in Modbus TCP/IP ..................................................................................................... 332
25.3.3 Exception codes .............................................................................................................................................. 333
25.4 CONTROL PROCESSES ........................................................................................................................................ 333
25.4.1 Request for equipment status ........................................................................................................................ 333

User Manual VIII
INDEX 
25.4.2 Request for digital signals ............................................................................................................................... 333

25.4.3 Request for measurements and counters....................................................................................................... 333
25.4.4 Request for digital signal changes ................................................................................................................... 334
25.4.5 Requesting data via memory map .................................................................................................................. 335
25.4.6 Synchronization ............................................................................................................................................... 336
25.4.7 Command execution ....................................................................................................................................... 336
25.5 EQUIPMENT ADDRESS MAP ............................................................................................................................... 336
25.6 DATA FORMAT ................................................................................................................................................... 338
25.7 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TOOL ................................................................................................................... 339
25.7.1 Fields to be configured .................................................................................................................................... 339
25.7.2 Configuration example .................................................................................................................................... 342
25.8 SERIAL MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................................. 344
25.8.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................................. 344
25.8.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................................... 345
25.9 TCP/IP MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................................. 349
25.9.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................................. 349
25.9.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................................... 350
26. QUALITY ANALYSIS ......................................................................................................................... 351
26.1 sags and swells .................................................................................................................................................. 351
26.1.1 Presentation of results .................................................................................................................................... 354
26.2 4.2 THD overexcitation ...................................................................................................................................... 355
26.2.1 Presentation of results .................................................................................................................................... 357
26.3 Harmonic individual measurements .................................................................................................................. 358
27. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................................................... 360
27.1 CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES ................................................................................................................................. 360
27.2 ANSI CURVES ..................................................................................................................................................... 373
27.2.1 Battery voltage curves .................................................................................................................................... 382
27.3 IEC 60255-151 curves ................................................................................................................................... 383
27.4 USER CURVES ..................................................................................................................................................... 390
28. MEASUREMENT LIST....................................................................................................................... 392
29. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................... 401
29.1 ERROR DETECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 402
29.2 ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................... 403
30. PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES ............................................................................... 404
30.1 DEVICE MODELS................................................................................................................................................. 405
30.2 PUBLISHERS DECLARATION ................................................................................................................................ 405
30.3 SAMPLED VALUES SUBSCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................... 405
30.3.1 Configuration .................................................................................................................................................. 405
30.3.2 ADD-IN of subscription .................................................................................................................................... 406
30.3.3 Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 408
30.4 CONFIGURABLE LOCAL MEASURES .................................................................................................................... 410
30.5 SAMPLED VALUES SIMULATION ......................................................................................................................... 410
30.6 TEST MODE FOR SAMPLED VALUES ................................................................................................................... 411
30.7 BEHAVIOUR WITH LOSS OF SYNCHRONIZATION ................................................................................................ 411

User Manual IX
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Table 1 shows the features available in each of the different models.
Table 1 Functions depending on model
CB0 CB1
Common protection functions
27 Undervoltage  
59 Overvoltage  
59N Zero sequence overvoltage  
47 V2 overvoltage protection  
Frequency (81M/m)  
Frequency rate of change (81R)  
3x50/51 (67)  
50N/51N (67N)  
50ND2/51ND1. Neutral 1 overcurrent unbalance protection  
50ND2/51ND2. Neutral 2 overcurrent unbalance protection  
50ND3/51ND3. Neutral 3 overcurrent unbalance protection 
46TOC (67Q), 46IOC(67Q)  
46FA Open phase  
37 Undercurrent  
49T Overtemperature through RTD (Only with RTD module)  
Quality analysis (1)  
Monitoring Units
68FF Fuse failure  
Breaker Monitoring
k12 breaker monitoring per pole  
Closing and trip circuit monitoring  
Excessive number of trips  
Breaker status logic  
Breaker
50BF Basic breaker failure  
Automatisms
Capacitor Bank connect/disconnect automatism 
Recloser  
Data acquisition functions
Phase and neutral current measurements  
Phase voltage measurements  
Real and reactive power  
Real and reactive energy  
Historical event, protection event and fault recording  
Breaker monitoring  
Oscillography  
Historical reports  
(1) Available from firmware version 6.1.18.7 / 2.0.0.0 and ICD version 8.3.1.2

User Manual 10
1.2 MODEL ENCODING
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM5
COM6
ETH1
ETH2
I/O 2
I/O 3
I/O 4
I/O 5
I/O 6
I/O 7
I/O 8
INGEPAC EF CB MODEL C B - A - - -
MODEL
67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50Nd1/51Nd1, 50Nd2/51Nd2, 67Q, 46BC, 37, 59, 27, 59N, 47,
81M/m, 81R, 68FF, 79,74TC/CC, 50BF, Capacitor bank connect/disconnect automatism
0
67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50Nd1/51Nd1, 50Nd2/51Nd2, 50Nd3/51Nd3, 67Q, 46BC, 37, 59, 27,
59N, 47, 81M/m, 81R, 68FF, 79,74TC/CC, 50BF 1
67, 67N, 67IN, 67CN, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50Nd1/51Nd1, 50Nd2/51Nd2, 67Q, 46BC, 37, 59, 27,
59N, 47, 81M/m, 81R, 68FF, 79,74TC/CC, 50BF, Capacitor bank connect/disconnect
automatism 2
EXTENDED CONTROL FUNCTIONS

No A
Yes B
HOUSING
1/2 chassis 19" 5U with configurable keyboard A
1/2 chassis 19" 5U with predefined keyboard Note 1 B
Chassis 19" 4U with configurable keyboard C
Chassis 19" 4U with predefined keyboard Note 1 D
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

Single PS 85-300 Vdc+ 6DI 125 Vdc + 4DO A
Single PS 85-300 Vdc+ 6DI 220 Vdc + 4DO B
Single PS 18-60 Vdc+ 6DI 24 Vdc + 4DO C
Single PS 18-60 Vdc+ 6DI 48 Vdc + 4DO D
Redundant PS 48 Vcc / 48 Vcc F
Redundant PS 125 Vcc / 125 Vcc G
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS

A GFO COM-1
B PFO COM-2
C RS232C COM-3
D RS485 COM-4
X No port COM-5
COM-6
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORTS

E GFO ETH-1
F RJ45 ETH-2
I GFO (Link failover redundancy) Note 6
J RJ45 (Link failover redundancy) Note 6
K LC (Link failover redundancy) Note 6
L LC
O LC (PRP/HSR/Switch) Note 7
P RJ45 (PRP/HSR/Switch) Note 7
X No port
TERMINALS
Pin type standard terminals A
Closed terminals Note 2 B
Closed terminals for analog inputs and pin type standard terminals for the rest C
I/O BOARD CONFIGURATION

BOARD SELECTION (Note 3)
-A No board Board 2
-B 11 DI (24V dc) + 9 DO Board 3
-C 11 DI (48 Vdc) +9 DO Board 4 (Note 4)
-D 11 DI (125 Vdc) + 9 DO Board 5 (Note 4)
-E 11 DI (220 Vdc) + 9 DO Board 6 (Note 4)
-F 32 DI (24Vdc) Note 8 Board 7 (Note 4)
-G 32 DI (48Vdc) Note 8
-H 32 DI (125 Vdc) Note 8
-I 32 DI (220 Vdc) Note8
-J 16 DI (24Vdc)-8 independent DO
-K 16 DI (48 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-L 16 DI (125 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-M 16 DI (220 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-N 16 DI (24 Vdc)- 16DO
-O 16 DI (48Vdc)- 16 DO
-P 16 DI (125 Vdc)- 16DO
-Q 16 DI (220 Vdc)- 16DO
-R 16 DI (24Vdc)-8 AI Note 5
-S 16 DI (48Vdc)-8 AI Note 5
-T 16 DI (125 Vdc)-8 AI Note 5
-U 16 DI (220 Vdc)-8 AI Note 5
-V 16 DI (24 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 5
-W 16 DI (48Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 5
-X 16 DI (125 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 5
-Y 16 DI (220 Vcc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 5
-0 8DI (24Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-1 8DI (48Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-2 8DI (125Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-3 8DI (220Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-4 8DI (24Vcc) + 8DO
-5 8DI (48Vcc) + 8DO
-6 8DI (125Vcc) + 8DO
-7 8DI (220Vcc) + 8DO
-8 11 RTD + 4 AO Note 10
ZB 8DI (24Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 9
ZC 8DI (48Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 9
ZD 8DI (125Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 9
ZE 8DI (220Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 9
ZF 8ED (24Vcc) + 8SD (h.b.c.o.)
ZG 8ED (48Vcc) + 8SD (h.b.c.o.)
ZH 8ED (125Vcc) + 8SD (h.b.c.o.)
ZI 8ED (220Vcc) + 8SD (h.b.c.o.)
- Reserved
- Reserved
- Reserved
Note 1: Only selectable with extended control functions.

Note 2: The terminals for the power supply inputs are pyn type standard terminals.
Note 3:To know the order of the boards in the rack, consult the number of the terninals on the rear views of each chassis.
Note 4: Only available for 19" chassis.
Note 5: Standard analogue inputs configuration: +/-5mA, +/-5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-20mA, +/-20mA. Consult other configurations.
Note 6:This option requires selecting both ETH1 as ETH2 and supports any combination of options I , J and K.
Note 7: If there is only one card with these options it should be placed in ETH-1. This options replace options G, H, M, N. To use replaced options consult Ingeteam.
Note 8: If REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORT is "O" or "P", not available on board I/O 2 (4U housing) neither on board I/O 3 (5U housing).
Note 9: Not available on board I/O 7. If REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORT is "O" or "P", not available on board I/O 2 (4U housing) neither on board I/O 3 (5U housing).
Note 10: The maximun number of RTD board in the device are 2 .
It´s available an external accessory (FC2910) to allow BNC connection with coaxial cable in Irig-B and PPS input.

User Manual 11
Figure 1 Board position acording to model encoding 19” chassis
Figure 2 Board position acording to model encoding ½ 19” chassis”
I/O 1 XFA1 XB1
I/O 2
XA2 XB2
I/O 3 XA3 XB3
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
Serial Ports Ethernet
X2
Figura 3 Redundant power supply 19” chassis Figura 4 Redundant power supply ½ 19” chassis
Figure 5 PRP Redundancy (2LC) Figure 6 PRP Redundancy (2RJ45 + 2LC)

User Manual 12
1.3 USER INTERFACE
The front board is equipped with:
❑ 10-digit numerical keyboard with decimal point, plus R key

❑ 4 scroll keys:  (Up),  (Down),  (Left), → (Right)
❑ 3 general keys  (Enter), ESC (Escape), MENU
❑ Function keys depending on the model:
 5 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF)
 7 function keys (I, O, F1...F5)
 12 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF, F1…F7)
 16 function keys (I, O, F1…F14)
❑ 19 fully assignable LEDs
❑ 1 unit operation LED
❑ USB 2.0 front port for downloading reports and loading CID
❑ Front RJ45 port for communications
Dispone de un interface trasero con comunicaciones:
The rear communications could be:
❑ Ethernet. Up to two Ethernet port (IEC8802-3) with options of RJ45, GFO or LC. Redundant ports are optional.
❑ Serial. Up to 6 ports with options: RS232, RS485, GFO and PFO.
1.4 INTERCONNECTIONS
Interconnections depend on the modules selected. The connections associated with each of the modules are indicated, and thus the
diagram will depend on the modules installed.
1.4.1 CPU
Figure 7 3-contact relay and IRIG-B Figure 8 With BNC accessory

User Manual 13
1.4.2 Power supply

The two options are a redundant power supply and a simple power supply with inputs/outputs.
Figure 9 Simple power supply
Figure 10 Double power supply
1.4.3 Input/output cards

The I/O modules available are:
❑ Module 1 (Figure 11): Equipped with 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs grouped as follows:
 Inputs: 4 independent + 3 with a common point + 4 with a common point.
 Outputs: 5 independent + 3 with a common point + 1 switched (3 contacts).
Figure 11 Module 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs
 Inputs: 16 with a common point.
 Outputs: 16 with a common point.
 Outputs: 8 independent.

User Manual 14
❑ Module 4 (Figure 14): Equipped with 32 digital inputs grouped as follows:

 Inputs: 16 with a common point + 16 with a common point.
Figure 14 Module 32 inputs
❑ Module 5 (Figure 15): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs grouped as follows:
 Analogue: 8 independent. The analogue inputs have standard configuration, that could be changed among the
options: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA, ±20mA, ±5V, ±10V
Standard configuration of analogue inputs
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

+/- 5mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 20mA +/- 20mA
Figure 15 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs
❑ Module 6 (Figure 16): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated) grouped as follows:
 Analogue: 8 independent, 4 of them are isolated and 4 have a common point. The analogue inputs have
standard configuration, that could be changed among the options: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA, ±20mA, ±5V, ±10V
Standard configuration of analogue inputs
Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4
(isolated) (isolated) (isolated) (isolated)
+/- 5mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 20mA +/- 20mA
Figure 16 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated)

User Manual 15
❑ Module 7 (Figure 17): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 4 high breaking capacity outputs (hbco) and 4 digital outputs
grouped as follows:
 Inputs: 8 independent.
 Outputs: 8 independent: the 4 hbco outputs are 1 to 4 (pins 1 to 8) and the 4 standard outputs are 5 to 8 (pins
10 a 17).
Figure 17 Módule 8 inputs, 4 outputs (hbco) and 4 digital outputs
❑ Module 8 (Figure 18): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 independent.
Figure 18 Módule 8 inputs, 8 outputs
❑ Module 9 (Figure 19): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 4 fast and high breaking capacity outputs (hbco) and 4 digital outputs
grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 independent: the 4 fast and hbco outputs are 1 to 4 (pins 1 to 8) and the 4 standard outputs are 5
to 8 (pins 10 a 17).
Figure 19 Module 8 inputs, 4 outputs (fast and hbco) and 4 digital outputs
❑ Module 10 (Figure 18): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 8 high breaking capacity outputs (hbco) grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 hbco independent outputs..
Figure 20 Module 8 inputs, 8 outputs (hbco)

User Manual 16
❑ Module 11 (Figure 21): Equipped with 11 RTD inputs and 4 analogue outputs grouped as follows:
 RTD Inputs: 11 RTD.
 Analogue outputs: 4 independent. The analogue outputs can be configured with the options 0-1mA, 0-20mA,
4-20mA.
Figure 21 Module 11 RTD and 11 analog outputs
1.4.4 Analogue inputs

The following diagram shows the configuration of the analogue inputs, depending the model:
Modelo CB0 Modelo CB1

User Manual 17
1.4.4.1 Wiring diagrams

The following figures show different interconnection options for the analogue inputs, in accordance with the available inputs.
Fig. 1.1 Model CB0, Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ind1, Ind2, Vphase and V0

User Manual 18
Fig. 1.2 Model CB1, Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ind1, Ind2, Ind3, Vphase and V0

User Manual 19
HARDWARE 
2. HARDWARE
EF devices can be used as autonomous devices or as part of a protection and control system. The devices are implemented based on a
microprocessor and a DSP linked through shared RAM and communication lines.
The digital processing is done by a high accuracy 16 bit converter. Each signal reaches this converter after being conditioned, filtered and
amplified. A high frequency sampling is done at 144 samples per cycle (at 8640 Hz for 60 Hz systems or at 7200Hz for 50 Hz systems). This
sampling is transformed into 24 samples per cycle through a digital process before reaching the protection functions.
INGEPAC EF devices have non-volatile flash memory where the user settings, configurations and application are stored. This kind of
memory allows software updates and modifications without needing to manipulate the device hardware.
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
Two options can be selected:
❑ Half chassis ½ 19” and 5U

❑ Chassis 19” and 4U
2.1.1 Half chassis (½ 19”)

User Manual 20
HARDWARE 
2.1.2 19” chassis
2.2 REAR TERMINALS
The rear section will vary in accordance with the options selected for the unit. The following figures show various possible
configurations.
2.2.1 Configuration options

The rear section options may vary depending on the options selected:
❑ Power supply unit. There are two options available:

 Simple with inputs/outputs. Equipped with a 3-contact terminal with power supply with screw and a 17-
contact terminal with screw (Figure 22).
 Redundant. Equipped with two 3-contact terminals for each of the power supplies.
❑ Inputs/outputs cards. All the input/output modules have two 17-contact terminals with screw.
❑ CPU. Equipped with a 6-contact terminal with screw for the digital output of 3 contacts and the IRIG-B inputs. Equipped
with different Ethernet and standard communications module options (Figure 7).
❑ Analogue. Equipped with two 12-contact terminals with screw.
❑ Communications. To choose between:
 Ethernet: RJ45 and G.F.O.
 Standard: RS232, RS485, G.F.O. and P.F.O.
Pin type or closed type terminals may be chosen for the analogue and input/output terminals.

Different options which modify the view of the rear section may be selected (from top to bottom):
❑ Simple/redundant power supply

❑ 1 or 2 I/O modules

User Manual 21
HARDWARE 
❑ Communication ports in the CPU

❑ Analogue card with up to 12 transformers
Figure 22 shows rear section with the options:
❑ Simple power source with inputs/outputs

❑ 2 input/output cards
❑ CPU with communication ports:
 Ethernet GFO + RJ45
 Standard RS232+RS485+GFO+PFO
Figure 22 Rear section with analogue and simple source
Figure 23 Rear section without analogue and simple source
2.2.3 19” chassis

Different options which modify the view of the rear section may be selected (from top to bottom and left to right):
❑ Simple/redundant power supply

❑ 1 or no I/O modules
❑ Communication ports in the CPU
❑ Number of I/O modules

User Manual 22
HARDWARE 
In Figure 24 the next options can be seen:
❑ Simple power source with inputs/outputs

❑ 5 input/output cards
❑ CPU with communication ports:
 Ethernet GFO + RJ45
 Standard with 3 RS232 + 2 GFO + PFO
Figure 24 Rear section with analogue and simple source
2.2.1 Closed Terminals

The next figures show the closed terminals used in the digital I/O boards (Figure 25) and the transformer inputs (V/I) (Figure 26).
Figure 25 Closed Terminals I/O boards
Figure 26 Closed Terminals transformer inputs (V/I)
2.2.2 Wire section

The wires for the terminals should be copper with a section:
❑ Supply terminals:
Wire section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2)
❑ I/O terminals:
Wire section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2)
❑ Current and voltage terminals:

Wire section AWG 10 (4 mm2)

User Manual 23
HARDWARE 
2.3 FRONT INTERFACE

There are two half-chassis front options (½ 19” and 5U):
❑ Configurable functional keys (Figure 27)

❑ Fixed functional keys (Figure 28).
The front interfaces are equipped with:
❑ Graphic display
❑ 19 general use LEDs with interchangeable labels
❑ 1 2-colour unit status LED
❑ Numeric keypad
❑ 7 operational keys
❑ Ethernet communication
❑ Master USB communication
❑ Depending on the model, the following are available:
 5 functional keys for selecting with interchangeable labels + 2 operational keys
 3 fixed function keys + 2 operational keys.
Figure 27 Configurable functional keys Figure 28 Fixed functional keys
2.3.2 19” chassis

There are two 19” and 4U chassis front options:
❑ Configurable functional keys (Figure 29)

❑ Fixed functional keys (Figure 30)
The front interfaces are equipped with:
❑ Graphic display
❑ 19 general use LEDs with interchangeable labels
❑ 1 2-colour unit status LED
❑ Numeric keypad
❑ 7 operational keys

User Manual 24
HARDWARE 
❑ Ethernet communication
❑ Master USB communication
❑ Depending on the model, the following are available:
 14 functional keys for selecting with interchangeable labels + 2 operational keys
 3 fixed function keys + 2 operational keys + 7 functional keys with interchangeable labels for selecting.
Figure 29 Configurable functional keys
Figure 30 Fixed functional keys
2.4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.4.1 Power supply voltage

Single power supply 125/220 Vdc models: 110Vdc-20% up to 250Vac + 10%:
❑ Operating range:
 Direct: 88Vdc up to 300Vdc
 Alternating: 85Vac up to 265Vac
Single power supply 24/48 Vdc models: 24Vdc-20% up to 48Vdc + 20%:
Redundant power supply 125Vdc models:
Redundant power supply 24/48 Vdc models:
Burden. Depends on the cards connected.

User Manual 25
HARDWARE 
❑ 20W + 0,5W for each relay activated

Battery failure signal. Minimum voltage to activate the signal
Power supply 24Vcc 48Vcc 125Vcc 220Vcc

Activation level 16V 37V 86V 170V
The wires for the terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2).
2.4.2 Digital outputs

The wires for the I/O terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2).
Independent standard and trip outputs:
The characteristics of the independent contact outputs are as follows:
❑ Permanent current: 8 A at 25ºC

❑ Make: 30 A 1sec
❑ Connection capacity 2500W at 250Vdc
❑ Open or break capacity:
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 1.0A 1.5A 2.0A
With inductive load L/R=40ms 0.7A 1.0A 1.5A
❑ Operating time: 5ms activation and 8ms deactivation

Signal outputs:
The characteristics of the 3-contact switched, common point signal outputs are:

❑ Make:
 30 A ½ sec.
 20 A 1 sec.
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 0.2A 0.4A 1.0A
With inductive load L/R=40ms 0.1A 0.2A 0.5A
❑ Operating time: 8ms activation and deactivation

The compliance of the common point outputs is the same as that of the independent outputs. However, due to sharing a common
point, only 2 relays can be activated simultaneously.
High break contact outputs (h.b.c.o) and Fast + high break contact outputs (fast + h.b.c.o):
The characteristics of the independent contact outputs are the same except the activation times:

❑ Make: 30 A 1sec
❑ Connection capacity 2500W at 250Vdc
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 10A 10A 10A
With inductive load 10A L/R=20ms 10A L/R=40ms 10A L/R=40ms

User Manual 26
HARDWARE 
❑ Cyclic capacity: 4 cycles in 1 second, 2 minutes waiting for thermal dissipation

❑ Operating time:
 h.b.c.o outputs
 5ms activation and 5ms deactivation with resistive load
 5ms activation and 14ms deactivation with L/R = 40ms
 Fast + h.b.c.o outputs
 3µs activation and 8ms deactivation with resistive load
2.4.3 Digital inputs

The input burden is lower than 3mA at nominal voltage.
The inputs do not have polarity.
The wires for the I/O terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2).
They have a fixed range with 4 nominal voltage options:
Rated V Characteristics
Not activated below 9 Vdc.
24Vdc Activated above 12 Vdc.
Maximum voltage 72 Vdc
125Vdc They are activated above 87 Vdc.
2.4.4 IRIG-B input and PPS

Equipped with an input for synchronization by GPS, using IRIG-B time codes (Figure 31) and a pulse per second (PPS) input for
synchronization with:
❑ Demodulated input (TTL levels).

❑ Cable type: 2-wire, shielded
❑ Insulation: 2000 V
The input circuit is a 440 ohm serial resistance with an opto-isolator; for a 5 V signal, the approximate burden is 10 mA.
The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator depends on the output current supply capacity; a typical value
is 70 mA, which would enable the connection of 6 units (although the length and the type of cable can also influence). The cable
must be shielded and twisted.
According to configuration, it synchronizes with frames B002 , B003 , B006 , B007 type . It also synchronizes with IEE1344.
Optionally, with an external adapter inputs IRIG- B and PPS can be BNC type. The connection must use a 50 Ω coaxial cable with a
male BNC connector.

User Manual 27
HARDWARE 
Figure 31 Connection example
2.4.5 Analogue ouputs

There is an I/O board with 4 continuous analogue outputs.
❑ Range can be selected by settings: 0 at 1 mA, 4 at 20mA and 0 at 20mA

❑ Accuracy: ± 1 % of full scale
❑ Maximum load: 1200 Ohms
❑ Isolation: 1 kV
2.4.6 RTD Inputs

There is a I/O board with 11 isolated RTDs suitable by setting for the following probes:
❑ 100Ω Platinum
❑ 100Ω Nickel
❑ 120Ω Nickel
❑ 10Ω Copper
Measurement range: -50ºC to +250ºC
Accuracy: ±2ºC
The wire must be shielded and twisted.

User Manual 28
HARDWARE 
2.4.7 Current and voltage circuits

Phases, neutral and polarization. Single rated current 1/5 A.
❑ Measurement range: 0.02A to 200A.

❑ Thermal capacity
 Permanent 20 A
 Short duration 150 A (10 sec.)
500 A (1 sec.)
 Very short duration 1250 A (half cycle)

❑ Burden at In= 5 A <0.2VA
Sensitive neutral: Single rated current 0.025/1 A.
❑ Measurement range: 0.01A to 10A.

 Permanent 20 A
 Short duration 50 A (10 sec.)
500 A (1 sec.)
❑ Burden at In= 0.025 A <0.015 VA

Voltage:
❑ Measurement range: 1V to 200V.

❑ Rated voltages: Configurable 40Vac to 140Vac
 Permanent 2 Un
 Short duration 5 Un (1 sec.)
3.5 Un (1 min)
❑ Burden at 63.5 V <0.015 VA

❑ Burden at 100 V <0.03 VA
The wires should be copper with a section AWG 10 (4 mm2).
2.4.7.1 Accuracy
❑ Phase Current
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*Ir)
 With In = 1: class 0.2 (0.2% of FS)
 With In = 5: class 0.2 (0.2% of FS)
 Protection range (0 to 200 A)
 1 % over the measurement or 1 mA (greater)
❑ Sensitive neutral
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*Ir)
 With Ir = 1: class 0.2 (0.2% of FS)
 With Ir = 0.25: class 0.2 (0.2% of FS)

User Manual 29
HARDWARE 
 Protection range (0 to 10 A)
 1 % over the measurement or 0,5 mA (greater)
❑ Voltage
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*Vr)
 Accuracy 0.2% of FS
 Protection range (0 to 200 Vac)
 1 % over the measurement or 50 mV (greater)
❑ Dephase angle
 Accuracy  1º
❑ Power
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*Ir*1.2*Vr)
 With In = 1: class 0.5 (0,5% of Pr)
 With In = 5: class 0.5 (0,5% of Pr)
❑ Frequency: ±10MHz
Time accuracy:
❑ Additional time = 0ms

 Measurement/start value:
 From 1 to 1,5 times: Up to 40ms (typical 35ms). Up to 35ms with fast outputs.
 2 times: Between 30-35ms. Up to 30ms with fast outputs.
 From 3 times: Under 30ms. Under 25ms with fast outputs.
 Additional time higher than 50ms
 30ms or 3% of the theorical value (the higher of the two)
Currents must be above 100mA.
The drop-off percentages respect to the start setting in the protection units are:
❑ Overcurrent: 5%
❑ voltage: configurable from 1%
❑ Frequency: 0,05%

User Manual 30
HARDWARE 
2.4.8 Front communication

Ethernet (IEC8802-3) via RJ45 cable
❑ RJ45 connector (female)

❑ Cable type: Shielded
❑ Cable length: 100 m maximum
❑ Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
❑ Insulation 500V
USB
❑ USB 2.0 compatible version

❑ Master operating mode
❑ Speed: 480Mbps (high-speed), 12Mbps (full-speed) or 1.5Mbps (low-speed)
❑ Insulation 500V
2.4.9 Rear communications
2.4.9.1 Ethernet communication

The device has two Ethernet port (IEC8802-3) with options of RJ45 or optical fiber.
Ethernet via RJ45 cable
❑ RJ45 connector (female)

❑ Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
❑ Insulation 500V
Ethernet via glass optical fiber (ST and LC)
❑ Connector
 ST
 LC
❑ Wavelength: 1310nm
❑ Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5 /125 µm and 50/125 µm
❑ Permitted attenuation
 8 db with 50/125 µm
 11 db with 62.5/125 µm
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: -20dBm to -14dBm
❑ Receiver optical sensitivity: -31dBm
❑ Baud rate: 100 Mb.
❑ Maximum distance: 2 km
2.4.9.2 Serial communications

Glass optical fiber

User Manual 31
HARDWARE 
❑ ST connector
❑ Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5 /125 µm and 50/125 µm
❑ Permitted attenuation
 9 db with 50/125 µm
 11 db with 62.5/125 µm
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: -17dBm to -11dBm
❑ Maximum distance: 2 km
Plastic optical fiber
❑ V-Pin connector (HP standard)

❑ Multimode optical fiber HCS (silica) with 200 µm and plastic with 1mm
❑ Permitted attenuation:
 24.7db with 1mm plastic cable
 22db with 200 µm silica cable
❑ Typical transmitter optical power
 -17dBm to -8dBm with 1mm plastic cable
 -13,5dBm to -4,5dBm with 200 µm silica cable
❑ Maximum distance: 115m with 1mm plastic cable and 1.9km with 200 µm silica cable
RS232
❑ DTE 9 pin female D type

❑ Insulation 500V
RS485
❑ DTE 9 pin female D type

❑ Cable type: Shielded crossed pair
❑ Cable length: 1.000 m maximum.
❑ Insulation 500V
The serial ports pinout is shown in the table:
Pin RS232 RS485

1 CD D+
2 Rx D+
3 Tx D-
4 9 Vcc D-
5 GND GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9
For communications between devices, according to options available in each model, can be used:
FO single-mode (60km)

User Manual 32
HARDWARE 
❑ Connector LC duplex or ST
❑ Wavelength: 1310nm, Laser
❑ Singlemode: 9/125 nm
❑ Permitted attenuation: 30db
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: -5dBm a 0dBm
❑ Receiver maximun optical power: 0dBm
❑ Maximum distance: 60km
❑ Minimum distance: 1km
FO single-mode (20-120km)
❑ Connector LC duplex or ST
❑ Wavelength: 1550nm, Laser
❑ Singlemode: 9/125 nm
❑ Permitted attenuation: 40db
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: 0dBm a 5dBm
❑ Receiver maximun optical power: 0dBm
❑ Minimum distance: 20km. It cannot be used below 20km.
C37.94 glass optical fiber
❑ ST connector
❑ Multimode glass optical fiber: 50/125µm and 62.5/125 µm
❑ Permitted attenuation:
 13db with 62,5/125 µm
 9dB with 50/125 µm
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: -16dBm a -11dBm
❑ Receiver maximun optical power: -32dBm
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating temperature:
❑ Continuous: -25°C a +60 ºC

❑ <96h: -25°C a +70 °C
❑ <16h: -40°C a +85ºC
❑ HMI and MTBF may be affected outside the continuous operating temperature range
❑ The maximum operation temperature for LC communication ports is +70º
Storage temperature: -40 to 85 ºC
Relative humidity: Up to 95% without condensation

User Manual 33
HARDWARE 
2.5.1 Tropicalized
Printed circuit boards are lacquered to protect against corrosion and biological factors in humid environments. Depending on the
type of card different methods are used, dipping or selective varnishing and different varnishes. It is a treatment that deposits a
layer of low surface energy that repels moisture and some types of dirt. This procedure is made by demand, in the order.
2.6 TESTS
2.6.1 Climatic test

Climatic test Standard
Cold IEC -60068-2-1 -40°C, 16 hours
Dry Heat IEC -60068-2-2 +85°C, 16 hours
Damp heat steady state IEC -60068-2-78 +40°C/93%RH, 96 hours
Damp heat cyclic IEC -60068-2-30 55ºC / 95% HR 6 cycles of 12+12 hours
Rapid change of temperature IEC -60068-2-14 -20ºC/+70ºC 5 cycles of 3+3 hours
External protection level IEC60529 IP30
2.6.2 Insulation and electrical safety tests

Insulation and electrical safety test Standard
Dielectric test IEC 60255-27 2 kVac
Insulation resistance test IEC 60255-27 > 100 MΩ at 500Vdc.
±5kV CM
Impulse voltage test IEC 60255-27
±1kV DM
2.6.3 Mechanical tests

Mechanical test Standard
Vibration (sinusoidal): Response IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2
Vibration (sinusoidal): Endurance IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Shocks and bumps IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2

User Manual 34
HARDWARE 
2.6.4 Electromagnetic tests

Electromagnetic test Standard
IEC 60255-26
Measurements of radiated disturbance field strength EN 55022 A Class
CISPR 11, 32
IEC 60255-26
A Class PS
Measurements of conducted radioelectric disturbances EN 55022
B class: Ethernet port
CISPR 11, 32
IEC 60255-26 ±2.8kV CM
Damped oscillatory waves immunity test
IEC 61000-4-18 ±1kV DM
IEC 60255-26
Electrostatic discharge immunity test ±8kV/±15kV
IEC 61000-4-2
IEC 60255-26
Electrical Fast transients immunity test ±4kV,5kHz
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-26 ±4kV CM
Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5 ±2kV DM
IEC 60255-26 100% 130 ms
DC power supply interruptions, dips and variations immunity test IEC 61000-4-29 60% 200 ms
IEC 61000-4-11 30% 5s
IEC 60255-26
Ripple immunity test 15% (50 and 100 Hz)
IEC 61000-4-17
IEC 60255-26
Power frequency immunity test IEC6100-4.16 300 V CM/ 150 V DM
IEC 60255-22-7
IEC 60255-26
Radiated radiofrequency electromagnetic field immunity test 10V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 60255-26
Conducted disturbances induced by radiofrequency fields immunity test 10Vrms
IEC 61000-4-6
IEC 60255-26
50 Hz magnetic fields immunity test 100 A/m 1000 A/m (2 s)
IEC 61000-4-8
IEC 60255-26
Pulse magnetic fields immunity test 1000 A/m
IEC 61000-4-9
Damped oscillatory magnetic fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-10 100 A/m
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers IEEE 37.90.2 35 V/m

User Manual 35
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.1 GENERAL
This section lists all the protection functions. Those included in each model are listed in the functional description.
3.1.1 General Signals

There are available general signals that group data from several functions ( see Table 2). These signals are in the node PROT/PTRC1.
In every model will be only the signals of the available functions.
❑ General Start. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip is started.
❑ General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip is activated.
❑ Pole A General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole A is activated.
❑ Pole B General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole B is activated.
❑ Pole C General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole C is activated.
❑ OC General Start. Indicates that one of the overcurrent units is started.
❑ OC General Trip. Indicates that one of the overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 51 Start. Indicates that any of the time delay phase overcurrent unit is started.
❑ 51N Start. Indicates that one of the time delay neutral overcurrent units is started.
❑ 51UN Start. Indicates that one of the time delay unbalance overcurrent units is started.
❑ 51 Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay phase overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 51N Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay neutral overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 51UN Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay unbalance overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 50 Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous phase overcurrent units is started.
❑ 50N Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous neutral overcurrent units is started.
❑ 50UN Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous unbalance overcurrent units is started.
❑ 50 Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous phase overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 50N Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous neutral overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 50UN Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous unbalance overcurrent units is activated.
❑ Voltage Start. Indicates that one of the voltage units is started.
❑ IOV Start. Indicates that one of the overvoltage units is started.
❑ IUV Start. Indicates that one of the undervoltage units is started.
❑ Minimum F Start. Indicates that one of the underfrequency units is started.
❑ Maximum F Start. Indicates that one of the overfrequency units is started.
❑ dfdt Start. Indicates that one of the df/dt units is started.
❑ Voltage Trip. Indicates that one of the voltage units is activated.
❑ IOV Trip. Indicates that one of the overvoltage units is activated.
❑ IUV Trip. Indicates that one of the undervoltage units is activated.
❑ Minimum F Trip. Indicates that one of the underfrequency units is activated.
❑ Maximum F Trip. Indicates that one of the overfrequency units is activated.
❑ dfdt Trip. Indicates that one of the df/dt units is activated.

User Manual 36
Table 2 General signals
Señal Dato Atributo

General Start Str general
General Trip Op general
Pole A General Trip Op phsA
Pole B General Trip Op phsB
Pole C General Trip Op phsC
OC General Start StrOC stVal
OC General Trip OpOC stVal
51 Start Str51 stVal
51N Start Str51N stVal
51UN Start Str51UN stVal
51 Trip Op51 stVal
51N Trip Op51N stVal
51UN Trip Op51UN stVal
50 Start Str50 stVal
50N Start Str50N stVal
50UN Start Str50UN stVal
50 Trip Op50 stVal
50N Trip Op50N stVal
50UN Trip Op50UN stVal
Voltage Start StrV stVal
IOV Start StrIOV stVal
IUV Start StrIUV stVal
Minimum F Start StrFmin stVal
Maximum F Start StrFmax stVal
dfdt Start StrDfDt stVal
Voltage Trip OpV stVal
IOV Trip OpIOV stVal
IUV Trip OpIUV stVal
Minimum F Trip OpFmin stVal
Maximum F Trip OpFmax stVal
dfdt Trip OpDfDt stVal
3.1.2 Commands
Certain commands enable actions to be taken on the protection functions. Each functions specific characteristics are listed in the
corresponding section. This section lists the general functions. Table 3 shows the functions affected by the general commands.
The general protection commands are in the PROT/PTRC node, allowing the blocking/unblocking of the associated functions:
❑ DOrdPrBl Protection block. Affects all the protection functions.

❑ DOrdPhBl Phase block. Affects all the phase functions.
❑ DOrdInsBl Instantaneous block. Affects all the instantaneous functions.
❑ DOrdInsPhBl Instantaneous phase block. Affects all the phase instantaneous functions.
❑ DOrdTmPhBl Timed phase block. Affects all the timed phase functions.
❑ DOrdINBl Instantaneous neutral block. Affects all the neutral instantaneous functions.
❑ DOrdVBl Voltage block. Affects all the voltage functions.
❑ DOrdDirBl Directional block. Affects all the directional functions. Equivalent to giving directional permission.

User Manual 37
Table 3 Command by functions
DOrdPrBl DOrdPhBl DOrdInsBl DOrdInsPhBl DOrdTmPhBl DOrdINBl DOrdVBl

Current units
Phase instantaneous (50)    
Phase timed (51)   
Neutral instantaneous (50)   
Neutral timed (51) 
Neutral 1 overcurrent unbalance instant. (50Nd1)   
Neutral 1 overcurrent unbalance timed (51Nd1) 
Unbalance instantaneous  
Unbalance block 
46FA Open phase  
37 Undercurrent  
Voltage units
Phase overvoltage timed    
Phase instantaneous overvoltage     
Zero sequence overvoltage timed  
Zero sequence instantaneous overvoltage    
V2 overvoltage timed  
V2 instantaneous overvoltage   
Phase undervoltage timed    
Phase instantaneous undervoltage     
Frequency units
Frequency (81M/m) 
Frequency rate of change (81R) 
Remaining protection functions
Fuse failure 
Breaker
50BF Basic breaker failure 
3.2 CURRENT UNITS
3.2.1 General overcurrent description
3.2.1.1 Timed characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceeded during the programmed time.
To reset, the current must fall below 95% of the setting value.
The different curve options are shown in the curve appendix.
The timed unit can be configured with a minimum response time, that is, a limit that prevents any unit from tripping below a
minimum time when the trip time corresponding to the curve in use is met. This is done to prevent timed trips from being
faster than instantaneous trips. It is configured with additional time setting, so that if it set to zero, there is no such limit.
The settings used in these functions (Table 4) are:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

❑ Operation type. To be selected between:
 “Trip” generates function trips.
 “Pick up”, in which the function generates a pick up but no trips.

User Manual 38
 “Instantaneous block 1”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1 has picked up. The timed
pick up is not deactivated.
 “Instantaneous block 1 and 2”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1 or 2 has picked up.
The timed pick up is not deactivated.
 “Instantaneous block 1, 2 and 3”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1, 2 or 3 has picked
up. The timed pick up is not deactivated.
❑ Start value (A). Set in secondary amps. It indicates the current value as of which the function is activated.
❑ Operating Curve Type Indicates the type of curve selected from the options:
 ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
 ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
 ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
 ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9)
 IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
 IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
 IEC-IC Short inverse (13)
 IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
 IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
 User curves 1 (33)
 Definite time (49)
❑ Time dial. Indicates the time curve within the selected characteristic.
❑ Operate/minimum time (ms). It has a different functionality depending on the type of curve selected:
 When the selected curve is a definite time, it indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of
the function must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time. i.e., in order for a trip to be produced, the
time employed will be greater between this setting and the time associated to the curve.
❑ Torque control. Selects the function’s directional type:
 “NO”. Acts as non-directional.
 “Forward”. Acts when the directional indicates forward.
 “Reverse”. Acts when the directional indicates reverse.
❑ Behaviour with Fuse fail. Defines the function’s action if a fuse failure is detected.
 "Idle". The fuse failure does not affect the function.
 "Non directional". The function acts as non-directional when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Block". The function blocks, i.e., it does not act, when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Enable". The function is enabled when a fuse failure is detected.
❑ Reset type. Allows the emulation of the induction operation. The following options are available:
 "Instantaneous". If the current drops below 95% of the setting value, both the trip and pick up reset
instantaneously.
 "Timed". If the current drops below 95% of setting value, the trip drops out instantaneously, while the pick up
reset time will depend on the selected curve (family and index) and the current. If a definite time curve is
selected, the pick up will reset upon the completion of the time programmed for the pick up as of the moment
in which it falls below the pick up current, regardless of the current value.
❑ Operating Quantity. Indicates the measurement used by the function:

User Manual 39
 "Phasor". Uses the fundamental measurement, without including harmonics.

 "Rms". Uses the effective value, including harmonics.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
❑ Time delay cancellation Input. Selects the signal which, when active, generates the instantaneous trips regardless of the
setting time.
❑ General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not. For additional details, see section corresponding to the
recloser.
❑ TripP:RL,RR,RL,R:1,2,3,4,MC. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status: standby,
blocked, safety time after reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see section
corresponding to the recloser (3.7.2).
❑ Reclose perm.(R1,R2,R3,R4). Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's
closing cycle .
❑ Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s
protection events are not generate. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 4 Timed overcurrent unit settings
Data Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks Type

PTOCEna Enabled NO/YES enum
TRIP (1)
PICK UP (2)
Optype Operation type INST_1 LOCK (3) enum
INST _1, INST_2 LOCK (4)
INST_1, INST_2, INST_3 LOCK (5)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 150,0 0,01 float32
ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
IEC-I Normal inverse (9)
IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
TmACrv Operating Curve Type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
TmMult Time dial 0,05 30,0 0,01 IEC float32
OpDlTmms Operate/minimum time (ms) 0 600000* 10 Int32
NO (0)
DirMod Torque control Forward (1) enum
Reverse (2)
Nothing (0)
Inhibit (1)
FFailBeh Behaviour with Fuse fail action enum
Block (2)
Enable (3)
Instantaneous (0)
RstTyp Reset type enum
Reset (1)
Phasor (0)
MesTyp Operating Quantity enum
Rms (1)
LogInBlk Blocking Input uint 32
LogInCaTm Time delay cancellation Input uint 32
GenTrip General trip NO/YES Boolean
TripPerm TripP:RL,RR,RL,R:1,2,3,4,MC 0 255 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
ReclPerm Reclose perm.(R1,R2,R3,R4) 0 15 Bit meaning (2) ING
MaskEna Enable Events record NO/YES Boolean
In which:

User Manual 40
Bit meaning (1) Bit Value

Reclose block 0 YES/NO
Trip permission 79 standby 1 YES/NO
Trip permission 79 blocked 2 YES/NO
Permission for trip in safety time following reclose 1 3 YES/NO
Permission for trip in safety time following manual close 7 YES/NO

Reclose permission 1 0 YES/NO
3.2.1.2 Instantaneous characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceed during the programmed time.
To reset, the current must fall below 95% of the setting value.
The settings used in these functions (see Table 5) are:

 “Trip” generates function trips.
 “Pick up”, in which the function generates a pick up but no trips.
❑ Operate Delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function must be met.
❑ Torque control. Selects the function’s directional type:
 “NO”. Acts as non-directional.
 “Forward”. Acts when the directional indicates forward.
 “Reverse”. Acts when the directional indicates reverse.
❑ Behaviour with Fuse failure. Defines the function’s action if a fuse failure is detected.
 “Idle”. The fuse failure does not affect the function.
 “Non directional”. The function acts as non-directional when a fuse failure is detected.
 “Block”. The function blocks, i.e., it does not act, when a fuse failure is detected.
 “Enable”. The function is enabled when a fuse failure is detected.
❑ Operating Quantity. Indicates the measurement used by the function:
 “Phasor”. Uses the fundamental measurement, without including harmonics.
 “Rms”. Uses the effective value, including harmonics.
❑ Time delay cancellation Input. Selects the signal which, when active, generates the instantaneous trips regardless of the
setting time.
recloser .

User Manual 41
closing cycle.
Table 5 Instantaneous overcurrent unit settings

PIOCEna Enabled NO/YES enum
TRIP (1)
Optype Operation type enum
PICK UP (2)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 150,0 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms Operate Delay time (ms) 0 600000* 10 Int32
NO (0)
DirMod Torque control Forward (1) enum
Reverse (2)
Nothing (0)
Inhibit (1)
FFailBeh Behaviour with Fuse fail enum
Block (2)
Enable (3)
Phasor (0)
MesTyp Operating Quantity enum
Rms (1)
LogInBlk Blocking Input uint 32
LogInTIn Time delay cancellation input uint 32
ReclPerm Reclose perm.(R1,R2,R3,R4) 0 15 Bit meaning (2) ING
In which:

Reclose block 0 YES/NO
Permission for trip in safety time following manual close 7 YES/NO

3.2.2 Directional characteristics

The overcurrent units have a setting (torque control) for selecting the unit’s directionality:
❑ No: the unit acts as non-directional.

❑ Forward: the unit acts as directional in a forward direction.
❑ Reverse: the unit acts as directional in a reverse direction.
There are logical trip direction inversion inputs that allow the different units' trip direction to be inverted.
There are logical “function X directional inhibition” inputs that allow the directional units to which they are applied to be converted
into non-directional. These inputs allow for a unit's conversion into non-directional in the case of a fuse failure, for example.
The negative sequence unit can be employed in phases and in neutral.

User Manual 42
3.2.2.1 Phase directional

The operation can be selected among: quadrature, direct (S1) and direct+inverse (S1+S2). Each mode has its own settings.
This function’s general settings and those applied in the quadrature and positive sequence criteria are in the PROT/RDIR1 node:
❑ Directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

 “Quadrature”. Analyzes each phase independently.
 “Quadrature 2 of 3”. Analyzes each phase independently. However, in order to grant permission it must see
the direction in at least two phases.
 “Positive sequence”. Analyzes the positive sequence.
 “Inverse and positive sequence”. Analyzes the inverse and positive sequence.
❑ Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle. Applies to quadrature and positive sequence.
❑ Minimum V polarization. Indicates the minimum voltage for polarization; the direction cannot be reliably determined
below this value.
❑ Directional Zone amplitude. Indicates the angle covered by the trip zone.
❑ Trip permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below the
threshold. If set to YES, it enables an overcurrent trip if the memorized polarization voltage is lower than the minimum
polarization voltage; if set to NO, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under those conditions.
❑ Phase directional inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
❑ Phase directional blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is blocked, it is
issues permission for the trip.
Table 6. Phase directional settings

Quadrature
PolQty (PolSel in Quadrature 2 of 3
Directional method enum
Ed2) Positive sequence
Inverse and positive sequence
ChrAng Torque angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
Vpol V minimum V polarization 1 200 0,1 float32
Amp (AmpVal in
Directional Zone amplitude 90 170 1 float32
Ed2)
EnaOpn (TripVpol
Trip Permission with low Vpol NO/YES Boolean
in Ed2)
LogInInvDir Phase directional inversion Int32
LogInBlDir Phase directional blocking Int32
The minimum polarization current is considered as 50% of the minimum setting of the three timed phase units (51).
❑ The quadrature and positive sequence units settings, commands and outputs.
❑ PROT/RDIR1 node
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 6.
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking.
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional’s trip direction.
❑ Outputs: Table 7 shows the function’s output data.
 67 Forward X. The detected direction indicates forward. It is independent for each phase.
 67 Reverse X. The detected direction indicates reverse. It is independent for each phase.

User Manual 43
 Polarization failure X. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure. It is
independent for each phase.
 Phase directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Phase direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.
Table 7 Phase directional outputs (quadrature and positive sequence)
Signal Data Attribute

67-Forward A Fw67 phsA
67-Forward B Fw67 phsB
67-Forward C Fw67 phsC
67-Reverse A Rv67 phsA
67-Reverse B Rv67 phsB
67-Reverse C Rv67 phsC
Polarization Failure A FailPol phsA
Polarization Failure B FailPol phsB
Polarization Failure C FailPol phsC
Phase Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
Phase Direction Inversion InvDir general
3.2.2.1.1 Quadrature
For the detection of directionality in phases, the polarization voltage corresponds to the quadrature connection (90º), in
which each phase’s current is compared with the phase to phase voltage between the other two phases (see Figure 32).
− j
  −MTA_FASES  

Phase Ia Spol Vbc Sop Ia  e  2  180
  
− j − MTA_FASES 
Ib  e   180
2
Phase Ib Spol Vca Sop
   
− j − MTA_FASES 
Ic  e   180
2
Phase Ic Spol Vab Sop
Signals forward when |ang(Spol)-ang(Sop)|<90º
The “2 out of 3” means that the unit only signals forward if this direction is seen in 2 phases. Avoid cases in which, with a
reverse fault, certain of the phases detected a forward fault (e.g., weak in-feed). In the case of weak in-feed due to the
breaking of a transformer, there is only zero sequence current circulation and therefore the three phases detect the same
current. In this case, one of the 3 phases will detect the fault in the opposite direction to the other two.
It operates as three single phase units in which polarization voltages are the phase to phase voltages of the healthy phases.
These may be obtained by calculation or by transformer measurement, depending on whether the voltage setting type
indicates that the signals entered are phase to ground voltages (calculation) or phase to phase voltages (measurement).
In the case of an ABC phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vab, Vbc and Vac, for Ic, Ia and Ib. In the case of a CBA
phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vba, Vcb and Vac, for Ic, Ia and Ib.
There is a 5º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained.
This unit’s signals are independent for each of the phases (see Table 7).

User Manual 44
Memory
The current quadrature voltage is used. If it falls below the Vpol threshold, the value memorized in accordance with the
memory management explained in the polarization memory monitoring is used. It is also affected by the serial
compensation logic in so far that if it is set to YES the memorized voltage is used as of the moment in which a fault or a
voltage inversion is detected.
Trip permission with low Vpol
The directional block is used when the polarization voltage is below a threshold (VPOL_FASES) or the operating current is
below another threshold (Iphase < (IMIN_FASES)). “Polarization Failure X” is indicated. If the trip permission without
polarization V is set to YES, the trip is permitted. If set to NO, it is blocked.
Figure 32 Phase directional (Quadrature)
3.2.2.1.2 Positive sequence

The direction is determined by comparison between the positive sequence voltage and current (see Figure 33).
S1pol V1

j MTA_FASES 
180
S1op I1  e
It signals forward when |ang(S1pol)-ang(S1op)|<90º
90-angle setting >arg(I1)-arg(V1)>270-angle setting
This unit’s signals are the same as those of the quadrature, with the difference that the three phases are always given
simultaneously (see Table 7).
Memory
The memory management explained in the Polarization memory monitoring is used. If the voltage falls below VPOL_FASES,
the voltage is memorized during the programmed time. It is also affected by the serial compensation logic in so far that if it
is set to "YES" the memorized voltage is used as of the moment in which a fault is detected.
Trip permission with low Vpol
The directional block is used when the V1 polarization voltage is below a threshold (VPOL_FASES) or the operating current
is below another threshold (Iphase< (IMIN_FASES)). “Phase A, B and C polarization fault” is indicated.

User Manual 45
If the V1 polarization voltage is below the threshold (VPOL_FASES) and the trip permission without polarization V is set to
YES, the trip is permitted. If set to NO, it is blocked.
Figure 33 Phase directional (Positive sequence)
3.2.2.1.3 Inverse and positive sequence

Both methods are used to determine the direction, first by analysing the negative sequence:
❑ If the negative sequence indicates the direction, the positive sequence is not consulted.
❑ If the negative sequence indicates a polarization failure, the positive sequence is consulted.
3.2.2.2 Negative sequence

It is used both in phase and neutral directional.
The direction is determined by comparison between the negative sequence voltage and current, with I2 superior to a threshold
and V2 superior to a threshold (see Figure 28)
It signals forward when |arg(S2po)-arg(S2opl)| is less than 90º
Negative sequence polarization failure
If the negative sequence polarization voltage (S2pol) is less than a threshold (Setting “Vpol_S2”), or if the negative sequence
current is below a threshold (3I2<IMIN_IN_S2 or 3I2<IMIN_I1_S2xI1/100 ), “Negative sequence polarization fault” is indicated.
This function’s general settings and those applied in the quadrature and positive sequence criteria are in the PROT/S2RDIR1
node:
❑ Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle.

❑ DIrectional Zone amplitude (º). Indicates the angle covered by the trip zone.
below this value.
❑ I2 minimum operation x I1. Percentage of I1 Indicates the minimum value of I2 in relation to I1.
❑ I2 minimum operation x In. Percentage of rated I. Indicates the minimum value of I2 in relation to rated I.

User Manual 46
❑ Permission without polarization V. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below the
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is blocked, it is issues
permission for the trip.
❑ Logical inversion input. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
Table 8 Negative sequence directional settings

ChrAng Torque angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
Amp (AmpVal in
Directional Zone amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
Ed2)
Vpol Minimum V polarization 1 200 0,1 float32
BlkValI1 Minimum I2 / I1 (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
BlkValIn Minimum I1 / Irated (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
LogInInvDir Neg.Seq.Directional inversion Int32
LogInBlDir Blocking input Int32
The quadrature and positive sequence units settings, commands and outputs:
❑ PROT/S2RDIR1 node
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 8.
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional’s trip direction
❑ Outputs:
 67N-S2 Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67N-S2 Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure S2. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure.
 S2 directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 S2 direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.
Table 9 Negative sequence directional outputs

67N-S2 Forward Fw67S2 general
67N-S2 Reverse Rv67S2 general
Polarization Failure S2 FailS2 general
S2 Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
S2 Direction Inversion InvDir general

User Manual 47
Figure 34 Negative sequence directional
Figure 35 Negative sequence directional scheme
INTERNAL CALCULATION
|3V2| +
-
<
SETTING DIGITAL SIGNAL
Vpol_S2 Polarization Failure S2
3I2/In (Rated I of the CT) +
-
<
SETTING
IMIN_IN_S2 (% of In)
Time
N/4
I2/I1 +
-
<
SETTING n/4
IMIN_I1_S2 (%)
DIGITAL SIGNAL
SETTING
PERMISSION WITHOUT 67N-S2 Forward
VPOL=YES
INTERNAL CALCULATION Time
|ANG(SOP/SPOL)|=AMP_S2/2 N/4
DIGITAL SIGNAL
INTERNAL CALCULATION n/4 67N-S2 Reverse
|ANG(SOP/SPOL)+180|=AMP_S2/2
3.2.2.3 Polarization memory monitoring

It is used in the polarization of the phase directional (positive sequence and quadrature).
Allows the memorized voltage to be used during the configured time when the current voltage is not apt.
This unit don´t have settings:
❑ Minimum V1. Indicates the minimum V1 value for employing the memorized voltage. It is set at 10V.
❑ V1 maintenance time. Indicates the time during which the memorized voltage is used in the polarization by positive
sequence. It is set at 30 cycles.
❑ Minimum Vc. Indicates the minimum quadrature voltage for employing the memorized voltage. It is set at 30V.
❑ Vc maintenance time. Indicates the time during which the memorized voltage is used in the polarization by quadrature. It
is set at 30 cycles.
This unit’s operating scheme is:
❑ If V1> VPOL_FASES is met during at least 4 cycles, the memorized voltage is captured once again.
❑ V1men is then update to the V1 value registered 3 cycles previously. Thus, in the moment in which the conditions for using
it are met, the value registered 3 cycles previously will be taken.

User Manual 48
❑ The 67-50/51 units are normally polarized without memory. The memorized voltage is used in the moment in which the
current V1 voltage drops below VPOL_FASES. The memorized voltage must exceed VPOL_FASES in order to be used. The
memory time is indicated in the maintenance time setting.
The positive sequence voltage and the quadrature voltages are analyzed separately (Vab, Vbc and Vac).
The function’s logic diagram is shown in Figure 36 (positive sequence) and Figure 37 (quadrature).
Figure 36 Positive sequence memorized monitoring
INTERNAL VALUE
V1MEM=V1
INTERNAL VALUE
V1MEM=V1(n-2cycles)
Time
INTERNAL MEASUREMENT
2 CYCLES
V1
≥ S
SETTING Time INTERNAL VALUE
0
VPOL_FASES 0 V1MEM=V1MEM
R
10
CYCLES
INTERNAL VALUE
V1POLARIZ=V1
INTERNAL VALUE
V1POLARIZ=V1MEM
Figure 37 Memorized quadrature monitoring
INTERNAL VALUE
VABMEM=VAB
INTERNAL VALUE
VABMEM=VAB(n-3cycles)
Time
INTERNAL MEASUREMENT 2 CYCLES INTERNAL VALUE
VAB S VABMEM=VABMEM
SETTING ≥ 0
Time
0
VPOL_FASES
R
10
CYCLES INTERNAL VALUE
VABPOLARIZ=VAB
INTERNAL VALUE
VABPOLARIZ=VABMEM
3.2.2.4 Neutral directional

Affects neutral units, allowing or blocking the trip in accordance with the configuration.
The operation can be selected from among: angular, cosine, sine and watt-metric. Various options can be selected from within
the angular criterion.
This unit’s settings are in the PROT/GRDIR node. In accordance with the selected mode, they affect:
General
❑ Ground directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

 “Angular”. Analyzes each phase independently.
 “I·cosϕ”
 “I·senϕ”
 “Watt-metric”
❑ Minimum 3I0/Irated (%). Percentage of rated I. Indicates the minimum value of 3 I0 in relation to rated I. “I·cosϕ” and
“I·cosϕ” are used in zero sequence mode.
❑ Ground directional Lock. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is blocked, it is
issues permission for the trip.

User Manual 49
❑ Ground directional inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
Angular and Zero Sequence
❑ Polarization type. Selected the polarization type from the options:

 V. By voltage.
 IPOL. By current
 IPOL → V. By current and, in the event of uncertainty, by voltage.
 IPOL or V. By current or by voltage.
 IPOL and V. By current and by voltage.
❑ Voltage directional criterion. Only applied if voltage polarization has been selected.
 S0. Zero sequence.
 S2. Negative sequence.
 S2 & S0. Inverse and zero sequence.
 S2 OR S0. Inverse or zero sequence.
 S2 →S0. Negative sequence and, in the event of uncertainty, zero sequence.
 S0 →S2. Zero sequence and, in the event of uncertainty, negative sequence.
❑ Direct Zone amplitude. Indicates the angle covered by the trip zone.
below this value.
❑ Trip permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below the
❑ Minimum Ipol/Irated (%). Indicates the minimum current for polarization; the direction cannot be reliably determined
below this value.
❑ Minimum 3I0/I1 (%). Percentage of I1 Indicates the minimum value of I0 in relation to I1.
Watt-metric, I·cosϕ, I·senϕ
❑ Minimum power (Icos, Isin, Watt): Power value P=Vn·In·cos(-c),, in which =Angle between Vn and In. If the power
negative and higher than this value, a forward fault is registered. If it is positive and higher than this value, a reverse fault
is registered.
❑ Icos<->Isen method switch. If a signal is assigned to this input, it indicates the directional type employed (independent of
the setting) I·cosϕ if the input is 0 (deactivated) and I·senϕ if the input is 1 (activated). If no signal has been assigned, the
criterion selected for the setting is employed.

User Manual 50
Table 10 Neutral directional settings

“Angular criterion”
DirTyp “Icos ”
Ground Directional method enum
“Isen ”
“Watt-metric”
ChrAng Torque angle(º) 0 359 1 float32
Amp (AmpVal in Ed2) DIrect. Zone amplitude 90 170 1 float32
BlkValV V minimum V polarization 1 200 0,1 float32
BlkValIn Minimum 3I0/Irated (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
LogInInvDir Ground directional Inversion Int32
LogInBlDir Ground directional Lock Int32
LogInChSC Icos<->Isen method switch Int32
V
IPOL
PolTyp
Polarization method (V,Ipol) IPOL → V enum
IPOL or V
IPOL and V
S0
S2
PolQty (PolSel in Ed2) S2 & S0
Voltage directional criterion enum
S2 OR S0
S2 →S0
S0 →S2
BlkValI1 Minimum 3I0/I1 (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
EnaOpn (TripVpol in
Trip permission with low Vpol NO/YES Boolean
Ed2)
BlkValIpol Minimum Ipol/Irated (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
BlkValW Minimum power (Icos, Isin, Watt) 0 100 0,01 float32
The neutral units have settings, commands and outputs:
❑ PROT/GRDIR1 node
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 10 for details
❑ Commands:
 67N Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67N Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure In. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure.
 Ground directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Ground direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.
Table 11. Neutral directional outputs

67N Forward Fw67G neut
67N Reverse Rv67G neut
Polarization Failure In FailIn neut
Ground Directional Inhibition BlkDir neut
Ground Direction Inversion InvDir neut

User Manual 51
3.2.2.4.1 Combinations with angle criteria

The various combinations according to the polarization type are:
I→V
If Ineutro is less than (IN<IMIN_IN_S0 or IN<IMIN_I1_S0xI1/100), a “Neutral I polarization signal” is issued and no other
actions are taken. (IN=Ineutro).
If the I unit does not determine the polarization fault direction, the voltage signal combination is displayed.
If the result is “Without VPOL”, the “Trip permission without neutral VPOL” setting is inspected.
If there is a fuse failure, only current directional is taken into account.
I and V
actions are taken.
If the I unit does not determine the direction, the voltage signal combination is displayed. If it agrees with the result, a
forward or reverse indication is made. If V lacks sufficient polarization, the result is decided in accordance with the "Trip
permission without neutral Vpol" setting.
If the I or V unit does not determine the direction, a "polarization fault” message is indicated and a decision is taken in
accordance with the “trip permission without Vpol” setting.
This combination is applicable to autotrans when there is a malfunction of Ipol.
I or V
actions are taken.
If the I and V units indicate a polarization failure, “polarization fault” message is indicated and a decision is taken in
accordance with the “trip permission without Vpol” setting.
If any unit indicates forward or reverse, the corresponding signal is activated.
Furthermore, we can choose from among the following options:
S0→S2
If Ineutro is less than (IN<IMIN_IN_S0 or IN<IMIN_I1_S0xI1/100), a “Neutral I polarization signal” is activated.
To the contrary, the s0 conditions are displayed.
If the S0 unit does not determine the direction, a “neutral V polarization failure” signal is activated and S2 is displayed.
If the conditions for determining the direction are still not given, a “negative sequence polarization failure” signal is
activated and the “trip permission without Vpol” setting is consulted in order to decide whether trip permission is to be
given or not.
Example of specific situations:
One unit set in reverse and one set forward. s0 indicates reverse and s2 forward. Only reverse would be signalled (due to
s0).
V0 V2 Result
F F or R or Without Vpol F
R F or R or Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
Without Vpol Without Vpol Without Vpol

User Manual 52
S0 & S2
To the contrary, the S2 and S0 unit’s are analyzed.
If the two match, the decision is signalled.
If either of the units (S0 or S2) does not determine the direction, a “negative sequence polarization fault” or “Neutral V
polarization fault” signal is activated and the signalling is decided upon in accordance with the “trip permission without
Vpol” setting.
Specific situations:
One unit set in reverse and one set forward. S0 indicates reverse and S2 forward. No output is given.
V0 V2 Result
F F F
F R Nothing
R R R
R F Nothing
F Without Vpol Without Vpol
R Without Vpol Without Vpol
Without Vpol F Without Vpol
Without Vpol R Without Vpol
S0 OR S2
To the contrary, the V2 conditions are displayed.
If the V2 unit does not determine the direction, an “negative sequence polarization failure” signal is activated.
If the conditions for determining the direction are still not given in S0, a “Neutral V polarization failure” signal is activated
and the “trip permission without Vpol” setting is consulted in order to decide whether trip permission is to be given or not.
V0 V2 Result
F F F
F R F&R
R R R
R F F&R
F Without Vpol F
R Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
3.2.2.4.2 S0 polarization
The direction is determined by comparing the neutral current (3·I0) with the neutral voltage as polarization, (-3·V0). The
angle determines the range in which the fault is considered as a forward fault and as a reverse fault.
S0pol −VN

jMTA_S0 
180
S0op IN  e
The VN=3·V0 voltage can be calculated using the phase to earth voltages of the phases or it can be measured by a
transformer, in accordance with the “V0 measurement type” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node. If the “voltage type” setting
is set to “phase to phase”, the zero sequence voltage calculated will always be zero and this unit cannot be used.

User Manual 53
The 3I0 measurement can also be calculated using the sum of the phase currents in those models in which a transformer is
not assigned to this measurement.
The function trips if the |ang(S0op)-arg(S0pol)| is less than amplitude angle between 2.
Figure 38 Zero sequence directional
Trip permission with low Vpol.
The directional block is used when the S0pol polarization voltage is below a minimum V polarization threshold (VPOL_S0
setting) or the operating current is below another current threshold (Ineutro<IMIN_IN_S0 or Ineutro<IMIN_I1_S0xI1/100).
“Neutral polarization fault” is signalled.
If the trip permission without V polarization is set to YES, the trip is permitted (if VN<Vpol_S0). If set to NO, it is blocked.
That is, the trip is allowed only the absence of Vn.
Figure 39 Zero sequence directional scheme
|VN| +
-
<
Vpol_S0 Polarization fault 67N_S0
IN/In (Rated I of the CT)
+
SETTING -
<
IMIN_IN_S2 (% of In)
Time
IN/I1 N/4
+
SETTING -
<
IMIN_I1_S2 (%) n/4
DIGITAL SIGNAL
SETTING
PERMISSION WITHOUT 67N Forward
VPOL=YES
Time
N/4
|ANG(SOP/SPOL)|≤AMP_S0/2 DIGITAL SIGNAL
INTERNAL CALCULATION n/4 67N Reverse
|ANG(SOP/SPOL)+180|≤AMP_S0/2
3.2.2.4.3 I polarization
The direction is determined by comparing the grounding current (Ipol) with the neutral current. To be able to verify the
direction, Ipol> IMIN_IPOL_S0 must be met.

User Manual 54
Figure 40 Directional with current polarization
There is a 5º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained, both
for voltage and for current polarization.
Permission due to polarization fault
If the polarization current (IN< IN<IMIN_IN_S0 or IN<IMIN_I1_S0xI1/100), a “Neutral I polarization fault” is signalled.
If the polarization current (Ipol) falls below a threshold (Ipol<IMIN_IPOL_S0), a “IPOL polarization fault” is indicated.
However, the “Vpol fault trip permission” is not consulted and, therefore, no trip permission is issued.
3.2.2.4.4 Watt-metric directional

This is for lines with Petersen coil compensation.
In order to allow the directional unit to pick up, the following must be met:
❑ Exceed a minimum VN threshold.

❑ For forward faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle must be
between 95 and 265.
95<Ang(I0)-angle(V0)+Torque angle<265
❑ For reverse faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle must be
between 275 and 85.
❑ 275<Ang(I0)-angle(V0)+Torque angle<85
❑ The power P=Vn·In·cos(-c) must exceed the minimum P threshold by the absolute value. If the sign of P is
negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse. The equation to be implemented for calculating P is as
follows:
P (Re(V)  cos ( ) + Im(V)  sin( ))  Re(I) + (Im(V)  cos ( ) − Re(V)  sin( ))  Im(I)

User Manual 55
Figure 41 Directional with watt-metric polarization
3.2.2.4.5 I*cos() / I*sen() directional

An input can be programmed (“67N Isen(phi) r Icos(phi)”) such that when activated the operating mode of I*cos() changes
to I*sen(). If programmed, this input cancels the setting: if deactivated, it runs the I*cos() algorithm. If activated, the
I*sen() algorithm is run, independently of the setting. It does not affect either the angular of the watt-metric directional.
I*cos() directional

❑ The minimum current I minimum=In·cos(?-?c) must exceed the minimum threshold by the absolute value. If the
sign is negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
between 95 and 265.
between 275 and 85.
❑ The trip zone will depend on the angle between the zero sequence voltage and the zero sequence current. If we
are in the trip zone, the directional will issue trip permission when the value of cos(-c) exceeds the setting (in a
negative value).
 (Re( V)  cos ( ) + Im( V)  sin( ))  Re( I) + (Im( V)  cos ( ) − Re( V)  sin( ))  Im( I) 
I·cos(v − i −  )
V

User Manual 56
Figure 42 Directional with cosine polarization
As the neutral units allow trip permission to be issued with forward and with reverse faults, in reality the characteristics will
be as follows.
Figure 43 Forward/Reverse with cosine polarization
67N I*sen() directional

❑ The current I minimum=In·sen(-c) must exceed the minimum threshold by the absolute value. If the sign is
negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
between 185 and 355.
between 5 and 175.
(Im(V)  cos ( ) − Re(V)  sin( ))  Re(I) − (Re(V)  cos ( ) + Im(V)  sin( ))  Im(I)
I·sin(v − i −  )
V

User Manual 57
Figure 44 Directional with sine polarization
3.2.2.5 Sensitive neutral directional

Affects sensitive neutral units, allowing or blocking the trip in accordance with the configuration.
The operation can be selected from among: angular, cosine, sine and watt-metric. Various options can be selected from within
the angular criterion.
This unit’s settings are in the PROT/SGRDIR node. In accordance with the selected mode, they affect:
General
❑ Sen. Ground directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

 Angular”. Analyzes each phase independently.
 “I·cosϕ”
 “I·senϕ”
 “Watt-metric”
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is blocked,
it issues permission for the trip.
❑ 67NS Directional Inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
❑ Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”,
the function’s protection events are not generate. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is
contemplated.
Angular

❑ Directional Zone amplitude (º). Indicates the angle covered by the trip zone.
❑ Trip permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is
below the threshold. If set to YES, it enables an overcurrent trip if the memorized polarization voltage is
lower than the minimum polarization voltage; if set to NO, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under those
conditions. The minimum voltage polarization threshold is the same as in the neutral unit.
❑ Minimum Isn/Irated (%). Indicates the minimum current for polarization; the direction cannot be reliably
determined below this value.
Watt-metric, I·cosϕ, I·senϕ
❑ Minimum power (Icos, Isin, Watt): Power value P=Vn·In·cos(-c),, in which ==Angle between Vn and In.
If the power negative and higher than this value, a forward fault is registered. If it is positive and higher
than this value, a reverse fault is registered.

User Manual 58
❑ Switch method Icos Isen. If a signal is assigned to this input, it indicates the directional type employed
(independent of the setting) I·cosϕ if the input is 0 (deactivated) and I·senϕ if the input is 1 (activated). If
no signal has been assigned, the criterion selected for the setting is employed.
Table 12 Sensitive neutral directional settings

“Angular criterion”
DirTyp “Icos ”
Sen. Ground directional method enum
“Isen ”
“Watt-metric”
ChrAng Torque Angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
Amp (AmpVal in
Directional Zone amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
Ed2)
LogInInvDir 67NS Directional Inversion Int32
LogInBlDir Blocking Input Int32
LogInChSC Switch method Icos Isen Int32
BlkValA Minimum Isn/Irated (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
EnaOpn (TripVpol
Trip permission with low Vpol NO/YES Boolean
in Ed2)
BlkValW Minimum power (Icos, Isin, Watt) 0 100 0,01 float32
The sensitive neutral unit has settings, commands and outputs:
❑ PROT/SGRDIR1 node
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See table 6 for settings. See Table 12 for details.
❑ Commands:
 67NS Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67NS Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure Ins. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure.
 Ins directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Ins direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.
Table 13 Sensitive neutral directional outputs

67NS Forward Fw67SG sneut
67NS Reverse Rv67SG sneut
Polarization Failure Ins FailISG sneut
Ins Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
Ins Direction Inversion InvDir general
3.2.2.5.1 Angular polarization

Employs the neutral’s S0 polarization, with the difference that it employs the settings pertaining to the torque angle, zone
amplitude, minimum current and trip permission without Vpol.
3.2.2.5.2 Watt-metric directional

This is for lines with Petersen coil compensation.

User Manual 59

between 95 and 265.
between 275 and 85.
❑ The power P=Vn·Ins·cos(-c) must exceed the minimum P threshold by the absolute value. If the sign of P is
negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse. The equation to be implemented for calculating P is as
follows:
P (Re(V)  cos ( ) + Im(V)  sin( ))  Re(I) + (Im(V)  cos ( ) − Re(V)  sin( ))  Im(I)
Figure 45 Directional with watt-metric polarization
3.2.2.5.3 I*cos() / I*sen() directional

An input can be programmed (“67NS Isen(phi) or Icos(phi)”) such that when activated the operating mode of I*cos()
changes to I*sen(). If programmed, this input cancels the setting: if deactivated, it runs the I*cos() algorithm. If activated,
the I*sen() algorithm is run, independently of the setting. It does not affect either the angular of the watt-metric
directional.
I*cos() directional

❑ The minimum current I minimum=Ins·cos(-c) must exceed the minimum threshold by the absolute value. If the
sign is negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
between 95 and 265.
between 275 and 85.

User Manual 60
❑ The trip zone will depend on the angle between the zero sequence voltage and the zero sequence current. If we
are in the trip zone, the directional will issue trip permission when the value of Io·cos(-c) exceeds the setting (in
a negative value).
 (Re( V)  cos ( ) + Im( V)  sin( ))  Re( I) + (Im( V)  cos ( ) − Re( V)  sin( ))  Im( I) 
I·cos(v − i −  )
V
Figure 46 Directional with cosine polarization
As sensitive neutral units allow trip permission to be issued with forward and with reverse faults, in reality the
characteristics will be as follows.
Figure 47 Forward/Reverse with cosine polarization
67N I*sen() directional

❑ The current I minimum=Ins·sen(-c) must exceed the minimum threshold by the absolute value. If the sign is
negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
between 185 and 355.

User Manual 61
between 5 and 175.
( Im( V)  cos (  ) − Re( V)  sin(  ) )  Re(I) − ( Re(V)  cos (  ) + Im(V)  sin(  ) )  Im(I)
I·sin( v − i −  )
V
Figure 48 Directional with sine polarization
3.2.3 Phase overcurrent
3.2.3.1 Instantaneous
There are 3 independent units for each of the phases.
Each of the three units has independent settings, commands and outputs.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIOC1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 5
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 IOC1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase.
 IOC1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase.
 IOC1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for
all three phases.
 IOC1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IOC1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 62
Table 14 Instantaneous phase function outputs
PIOC1 Signals PIOC2 Signals PIOC3 Signals Data Atribute

IOC1 Start phase A IOC2 Start phase A IOC3 Start phase A Str phsA
IOC1 Start phase B IOC2 Start phase B IOC3 Start phase B Str phsB
IOC1 Start phase C IOC2 Start phase C IOC3 Start phase C Str phsC
IOC1 Trip phase A IOC2 Trip phase A IOC3 Trip phase A Op phsA
IOC1 Trip phase B IOC2 Trip phase B IOC3 Trip phase B Op phsB
IOC1 Trip phase C IOC2 Trip phase C IOC3 Trip phase C Op phsC
IOC1 Phase Status IOC2 Phase Status IOC3 Phase Status StEna stVal
IOC1 Phase Start IOC2 Phase Start IOC3 Phase Start Str general
IOC1 Phase Trip IOC2 Phase Trip IOC3 Phase Trip Op general
3.2.3.2 Timed
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PTOC1
❑ Commands:
 TOC1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase.
 TOC1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase.
 TOC 1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
for all three phases.
 TIOC1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TOC1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 15 Timed phase function outputs
PTOC1 Signals PTOC2 Signals PTOC3 Signals Data Atribute

TOC1 Start phase A TOC2 Start phase A TOC3 Start phase A Str phsA
TOC1 Start phase B TOC2 Start phase B TOC3 Start phase B Str phsB
TOC1 Start phase C TOC2 Start phase C TOC3 Start phase C Str phsC
TOC1 Trip phase A TOC2 Trip phase A TOC3 Trip phase A Op phsA
TOC1 Trip phase B TOC2 Trip phase B TOC3 Trip phase B Op phsB
TOC1 Trip phase C TOC2 Trip phase C TOC3 Trip phase C Op phsC
TOC1 Phase Status TOC2 Phase Status TOC3 Phase Status StEna stVal
TOC1 Phase Start TOC2 Phase Start TOC3 Phase Start Str general
TOC1 Phase Trip TOC2 Phase Trip TOC3 Phase Trip Op general

User Manual 63
3.2.4 Neutral overcurrent

Employs the neutral transformer input as a measurement.
There are 3 independent units.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/GPIOC1
❑ Commands:
❑ Outputs: Table 16 shows the function’s output data
 GIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Ground Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 16 Neutral instantaneous function outputs
GPIOC1 Signals GPIOC2 Signals GPIOC3 Signals Data Attribute

GIOC1 Start GIOC2 Start GIOC3 Start Str neut
GIOC1 Trip GIOC2 Trip GIOC3 Trip Op neut
IOC1 Ground Status IOC2 Ground Status IOC3 Ground Status StEna stVal
3.2.4.2 Timed
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/GPTOC1
❑ Commands:
❑ Outputs:Table 17 shows the function’s output data Table 17
 GTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 GTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Ground Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.

User Manual 64
Table 17 Timed neutral function outputs
GPTOC1 Signals GPTOC2 Signals GPTOC3 Signals Data Attribute

GTOC1 Start GTOC2 Start GTOC3 Start Str neut
GTOC1 Trip GTOC2 Trip GTOC3 Trip Op neut
TOC1 Ground Status TOC2 Ground Status TOC3 Ground Status StEna stVal
3.2.5 Sensitive neutral overcurrent

Include 2 units referring to the transformers unbalance neutral of the bank, in model CB0 2 transformers and 3 in model CB1.
Used as measure the input of neutral unbalance transformers corrected according paragraph 3.2.7
The setting range changes in relation to that shown in the overcurrent units:
❑ Pick up from 0.001A to 10A.

❑ Additional time from 0ms to 1800000ms (30 minutes).
❑ It is not used the adjustment type of measure , is always used the fundamental
These units do not have directionality, recloser or fuse failure
There are 1 units for each unbalance neutral transformer.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/ ND1PIOC1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 5, except for the pick up and additional time ranges.
❑ Commands:
 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 18 Unbalance neutral 1 instantaneous function outputs (for unbalance 2 and 3 would be equal)
SGPIOC1 Signal Data Attribute

ND1IOC Start Str general
ND1IOC Trip Op general
Status StEna stVal
These units are allowed to carry out general trip. In case of double or triple capacitor bank, each unbalanced functions
correspond to the opening of the breaker of each bank.
3.2.5.2 Timed
There are 1 units for each unbalance neutral transformer.

User Manual 65
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/ND1PTOC1
 Unit 2: PROT/ ND2PTOC2
 Unit 3: PROT/ ND3PTOC3
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 4, except for the pick up and additional time ranges.
❑ Commands:
❑ Outputs: Table 19 shows the function's output data.
 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 19 Sensitive neutral timed function outputs
SGPTOC1 Signals Data Attribute

ND1PTOC Start Str general
ND1PTOC Trip Op general
ND1PTOC Status StEna stVal
These units are not allowed to carry out general trip, would be used as alarm level, not allowing to adjust general trip to yes
and in case of double or triple capacitor bank, each unbalanced functions not correspond to the opening of the breaker of each
bank.
3.2.6 Unbalance overcurrent

Employs 3 times the negative sequence as a measurement:
3·I2=(Ia+a2·Ib+a·Ic) In which=1|120º
The calculation of the sequence takes into phase succession order setting (ABC/ACB).
This measure is corrected according paragraph 3.2.7
The negative sequence directional is employed by this unit.
The measurement type setting is not used, as the fundamental is always used.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/UNPIOC1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. It employs the settings in Table 5, with the exception of the
measurement type.
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.

User Manual 66

 UNIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Unbalance Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 20 Instantaneous unbalanced function outputs
UNIOC1 Signals UNIOC2 Signals UNIOC3 Signals Data Attribute

UNIOC1 Start UNIOC2 Start UNIOC3 Start Str general
UNIOC1 Trip UNIOC2 Trip UNIOC3 Trip Op general
IOC1 Unbalance Status IOC2 Unbalance Status IOC3 Unbalance Status StEna stVal
3.2.6.2 Timed
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/UNPTOC1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. Employs the settings in Table 4, with the exception of the
measurement type.
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
❑ Outputs: Table 21 shows the function's output data
 UNTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Unbalance Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 21 Timed unbalanced function outputs
UNPTOC1 Signal UNPTOC2 Signal UNPTOC3 Signal Data Attribute

UNTOC1 Start UNTOC2 Start UNTOC3 Start Str general
UNTOC1 Trip UNTOC2 Trip UNTOC3 Trip Op general
TOC1 Unbalance Status TOC2 Unbalance Status TOC3 Unbalance Status StEna stVal
3.2.7 Correction of the unbalance functions proceeding

The unbalance functions, both phase and unbalance between battery neutral in double or triple star functions, work on the
difference between the measured unbalance and that, considered as “normal”, that is, that existing in normal conditions due to the
battery construction.
This “normal” value is introduced as a correction setting in module and angle for phases and another one for neutral, on the basis
of the measurement carried out by the worker in normal conditions. The “normal” measurement appears on the Status; for phases,
it is the module and angle of the current reverse sequence, and for neutral unbalance, it is the measurement of the corresponding
transformer.
It is important to take into account that the angle reference is VA, so there must be this voltage measurement.
The correction is carried out in a vectorial way, so the current over which the protection is applied is the vectorial difference
between the measurement and the one programmed in the correction setting.

User Manual 67
❑ Node RNDC1:
Dato Ajuste Mín. Máx. Escalón Observaciones
ModUnbPhs Phase module unbalance (A) 0 150 0,01
AngUnbPhs Phase arg unbalance 0 359 0,1
ModUnbGnd1 Unbalance 1 module (A) 0 10 0,001
AngUnbGnd1 Unbalance 1 arg 0 359 0,1
3.2.8 Broken conductor

This is a definite time protection unit.
The pick-up value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, and it depends on the setting "Operation type".
There are two modes of operation, selectable by setting. The relay trips once the programmed time has elapsed if the following
conditions are met:
❑ “Always”:
 The positive sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 The negative sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 I2/I1 ratio exceeds the setting value.
I2/I1=(Ia+a2·Ib+a·Ic) / (Ia+a·Ib+a2·Ic) In which a=1|120º
 Current value of one phase is greater than the setting "Minimum Phase I".
❑ “Yes with 52”:

 The positive sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 The negative sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 I2/Irated exceeds the setting value.
I2/Irated = (Ia+a2·Ib+a·Ic)/ (3·Iratedl) In which a=1|120º
 I0/Irated is bellowthan the setting value. If set to 0, this setting will not be taken into account.
 If breaker is closed, the current value of one or two phases is lower than the setting "Minimum Phase I".
Figure 49 shows the logic scheme of the function.
The settings used in these functions are:

 “Always”
 “Yes with 52”
❑ Start value (%). If "Operation Type" is "Always", indicates the ratio I2/I1. In case of "Yes with 52", it indicates I2/Irated.
❑ Operate delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function must be met.
❑ Minimum phase current (%Irated). Minimum phase current value.
❑ Maximum threshold I0/Irated. Maximum I0/Irated value necessary to act.
recloser (5.2.1).

User Manual 68
corresponding to the recloser.
closing cycle (5.2.3).
protection events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 22 Broken conductor settings
Data Setting Min Max Step Remarks Type

OPPTOCEna Enabled NO/YES enum
ALWAYS (1)
YES WITH 52 (2)
StrVal Start value (%) 5 100 0,1 float32
OpDlTmms Operate delay time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
BlkIph Minimum phase current (%Irated) 5 200 0,1 float32
BLkI0I1 MaximumThreshold I0/Irated 0 20 0,1 float32
LogInBlk Blocking input uint 32
TripPerm TripP:RL,RR,RL,R:1,2,3,4,MC 0 255 1 Bit meaning ING
ReclPerm Reclose perm.(R1,R2,R3,R4) 0 15 Bit meaning ING
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/YES Boolean
There are independent settings, commands and outputs.
❑ PROT/OPPTOC node
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 22.
❑ Commands:
❑ Outputs:Table 23shows the function’s output data.
 Open Phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 Open Phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Open Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 23 Broken conductor function outputs

Broken conductor Start Str general
Broken conductor Trip Op general
Broken conductor Status StEna stVal

User Manual 69
Figure 49 Broken conductor logic
3.2.9 Undercurrent
There are two independent undercurrent units.
They employ the phases’ fundamental measurements. The unit picks up when the current falls below the setting and drops out
when the current rises above 105% of the setting.
The pick up is generated for each phase, regardless of the operation type setting. However, the unit’s trip takes the operation type
into account.
The settings of each of these units are:

 “AND”. The unit trips when all the phases meet the undercurrent conditions
 “OR”. The unit trips when at least one of the phases meets the undercurrent conditions

User Manual 70
recloser (5.2.1).
Table 24 Undercurrent settings

PTUCEna Enabled NO/YES enum
AND (A, B and C) (1)
OR (A, B or C) (2)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 10 0,01 float32
There are independent settings, commands and outputs in each unit.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PTUC1
 Unit 2: PROT/PTUC2
❑ Commands:
 TUC1 phase X Start. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase and does not
consider the operation type setting.
 TUC1 phase Start. Pick up of at least one phase. Indicates that at least one of the unit's phases has picked up. It does
not take into account the operation type setting.
 TUC1 Start. Taking into account the operation type setting, it indicates that the unit has picked up.
 TUC1 Trip. Taking into account the operation type setting, it indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Undercurrent Unit 1 Status . Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
for all three phases.
Table 25 Phase undercurrent function outputs
PTUC1 Signals PTUC2 Signals Data Atribute

TUC1 phase A Start TUC2 phase A Start Str phsA
TUC1 phase B Start TUC2 phase B Start Str phsB
TUC1 phase C Start TUC2 phase C Start Str phsC
TUC1 Start TUC2 Start StrUC general
TUC1 Trip TUC2 Trip OpUC general
Undercurrent Unit 1 Status Undercurrent Unit 2 Status StEna stVal
TUC1 phase Start TUC2 phase Start Str general

User Manual 71
3.3 VOLTAGE UNITS
3.3.1 General description

In order to reset, the voltage must fall below the pick up value return percentage. For example, if the pick up threshold is 50V and
the reset percentage is 10%, the unit must register voltage above 50V in order to pick up and voltage below 45V in order to reset
(50-0.1 50).
When enabled and unblocked, the undervoltage units act when the voltage is inferior to the setting value during the programmed
time. In order to reset, the voltage must exceed the pick up value return percentage. For example, if the pick up threshold is 50V
and the reset percentage is 10%, the unit must register voltage below 50V in order to pick up and voltage above 55V in order to
reset (50+0.1 50).
The voltage units are not directional.
The voltage unit’s general settings are available in the PROT/PVGE1 node (return percentages and VO measurement type):
❑ Phase overV drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that the
instantaneous and timed phased units reset.
❑ Phase underV drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage above which the voltage must rise in order that the
instantaneous and timed phased units reset.
❑ 3V2 drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that the
instantaneous and timed V2 units reset.
❑ 3VO drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that the
instantaneous and timed VO units reset.
❑ 3VO Operating quantity. Indicates the measurement employed for the VO overvoltage:
 Calculated: The 3 V0 measurement is employed, i.e., the vector sum of the 3 ground to earth phases. 3V0=Va+Vb+Vc
 Measured: The measurement from the transformer configured as Vn is employed.
Table 26 General voltage settings

RepValOVp Phase overV drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
RepValUVp Phase underV drop out (%) 101 110 1 float32
RepValOV2 3V2 drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
RepValOV0 3VO drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
Calculated (0)
SelV0 3VO Operating quantity enum
Measured (1)
3.3.1.1 Instantaneous characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceed during the programmed time.

❑ Operation type. Consult in each unit.
❑ Start value (V). Indicates the voltage value (in secondary volts) at which the function is activated.
recloser (5.2.1).

User Manual 72
❑ TripP:RL,RR,RL,R:1,2,3,4,MC. Indicates whether there is trip permission for the different recloser statuses: standby,
blocked, safety time following couplings, following closure. For additional details, see section corresponding to the recloser
(5.2.2).
Table 27 Instantaneous voltage unit settings

PIOVEna Enabled NO/YES enum
Standard (0)
Vphase-ground FUND(1)
Optype Operation type Vphase-ground FUND(2) enum
Vphase-ground RMS (3)
Vphase-phase RMS (4)
StrVal Start value (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
In which:

Reclosure block 0 YES/NO
Permission for trip in safety time following reclosure 1 3 YES/NO
Permission for trip in safety time following manual closure 7 YES/NO
3.3.1.2 Timed characteristics

The different curve options are shown in the curve appendix.
The timed unit can be configured with a minimum of response time, that is, a limit that prevents any unit from tripping below a
minimum time when the trip time corresponding to the curve in use is met. This avoids timed trips which are quicker than the
instantaneous trips. It is configured with additional time setting, so that if it set to zero, there is no such limit.

❑ Start value (V). Set in secondary volts. Indicates the voltage value at which the function is activated.
❑ Operation type. Consult in each unit.
❑ Operating Curve Type Indicates the type of curve selected from the options:
 ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
 ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
 ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
 ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9)
 IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
 IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
 IEC-IC Short inverse (13)

User Manual 73
 IEC-IL Long inverse (14)

 IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
 Definite time (49)
 Battery curve (51)
❑ Time dial. Indicates the time curve within the selected characteristic.
❑ Operate/minimum time (ms). It has a different functionality depending on the type of curve selected:
When the selected curve is a definite time, it indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function
must be met.
In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time. i.e., in order for a trip to be produced, the time employed
will be greater between this setting and the time associated to the curve.
recloser (5.2.1).
❑ Trip permission. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status: standby, blocked, safety
time after reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see section corresponding to the recloser
(5.2.2).
Table 28 Timed voltage unit settings

PTVEna Enabled NO/YES enum
Standard (0)
Vphase-ground FUND (1)
Optype Operation type Vphase-ground FUND (2) enum
Vphase-ground RMS (3)
Vphase-phase RMS (4)
StrVal Start value (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
IEC-I Normal inverse (9)
IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
TmVCrv Operating curve type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
TmMult Time dial 0,05 30,0 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms Operate/minimum time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32

User Manual 74
In which:

Permission for trip in safety time following manual closure 7 YES/NO
3.3.2 Phase overvoltage

Acts on the phase voltage transformers. If the unit is configured with ground to phase voltages, the protection is wired with ground
to phase measurements (Va, Vb and Vc), while if it is configured with phase to phase voltages, the protection is wired with phase to
phase measurements (Vab, Vbc and Vca).
The return percentage can be configured by the user in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
The operation type setting allows for a selection to be made from among the following:
❑ “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental

❑ “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
❑ “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
❑ “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics
❑ “Vphase-phase RMS”. . Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics
If the PROT/TVTR voltage phase setting indicates that at least one of the phase-phase voltage options, the operation type can
only be selected as VFAs-phase Fund or Vphase-phase RMS. If any other type is selected, the unit will correct itself internally.
The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIOV1
 Unit 2: PROT/PIOV2
❑ Commands:
 IOV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase.
 IOV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase.
 IOV1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all
three phases.
 IOV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IOV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 75
Table 29 Instantaneous phase overvoltage function outputs
PIOV1 Signals PIOV2 Signals Data Atribute

IOV1 Start phase A IOV2 Start phase A Str phsA
IOV1 Start phase B IOV2 Start phase B Str phsB
IOV1 Start phase C IOV2 Start phase C Str phsC
IOV1 Trip phase A IOV2 Trip phase A Op phsA
IOV1 Trip phase B IOV2 Trip phase B Op phsB
IOV1 Trip phase C IOV2 Trip phase C Op phsC
IOV1 Phase Status IOV2 Phase Status StEna stVal
IOV1 Phase Start IOV2 Phase Start Str general
IOV1 Phase Trip IOV2 Phase Trip Op general
3.3.2.2 Timed
There is a single timed unit, which is independent for each of the phases.

❑ “Vfphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics
❑ “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics
If the PROT/TVTR voltage phase setting indicates that at least one of the phase-phase voltage options, the operation type can
only be selected as VFAs-phase Fund or Vphase-phase RMS. If any other type is selected, the unit will correct itself internally.
There are settings, commands and outputs.
❑ Nodes: PROT/PTOV1
❑ Commands:
 TOV Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase.
 TOV Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase.
 TOV Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all three
phases.
 TOV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TOV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 76
Table 30 Timed phase overvoltage function outputs
Signal Data Atribute

TOV Start phase A Str phsA
TOV Start phase B Str phsB
TOV Start phase C Str phsC
TOV Trip phase A Op phsA
TOV Trip phase B Op phsB
TOV Trip phase C Op phsC
TOV Phase Status StEna stVal
TOV Phase Start Str general
TOV Phase Trip Op general
3.3.3 Zero sequence overvoltage

There is a timed and an instantaneous unit.
The following can be configured in the PROT/PVGE1 node:
❑ The measurement employed between Vn transformer measurement or the vector sum of the three voltage phases (3 V0).
❑ The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
The operation type setting is not used, as the fundamental frequency measurement is always used.
There is one unit.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs.
❑ PROT/GPIOV1 node
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 26 and Table 27.
❑ Commands:
❑ Outputs:Table 31shows the function’s output data
 GIOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GIOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV (V0) Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 31 Instantaneous zero sequence overvoltage function outputs

GIOV1 Start Str neut
GIOV1 Trip Op neut
IOV (V0) Status StEna stVal
3.3.3.2 Timed
There is one timed unit.
❑ Nodes: PROT/GPTOV1

User Manual 77
❑ Commands:
 GTOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GTOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV (V0) Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 32Timed zero sequence overvoltage function outputs

GTOV1 Start Str neut
GTOV1 Trip Op neut
TOV (V0) Status StEna stVal
3.3.4 Negative sequence overvoltage

There is a timed and an instantaneous unit.
Employs 3 times the negative sequence as a measurement:
3·V2=(Va+a2·Vb+a·Vc) In which=1|120º
The calculation of the sequence takes into phase succession order setting (ABC/ACB).
The operation type setting is not used, as the fundamental frequency measurement is always used.
There is one unit.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs.
❑ PROT/UNPIOV1 node
❑ Commands:
 UNIOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNIOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV (V2) Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 33 Instantaneous V2 overvoltage function outputs

UNIOV1 Start Str general
UNIOV1 Trip Op general
IOV (V2) Status StEna stVal

User Manual 78
3.3.4.2 Timed
There is one timed unit.
❑ Nodes: PROT/UNPTOV1
❑ Commands:
 UNTOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNTOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV (V2) Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 34 Timed V2 overvoltage function outputs

UNTOV1 Start Str general
UNTOV1 Trip Op general
TOV (V2) Status StEna stVal
3.3.5 Phase undervoltage

Acts on the phase voltage transformers. If the unit is configured with ground to phase voltages, the protection is wired with ground
to phase measurements (Va, Vb and Vc), while if it is configured with phase to phase voltages, the protection is wired with phase to
phase measurements (Vab, Vbc and Vca).

The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIUV1
 Unit 2: PROT/PIUV2
❑ Commands:

User Manual 79

 IUV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase.
 IUV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase.
 IUV1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all
three phases.
 IUV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IUV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 35 Instantaneous phase undervoltage function outputs
PIUV1 Signals PIUV2 Signals Data Atribute

IUV1 Start phase A IUV2 Start phase A Str phsA
IUV1 Start phase B IUV2 Start phase B Str phsB
IUV1 Start phase C IUV2 Start phase C Str phsC
IUV1 Trip phase A IUV2 Trip phase A Op phsA
IUV1 Trip phase B IUV2 Trip phase B Op phsB
IUV1 Trip phase C IUV2 Trip phase C Op phsC
IUV1 Phase Status IUV2 Phase Status StEna stVal
IUV1 Phase Start IUV2 Phase Start Str general
IUV1 Phase Trip IUV2 Phase Trip Op general
3.3.5.2 Timed
There is a single timed unit, which is independent for each of the phases.

❑ Nodes: PROT/PTUV1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 27and Table 25.
❑ Commands:
❑ Outputs:Table 36 shows the function’s output data
 TUV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase.
 TUV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase.
 TUV Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all three
phases.
 TUV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TUV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 80
Table 36 Timed phase undervoltage function outputs

TUV1 Start phase A Str phsA
TUV1 Start phase B Str phsB
TUV1 Start phase C Str phsC
TUV1 Trip phase A Op phsA
TUV1 Trip phase B Op phsB
TUV1 Trip phase C Op phsC
TUV Phase Status StEna stVal
TUV1 Phase Start Str general
TUV1 Phase Trip Op general
3.4 FREQUENCY UNITS
The frequency is measured each cycle and refreshed each half cycle, as shown in Figure 50.
Figure 50 Frequency Calculation
The algorithm is executed in the event of the phase B voltage registering zero.
Both the positive and negative registers are measured, although the frequency measurement is carried out for complete cycles.
The frequency is calculated if the phase B voltage measurement is superior to 5V.
3.4.1 Frequency
This function is composed of 8 steps, which are programmable as maximum or minimum frequencies. The frequency is measured
on the phase B voltage.
The function’s node, PROT/PTGF1, has independent settings for each step and common settings for all.
The common settings for all steps are as follows:
❑ Minimum allowed voltage (V). Indicates the minimum phase B voltage value below which the frequency protection does
no act, the unit is not permitted to pick up.
❑ Number of cycles (Start). Indicates the number of cycles during which the frequency conditions necessary for the unit to
pick up must be met.
❑ Number of cycles (Reset). Indicates the number of cycles during which the drop conditions necessary for the unit to reset
must be met in the event of the unit's not having tripped.
❑ Overfrequency reset time (ms). Once tripped by overfrequency, this is the time during which the reset conditions must be
met in order to clear the trip from the unit. It is applied to all the steps configured as overfrequency.
❑ Underfrequency reset time (ms). Once tripped by underfrequency, this is the time during which the reset conditions must
be met in order to clear the trip from the unit. It is applied to all the steps configured as underfrequency.

User Manual 81
recloser (5.2.1).
❑ Trip permission. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status: standby, blocked, safety
time after reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see section corresponding to the recloser
(5.2.2).
The independent settings for each of the 8 steps are:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the step is enabled or not.

❑ Start value (HZ). Indicates the frequency value at which the function is activated.
❑ Function type. Indicates whether its acts on overfrequency or underfrequency.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the step.
The form in which it acts varies in accordance with type of step selected.
Minimum frequency. Each step picks up when the frequency falls below the set value during a number of cycles equal or higher
than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting. Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in order for a trip to be produced. If the
unit has tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during the underfrequency reset time. If it has picked up but has not
tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during reset cycles.
Maximum frequency. Each step picks up when the frequency exceeds the set value during a number of cycles equal or higher than
the “No. of pickup cycles” setting. Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in order for a trip to be produced. If the unit
has tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during the overfrequency reset time. If it has picked up but has not tripped, it
drops out if the frequency is correct during reset cycles.

User Manual 82
Table 37 General frequency protection settings
Data Parameter Min Max Step Remarks Type

BlkValV Minimum allowed voltage (V) 15 200 1 float32
StrNumCyc Number of cycles (Start) 3 15 1 Int32
RepNumCyc Number of cycles (Reset) 0 10 1 Int32
OFRsDlTmms Overfrequency reset time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
UFRsDlTmms Underfrequency reset time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
PTGFEna1 Step 1 enabled NO/YES Boolean
StrVal1 Step 1 Start value (Hz) 45 65 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms1 Step 1 Operate delay time(ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
StTyp1 Step 1 Function type Maximum/Minimum enum
LogInBlk1 Step 1 Blocking input uint 32
❑ Nodes: PROT/PTGF1
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. It only acts on the enabled steps. If acts on the 8 steps
 “DOrdFminB”. Blocking and unblocking of the steps configured as minimum frequency. It only acts on the enabled
steps.

User Manual 83
 “DOrdFmaxB”. Blocking and unblocking of the steps configured as maximum frequency. It only acts on the enabled
steps.
 “DOrdFL1Bl”. Blocking and unblocking of step 1. It only acts if the step is enabled
 “DOrdFL2Bl”,… “DOrdFL8Bl”. As above, but acts on steps 2 to 8.
❑ Outputs: Table 38 shows the function’s output data. They are independent for each step
 Level X Frequency Start. Indicates that the step has picked up. It is independent for each step.
 Level X Frequency Trip. Indicates that the step has tripped. It is independent for each step.
 Level X Frequency Status. Indicates the step’s status. Active when enabled and not blocked. Independent for each step.
Table 38 Frequency function outputs

Level 1 Frequency Start Str1 general
Level 1 Frequency Trip Op1 general
Level 1 Frequency Status StEna1 stVal
Same for the rest of the steps
Level 8 Frequency Start Str8 general
Level 8 Frequency Trip OP8 general
Level 8 Frequency Status StEna8 stVal
3.4.2 Frequency rate of change

This unit has 8 steps. In each step, a relay is activated if the frequency variation per time unit is higher than the set value. The
variation can represent a reduction and/or an increase in the frequency, depending on the operation type setting.
The function’s node, PROT/PFRC1, has independent settings for each step and common settings for all.
The common settings for all steps are as follows:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the unit is enabled or not.

❑ Operation type. Indicates the whether the frequency variation is a reduction (Negative), and increase (Positive) or
both (Negative and positive).
❑ Minimum current level (A). Indicates the minimum current value below which it does no act, the unit is not
permitted to pick up.
❑ Number of cycles (Start). Indicates the number of cycles during which the conditions necessary for the unit to pick
up must be met.
❑ Number of cycles (Reset). Indicates the number of cycles during which the drop conditions necessary for the unit to
reset must be met in the event of the unit's not having tripped.
❑ Reset delay time (ms). Once tripped, this is the time during which the reset conditions must be met in order to
clear the trip from the unit.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the unit.
❑ General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not. For additional details, see section corresponding to
the recloser (5.2.1).
❑ TripP:RL,RR,RL,R:1,2,3,4,MC. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status:
standby, blocked, safety time after reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see
section corresponding to the recloser (5.2.2).
❑ Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the
function’s protection events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
❑ Minimum allowed voltage (V). The setting as employed in the frequency protection (PTGF1). Indicates the
minimum phase B voltage value.

User Manual 84
The independent settings for each of the 8 steps are:
❑ Supervision f max. Indicates the maximum frequency above with the frequency rate of change is not measured.
❑ f start value(Hz/seg). Indicates the frequency variation value at which the function is activated.
❑ Operate delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function must be
met.
❑ Trip lock. Selects the signal which, when active, locks the activation of the function; so, once activated, the signal is
kept until the lock signal and the rate of change signal are deactivated.
Table 39 Frequency rate of change settings
Data Parameter Min. Max Step Remarks Type

PFRCEna Enabled NO/YES Boolean
Negative(0)
Positive (1)
Optype Operation type uint 32
Negative and
Positive (2)
BlkValA Minimum current level (A) 0 100,0 0,1 float32
StrNumCyc Number of cycles (Start) 3 15 1 Int32
RepNumCyc Frequency rate of change drop off cycles 0 10 1 Int32
RsDlTmms Overfrequency rate of change drop off time 0 600000 10 Int32
BlkValHz1 Step 1: Supervision f max 40 70 0,01 float32
StrVal1 Step 1: f start value (Hz/seg) 0,20 10 0,05 float32
OpDlTmms1 Step 1:Operate delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 Int32
LogInTrLck1 Step 1: Trip Lock uint 32
OpDlTmms2 Step 2: Operate delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 Int32
LogInTrLck2 Step 2:Trip Lock uint 32

OpDlTmms8 Step 8: Operate delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 Int32
LogInTrLck8 Step 8: Trip Lock uint 32
❑ Nodes: PROT/PFRC1
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. It only acts on the enabled steps. If acts on the 8 steps
❑ Outputs: Table 40 shows the function’s output data. They are independent for each step
 ROCOF (dfdt) Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. Common for all steps.
 Level x df/dt Start. Indicates that the step has picked up. It is independent for each step. Where x indicates the level
from 1 to 8.
 Level x df/dt Trip. Indicates that the step has tripped. It is independent for each step. Where x indicates the level from
1 to 8.

User Manual 85
Table 40 Frequency rate of change function outputs

ROCOF (dfdt) Status StEna stVal
Level 1 df/dt Start Str1 general
Level 1 df/dt Trip Op1 general
Level 8 df/dt Start Str8 general
Level 8 df/dt Trip OP8 general
General operation.
The function is only effective for frequencies inferior to a threshold called “maximum monitoring frequency”, currents superior to
the threshold called “minimum current” and voltages superior to the minimum monitoring threshold:
❑ Minimum monitoring current. The maximum phase current is compared to this setting. If the minimum current circulating
in all the phases is inferior to the setting, the frequency rate of change unit is not allowed to pick up. When a current
superior to the set threshold appears in at least one of the phases, the relay waits for 10 cycles before running the
frequency rate of change function.
❑ Minimum monitoring voltage. If the phase B voltage is inferior to the setting, the frequency rate of change unit is not
allowed to pick up. When the voltage exceeds the set threshold, the relay waits for 10 cycles before running the frequency
rate of change function.
The frequency is measured each cycle and reloaded every half cycle, as shown in Figure 50.
The algorithm stores the periods of the signal’s last 4 cycles and calculates the frequency rate of change by comparing the current
cycle’s frequency measurement with the measurement taken from 4 cycles previously, taking into account the time lapse between
both (Figure 51).
df/dt =(f1-f5)/(T1+T2+T3+T4)
In which:
f5 =frequency measurement taken 4 cycles previously
f4 =frequency measurement taken 3 cycles previously T4 period of the 4th cycle starting from the end
f3 =frequency measurement taken 2 cycles previously T3 period of the 3rd cycle starting from the end
f2 =frequency measurement taken 1 cycle previously T2 period of the 2nd cycle starting from the end
f1 =Last frequency measurement T1 period of the last cycle
This calculation is repeated, taking into account the measurements separated by two cycles in order to ensure that the frequency
has fallen during the entire period, i.e., to ensure that an incorrect measurement does not lead to a trip. Two checks are carried
out:
❑ the measurement of the current cycle against that of the cycle minus two cycles
df/dt2=(fn-fn-4)/(tn-tn-4)
❑ the measurement of the cycle minus two cycles against that of the cycle minus four cycles
df/dt3=(fn-4-fn-8)/(tn-4-tn-8)

User Manual 86
Figure 51 Frequency rate of change calculation
For the unit to pick up, the frequency rate of change must be exceeded by an absolute value during the set number of cycles. The
pick up is only produced if the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change value meets the criterion selected in the operation
type setting:
❑ Negative. The frequency rate of change/voltage rate is negative, i.e., when the current frequency is inferior to that
measured 4 cycles previously.
❑ Positive. The frequency rate of change/voltage rate is positive, i.e., when the current frequency is greater than that
measured 4 cycles previously.
❑ Negative and Positive. Acts on frequency rate of change/voltage rate in both directions.
During the pickup process, one measurement is allowed to be out of the pickup range without restarting the process. For example,
if 3 cycles are required to cause a pickup, the threshold need only be exceeded 3 times from a total of 4 consecutive
measurements.
In order for a trip to occur once the unit has picked up, the frequency rate of change measurement must remain between the set
frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change value and a reset value to the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change
minus 0.05Hz/s during the set time.
In order for the unit to reset once it has picked up, the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change measurement must be
detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the set value during the number of cycles programmes as reset cycles.
In order for the unit to reset once it has tripped, the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change measurement must be
detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the set value during the reset time. Any sealing signals that have been configured must register a
value of zero in order for the trip to be deactivated.

User Manual 87
Figure 52 Frequency rate of change trip diagram
SETTING
Rate of change enabled
Time
MEASUREMENT
0
Vb
+
SETTING -
≥
3 semi-
Minimum monitoring V cycles
MEASUREMENT
Ia
+
-
≥
SETTING
Minimum monitoring I
fn
SETTING +
<
Maximum monitoring f -
Time
INTERNAL CALCULATION +
35Hz -
≥ Nºcyclesx2–1/2
INTERNAL CALCULATION S DIGITAL SIGNAL

fr.r.ch/vol.r=|(fn-fn-9)/(tn -tn-9)| +
Step 1 pick up
-
≥
R
fr.r.ch2/vol.r=|(fn-fn-4)/(tn -tn-4)|+0.1Hz/s +
Reset count
-
≥ Freeze count
fr.r.ch3/vol.r=|(fn-4-fn-8)/(tn-4 -tn-8)|+0.1Hz/s +
-
≥ Time Time Time
INTERNAL CALCULATION + 1 cycle 1 cycle Additional
fr.r.ch/vol.r.1-0.05Hz <
- time
SETTING
fr.r.ch/vol.r.1
Drop out t.
(fn-fn-9)<0 Time
N. drop out
INTERNAL CALCULATION cycles S DIGITAL SIGNAL
(fn-fn-9)>0 R Step 1 activation
(Reset
SETTING dominat
es)
fr.r.ch/vol.r type = negative
fr.r.ch/vol.r. type = positive and negative
fr.r.ch/vol.r. type = positive
DIGITAL INPUT
Breaker for sealing fr.r.ch/vol.r.1 52a
3.5 FUSE FAILURE
The measurement obtained from the half-cycle DFT is used to obtain results before the protection units are activated.
The fuse failure conditions are as follows:
❑ The three breakers are closed. (Open pole detector)

❑ I1 positive sequence current greater than 5% of rated current.
❑ The increase in I1 positive sequence and the IN neutral current in relation to the current measured 1 cycle previously must
be less than 0.1 A for 5 A rated current and 0.02 A for rated current 1.
❑ Overcurrent units (phase, ground, sensitive ground, earth system and unbalance) haven´t picked up.
❑ The angle difference between currents I1 and I0 and those of 1 cycle previous are less than 5º.
❑ The V1 positive sequence voltage memorized 1 cycle previously must exceed VFF and drop below 95% of VFF,
VFF = VN  80% ( V)
With VN as the rated ground to phase voltage (PROT/TVTR node).
If the function detects all the above conditions, or if the “fuse failure” input is activated, a fuse failure pick up signal is produced and
used to block the units in question (configurable).
These conditions must be met during a programmable time in order for the fuse failure trip to be activated. Once tripped, the fuse fault
is maintained until the V1 voltage rises above VFF.
If any of the overcurrent functions (phase, ground, sensitive ground, earth system and unbalance) have picked up or if during the
timeout the relay picks up at least one of these units, the fuse fault output is not activated as the situation is considered a fault, not a
fuse failure.
The fuse failure pick up and trip are also activated when the digital “Fuse Failure” input is activated independently of the programmed
time. The fuse failure is only deactivated when the input is deactivated.

User Manual 88
If the "B side fuse failure” input is activated, the synchrocheck unit is deactivated.
The fuse failure pick up can be used as a blocking signal for other functions by means of each function’s logic signals.
The overcurrent units have settings that configure their functioning in the event of a fuse failure, allowing the enabled of the function,
the inhibition of directional, etc.
Figure 53 Fuse failure scheme
SETTING
Enabling FF=YES
DIGITAL INPUT
FF block
DIGITAL SIGNAL
OPEN POLE (1 or 2)
DIGITAL SIGNAL
3 OPEN POLES DIGITAL SIGNAL
FUSE FAILURE STATUS
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Picked up units I
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Fault detector active
INTERNAL CALCULATION Time
I1>5%·In FF T DIGITAL SIGNAL

|I1-I1(n-1)|<2%·In S
FUSE FAILURE TRIP
|IN-IN(n-1)|<2%·In 0 R
|arg(I1)-arg(I1(n-1))|<5º (Reset
|arg(IN)-arg(IN(n-1))|<5º dominat
es)
V1<76%·Vn
V1(n-1)>80%·Vn
V1>80%·Vn
DIGITAL INPUT
Fuse fail input DIGITAL SIGNAL
FUSE FAILURE B1
Fuse fail input (b-side sinc1)
ACTIVATION
Fuse fail input (b-side sinc2) FUSE FAILURE B2
ACTIVATION

❑ Operate delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions must be met in order for the trip to take place.
❑ Fuse fail input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates a fuse failure.
❑ Fuse Fail input (B-side sinc1). It selects the signal which, when activated, indicates a fuse failure on breaker 1’s side B
synchronism.
❑ Fuse Fail input (B-side sinc2). It selects the signal which, when activated, indicates a fuse failure on breaker 2’s side B
synchronism.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs:
❑ PROT/RFUF1 node
❑ Commands:

User Manual 89
 Fuse Failure Start. Indicates that the fuse failure has picked up.
 Fuse Failure Trip. Indicates that the fuse failure has tripped, that is, the additional time has elapsed with the unit
picked up.
 Fuse Failure B1 Activation. Indicates that fuse failure is activated on breaker 1’s synchronism B side.
 Fuse Failure B2 Activation. Indicates that fuse failure is activated on breaker 2’s synchronism B side.
 Fuse Failure Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 41 Fuse failure settings

RFUFEna Enabled NO/YES Boolean
LogInFF Fuse fail input uint 32
LogInFFB1 Fuse Fail input (B-side sinc1) uint 32
LogIn FFB2 Fuse Fail input (B-side sinc2) uint 32
Table 42 Fuse failure function outputs

Fuse Failure Start Str general
Fuse Failure Trip Op general
Fuse Failure B1 Activation FFB1 general
Fuse Failure B2 Activation FFB2 general
Fuse Failure Status StEna stVal
3.6 BREAKER FAILURE
When enabled, the basic functioning is as follows (see Figure 48):

❑ If the unit issues a trip signal or an external protection action signal is received via a logical input, a timer picks up;
❑ If, following a period programmed as “definite retrip time”, the current of at least one of the phases exceeds the
programmed "phase reset current", or if the neutral exceeds the "neutral reset current", the retrip signal is activated.
❑ If, following a period programmed as “definite trip time”, the current of at least one of the phases exceeds the
programmed "phase reset current", or if the neutral exceeds the "neutral reset current", the trip signal is activated.
❑ The signals are only deactivated when the phase and neutral currents fall below their drop off values.
This unit does not contemplate the breaker status digital input, but rather the current values.
This unit does not contemplate the breaker status digital input, but rather the current values. The measurement obtained from the
half-cycle DFT of the full-cycle DFT is employed (the lesser of the two).
Each of the phases and the neutral are analyzed separately.
The external protection signal is memorized internally, that is to say, it may be a pulse.

User Manual 90
Figure 54 Basic breaker failure scheme
The input signals to this function are:
❑ Tripolar Trip. Indicates that a 3 poles trip is activated.

❑ IA measurement. It is the fundamental phase A measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
❑ IB measurement. It is the fundamental phase B measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
❑ IC measurement. It is the fundamental phase C measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
❑ IN measurement. It is the fundamental neutral measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
❑ 52_x Locked. Indicates that the breaker is locked, where "x" is the breaker number.
The unit’s settings are:

❑ Phase current threshold(A). Indicates the current value below which the phase is considered as open.
❑ Gnd current threshold(A). Indicates the current value below which the neutral is considered as open.
❑ Retrip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the retrip signal if the current does not drop below
the reset level.
❑ Trip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the trip signal if the current does not drop below the
reset level.
❑ 3 pole BF start. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the start of the breaker failure timed.
Table 43 Breaker failure settings

RBRFEna Enabled NO/YES Boolean
DetValAPhs Phase current threshold(A) 0,02 150 0,01 float32
DetValAGnd Gnd current threshold(A) 0,02 150 0,01 float32
RFailTmms Retrip time delay (ms) 0 60000 0,5 0.5 ms step float
FailTmms Trip time delay (ms) 0 60000 0,5 0.5 ms step float
LogInBlk Blocking input Int32
LogInBFIn 3 pole BF start Int32

User Manual 91
❑ PROT/RBRF1 node
❑ Setting and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 43.
❑ Commands:
 50BF Trip . Indicates that a trip has been produced as a result of a phase or neutral breaker failure.
 50BF Retrip . Indicates that a retrip has been produced as a result of a phase or neutral breaker failure.
 Breaker Failure Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 44 Breaker failure function outputs

50BF Trip Tr general
50BF Retrip ReTr general
Breaker Failure Status StEna stVal
3.7 TRIP LOGICS
3.7.1 General trip logic

Each protection unit has a mask that allows it to produce a general trip:
❑ If a unit trips during a specific recloser status (blocked, in security t, etc.) and the corresponding mask is set to “YES”, the
trip is sent to the general trip output.
❑ If the mask is set to “NO”, the trip is produced but the "direct trip" signal is not received. In this way, the recloser is
independent of any trips used for signalling.
❑ If the recloser is out of service, all the units programmed to produce a general trip will issue a trip.
In the event of a specific trip failing to activate the “general trip”, the fault report is not generated.
If a trip is produced at the same time as another trip which activates the general trip, all the trips are reflected in the fault
report: those which go to GT and those which do not.
The picks ups are affected in the same way as with each unit's trips. Each of the relay’s pick ups generates a signal. This signal
passes through the trip mask filter and is included in an OR in order to generate a "General pick up" signal.

User Manual 92
Figure 55. General trip scheme
DIGITAL SIGNAL
79 in service
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL SIGNAL with 79 blocked
79 blocked
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL SIGNAL with 79 in standby
79 in stand-by
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 in time t
DIGITAL SIGNAL Following manual closure
79 in time following Manual
Closure
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in recalim t 1
79 in TIME t 1
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in TIME t 2
79 in TIME t 2
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in TIME t 3
79 in TIME t 3
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in time t 4
79 in TIME t 4
DIGITAL INPUT
51-1 Trip
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
DIGITAL INPUT
General trip
DIGITAL INPUT
51-2 Trip
AJ 51-2->D.G.
………………………….
DIGITAL INPUT
Unit X Trip
AJ X->D.G.
3.7.2 Trip permission masks

They are independent for each of the protection units and are configured in the protection nodes.
This mask is used to select which trips are associated to the “general trip” (with the recloser in service), depending on the status of
the recloser.
Independently of these settings, the protection units pick up and trip, activating their corresponding signals.
The unit that is to produce the trip (activate the general trip signal) can be selected by programming 4 trip masks peer unit and
which are active in the following moments:
❑ Standby (supervising or reset).

❑ Reclaim time following manual closure
❑ Reclaim time following reclosure 1, 2, or 3.
❑ Recloser blocked (external or internal block)
If the recloser is out of service, these masks have no effect, and thus all the units programmed to produce a general trip will issue a
trip.
Each protection unit has independent masks. If a unit trips during a specific recloser status (blocked, in security t, etc.) and the
corresponding mask is set to “YES”, the trip is sent to the general trip output. If the mask is set to “NO”, the trip is produced but the
"direct trip" signal is not received.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable the unit’s permissions. The reference is
“TripPerm”. The setting is configured as a bit field where each bit corresponds to a selection, indicating the integer value:

User Manual 93

Reclosure block 0 NO/YES
Trip permission 79 standby 1 NO/YES
Trip permission 79 blocked 2 NO/YES
Permission for trip in reclaim time following reclosure 1 3 NO/YES
Permission for trip in reclaim time following manual closure 7 NO/YES
An example of use with trip permissions in standby and following reclosures would be the decimal value 122 (01111010 in binary),
broken down into:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
The maximum permitted value with all permissions enabled is 255 (11111111 in binary).
Table 45. Trip permission after reclosing (each protection node)

TripPerm Trip Permission by reeng. 0 8191 1 Int32
3.7.3 External trips

This function allows you to program any signal as an external trip. It also provides a setting that performs a mask that allows it
to produce a general trip. There is another setting for this unit to indicate if it can be reclosed, regardless of if it's going to
produce general trip or not.
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 46.
❑ External trip - 3 pole. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external three-pole trip.
❑ General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not. For additional details, see the section corresponding to the
recloser (3.7.1).
❑ Reclose permission. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's closing cycle
(see reclosure permission mask).
This unit's settings and outputs are in the PROT/ZPEXT1 logical node:
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 46
 External trip pole A. Indicates the activation of an external A pole trip.
 External trip pole B. Indicates the activation of an external B pole trip.
 External trip pole C. Indicates the activation of an external C pole trip.
 External trip 3 pole. Indicates the activation of an external three-pole trip.
 External trip 1 pole. Indicates the activation of an external single-pole trip.
Table 46. External trips settings
Data Setting Min. Max. Step Remarks Type

LogInExABC External trip - 3 pole Int32
TripPerm Trip Permission by recloser 0 255 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 15 Bit meaning (2) ING

User Manual 94
Table 47 External trips outputs

External trip 3 pole ExtOp general
3.8 CT MONITORING
If the event of neutral current in the 4th transformer, a fault may be detected in at least one of the relay input channels (adaptation
transformer + internal circuitry). The absolute value of three times the zero sequence current (calculated using the phase currents) is
compared with the current measured at the transformer, taking the phase (RTF) and neutral (RTN) transformation ratios into account.
None of the phases must exceed 1.5 times the rated current.
The unit activates a “CT monitoring alarm signal” when the following conditions are met.
❑ The measurements are outside the range:

|Ia +Ib +Ic |∙RTF
❑ 0.8 < |IN |∙RTN
< 1.3
❑ The measurement ratios meet:

|Ia + Ib + Ic | ∙ RTF − |IN | ∙ RTN
> 0.2
RTF
❑ |Ia+Ib+Ic-IN|/3>>10%·max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)+5%·Irated

❑ The measurement of 3 current phases is less than 1.5 times the rated current.
The settings for the configuration of the current transformer monitoring are shown in Table 48.
❑ Enabled: Enables the CT monitoring function.

Table 48. CT monitoring settings

CTSpvEna Enabled NO/YES enum
❑ PROT/CCTS1 node
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables.
❑ There are no logical inputs or commands
 CT Supervision Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 CT Supervision. Indicates that the CT monitoring conditions have been met.
Table 49. CT monitoring outputs

CT Supervision Status StEna stVal
CT Supervision CTSpv general

User Manual 95
BREAKER 
4. BREAKER
4.1 BREAKER LOGICS
4.1.1 Breaker status

The breaker unit uses the PROT/XCBR logical node. The settings used for each breaker are:
The number of logical nodes of the breaker depends on the model, CB0 model has 3 XCBR nodes and CB1 model has 4 XCBR nodes.
All nodes are identical in settings and outputs.
❑ Breaker type. Indicates the type of breaker employed:

 1 or 2 DI.General Status. Only one input is used for the status of the three poles.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. An independent input is used for the status of each of the three poles.
❑ Pole failure time (ms). Indicates the time (ms) during which the difference between the type a and type b inputs
must be detected in the breaker status in order for the failure to be registered. Although the setting is unique, it
affects the three poles.
❑ 52a input. If the breaker type is "1 pole / 4 status", it indicates the breaker status.
❑ 52a-Pole A. If the breaker type is "3 pole / 4 status", it indicates the phase A breaker status.
❑ 52a-Pole B. The same as phase A, but for B.
❑ 52a-Pole C. The same as phase A, but for C.
❑ 52b input. If the breaker type is "1 pole / 4 status", it indicates the breaker status.
❑ 52b-Pole A. If the breaker type is "3 pole / 4 status", it indicates the phase A breaker status.
❑ 52b-Pole B. The same as phase A, but for B.
❑ 52b-Pole C. The same as phase A, but for C.
❑ Open blocking. When active, it blocks the manual breaker open commands. The trips are not blocked.
❑ Close blocking. When active, it blocks the breaker closure commands.
❑ Breaker open command input. When active, it generates a breaker open command.
❑ Close command input. When active, it generates a breaker closure command.
❑ 52 Blocking input. When active, it blocks the breaker openning and closure.
❑ 52-Pole A Blocking input. When active, it blocks the breaker phase A openning and closure.
❑ 52-Pole B Blocking input. The same as phase A, but for B.
❑ 52-Pole C Blocking input. The same as phase A, but for C.
❑ Trip sealed. Allows the open commands to be enabled. When it is enabled, the open command is maintained after
the cause of the trip has disappeared and until the breaker is detected as open.
❑ Close sealed. Allows the closure commands to be enabled. When it is enabled, the closure command is maintained
after the cause of the closure has disappeared and until the breaker is detected as closed.
❑ 52 Supervision: Allows breaker state supervision function.

User Manual 96
BREAKER 
Table 50 Breaker status settings

1 or 2 DI.General Status
BrTyp 52 Status detection enum
3 or 6 DI.Per Pole
FaBrTmms Pole failure time (ms) 0 10000 10 Int32
LogIn52a1 52a input Int32
LogIn52a1A 52a-Pole A Int32
LogIn52a1B 52a-Pole B Int32
LogIn52a1C 52a-Pole C Int32
LogIn52b1 52b input Int32
LogIn52b1A 52b-Pole A Int32
LogIn52b1B 52b-Pole B Int32
LogIn52b1C 52b-Pole C Int32
LogInOpBl Open blocking Int32
LogInClBl Close blocking Int32
LogIn52Op Breaker open command input Int32
LogIn52Cl Close command input Int32
LogInBlBr 52 Blocking input Int32
LogInBl52A 52-Pole A Blocking input Int32
LogInBl52B 52-Pole B Blocking input Int32
LogInBl52C 52-Pole C Blocking input Int32
TrLck Trip sealed NO/YES Boolean
ClLck Close sealed NO/YES Boolean
SupEna 52 Supervision NO/YES Boolean
Breaker status via digital input
The status of the general breaker and by pole is determined with the status of digital inputs and breaker type setting. Used to
determine the status of the breaker without uncertainty and employed in functions that require the breaker’s status to be known,
such as the breaking and closure sealing logic, the recloser, etc.
The 52b status inputs take precedence over the 52a status inputs, i.e., if 52b status inputs have been configured, the breaker status
is determined by means of these inputs, independently of the status of the 52a inputs.
Depending on the breaker type setting, the functioning is:
❑ 1 or 2 DI.General Status. The general 52b Status input is used for the breaker status. If it is not configured, the general 52a
Status input is used. The phase breaker status matches the general.
❑ 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. The independent phases 52b Status inputs are used for the breaker status. If they are not configured,
the general 52a Status inputs are used. The general breaker status is generated from the phases, taking into account the
following:
 Closed general status, if all the phases are closed.
 Open general status, if at least one of the phases is open.
Table 51 shows this function’s outputs.
❑ 52_1 Closed (Simple Log.). Indicates the breaker's general status, in accordance with the status of the digital inputs.
❑ 52_1 X Closed (Simple Log.). Indicates the status of each of the breaker's phases, in accordance with the status of the
digital inputs. Where "X" indicates the pole (A, B or C)
Breaking monitoring status
The status of each pole (open, closed) is determined in accordance with a combination of N/O and N/C inputs. If inconsistencies are
detected between the N/O and the N/C inputs after the failure time (”Pole failure time (ms)”), a failure is signalled and no other
action is taken (relative to the discrepancy) until the anomaly is corrected. The functioning of this unit is shown in figure 50,
52 Supervision setting allows breaker state supervision function
❑ PROT/XCBR1 node

User Manual 97
BREAKER 
❑ There are associated commands:
 Pos. Switch opening or closure command.
 LOrdLc52Op. Local mode switch opening or closure command.
 LOrdMaBl. Locking or unlocking operations command for switch in local mode.
 BlkCls. Locking or unlocking switch closure operations command.
 52_1 Open. Indicates that the 52 is open. There are independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Closed. Indicates that the 52 is closed. There are independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Undetermined. Indicates that the 52 is undetermined. There are independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Failure. Indicates that the 52 has a failure. There are independent general and phase signals.
 Close Command - Breaker 1. Indicates that a closure command has been generated.
 Open Command - Breaker 1. Indicates that a opening command has been generated.
 Phase X Open Command - Breaker 1: Indicates that a Phase X opening command has been generated. X can be
A, B or C.
 Close Failure - Breaker 1. Indicates that a failure has occurred in some closing switch pole because maximum
closing time has exceeded.
 Phase. X Close Failure- Breaker1. Indicates that a failure has occurred in closing switch X pole because
maximum closing time has exceeded. X can be A, B or C.
 Open Failure - Breaker 1. Indicates that a failure has occurred in some opening switch pole because maximum
closing time has exceeded.
 Phase. A Open Failure- Breaker 1 Indicates that a failure has occurred opening switch X pole because maximum
closing time has exceeded. X can be A, B or C..
In Figure 50, the state switch logic diagram is displayed. Input signals to this scheme are:
❑ Enab, Logic 52_1: This input indicates the state 52 detection mode. Corresponds to XCBR "52 Status detection" setting and
allows the following values:
 "1 or 2 DI.General Status ": There is only one digital input to indicate the switch status.
 "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole ". There are three digital inputs to indicate the status of each phase.
❑ 52a input: Indicates the switch a logic input. Applies to "52a input" setting. Active if the switch is closed.
❑ 52b input: Indicates the switch b logic input. Applies to "52b input" setting. Active if the switch is open.
❑ 52a Pole A: Indicates the phase A 'a logic' input. Applies to " 52a-Pole A" Active if the pole is closed.
❑ 52b Pole A: Indicates the phase A 'b logic' input. Applies to " 52b-Pole A" Active if the pole is open.
❑ 52a Pole B: Indicates the phase B 'a logic' input. Applies to " 52a-Pole B" Active if the pole is closed.
❑ 52b Pole B: Indicates the phase B 'b logic' input. Applies to " 52b-Pole B" Active if the pole is open.
❑ 52a Pole C: Indicates the phase C 'a logic' input. Applies to " 52a-Pole C" Active if the pole is closed..
❑ 52b Pole C: Indicates the phase C 'b logic' input. Applies to " 52b-Pole C" Active if the pole is open.

User Manual 98
BREAKER 
Figure 56 Breaker status.
SETTING
Enab. Logic 52_1 = 1 POLE / 4 STATUSES
Enab. Logic 52_1 = 3 POLES / 4 STATUSES
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE
FAILURE T
52a input
0
DIGITAL INPUT
52b input
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE DIGITAL SIGNAL
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 Undetermined
52a-Pole A
52_1 phase A Undetermined
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Failure
DIGITAL INPUT
52b-Pole A
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL
52a-Pole B
52_1 phase B Undetermined
0 DIGITAL SIGNAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 Open
52_1 phase B Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase B Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase B Failure
DIGITAL INPUT
52b-Pole B

DIGITAL INPUT POLE 52_1 closed
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL
52a-Pole C
52_1 phase C Undetermined
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase C Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase C Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 failure
DIGITAL INPUT 52_1 phase C Failure
52b-Pole C

User Manual 99
BREAKER 
Table 51 Breaker status outputs
XCBR1 Signal Data Attribute

52_1 Open OpenBr general
52_1 Closed CloseBr general
52_1 Undetermined UndetBr general
52_1 Failure FailureBr general
52_1 Phase A Open OpenBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Closed CloseBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Undetermined UndetBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Failure FailureBr phsA
52_1 Phase B Open OpenBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Closed CloseBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Undetermined UndetBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Failure FailureBr phsB
52_1 Phase C Open OpenBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Closed CloseBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Undetermined UndetBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Failure FailureBr phsC
52_1 Undetermined Pos stVal
52_1 Open Pos OpenBr
52_1 Closed Pos CloseBr
52_1 Failure Pos FailureBr
52_1 Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt general
52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsA
52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsB
52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsC
Close Command - Breaker 1 OpCls general
Open Command - Breaker 1 OpOpn general
Ph. A Open Command - Br1 OpOpn phsA
Ph. B Open Command - Br1 OpOpn phsB
Ph. C Open Command - Br1 OpOpn phsC
Close Failure - Br1 ClsFailBr general
Ph. A Close Failure- Br1 ClsFailBr phsA
Ph. B Close Failure- Br1 ClsFailBr phsB
Ph. C Close Failure- Br1 ClsFailBr phsC
Open Failure - Br1 OpenFailBr general
Ph. A Open Failure- Br1 OpenFailBr phsA
Ph. B Open Failure- Br1 OpenFailBr phsB
Ph. C Open Failure- Br1 OpenFailBr phsC
Operations Blocked - Br1 BrBlk general
Closing Blocked - Br1 BrClBlk general
4.1.2 Breaker failure and operating logic

The opening and closure failure time settings determine the time lapse between the issue of the corresponding command and the
reception of the breaker’s activity signal, on the understanding that the breaker has acted correctly. To the contrary, the
openfailure and closure failure signals are generated and failure and general indications are issued.
In capacitor bank models, the settings of breaker supervision are common to all breakers, as for the outputs are independent for
each breaker, being the same treatment for all the breakers.
This unit’s settings are grouped in the PROT/RBFS logical node:
❑ Open failure time (ms). If an open command is given, the breaker should be open before this time.
❑ Close failure time (ms). If a close command is given, the breaker should be closed before this time.

User Manual 100
BREAKER 
Table 52 Breaker status monitoring settings

OpTmms Open failure time (ms) 20 100000 1 Int32
ClTmms Close failure time (ms) 20 100000 1 Int32
Table 51 shows the operating logic’s output Data, which are available in the PROT/XCBR nodes.
4.1.3 Locking logic

The trip and close commands can be locked with the breaker status, depending on the configuration of the trip sealing and closure
sealing settings. Figure 57 and Figure 58 show the sealed trip and closure schemes.
Figure 57 shows Trip logic scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
❑ Trip Sealed 52-1: Setting that indicates whether trip will be sealed after completing trip conditions and manual opening.
Corresponds to XCBR setting "Trip sealed".
❑ General Trip: Corresponds to the signal "General trip" generated with any trip.
❑ Pole A (B,C) General Trip: Corresponds to the signals "Pole A General Trip", (B,C) generated with any phase trip.
❑ Manual open command input**: Indicates that open command has been generated by the logic input "Open Command -
Breaker 1" or by user command.
❑ Manual Open blocking: Indicates that blocking command has been generated by the logic input " Open blocking" or by
user command.
❑ 52a pole A: Enabled indicates that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)".
❑ 52a pole B: Enabled indicates that phase B is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)".
❑ 52a pole C: Enabled indicates that phase C is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)".

User Manual 101
BREAKER 
Figure 57 Trip logic scheme
Figure 58 shows Closure logic scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
❑ General trip: Indicates the signal generated with any trip. It is shown in "General trip".
❑ Manual open command: Internal signal indicating that open command has been generated by the logic input "Breaker
open command input" or by user command, and is not blocked by the logic input "Open blocking" neither by user
command.
❑ Close sealed: Setting that indicates whether will be sealed after completing the close order. Corresponds to the XCBR
"Close sealed" setting.
❑ RECLOSURE Command**: Internal signal indicating an OR of the reclosure commands. They are displayed on signals "52_1
Reclose Command" (switch reclosure) and "Reclosing Command F_RREC" (frecuency reclosure). It should not be blocked
by the logic input "Close Blocked" neither by user command.
❑ Close command: Indicates the logic input "Close Command - Breaker" is enabled or a closure order has been launched by
user command. Formerly sincrocheck's "Perm. Manual Close" must be enabled and must not be blocked by the logic input
"Close blocking" neither by user command.
❑ 52_1 closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_1A closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_1B closed: Signal indicating that phase B is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_1C closed: Signal indicating that phase C is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.

User Manual 102
BREAKER 
Figure 58 Closure logic scheme
4.2 BREAKER OPERATION SUPERVISION
It monitors the breaker’s operations after the trip and closure commands. In addition to signals, the counters generated by these
functions are shown in the statistical data.
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 53:
❑ ki2 calculation type. Indicates the calculation type between kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
❑ ki2 time (ms). Indicates the timeout following the trip for the measurement of the ki1 calculation current.
❑ Alarm value ki2. Indicates the ki2 summation threshold which, when exceeded, generates a “ki2 exceeded” signal.
❑ Initial value ki2. Indicates the initial value of the ki2 summation when a reset command is received.
❑ Trips exceeded window (min). Time window in minutes for the excessive number of trips counter.
❑ Maximum number of trips. Maximum number of trips permitted in the set time window.
❑ Mechanical opening T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the opening command until the detection of the open pole
by the digital input status.
❑ Mechanical closing T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the closure command until the detection of the closed pole
by the digital input status.
❑ Electrical opening T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the opening command until the detection of the absence of
current in the phase.
❑ Electrical closing T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the closure command until the detection of the presence of
current in the phase.
❑ Inactivity time (days). Indicates the maximum number of days without breaker activity.
❑ Opening dispersion T (ms). Indicates the maximum dispersion time between two poles upon opening.
❑ Closing dispersion T (ms). Indicates the maximum dispersion time between two poles upon closing.

User Manual 103
BREAKER 
Table 53 Operation monitoring settings

Ki2 (0)
KIType ki2 calculation type 0 2 1 KI (1) enum
KI2t (2)
KITmms ki2 time (ms) 0 100 10 Int32
KIAlarm Alarm value ki2 0 100000 1 Int32
KIInit Initial value ki2 0 100000 1 Int32
ExTrTmm Trips exceeded window (min) 1 60 1 Int32
ExTrNum Maximum number of trips 0 500 1 Int32
OpMeTmms Mechanical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClMeTmms Mechanical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
OpElTmms Electrical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClElTmms Electrical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
NoOpDays Inactivity time (days) 0 10000 1 Int32
OpDisTmms Opening dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
ClDisTmms Closing dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record 0 1 1 NO/YES Boolean
There are independent settings and outputs:
❑ PROT/CBOU1 node
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 53.
❑ Outputs: Table 54 shows the function’s output data. The meaning of each signal is detailed in the function explanation.
Table 54 Breaker monitoring signals
Signal Dato Atributo

Phase A ki2 exceeded KI2 phsA
Phase B ki2 exceeded KI2 phsB
Phase C ki2 exceeded KI2 phsC
ki2 exceeded KI2 general
Pole A mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsA
Pole Bmechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsB
Pole Cmechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsC
Pole A electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsA
Pole B electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsB
Pole C electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsC
Pole A inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsA
Pole B inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsB
Pole C inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsC
AB dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcAB in Ed2) phsAB (general in Ed2)
BC dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcBC in Ed2) phsBC (general in Ed2)
CA dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcCA in Ed2) phsCA (general in Ed2)
Pole A excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsA
Pole B excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsB
Pole C excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsC
Excessive nbr trips PolTrExc general
kI2 sum:
After a trip, the kI2 counter increases in accordance with the selected setting. The value of each phase’s current is calculated in
primary (VT ratio), as kA primary. There are a total of 3 counters (one for each phase).
If it exceeds the set threshold (the treatment is pole to pole), a “Phase X Ki2 exceeded” signal is generated. While in this situation, the
corresponding signal is sent to control. The signals are:

User Manual 104
BREAKER 
❑ Phase X ki2 exceeded. Where X is the phase. It is independent for each phase.
❑ ki2 exceeded. One for all the phases.
In order to calculate the pole wear, the type of calculation wanted can be programmed from among kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
❑ If Ki2 is chosen, the kA2 are calculated with I as the current measured after exceeding the set timeout following the trip.
❑ If kI is chosen, only the sum of the currents in kA is calculated, with I as the current measured after exceeding the set timeout
following the trip.
❑ If Ki2 *t is chosen, the Ki2 /100 value is accumulated every 10ms, with I as the current measured after exceeding the set timeout
following the trip. The accumulation terminates when I<0.05 A.
Excessive number of trips:
It counts the trips produced in the time, generating a signal when the number of trips is higher than the programmed number during
the programmed time and changes to a definite trip. The time period is reset upon a manual closure. The counter may be reset to the
initial value at any moment by means of a command. The signals are:
❑ Pole X excessive nbr trips. Independent for each phase

❑ Excessive nbr trips. One for all the phases.
Open counter:
There are independent open and trip counters for each phase:
❑ The trip commands generated by the protection are considered trips.

❑ A breaker's changes from closed to open (including manual and trip breaks) are considered openings.
There are 6 counters: 3 trip counters and 3 open counters. There is a reset command for each counter.
Closure counters:
There are independent closure counters for each phase. A breaker's changes from open to close are considered closures.
There is a reset command for each counter.
Operating time for electric openingand closure by pole:
They count the time elapsed from the command sent to the breaker unto its electric operation, measured with the current:
❑ Trip time: The time elapsed from the open command until the detection of the absence of power.
❑ Closure time: The time elapsed from the closure command until the detection of the presence of power.
The open pole detector current threshold is used.
These times are compared with the threshold settings. Events are generated per pole when the thresholds are exceeded “Pole X
electric time exceeded”:
❑ If the time elapsed from the open command exceeds the setting “Electrical opening T (ms)”
❑ If the time elapsed from the closure command exceeds the setting “Electrical closing T (ms)”
Mechanical breaking and closure operating time per pole:
They count the time elapsed from the command sent to the breaker unto its mechanical operation, detected in the digital inputs
status:
❑ Trip time: Indicates the time elapsed as of the opening command until the detection of the open pole by the digital input status.
❑ Closure time: Indicates the time elapsed as of the closure command until the detection of the closed pole by the digital input
status.
These times are compared with the threshold settings. Events are generated per pole when the thresholds are exceeded “Pole X
mechan.time exceeded”:
❑ If the time elapsed from the open command exceeds the setting “Mechanical opening T (ms)”
❑ If the time elapsed from the closure command exceeds the setting “Mechanical closing T (ms)”

User Manual 105
BREAKER 
Breaking and closure dispersion time for each pole pair:
They count the difference between the opening and closure times for every two poles. There are opening/closure counters for pole
pairs AB, BC and CA. The breaker status is determined by means of the digital input status.
These times are compared with the threshold settings. Events are generated per pole when the thresholds are exceeded “XY dispersion
time exceeded”:
❑ During the opening, a comparison is made with the "Opening dispersion T (ms)" setting.
❑ During the closure, a comparison is made with the "Closing dispersion T (ms)" setting.
Days of breaker inactivity without status change:
The days elapsed, since the last opening or closure of the breaker, are counted for each pole. Complete fractions of 24 hours since the
last action are considered. Partial periods of 24 hours are not accumulated, i.e., if 2 days and 20 hours have passed since the last action,
the counter will indicate 2 days. If at this point the time count is reset to zero, the 20 hours would be lost.
These counters are compared with the “Inactivity Time (days)” setting and an event is generated per pole in the event of it being
exceeded "Pole X inactivity time exceeded".
Last interrupted current:
The current value upon the trip is indicated per pole.
Maximum interrupted current:
The maximum current value measured at the moment of the trip is indicated per pole. The three poles can be reset to zero using the
reset command.
Overcurrent levels:
Indicates the time in seconds during which each phase's current is within each of the following ranges (with In as the set rated current):
❑ Seconds with the current between 2 and 5 times In

❑ Seconds with the current between 5 and 12.5 times In
❑ Seconds with the current between 12.5 and 20 times In
❑ Seconds with the current greater than 20 In
There are 12 counters (4 for each phase).
4.3 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS SUPERVISION
It monitors the circuits by pole, detecting any discontinuity with the breaker open and closed. It requires the assignment of the
monitoring inputs (the breaker circuit with open and closed breaker, the closure circuit with open and closed breaker). It is activated 20
seconds after the detection of the fault and remains active while the fault persists.
Up to six trip circuits and three closure circuits can be monitored, using the number of digital inputs required.
Figure 59 shows an example of the wiring for the monitoring of the closure circuit. The wiring for the trip circuit is similar.
When the breaker is closed, the contact “52a” contact is also closed. If there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as
“Close circuit 52 closed” is detected as closed. If there is no continuity, it is detected as open (circuit failure).
When the breaker is open, the contact “52b” contact is also closed. If there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as “Close
circuit 52 open” is detected as closed. If there is no continuity, it is detected as open (circuit failure).
The “closing coil failure” or “trip coil failure” signals are activated 20 seconds after the fault is detected, in the event of the fault
persisting upon the conclusion of this period.

User Manual 106
BREAKER 
Figure 59 Closure circuit monitoring
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 55:
❑ Trip circuit enabled: Enables the monitoring of the trip circuits.

❑ Close circuit enabled: Enables the monitoring of the closure circuits.
❑ Close circuit 52 open - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the closure circuit with the breaker open.
❑ Close circuit 52 closed - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the closure circuit with the breaker closed.
❑ Open circuit 52 open - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the trip circuit with the breaker open.
❑ Open circuit 52 closed - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the trip circuit with the breaker closed.
❑ PROT/RBCS1 node
 X trip coil failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the pole X trip coil.
 X closing coil failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the pole X closure coil.
 1 trip circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the trip coil of pole A1, B1 or C1.
 2 trip circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the trip coil of pole A2, B2 or C2.
 1 closing circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the closure coil of pole A1, B1 or C1.
 2 closing circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the closure coil of pole A2, B2 or C2.

User Manual 107
BREAKER 
Table 55 Circuit supervision settings

TCEna Trip circuit enabled Boolean
CCEna Close circuit enabled Boolean
LogInCCOA1 Close circuit 52 open - A1 Int32
LogInCCOB1 Close circuit 52 open -B1 Int32
LogInCCOC1 Closecircuit 52 open - C1 Int32
LogInCCOA2 Closecircuit 52 open - A2 Int32
LogInCCOB2 Closecircuit 52 open - B2 Int32
LogInCCOC2 Closecircuit 52 open - C2 Int32
LogInCCCA1 Closecircuit52 closed - A1 Int32
LogInCCCB1 Closecircuit 52 closed - B1 Int32
LogInCCCC1 Closecircuit 52 closed - C1 Int32
LogInCCCA2 Closecircuit 52 closed - A2 Int32
LogInCCCB2 Closecircuit52 closed - B2 Int32
LogInCCCC2 Closecircuit 52 closed - C2 Int32
LogInTCOA1 Opencircuit 52 open - A1 Int32
LogInTCOB1 Open circuit 52 open - B1 Int32
LogInTCOC1 Open circuit 52 open - C1 Int32
LogInTCOA2 Open circuit 52 open - A2 Int32
LogInTCOB2 Open circuit 52 open - B2 Int32
LogInTCOC2 Open circuit 52 open - C2 Int32
LogInTCCA1 Open circuit 52 closed - A1 Int32
LogInTCCB1 Open circuit 52 closed - B1 Int32
LogInTCCC1 Open circuit 52 closed - C1 Int32
LogInTCCA2 Open circuit 52 closed - A2 Int32
LogInTCCB2 Open circuit 52 closed - B2 Int32
LogInTCCC2 Open circuit 52 closed - C2 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record NO (0)/YES (1) Boolean
Table 56 Coil monitoring outputs

A1 trip coil failure FailTC1 phsA
B1 trip coil failure FailTC1 phsB
C1 trip coil failure FailTC1 phsC
A2 trip coil failure FailTC2 phsA
B2 trip coil failure FailTC2 phsB
C2 trip coil failure FailTC2 phsC
A1 closing coil failure FailCC1 phsA
B1 closing coil failure FailCC1 phsB
C1 closing coil failure FailCC1 phsC
A2 closing coil failure FailCC2 phsA
B2 closing coil failure FailCC2 phsB
C2 closing coil failure FailCC2 phsC
1 trip circuit failure FailTC1 general
2 trip circuit failure FailTC2 general
1 closing circuit failure FailCC1 general
2 closing circuit failure FailCC2 general

User Manual 108
AUTOMATISMS 
5. AUTOMATISMS
5.1 BATTERY CONNECTION/ DISCONNECTION AUTOMATION
Only available in CB0 model, single or double battery
5.1.1 Topology
The automation considers that the system must dispose of the following elements:
❑ transformer (one or two)

❑ transformer isolator(s) (between the transformer and the bar)
❑ transformer breaker(s)
❑ bar (one or two)
❑ battery isolator (between the bar and the battery)
❑ batteries breaker
❑ batteries
T1
52-T1
S-T1B1
Busbar 1
S-BB1
52-BREAKER STATUS
T1: Transformer 1
B1: Capacitor 1
B2: Capacitor 2
DIGITAL INPUTS TO CONNECT ON PL300BC (AS CONFIGURATION)

52-BREAKER STATUS: Capacitor breaker status
52-T1: Transformer Breaker 1
52-B1 52-B2
52-B1: Capacitor 1 Breaker
52-B2: Capacitor 2 Breaker
S-T1B1: Transformer 1 Busbar 1 Isol.
S-BB1: Busbar 1 Isolator
B1 B2

User Manual 109
AUTOMATISMS 
5.1.2 Automation state

The automationmay be in “active” or “inactive” state.
In order to be active the following conditions must be fulfilled:
❑ The corresponding settings must be enabled.

❑ The inputs corresponding to the transformer and battery isolator have to be programmed and they have to be seen
closed. In the case of double bar, it will be enough if the battery isolator input is closed to one bar and the isolator of any
of the transformer is also closed to the same bar.
❑ The activation order must be given (the unit picks up with the automation inactive, after the loss of supply voltage or
reset).
❑ If order failure is given, the automation is locked and it changes into inactive state. So as to activate it, this order failure
must be acknowledged.
❑ A “Battery automation activation locking” signal is included; this signal includes the failure orders, reactive converter
failures and the corresponding battery and transformer sectionalizers’ inputs are closed. If this signal is active, the
automation will not be activated. The failure reactive converter signal, includes both the failure of analog mA measures as
measures designed as Goose (the no variation of these at one time or the failure at receive)
There are two digital inputs for the activation/de activation through pulse, which must last for 200 ms at least. It can also be
activated or de activated through control commands or through keyboard (key R).

User Manual 110
AUTOMATISMS 
If the transformer breaker is opened, the automation (regardless it is active or inactive) sends an opening order of the battery
breaker, no matter the programmed operation mode.
If there is a voltage fault in the bars during a time longer than TCERO, the automation (regardless it is active or inactive) sends an
opening order of the battery breaker, no matter the programmed operation mode.
The automation state is a control signal, which can be taken to outputs, LEDs etc….
The state change produces an event.
Possible causes to pass to inactive are:
❑ The setting It is not enable

❑ Open inputs for isolating transformer and battery breaker.
❑ Fault detection converter
❑ Excessive numbers of maneuvers of automatism alarm.
❑ Loss of time, if I was using the automatic time.
❑ If trip protection functions (50/51, 50N/51N, 50Nu/51Nu, 27,59 ...) except 37.
❑ Failure by opening or closing command.
5.1.3 Automation by calendar

12 types of day are defined resulting from combining the working days, Saturdays and Public Holidays with the four seasons of
the year. The Public Holidays will be Sundays plus “n” days that can be programmed. The beginning and ending of the seasons
are also programmable and the change to the summer schedule is automatically carried out according to the setting.
You can choose to operate based on 4 seasons or only 2(summer and winter) depending on the date fixed for the time change
from summer to winter and vice versa in the LTIM1 node. If disabled the time change in the LTIM1 node, then the automatism
used as summer the dates indicated as beginning spring season and the beginning of autumn for the winter .
Each type of day can be programmed in several time stripes (Peak, Offpeak and Normal), defining up to two Peak intervals and
two Offpeak intervals (the peak period has priority over the offpeak). The remaining intervals are normal schedule. In each
interval can set the type of supervision, disabled or tension and also the type of control, that can be programmed as disabled,
by reactive (Q) and connect/disconnect, this is programmable as “Connection B1;B2” (Con B1B2), “Disconnection B1;B2” (Des
B1B2), “Connection B1” (Con B1), “Connection B2” (Con B2), “Connect. 1 only” (Con 1Bat). The setting “Connect. 1 only” will
connect the battery in an alternating way.
If you have to connect multiple batteries makes it depending on the setting "Use Double Battery" paragraph 5.1.9
In each schedule for supervision have specific minimum and maximum levels of voltage for connection and disconnection with
minimum times for the state of minimum and maximum voltage.
Each schedule time has specific levels of the transformer reactive energy for connection and disconnection with its connection
and disconnection times.
The main idea is setting to some burden and reactive generation limits according to the part of the day.
Data related to the automatism connect/disconnect
❑ Node: ZCAP
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables.
 LogInACBPc: logical input, active the battery automatism, must last at least 200 ms active.
 LogInACBPd logical input, disable the battery automatism, must last at least 200 ms active.
 LogInDTBlk: logical input, active, disables the lock by trip (86).
 LogInBrT1: logical input associated to transformer breaker 1.
 LogInBrT2: logical input associated to transformer breaker 2.
 LogInBus1: logical input associated to transformer isolator between the bar 1 and the battery.
 LogInBus: logical input associated to transformer isolator between the bar 2 and the battery.

User Manual 111
AUTOMATISMS 
 LogInBu1T1: logical input associated to transformer isolator between the bar 1 and transformer 1.
 LogInCoupl: logical input associated to bushbar coupling
❑ Commands:
 DOZCAPCon (CapDS in Ed2): Enables and disables the automatism of battery.
 DOZCAPUlt: Disable the lock by trip (86).
Table 57 Outputs of connect/disconnect battery automatism

Cap.Bank Autom.Block ZCAPLock general
Automatism Status ZCAPStatus general
Loss Time Disconn.Aut LosstZCAP general
Trip Block 86 TripLock86 general
Gen.Breaker Manoeuvre Inhibit GIManeInh general
Cap.Bank 1 Inhibition ZCAP1Inh general
Cap.Bank 2 Inhibition ZCAP2Inh general
Reactive Converter Fail RConvFail general
Gen.Br. Short Interv.Exc.Man GISIExcMan general
Gen.Int Long Interv.Exc.Man GILIExcMan general
Short Interv 52_1 Exc.Man LIn1ExcMan general
Long Interv 52_1 Exc.Man SIn1ExcMan general
Short Interv 52_2 Exc.Man LIn2ExcMan general
Long Interv 52_2 Exc.Man SIn2ExcMan general
Voltage Spv Close VSpvClose general
Calendar Cap.Bank Conn CalZCAPCon general
Voltage Spv Open VSpvOpen general
Cap.Bank Disconnect ZCAPDisc general
Additional Holiday AditHolid general
Normal Hour NormHInit general
Rush Hour RushHInit general
Off-peak Hour DipHInit general
Spring SpringInit general
Summer SummerInit general
Autumn AutumnInit general
Winter WinterInit general
General 52 ZCAP Open Command (XCBR1) ZCAPGBOpn general
52_1 ZCAP Open Command (XCBR2) ZCAPB1Opn general
52_2 ZCAP Open Command (XCBR3) ZCAPB2Opn general
General 52 ZCAP Close Command (XCBR1) ZCAPGBCls general
52_1 ZCAP Close Command (XCBR2) ZCAPB1Cls general
52_2 ZCAP Close Command (XCBR3) ZCAPB2Cls general

User Manual 112
AUTOMATISMS 
Settings of ZCAP node:
Table 58 Settings of connect/disconect battery automatism

AutoMode Automatic Mode 0 Disabled,1 Calendar Enum
VSource Voltage Measure Source 0 Vab, 3 Goose V Enum
Q Measure Source 0 Analog input Q, 3 Goose
QSource Enum
Q
Q1Factor Q 1 Factor Converter 0 40 0.1 Float
Q2Factor Q 2 Factor Converter 0 40 0.1 Float
Conf Configuration 0 Single, 1 Double Enum
0 Winter-Summer , 1 4
SSchedType Enum
Season Schedule Type Seasons
DaySpring Spring Start Day 1 31 1 Int32
MthSpring Spring Start Month 1 12 1 Int32
DaySummer Summer Start Day 1 31 1 Int32
MthSummer Summer Start Month 1 12 1 Int32
DayAutumn Autumn Start Day 1 31 1 Int32
MthAutumn Autumn Start Month 1 12 1 Int32
DayWinter Winter Start Day 1 31 1 Int32
MthWinter Winter Start Month 1 12 1 Int32
DayHoD1 Holiday Days Day 1 1 31 1 Int32
MthHoD1 Holiday Month Day 1 1 12 1 Int32

User Manual 113
AUTOMATISMS 

WoSpRu1In Daily Spring Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoSpRu1En Daily Spring Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoSpRu2In Daily Spring Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoSpRu2En Daily Spring Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoSpDi1In Daily Spri. OffPeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoSpDi1En Daily Spri. OffPeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoSpDi2In Daily Spri.Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoSpDi2En Daily Spri.Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoSuRu1In Daily Summer Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoSuRu1En Daily Summer Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoSuRu2In Daily Summer Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoSuRu2En Daily Summer Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoSuDi1In Daily Summ. Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoSuDi1En Daily Summ. Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoSuDi2In Daily Summ. Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoSuDi2En Daily Summ. Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoAuRu1In Daily Autumn Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoAuRu1En Daily Autumn Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoAuRu2In Daily Autumn Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoAuRu2En Daily Autumn Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoAuDi1In Daily Autum.Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoAuDi1En Daily Autum. Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoAuDi2In Daily Autum.Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoAuDi2En DailyAutumn Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoWiRu1In Daily Winter Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoWiRu1En Daily Winter Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoWiRu2In Daily Winter Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoWiRu2En Daily Winter Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoWiDi1In Daily Wint. Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoWiDi1En Daily Wint. Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
WoWiDi2In Daily Wint. Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
WoWiDi2En Daily Wint. Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaSpRu1In Sat.Spri.Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaSpRu1En Sat.Spri.Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32

User Manual 114
AUTOMATISMS 
SaSpRu2In Sat.Spri.Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32

SaSpRu2En Sat.Spri.Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaSpDi1In Sat.Spri.Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaSpDi1En Sat.Spri.Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaSpDi2In Sat.Spri.Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaSpDi2En Sat.Spri.Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaSuRu1In Sat.Summer Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaSuRu1En Sat.Summer Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaSuRu2In Sat.Summer Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaSuRu2En Sat.Summer Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaSuDi1In Sat.Summer Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaSuDi1En Sat.Summer Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaSuDi2In Sat.Summer Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaSuDi2En Sat.Summer Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaAuRu1In Sat.Autumn Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaAuRu1En Sat.Autumn Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaAuRu2In Sat.Autumn Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaAuRu2En Sat.Autumn Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaAuDi1In Sat.Autumn Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaAuDi1En Sat.Autumn Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaAuDi2In Sat.Autumn Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaAuDi2En Sat.Autumn Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaWiRu1In Sat.Wint. Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaWiRu1En Sat.Winter Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaWiRu2In Sat.Wint. Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaWiRu2En Sat.Winter Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaWiDi1In Sat.Wint. Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaWiDi1En Sat.Winter Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
SaWiDi2In Sat.Wint. Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
SaWiDi2En Sat.Winter Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoSpRu1In Holyday Spring Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoSpRu1En Holyday Spring Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoSpRu2In Holyday Spring Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoSpRu2En Holyday Spring Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoSpDi1In Holy.Spring Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoSpDi1En Holy. Spring Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoSpDi2In Holy.Spring Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoSpDi2En Holy.Spring Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoSuRu1In Holyday Summer Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoSuRu1En Holyday Summer Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoSuRu2In Holyday Summer Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoSuRu2En Holyday Summer Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoSuDi1In Holy.Summer Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoSuDi1En Holy. Summer Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoSuDi2In Holy.Summer Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoSuDi2En Holy. Summer Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoAuRu1In Holyday Autumn Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoAuRu1En Holyday Autumn Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoAuRu2In Holyday Autumn Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoAuRu2En Holyday Autumn Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoAuDi1In Holy.Autumn Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoAuDi1En Holy. Autumn Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoAuDi2In Holy.Autumn Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoAuDi2En Holy.Autumn Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoWiRu1In Holy. Winter Peak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoWiRu1En Holyday Winter Peak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoWiRu2In Holy. Winter Peak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoWiRu2En Holyday Winter Peak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoWiDi1In Holy.Wint. Offpeak 1 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoWiDi1En Holy. Wint. Offpeak 1 End 1 24 1 Int32
HoWiDi2In Holy. Wint. Offpeak 2 Init 0 23 1 Int32
HoWiDi2En Holy. Wint. Offpeak 2 End 1 24 1 Int32
ROpWTms Reactive Op.Waiting T.(s) 0 600 0.01 Float

User Manual 115
AUTOMATISMS 
VSpvEna Voltage Supervision Enable 0 1 1 Boolean

V0Val Zero Voltage (%) Vn 0 100 1 Int32
V0Tms Zero Time (s) 0 600 0.01 Float
RuSpvType Peak-Supervision type 0 No, 1 V Enum
RuSpvMiTms Peak-Minimum spv. T.(s) 0 600 0.1 Float
RuMinV Peak-Minimum Voltage (V) 40 200 0.1 Float
RuSpvMaTms Peak-spv. Maximum t. (s) 0 600 0.1 Float
RuMaxV Peak-Maximum Voltage (V) 40 200 0.1 Float
0 Disabled, 1 Q, 6
RuOpTyBelt Enum
Peak-Operation Typ.Belt Connect-disconnect
1 Connect B1B2, 2
Disconnect B1B2, 3
RuConnType Enum
Connect B1, 4 Connect
Peak-Conn.disconn.type B2, 5 Connect 1Bat
RuTconTms Peak-TCON conn. (s) 0.5 300 0.1 Float
RuTdesTms Peak-TDES disconn. (s) 0.5 300 0.1 Float
RuMVARcVal Peak-Conn. Thresh.MVAR -80 80 0.001 Float
RuMVARdVal Peak-disconn.ThreshMVAR -80 80 0.001 Float
DiSpvType Offpeak-Supervision type 0 No, 1 V Enum
DiSpvMiTms Offpeak-Minimum spv.t. (s) 0 600 0.1 Float
DiMinV Offpeak-Minimum V. (V) 40 200 0.1 Float
DiSpvMaTms Offpeak-Maximum spv t. (s) 0 600 0.1 Float
DiMaxV Offpeak-Maximun V. (V) 40 200 0.1 Float
0 Disabled, 1 Q, 6
DiOpTyBelt Enum
Offpeak-Operat.Type Belt Connect-disconnect
1 Connect B1B2, 2
Disconnect B1B2, 3
DiConnType Enum
Offpeak-Conn./Disconn.type B2, 5 Connect 1Bat
DiTconTms Offpeak-TCON connect. (s) 0.5 300 0.1 Float
DiTdesTms Offpeak-TDES disconn. (s) 0.5 300 0.1 Float
DiMVARcVal Offpeak-Conn.ThresholdMVAR -80 80 0.001 Float
DiMVARdVal Offpeak-Disconn.Thres.MVAR -80 80 0.001 Float
NoSpvType Normal-Supervision Type 0 No, 1 V Enum
NoSpvMiTms Normal-Minimum spv.t. (s) 0 600 0.1 Float
NoMinV Normal-Minimum V. (V) 40 200 0.1 Float
NoSpvMaTms Normal-Maximum spv t. (s) 0 600 0.1 Float
NoMaxV Normal-Maximun V. (V) 40 200 0.1 Float
0 Disabled, 1 Q, 6
NoOpTyBelt Enum
Normal-Operation Type Belt Connect-disconnect
1 Connect B1B2, 2
Disconnect B1B2, 3
NoConnType Enum
Normal-Conn./Disconn.type B2, 5 Connect 1Bat
NoTconTms Normal-TCON connect. (s) 0.5 300 0.1 Float
NoTdesTms Normal-TDES disconn. (s) 0.5 300 0.1 Float
NoMVARcVal Normal-Conn.ThresholdMVAR -80 80 0.001 Float
NoMVARdVal Normal-Disconn.Thres.MVAR -80 80 0.001 Float
0 No, 1Sharing (Q), 2
OpType Disconn.before(Q), 3 Enum
Operation type Disconn.after(Q)
ManeuvTms Maneuvers Periode (s) 0 600 0.01 Float
0 Capacitor Bank 1, 1
SmallCap Enum
Smaller Capacitor Capacitor Bank 2
0 Successive Steps, 1
SeqMode Enum
Sequence Mode Conn/Disc dir.High
CapBank1 Capacitor Bank 1 -80 80 0.001 Float
CapBank2 Capacitor Bank 2 -80 80 0.001 Float
ConvFaiEna Converter Fail.Det.Enable 0 1 1 Boolean
FailureTm Failure Time (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
DayManMax Daily Maneuver Max 1 100 1 Int32
DayIntMMax Daily Interval Man.Max 1 365 1 Int32
MinManMax Minute Maneuver Max 1 100 1 Int32
ManMaxTmh Hour Max.Man.Int 0 23 1 Int32

User Manual 116
AUTOMATISMS 
ManMaxTms Minute Max.Man.Int 0 59 1 Int32

Inh52Tms 52 Open Inhibit time (s) 0 600 0.1 Float
LogInACBPc ZCAP enable Int32
LogInACBPd ZCAP disable Int32
LogInDTBlk 86 Trip Lock Deactivate Int32
LogInBrT1 Transformer 1 Breaker Int32
LogInBrT2 Transformer 2 Breaker Int32
LogInBus1 Busbar bank disconnector 1 Int32
LogInBus2 Busbar bank disconnector 2 Int32
LogInBu1T1 Busbar 1 Transformer 1 Int32
MdGsV Goose V Measure Int32
MdGsQ1 Goose Q1 Measure Int32
MdGsQ2 Goose Q2 Measure Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/Yes Boolean
5.1.4 Modes of Operation

For each of the periods (peak, offpeak or normal) is selected by setting the supervisory variable which decides the first instance of
connection or disconnection depending on which set limits are exceeded. If this variable is within certain limits the decision is
based on a mode of operation time zone.
The supervision variable can be:
❑ Disable
❑ Voltage
In case of capacitor banks is the following table:
Settings related by time zone would be:
PEAK OFFPEAK NORMAL DESCRIPTION RANGE

NO
Peak-Supervision Offpeak-Supervision
Normal-Supervision type Inetrval-Supervision type Voltage
type type
Minimum time should be V below the
Peak-Minimum spv. Offpeak-Minimum Normal-Minimum spv. minimum voltage to connect the 0 to 600 step 0.1s.
T.(s) spv. T.(s) T.(s) battery.
Peak-Minimum Offpeak -Minimum Normal -Minimum Threshold voltage for connecting the
40-200V step 0.1
Voltage (V) Voltage (V) Voltage (V) battery
Minimum time should be V above the
Peak-spv. Maximum Offpeak -spv. Normal -spv. Maximum maximum voltage to connect the 0 to 600 s step 0.1s.
t. (s) Maximum t. (s) t. (s) battery.
Peak-Maximum Offpeak -Maximum Normal -Maximum Threshold voltage for disconnecting the
40-200V step 0.1
Voltage (V) Voltage (V) Voltage (V) battery
The Vsource setting indicates if the measure will be calculated by the relay itself as Vab or received the measure as Gooses. Then in
setting Goose V Measure indicates what goose measure corresponds to this measure
Open or close command is given if the following conditions are fulfilled:

User Manual 117
AUTOMATISMS 
(Automation active and Surveillance active by voltage) AND (Voltage in buses not-null and lower than VMIN during a period
longer than TMIN)
OR
(Automation active and Surveillance active by voltage) AND (Voltage in buses not-null and lower than VMAX during a period
longer than TMIN) AND (The operation control in selected areas indicate connection)
Open command is given if the following conditions are fulfilled:
(Automation active and Surveillance active by voltage) AND (Voltage in buses higher than VMAX during a period longer than
TMAX)
OR
(Automation active and Surveillance active by voltage) AND (Voltage in buses higher than VMIN) AND (The operation control in
selected areas indicate disconnection)
OR
Transformer breaker open (Digital input type 52b)
OR
If are enable Voltage fault in buses, and the voltage is lower than Vzero during a period higher than TZERO
The hysteresis of 3V between connection and disconnection zones is respected.
Between the maximum and minimum values is a time zone in which the decision is based on other parameters. This was done
through the setting type operation in time zone.
The mode of operation in time zone can be based on:
❑ Disable
❑ Reactive power
❑ Connection / disconnection. Among the options you can select:
 Connection B1;B2
 Disconnection B1;B2
 Connection B1
 Connection B2
 Connection only 1 battery
Settings related by time zone would be:
PEAK OFFPEAK NORMAL DESCRIPTION RANGE

Disable
Peak Operation Offpeak Operation Normal Operation Type of operation during this
By Reactive
interval
Connection/Disconnection
Connection B1 and B2,
Connect/Disconnect Connect/Disconnect Connect/Disconnect type in Disconnection B1 and B2,
Connect/Disconnect type in this
type in Peak type in Offpeak Normal Connection B1,
interval
Connection B2,
Connection only 1 Bat.
Threshold value of reactive power
QCON Peak QCON Offpeak QCON Normal -80-80MVAR step 0.001
to connect the battery.
Threshold value of reactive power
QDES Peak QDES Offpeak QDES Normal -80-80MVAR step 0.001
to disconnect the battery.
Minimum time should be Q above
TCON Peak TCON Offpeak TCON Normal 0,5 to 300 s step 0.1s.
QCON to connect the battery.
Minimum time should be Q below
TDES Peak TDES Offpeak TDES Normal 0,5 to 300 s step 0.1s.
QDES to disconnect the battery.

User Manual 118
AUTOMATISMS 
In case of loss of time for any reason, the automation status becomes inactive and is active signal "Alarm: automatism offline for
lost of time".
These adjustments QDES QCON have sign. The analog input is considered positive when the reactive flow goes from the
transformer to the bar where the battery is.
The automation will close command if the following conditions are met:
(Automation active and in the stripe selected control by reactive) AND (Q higher QCON during TCON)
The automation will open command if the following conditions are met:
(Automation active and in the stripe selected control by reactive) AND (Q lower QDES during TDES)
OR
Transformer breaker open (Digital input type 52b)
The automatism is based on reactive flow through the transformer (or transformers) power associated to the battery.
In addition there may be cases of simple bar or double bar.
The read of the reactive of each transformer is made from an analog input from a converter. It can be positive or negative. You can
also configure these measures as measures Goose.
In QSource setting is selected from which the measure Q, Goose or analog input and then in settings Measure Q1 and Measure Q2
is indicated measure Goose or analog corresponds.
Related settings:
❑ Factor converter: gives the relationship between the transformer reactive power (Q) and mA signal converter. There
should be two settings, one for each transformer
❑ Configuration:
 Simple bar
 Double bar
In the case of simple bar the Q considered for the automatism is the corresponding transformer.
For double bar when are coupled, the Q considered is the algebraic addition of the Q of both transformers. If are uncoupled, the Q
considered is the transformer that is at the same bar as the battery.
The configuration at any given time in the case of double bar is obtained from digital inputs:
❑ 2 DIs corresponding to the position of the battery bar isolator

❑ 4 DIs (2 by transformer) corresponding to the position of the bar isolator transformers
❑ 1 DI corresponding to the position of breaker coupling bars
❑ 2 DIs, each corresponding to each transformer breaker
As already indicated, if the inputs of battery bar isolator and transformer of the same bar are not closed, automatism becomes
inactive, and if the transformer breaker opens the automation opens the battery, regardless of operating mode selected.
Through the setting "Timeout for reactive operation" indicated an adjustable time for the order once control is reactive to wait a
while before re-enable automatic reactive maneuvers.
The idea is to set limits to consumption and generation of reactive depending on the time of day.

User Manual 119
AUTOMATISMS 
5.1.5 Open due to voltage lack: voltage 0

The automation will send the order to open when the voltage is under the setting Voltage zero, a settable time, time zero, no
matter the automation type selected and occurring with both the active and inactive automation. Only depends the setting
VSpvEna "Voltage Supervision Enable" to be taking this to YES.
5.1.6 Converter failure detection

In order to prevent failures in the converter, a time can be set, after which an alarm will be activated and the automation will pass
from active into inactive, when the converter value is constant for a time longer than the setting. It is considered to be constant
when the measurement variation is lower than ±40μA (range of the converter ±2.5 mA), a ±1.6% of its scale background.
It is replaced when the value varies in an amount higher than ±1.6% for the time set or the automation is enabled by order or
pushbutton.
With the measures of Q from Gooses, the failure activates with the qualityes of these gooses.
The settings are:
SETTING RANGE
Enable converter failure reactive YES/NO
Failure time 1-1440min /1min
5.1.7 Supervision for lost time

In case of loss of time for any reason, the automation status becomes inactive and active the signal "Automatism offline for lost of
time".
5.1.8 Alarm due to excessive manoeuvres of the automation

Two independent supervisions of excessive number of openings emitted by the automation can be set, one for alarm and the other
one of the automation passing into inactive.
It exclusively counts the number of orders emitted by the automation. It does no count protection trips either manual opening,
during a time window settable and mobile.
❑ Alarm level: Maximum number of manoeuvres in a day interval. It generates a signal that is replaced, after the last
opening from the keyboard (key R), control order, input or with automation passing to inactive.
❑ Automation passing to inactive level: Maximum number of manoeuvres in a minute or hour interval. It generates a signal
that is replaced, when connecting the capacitor bank is connected through the keyboard with the key R or when
activating the automation.
SETTING RANGE
Maximum number of manoeuvres in days 1-100/1
Maximum days of manoeuvres in days 1-365/1
Maximum number of manoeuvres in minutes. 1-100/1
Maximum days of manoeuvres in minutes - Hours 0-23/1
Maximum days of manoeuvres in minutes - Minutes 0-59/1
5.1.9 Double battery usage

The setting possibilities are the following ones:
NO / Sharing maneuvers (through Q) / Disconnect before (through Q) / Disconnect after (through Q). The settings with the note
“through Q”, will only be effective when the automation is selected through reactive; if it is not the case this setting will not be
taken into account.
The other settings related to double battery are:

User Manual 120
AUTOMATISMS 
AJUSTE Descripción Rango

NO
Operation type Disable (one battery)
Sharing maneuvers (Maintainability, for 2 batteries equals) (operation
Sharing (Q)
only by Reactive)
When you have to close the 2nd battery, first disconnect the first battery
Disconn.before(Q)
(operation only by Reactive)
When you have to close the 2nd battery, it connects and then disconnects
Disconn.after(Q)
the first (operation only by Reactive)
Maneuvers Periode (s) Minimum time that must elapse between consecutive operations 0-600s/0.01s
Smaller capacitor First battery on acting Battery 1 / Battery 2
Sequence Mode Successive Steps Successive Steps
Connect/Disconnect directly higher battery Conn/Disc dir.High
Capacitor bank 1 (MVAR) Capacity of battery 1 -80.000 / 80.000
Capacitor bank 2 (MVAR) Capacity of battery 2 -80.000 / 80.000
Two new digital inputs are added to define the status of each battery breaker.
Each trip by neutral unbalance will be given to each breaker. These trips have to be programmed in the corresponding output,
and it has to be programmed as trip in the output type, in order to carry out the logics corresponding to close failure and open
failure. In the same way as the breaker close order and open order outputs, it has to be programmed as closing and trip in
output type.
The remaining trips will be given to the general breaker, programming this output as trip in the output type.
The descriptions of the different modes of operation are detailed in the following paragraphs.
5.1.9.1 Equal batteries (Maintenance, Manoeuvre distribution)

In this case, every time that a close command is given through an automation, it is addressed to one breaker or to the other
depending on which of them is open or closed, the automation can go on giving close commands meanwhile both breakers are
not closed, and it can be opening meanwhile both of them are not open.
Every time a close or open command is given to a step, a minimum time has to be waited between operations.
This operation is detailed below:
Each breaker is assigned two variables:
A1and C1 variables are assigned to the breaker52-1, and variables A2 and C2, to the breaker 52-2.
These variables show that the breaker will have priority in the following manoeuvre. For example, if A1= 0, C1= 0, A2= 1 and
C2=1, the following open or close manoeuvre will be carried out by breaker 52-2.

User Manual 121
AUTOMATISMS 
(CA) H1 = Close Open

H2 = Close
Close
(A) H1 = Close Open H1 = Open

(C) H2 = Open (CA) H2 = Open
Close Close
(CA) H1 = Open Open (C) H1 = Open

H2 = Open (A) H2 = Close
Close
r
Open H1 = Close
(CA) H2 = Close
* With two batteries with own breaker

* The indications (C), (A) and (CA) show which one has the priority of Closing or Opening
When the open/close conditions are fulfilled, the automation watches the breaker states and the current priorities in order to
get position in a situation and give the order to achieve this position. Once the order given, if it is successful, the priorities are
changed according to the state it is addressed to after giving the order.
Other situations:
If an order failure is given, the automations locked and it passes to an inactive state. In that case, the automation can not pass
to the following state, and the breakers must maintain their priorities.
If the breakers are manually manoeuvred, from the console, from the TCP display or from the machine itself, move to one of
the states existing in the diagram, in order to change the preferences and assure that the automation is always in one of the
situations demanded. That is, manoeuvres not contemplated in this state diagram are not admitted.
In the EF-CB pick up, the breaker state is observed and one of the following 4 states is chosen:
If both breakers are close, A1= C1= 1, and A2= C2= 0.
If both breakers are open, A1= C1= 0, and A2= C2= 1.
If 52-1 is open, and 52-2 is closed, A1= 0, C1= 1, A2= 1, C2= 0
If 52-1 is closed, and 52-2 is open, A1= 1, C1= 0, A2= 0, C2= 1
5.1.9.2 Different batteries

There is a setting which determines which is the first battery to operate, the setting is called “Smaller capacitor”.
The operation will be the following one, taking into account the Operation Type setting “Disconnect before” or “Disconnect
after”.

User Manual 122
AUTOMATISMS 
H1 = Close
H2 = Close
Open order Close order
H1 = Open
Open order H2 = Close H1 is opened after
AJ:Disc before time between
maneouvers
H2 is closed after Open order
time between AJ: Disc after
H1= Open maneuvers
H1 = Close
H2 = Close
H1 Is closed after H2 = Close
time between H2 is open after
Time between
maneovers
Close order maneuvers
AJ: Disc.before Close order
AJ: Disc.after
H1 = Close
H2 = Open
Close order Open order
H1 = Open
H2 = Open
* Where H1 is the battery set as low battery

.
5.1.9.3 Sequence mode

The unit disposes of a setting “Sequence mode”, which programmed as “Successive steps” will operate as it has been previously
described and as “Direct Connection/Disconnection High Battery” will operate as it has been previously described apart from
the following conditions (being the High Battery the one not programmed as low):
From the state of the two disconnected batteries, if Qt > Qcon and Qt-Qb2 > Qdis , then the High Battery will be directly
connected.
Being the High Battery connected Qt < Qdis and Qt+Qb2 < Qcon, then this battery will be directly.
Being :
Qt: transformer reactive power

Qb1: BC1 power
Qb2: BC2 power
Qcon: Q threshold of connection
Qdis: Q threshold of disconnection
5.1.10 Trip function with blocking (86)

The overcurrent function operation (any, except timed function of unbalance neutral) will cause the trip and the locking of the
breaker closing. For that, there will be an output (with contact N/C) programmed as “blocking by trip). In order to restore it, a
“restoration” will have to be carried out, by keyboard/display (key R), digital input or control command.
This blocking state is memorized, so, it is recovered after a repick up (reset or Vdc loss) of the unit.
Besides the trip due to any protection function (overcurrent or not, except undercurrent and timed function of unbalance neutral)
provokes the automation to pass to an inactive state.
There is also an N/C output programmed as “inhibit manoeuvre”, which will be activated when:

User Manual 123
AUTOMATISMS 
The automation is active
OR
During Inh52Tms time, after opening the battery breaker.Inh52Tms is the adjustment of maneuver inhibition time after 52
open "52 Open Inhibit time (s)". The setting: Inh52Tms has a range of 0 to 600 seconds.
OR
When a signal is received showing that the transformer breaker is open
OR
When there is no voltage in the buses (V lower than VZERO) and is enable this function.
This signal of inhibit maneuver, is generated for each of the breakers, and after opening breaker waits Inh52Tms adjustment, "52
Open Inhibit time" to allow a closure on the breaker, that is to wait for a time after the open the bank is discharged, in order to
close, to avoid transient overloads, surges, etc.

User Manual 124
AUTOMATISMS 
5.2 RECLOSER
The unit allows up to 4 reclosures to be effected. In order to make the recloser as useful as possible, the number of reclosures allowed
is programmable (0 is not permitted).
Differentiated close times for each of the closures.
The recloser is put into service – out of service by means of a setting. Only when enabled by setting can it be put into service-out of
service by means of a command via communications or the keyboard.
Programmable reclaim time following manual closure and following automatic closure.
The 5 closure counters (total, first, second, third and fourth closures) are stored in non-volatile memory and can be viewed in the
console and on the display. These counters can be set to 0 by command or by the keyboard.
The closure cycle can be started either by the unit's own protection trips or by external trips from other protections.
The main recloser statuses are:
❑ Supervising status.
This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence of any trips. If any trip occurs, the recloser is
activated.
❑ Ongoing cycle status.

The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip up to the closure of the breaker and the elapse of the reclaim time
(successful reclosure), or until all the programmed reclosures have been unsuccessfully executed. In the first case, the recloser
switches to “supervising” and, in the second, to “definitive trip”.
❑ Definitive trip status.

The recloser’s final situation once it has run all the programmed attempts and the breaker remains open due to the existence of a
permanent fault. It only leaves this status when the breaker is closed manually.
❑ Internal block status.

The status is reached as a result of different causes. The reclosure cycle cannot be started nor can the termination of the cycle be
provoked if the cycle is running. It is cancelled by a breaker closure.
Definitions:
❑ Reclosable units.
Units which are capable of initiating the reclosure process. By default, they are overcurrent or distance units. The non-reclosable
units are those whose trips do not initiate the reclosure cycle (voltage, frequency, power units, etc). There is an input which can be
programmed as “Reclosable configurable trip”.
❑ Trips permitted following reclosure.

Each of the units that are blocked during the reclaim time following each reclosure are programmed by means of "Yes" or "NO".
5.2.1 Settings and signals

The general settings used in the recloser (PROT/RREC node) are (see Table 59):

❑ Number of reclosures. Indicates the maximum number allowed before the issued of the definitive trip.
❑ Faults between phases reclosure timeouts: first, second, third and fourth.
This is the timeout following a phase trip until the recloser issues a closure command in each of the reclosure phases. There
are differentiated closure times for each of the closures.
❑ Earth fault reclosure timeouts: first, second, third and fourth.

This is the timeout following a grounding trip until the recloser issues a closure command in each of the reclosure phases.
There are differentiated closure times for each of the closures.

User Manual 125
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Reclaim time following manual closure.

The time following the manual closure of the breaker, during which the existence of a protection trip is monitored. In such a
case, a definitive trip is triggered instead of a change to supervising status.
❑ Reclaim time following automatic closure following grounding fault.

This is the time following the automatic closure of the breaker due to a grounding fault, during which the existence of a
protection trip is monitored. In such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to supervising status.
❑ Reclaim time following automatic closure following fault between phases.

This is the time following the automatic closure of the breaker due to a fault between phases, during which the existence of
a protection trip is monitored. In such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to supervising status.
❑ Incomplete sequence enabled. Indicates whether the incomplete sequence function is enabled or not.
❑ Incomplete sequence block time. Indicates the maximum time for the completion of the reclosure process.
❑ 79 Blocking level input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the recloser. The recloser must be enabled by
setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
❑ 79 Blocking pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, blocks the
recloser. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
❑ 79 Unblock pulse input. . Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, unblocks
the recloser. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
❑ Pause+Reset AR time input. Selects the signal which, when active, restarts the closure time.
❑ Pause input. Selects the signal which, when active, stops the closure time.
❑ Autoreclose sequence reset. Selects the signal which, when active, restart the closure process. If the breaker is open,
“Recloser Lock 52 open” is activated and waits for it to be closed. If it is close, “Recloser Lock manual closing” is activated.
In any case, once closed, it waits for the reclaim time following manual closure to return to supervising status.
❑ Configurable autoreclose. Selects the signal which, when active, initiates the closure process.
❑ On line pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, the recloser
goes to “On service”. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
❑ Out of line pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, the recloser
goes to “Out of service”. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.

User Manual 126
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 59 General recloser settings

RecEna Enabled YES/NO enum
RecNum Number of shots 1 4 1 Int32
Rec1PhTms Reclose time Ph-Ph (s) 1 0,05 600 0,01 float
Rec2PhTms Reclose time Ph-Ph (s) 2 1 600 1 float
Rec1GTms Reclose time Ground (s) 1 0,05 600 0,01 float
Rec2GTms Reclose time Ground (s) 2 1 600 1 float
PReSe3Tms Safety time Ph-Ph (s) 0 600 1 float
PReSe1Tms Safety time ground (s) 1 600 1 float
MaClSeTms Time after manual close(s) 1 600 1 float
BlInSecEna Incomplete sequence YES/NO enum
BlInSecTms Incomplete sequence t. (s) 1 600 1 float
LogInReLB 79 Blocking pulse input Int32
LogInRePB 79 Blocking pulse input Int32
LogInRePUb 79 Release pulse input Int32
LogInTmRst Pause+Reset AR time input Int32
LogInTmPau Pause input Int32
LogInRst Autoreclose sequence reset Int32
LogInConf Configurable autoreclose Int32
LogInRPOn On line pulse input Int32
LogInRPOff Out of line pulse input
NO (0) /
MaskEna Boolean
Enable Events Record YES (1)
The general settings used for the supervising for synchronism (PROT/RLSS1 node) are (see Table 60):
❑ Synchrocheck type. Indicates whether the synchronism is internal or external.

❑ Check 3pole first reclose . Three-phase closure 1 monitoring. Indicates whether the first closure is to be monitored with
synchronism.
❑ Check rest of autorecloses . Monitoring remaining closures. Indicates whether the closures other than the first are to be
monitored with synchronism.
❑ Sync. Delay Time (s). Synchronism timeout. This is the maximum time waited before the synchronism grants permission
before a three-phase closure. If closure permission is granted before the conclusion of this time, a closure command is
issued. On the other hand, if this time elapsed without permission being granted, a definitive trip is triggered.
❑ External syncro. Permission. Logical external synchronism permission logic. Selects the signal which, when active,
indicates the existence of permission for synchronism.
Table 60 Monitoring by synchronism settings

SynTyp Synchrocheck type Internal/External enum
Rec1SyEna Check 3pole first reclose YES/NO Boolean
RecSyEna Check rest of autorecloses YES/NO Boolean
SyWaTms Sync. Delay Time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
MaskEna Enable Events Record YES/NO Boolean
LogInExSy External syncro. Permission Int32
The settings used for the monitoring by reference voltage (PROT/RVRS1 node) are (see Table 61):

User Manual 127
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Delay time (s). This is the time, following the opening of the breaker, that is waited for the activation of the reference
voltage signal to allow the reclosure. It is used to wait for the activation of an external signal before allowing a reclosure.
E.g., to wait for the line voltage to disappear following a trip (e.g., if there were motors or batteries connected) before
reconnecting the line.
❑ Minimum time (s). This is the minimum time during which the vref signal must be seen to be active in order to consider
the existence of reference voltage.
❑ Reference Voltage input. Logical Vref input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the existence of reference
voltage (Vref).
Table 61 Monitoring by Vref settings

VrefEna Enabled YES/NO enum
VrefWaTms Delay time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
VrefMinTms Minimum time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
LogInVref Reference Voltage input Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record YES/NO Boolean
Table 62 shows the output signal of the monitoring by reference voltage (PROT/RVRS1 node):
❑ Presence of Vreftes the presence of reference voltage.

❑ Blocked without Vreftes blocking by ausence of reference voltage.
Table 62 Monitoring by Vref outputs

Presence of Vref PresVref general
Blocked without Vref BlkVref general
The setting used for blocking a closure due to a failure in the breaker’s coils (PROT/RTCS1 node) is (see Table 63):
❑ Lock by Coil failure. Indicates whether the recloser blockin by failure in the breaker’s coils is enabled or not.
Table 63 Closure block settings

ClBlTCF Lock by Coil failure YES/NO boolean
5.2.1.1 Signals
The recloser’s output signals are in the PROT/RREC1 node and are shown in Table 64 and Table 65.
The general recloser signals are:
❑ Recloser in service. Indicates whether it is enabled and not locked by an external blocking input. Internal blocking signals
don´t afect this signal.
❑ Recloser in standby. Indicates that it is in standby or supervising.
❑ Recloser Locked. Indicates that it is locked. If the recloser is out of service, this signal is activated. If the recloser is on line,
this signal is activated by internal and external block.
❑ Definitive trip. Indicates that it is in the definitive trip. It´s activated by maximum reclose number or a trip with the
recloser blocked.
❑ Definitive Trip+Ext blocked. Indicates that it is in definitive trip and external block. It includes trips with the recloser out of
service or blocked.
❑ Reclosure command. Automatic breaker closure command.

User Manual 128
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ 79 in progress. Active from the moment the breaker is opened by a trip until the monitoring or definitive trip status is
reached.
❑ Reclosing 1 in progress. During the closure cycle 1. As of the opening of the breaker by the first trip or until supervising is
reached following the reclaim time or trip which leads to it being blocked (by Definitive T.) or a new cycle is produced.
❑ Reclosing 2 in progress. During the closure cycle 2. As of the opening of the breaker by a trip during the reclaim time
following the first reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
following the second reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
following the third reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
❑ Safety time. Following the closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until supervising is entered or a new closure
cycle is initiated.
❑ Safety time manual closing. Following the automatic closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until supervising
is entered or a new closure cycle is initiated.
❑ Safety time reclosing. Following the manual closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until supervising is
entered or a new closure cycle is initiated.
❑ Safety time 1 st reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the first closure, the reclaim time is counted until
supervising is entered, a new closure cycle is initiated or the definitive trip is triggered.
❑ Safety time 2nd reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the second closure, the reclaim time is counted until
❑ Safety time 3rd reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the third closure, the reclaim time is counted until
❑ Safety time 4th reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the fourth closure, the reclaim time is counted under
supervising is entered or the definitive trip is triggered.
❑ Vref presence. Indicates the presence of reference voltage.
❑ Recloser paused. Indicates that the recloser is in pause in the closure time counter.
❑ Reclosing Started. Indicates that the reclosure process has started.
❑ Reclosing 1 Started. Indicates that the first reclosure process has started.
❑ Reclosing 2 Started. Indicates that the second reclosure process has started.
❑ Reclosing 3 Started. Indicates that the third reclosure process has started.
❑ Reclosing 4 Started. Indicates that the fourth reclosure process has started.
❑ Successful Reclosing. Indicates that the reclosure process was completed successfully.
❑ Breaker Reclosing ongoing. Indicates that the breaker is reclosing.

User Manual 129
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 64 General recloser outputs

Recloser in service Auto general
Recloser in standby RestST general
79 in progress RecCyc (RecCycOn in Ed2) general
Successful Reclosing RecOK general
Definitive Trip DefTrip general
Reclose Command OpCls general
Recloser Locked Blk (RecBlk in Ed2) general
Reclosing 1 in progress RecCyc1 general
Reclosing 1 1P in progress RecCycMon1 general
Reclosing 1 3P in progress RecCycTr1 general
Safety time SecTime general
Safety time manual closing ManClSecT general
Safety time reclosing RecSecT general
Safety time 1 st reclosing Rec1SecT general
Safety time 2nd reclosing Rec2SecT general
Safety time 3rd reclosing Rec3SecT general
Safety time 4th reclosing Rec4SecT general
Recloser paused Pause general
Reclosing Started RecPrIn general
Reclosing 1 Started RecPrIn1 general
Definitive Trip+Ext blocked DefTripBlk general
Breaker Reclosing ongoing BrRec general
The recloser blocking signals are:
❑ Recloser Internal Lock. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to any cause.
❑ Recloser Definitve Trip Lock. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a definitive trip.
❑ Recloser Lock 52 opened. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a manual break.
❑ Recloser Lock Trip Exceeded. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to an excessive number of trips.
❑ Recloser Lock switch on fault. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a switch onto fault, i.e., a trip is
produced during the reclaim time following a manual closure.
❑ Recloser Lock No Syncrocheck. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the ausence of syncrcheck.
❑ Recloser Lock without Vref. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the ausence of vref.
❑ Recloser Lock Pole discordance. If the discordance function acts, the reclosure cycle is blocked.
❑ Recloser Lock Close Failure. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the close failure. Related to the breaker
monitoring.
❑ Recloser Lock opening Failure. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the open failure. Related to the
breaker monitoring.
❑ Recloser External Lock. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to any cause.
❑ Recloser External Lock Comms. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to command.
❑ Recloser External Lock Input. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to logical input.

User Manual 130
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Reclosing Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to reclosing start failure.
❑ Recloser Lock End of cycle. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to the end of the reclosing cycle.
❑ Recloser Lock manual closing. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to manual reclosing.
❑ Recloser Lock manual opening. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to manual opening.
❑ Recloser Trip In Safety time. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to a trip in safety time.
❑ Recloser Incomplete sequence. Indicates that the recloser is blocked because the sequence time is exceeded.
❑ Recloser Lock TC Failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to breaker circuit supervision failure.
Table 65 Recloser block outputs

Recloser Internal Lock BlkInt general
Recloser Definitve Trip Lock BlkIntDeTr general
Recloser Lock 52 opened BlkIntOpBr general
Recloser Lock Trip Exceeded BlkInExcTr general
Recloser Lock switch on fault BlkIntSOF general
Recloser Lock tripoloar trip BlkInt3PTr general
Recloser Lock No Syncrocheck BlkINoSync general
Recloser Lock without Vref BlkINoVref general
Recloser Lock Pole discordance BlkIPoleD general
Recloser Lock Close Failure BlkIClFail general
Recloser Lock opening Failure BlkIOpFail general
Recloser External Lock BlkExt general
Recloser External Lock Comms BlkExtComs general
Recloser External Lock Input BlkExtDI general
Reclosing Start failure BlkIntInFa general
Reclosing A Start failure BlkIAInFa general
Reclosing B Start failure BlkIBInFa general
Reclosing C Start failure BlkICInFa general
Recloser Lock End of cycle BlkICyEnd general
Recloser Lock manual closing BlkIManCl general
Recloser Lock manual opening BlkIManOp general
Recloser Trip In Safety time BlkITrMaSe general
Recloser Incomplete sequence BlkInSec general
Recloser Lock TC Failure BlkClsTrip general
5.2.1.2 Reclosure counters

There are independent reclosure counters for the first, second, third, fourth reclosures and for the totals.
They are stored in a non-volatile memory and displayed in the statistical data (communications and display).
These counters can be set to 0 by command.
5.2.1.3 Excessive number of trips

Allows the number of trips within the time to be limited.
A signal is generated the trip limit is exceeded (“excessive number of trips” setting) within a set time (“excessive number of
trips time window” setting).
It sets recloser to “Internal block”, signalling “Internal block due to excessive number of trips” and “Definitive trip”.

User Manual 131
AUTOMATISMS 
5.2.2 General operation

After a certain period following the introduction of voltage (or after resetting), the recloser enters in one of the states:
❑ If the recloser is enabled:

 Supervising status when the breaker is closed (passing through manual closure) or
 Manual Opening (manual opening block) if the breaker is open.
❑ If the recloser is disabled or there is a block signal, the reclosure cycle is not launched and it remains in the blocked status
Figure 60 Recloser initialization
It remains in the Manual Opening and Definitive Trip statuses until the breaker is closed manually.
Following the closure:
❑ If the breaker does not open during the block (or reclaim) time, it enters Supervising.
❑ If there is a manual opening, it enters Manual Opening Block.
❑ If there is an opening by a protection, it enters Definitive Trip Block.
If the protection acts but the breaker does not open (or the trip remains active) during the programmed time, it enters internal
block due to opening failure and the corresponding signal is activated. It leaves this status following a manual opening, a breaker
closure command or a reset.
The Supervising (or reset) status is maintained until:
❑ There is a manual opening.

❑ The protection acts and opens the breaker, initiating the cycle when applicable.
The cycle consists of 1 to 4 reclosures.
During each cycle a programmed time is observed and the breaker closes. If the breaker does not trip due to a protection within
the reclaim time, the Supervising (reset) status is entered. If it does, the following closure is initiated. If this was the last, the
Definitive Trip is initiated.
If, following the action of the protection, the breaker does not open in the preset time or the relay continues to trip, the internal
block begins to operate. If, following a closure and while the safety time is being counted, there is a manual opening. In this case, it
enters Manual Opening Block and exits the cycle.
If, while the reclosure time is being counted, a manual closure is produced, the recloser aborts the reclosure cycle and enters
“Manual closure”. Following the corresponding reclaim time, it returns to standby.
If, once closed, a reset is received, it also enters manual closure.
The action of the external block prevents the cycle from being entered, or the exit from any ongoing cycle. If the breaker opens
while the block is in effect, it enters Definitive Trip block.
If the synchrocheck function is enabled and the synchrocheck monitoring setting is set to YES, this function must issue closure
permission in order for the closure relay to be activated.
The figures below show the sequence of events for a reclosure which has been programmed for three reclosure attempts (TR1, TR2
and TR3, respectively), with a reclaim time of Tsec, for different situations:
a.- Successful first reclosure.

User Manual 132
AUTOMATISMS 
Once the Supervising status has been reached, a new trip causes a new cycle to begin and reclosure 1 is started once more, as
shown below:
b.- Successful second reclosure.
c.- Successful third reclosure.

User Manual 133
AUTOMATISMS 
d.- Changes to definitive trip after exhausting the number of programmed reclosures.
e.- Changes to definitive trip due to a trip during the reclaim time following a manual closure.
5.2.3 General trip masks

It is independent for each of the protection units.
Indicates if this unit produces a general trip or not. The protection functions can be enabled or disabled and can trigger a trip
and/or a pick up independently of which units are to open the breaker. The general trip signal is sent to the breaker and is
configured by means of this mask.
In order, upon tripping, for a unit to activate the general trip, it must meet (see Figure 61):
❑ Be enabled
❑ Have its general trip mask set to YES
❑ If the recloser is enabled, the unit must not be blocked by the trip permission mask.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable its general trip. Its reference is "GenTrip" and
allows the options “YES/NO”.
Table 66 General trip (in each protection node)

GenTrip General trip YES/NO

User Manual 134
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 61 General trip scheme
79 in service
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 blocked
79 blocked
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

with 79 in standby
79 in stand-by
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 in time t
Following manual closure
79 in time following Manual Closure
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

with 79 in time t 1
79 in time t 1
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 in time t 2
79 in time t 2
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 in time t 3
79 in time t 3
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 in time t 4
79 in time t 4
51-1 Trip
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
General trip
51-2 Trip
AJ 51-2->D.G.
………………………….
Unit X Trip
AJ X->D.G.
5.2.4 Trip permission masks

This mask is used to select which trips are associated to the “general trip” (with the recloser in service), depending on the status of
the recloser.
Independently of these settings, the protection units pick up and trip, activating their corresponding signals.
The unit that is to produce the trip (activate the general trip signal) can be selected by programming 4 trip masks peer unit and
which are active in the following moments:
❑ Standby (supervising or reset).

❑ Reclaim time following manual closure
❑ Reclaim time following reclosure 1, 2, 3, or 4.
❑ Recloser blocked (external or internal block)
If the recloser is out of service, these masks have no effect, and thus all the units programmed to produce a general trip will issue a
trip.
Each protection unit has independent masks. If a unit trips during a specific recloser status (blocked, in security t, etc.) and the
corresponding mask is set to YES, the trip is sent to the general trip output. If the mask is set to NO, the trip is produced but the
"direct trip" signal is not received.
Reclosure block. When selected, the trip of this unit block the recloser. Detailed description in the chapter “Post-trip reclosure
permission mask”.

User Manual 135
AUTOMATISMS 
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable the unit’s permissions. The reference is
“TripPerm”. The setting is configured as a bit field where each bit corresponds to a selection, indicating the integer value:

Permission for trip in reclaim time following reclosure 1 3 YES/NO
Permission for trip in reclaim time following manual closure 7 YES/NO
An example of use with trip permissions in standby and following reclosures would be the decimal value 122 (01111010 in binary),
broken down into:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
The maximum permitted value with all permissions enabled is 255 (11111111 in binary).
Table 67 Trip permission following reclosure (in each protection node)

TripPerm Trip permission 0 8191 1 Int32
5.2.5 Post-trip reclosure permission mask

The enabling of the corresponding R1, R2, R3 and R4 post-trip reclosure permission mask is checked with each trip. If they are not
enabled, the reclosure cycle is interrupted.
In the event of simultaneous trips (before the opening of the breaker), the units with reclosure permission are taken into account in
order start the reclosure cycle.
Additionally, the trips which force the recloser to enter a block are also checked.
If consecutive trips are produced in different units, the relay reviews the tripped units’ masks and allows as many reclosures as
correspond to the minimum number allowed for the units involved.
That is, if the minimum number of reclosures is set to 3, reclosures 1, 2 and 3 are allowed.
Once the number of permitted cycles has been exceeded, a new trip causes the recloser to enter “Definitive trip block”.
Reclosable trips
These are trips that are capable of initiating the reclosure cycle is programmed accordingly. In general, they are trips corresponding
to the overcurrent and distance units, as well as the external trip inputs and the configurable reclosable trip input.
Each trip’s programming options are:
❑ Reclosure following a trip set to YES

In order to allow reclosure following a specific trip type, the reclosure permission settings must be set to “YES”.
If various units issue a trip order during a fault and at least one of the tripped units has reclosure permission, the reclosure
cycle is initiated, unless one of the units is set to produce a 79 block.
❑ Reclosure following a trip set to NO

If, in the event of simultaneous trips, reclosure is not to be produced by a specific unit but rather the units with permission
are to have precedence, i.e., the reclosure cycle is to be initiated.

User Manual 136
AUTOMATISMS 
The logical “Configurable autoreclose” input allows any internal signal to be assigned as the cause of a reclosure. It allows reclosure
for any external cause (including the breaker status).
Likewise, there are various unit block inputs (for status and for pulses), thus making it possible to transfer any signal that is to be
used to avoid the reclosure to this input.
Non-reclosable trips
If a non-reclosable trip is produced (27, 59, 59N, 81, 81R), the reclosure unit will not launch the reclosure sequence for this cause
and, depending on whether the reclosure block mask has been set to YES, it will force the recloser to enter the definitive trip status.
If the trip does not open the breaker (because it has not given rise to the general trip), the recloser will remain in its current status.
Non-reclosable unit’s can be made to produce a reclosure by means of the connection to the trip output corresponding to the
“Configurable autoreclose” input.
Recloser block due to trip
This is used when a specific unit is not to produce a reclosure following a trip and when this unit is to prevail over those with
permissions in the event of simultaneous trips.
If this mask is not used, two units may trip simultaneously and the recloser may reclose due to one of the units being reclosable.
In the event of the non-reclosable unit tripping on its own, the breaker will open and remain in a block status.
In addition to these masks, the relay has logic inputs that allow the recloser to be blocked. Through the logical assignment of
internal signals to these inputs, the user can modify the operation of the recloser.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable this unit’s reclosure due to trip permissions. The
reference is “ReC1Perm”. The setting is configured as a menu of options.
The PacFactory has a drop-down menu showing the possible combinations:
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed
1 Reclose 1 Only the first reclose is allowed.
2 Reclose 2 Only the second reclose is allowed.
3 Reclose 1-2 The first and second recloses are allowed.
4 Reclose 3 Only the thrird reclose is allowed.
5 Reclose 1-3 The first and thrird recloses are allowed.
6 Reclose 2-3 The second and thrird recloses are allowed.
7 Reclose 1-2-3 The first three recloses are allowed.
8 Reclose 4 Only the fourth reclose is allowed.
9 Reclose 1-4 The first and fourth recloses are allowed.
10 Reclose 2-4 The second and fourth recloses are allowed.
11 Reclose 1-2-4 The first, second and fourth recloses are allowed.
12 Reclose 3-4 The thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
13 Reclose 1-3-4 The first, thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
14 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
15 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed
Table 68 Reclosure permissions following trip (in each protection node)

ReclPerm Reclosure permission 0 8191 1 Int32

User Manual 137
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 62 Recloser start

User Manual 138
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 63 Example of trip and reclosure permission operation

User Manual 139
AUTOMATISMS 
5.2.6 Fault type selection

Depending on which unit has provoked the initiation of the reclosure process, the reclosure time to elapse before the generation of
the reclosure signal, as well as the reclaim time following the reclosure, is selected.
Internal trips
Depending on the type of trip produced, there are 2 types of reclosure:
❑ Reclosure following a grounding fault. These involve at least one of the neutral units (neutral, sensitive neutral or
grounding units)
❑ Reclosure following a fault between phases (the rest).
If reclosable trips from several units coincide with the same fault, the reclosure and reclaim times are employed in accordance with
the first reclosable trip to take place.
External trips
Includes the following signals:
❑ DPE - External protection trip: Can be three-phase or not. It is equivalent to an external trip by pole OR.
❑ DPR-Reclosable programmable trip. An internal signal which is wired for logics and whose activation allows the reclosure
cycle to be initiated.
If a “DPE-External trip” or “DPR-programmable trip” input signal is activated, the time to be employed is the time corresponding to
faults between phases.
Upon the opening of the breaker and once it has been determined whether the fault is a grounding fault or a fault between phases,
a reclosure time that is programmed in accordance with the chosen setting (phases or grounding) is launched.
5.2.7 Breaker open timeout

Once the relay has tripped (activation of the general trip), the breaker is to open (by contact) and the trip is to disappear within the
opening fault time. If the breaker does not open upon the conclusion of this time, “opening failure block” is entered.
If during this programmed period of time the breaker opens, the ongoing cycle is initiated and the “79CC-Ongoing cycle” signal is
activated.
This signal will remain active until the cycle terminates upon its completion and a standby or block status is entered.
If the 52 NO and NC inputs are programmed, the 52b (NC) will be taken into consideration to detect the opening. If only the 52a
(NO) input is programmed, this signal at zero will be used as an open status.
5.2.8 Number of reclosures available

The total number of reclosures can be selected by settings.
The reclosures which are to be possible following the tripping of a specific unit can also be selected.
The enabling of the corresponding R1, R2, R3 and R4 permission mask is checked with each trip. If they are not enabled, the
reclosure cycle is interrupted.
In the event of simultaneous trips (before the opening of 52), the units with reclosure permission are taken into account in order
start the reclosure cycle.
Additionally, the trips which force the recloser to enter a block are also checked.
If consecutive trips are produced in different units, the relay reviews the tripped units’ masks and allows as many reclosures as
correspond to the minimum number allowed for the units involved. That is, if the minimum number of reclosures is set to 3,
reclosures 1, 2 and 3 are allowed.
Once the number of permitted cycles has been exceeded, a new trip causes the recloser to enter “Definitive trip block”.
All the trips (reclosable, non-reclosable and block) are checked up to the moment in which the breaker opens.

User Manual 140
AUTOMATISMS 
Any block trips which appear are sent directly to a blocked recloser.
If there are only reclosable trips, the reclosure cycle is begun with the time of the first reclosable produced by the trip.
Examples of operation.
The total number of reclosure cycles is set to 4.
Example 1:
❑ Unit 50 trips (with R2 reclosure permission) 79 does not reclose as the reclosure permission is not allowed in CC1 79
would enter “Internal Block-Definitive Trip”
Example 2:
❑ 52 is closed and reclaim time following manual closure is initiated.

❑ Unit 51N trips (with R1 and R2 reclosure permission). 79 recloses with “reclosure time for grounding faults 1”.
❑ With 52 closed, and while “reclosure time for grounding faults 1” is running, unit 50 trips (with R2 and R3 reclosure
permission) Reclosure R2 is not performed with the “reclosure time for faults between phases 2".
❑ There follows a new trip by 50 during the “reclaim time for phases 2”. A reclosure with “reclosure time for faults between
phases 3” would take place.
❑ There follows a new trip by 50 during the “reclaim time for phases 3”. 79 does not reclose as reclosure R4 is not
permitted. 79 would enter “Internal Block-Definitive Trip”
Example 3:
❑ While in standby, a 50 trio with R1 permission is produced and, before 52 opens, another 50N with R2 permission,
programmed without blocking, trip is produced.
In this case, the 50 trip would take precedence, provoking the reclosure cycle.
Example 4:
❑ While in standby, a 50 trio with R1 permission is produced and, before 52 opens, another 50N programmed with blocking
trip is produced.
In this case, when the 50N trip is produced and the breaker opens, the reclosure cycle would be interrupted and “Internal Block-
Definitive Trip” would be entered.
5.2.9 Reference voltage monitoring

This is used to wait for the activation of an external signal before allowing a reclosure. For example, to wait for the disappearance
of the line voltage following a trip (if there were motors or batteries connected to the line) or for a specific network condition
(power fluctuations, etc).
This monitoring is equivalent to a pause signal that halts the reclosure cycle during the VREF timeout.
It operates as follows:
❑ Once the breaker has opened and the trip has dropped out, the reclosure cycle is initiated and the reclosure time is
launched.
❑ In the absence of VREF, “VREF timeout” is launched, during which the VREF signal should be activated to allow the
continuation of the reclosure process.
❑ If the VREF signal does not appear prior to the elapse of this time, the internal 79 block due to absence of VREF” status is
entered.
❑ This status is cancelled by means of a closure or following the activation of the recloser reset input.

User Manual 141
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 64 Reference voltage monitoring scheme
5.2.10 Re-initiation of reclosure time

The digital “Pause with reclosure reinitiation” input is used to reset the reclosure time counter to zero.
When the “Pause with reclosure reinitiation” input is activated, the recloser time counter (dead time) is reset to zero and the 79 is
halted until this input is cleared.
When this input is deactivated, the reclosure time count is restarted.
5.2.11 Pausing of reclosure time

The digital “Recloser pause” input is used to pause the reclosure time counter.
When this input is activated, the reclosure time counter (dead time) is halted until this input is cleared.
When this input is deactivated, the reclosure time count continues.
Figure 65 Reclosure time with pause and restart scheme
5.2.12 Incomplete sequence block

The two pause inputs can be used to wait for a certain signal, although the cycle can be extended indefinitely. It is thus important
to prevent the recloser from remaining permanently in the current cycle.

User Manual 142
AUTOMATISMS 
This timed is used to check that the recloser has exceeded a defined time without issuing a closure command nor becoming
blocked or resetting, thus causing the recloser to enter a block by incomplete sequence status.
Figure 66 Block by incomplete sequence scheme
5.2.13 Synchronism monitoring

If a specific reclosure is set to “monitored by synchronism” and once the reclosure time has elapsed, there is a maximum timeout
equivalent to the “Sync. Delay Time (s)” setting in which the “synchronism permission” signal is to activate. Upon the issue of the
synchronism permission the reclosure command is activated.
If synchronism permission is not activated, the “Block due to lack of synchronism” status is entered.
The first and the rest of the reclosures can be set to monitoring by synchronism by means of a setting. This allows the first
reclosures to be carried out quickly and without the need to check for synchronism, in the case of specific faults, and normal
reclosures for the rest.
Settings can be used to establish whether the synchronism is to check the relay’s functioning or that or an external input.
There is a setting within the synchronism unit to enable monitoring by synchronism for the recloser and for manual closing. As they
are independent settings, by disabling function 25 it is possible to monitor the reclosure with the external synchronism input.
If the setting “Synchrocheck type” is internal, the recloser waits the permission signal is activated. If the setting is external, the
recloser waits the activation of the “External syncro. Permission” input.
5.2.14 Closure block by trip circuit monitoring

If the closure block by trip circuit monitoring is set to YES, when the reclosure command is activated while the trip circuit
monitoring logic’s “trip circuit failure” signal, the closure command is not received and "Internal block due to failure in the SPV trip
circuit" is signalled.
This status is cancelled by the manual closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
5.2.15 52 closure timeout

Once the relay has issued a reclosure command (Activation of the 79 output-reclosure command), the breaker should close during
the closure failure timeout (by contact), If the breaker has not closed upon the conclusion of the timeout, "79 block due to closure
failure" s entered and the reclosure command is deactivated. If there is a trip during that time, the reclose command is cancelled
and a definitive trip is generated.
This status is cancelled by means of a manual closure.
If the 52 NO and NC inputs are programmed, the 52b (NC) will be taken into consideration to detect the closure.
If only the 52b (NC) is programmed, this denied signal will be used.

User Manual 143
AUTOMATISMS 
5.2.16 Recloser statuses

During its operation, the recloser enters through various statuses that are grouped together as stables and transitory.
5.2.16.1 Stable statuses

The "Recloser" function has 5 stable statuses, i.e., statuses in which it can remain indefinitely until something occurs to cancel
the status. They are:
❑ Out of service.
❑ Supervising, standby or reset.
❑ Manual opening.
❑ Internal block. Includes the Definitive trip.
❑ External block.
❑ Reclosure successful
5.2.16.1.1 Out of service

It will be placed out of service by settings (Enabled NO).
If it is in service, it can be placed out of service by pressing the R key on the keyboard or by means of a command or logical
input.
This status is exited when the function is enabled by a setting or command (R key or command or logical input). The
transitory manual closure setting is entered if the breaker is closed at this time. If the breaker is open, internal block (due to
manual opening) is entered.
The functioning is similar when the relay lights and the reclosure setting is set to YES.
5.2.16.1.2 Supervising or standby

This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence of any trips. If any trips occur, the
recloser is activated.
This status is entered:
❑ Whenever the breaker is closed for a period that exceeds the reclaim time (following a manual closure or
following a trip).
❑ If the block signal is cleared when the breaker is closed and in the external block status.
This status is exited:
❑ By the action of the protection and the subsequent opening of the breaker. If reclosure is to follow, the
cycle is initiated. If not, Definitive trip is entered.
❑ Due to the manual opening of the breaker. Manual Opening is entered.
5.2.16.1.3 Manual opening

This status is entered by a manual opening command (by command, contact or other causes, but not by a trip).
This status is cancelled when the 52 is closed manually (by command, contact, etc., by not by reclosure).

User Manual 144
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 67 Manual opening
5.2.16.1.4 Internal block

There is a general internal block status with different signalling, in accordance with the cause. This status is entered as
result of different causes:
❑ Opening failure
❑ Closure failure
❑ Manual opening
❑ Three-phase Trip
❑ Definitive trip
❑ Incomplete sequence
The reclosure cycle is not started in this status. The cycle is abandoned if it has already been started and Definitive Trip is
signalled if the breaker has opened as a result of a protection trip.
This status is cancelled by the closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
In all cases, a generic “internal block” signal is activated, in addition to a specific signal identifying the cause of the block. In
those cases where the block status occurs after a trip and the opening of the 52, “definitive trip block” is also indicated.

User Manual 145
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 68 Block scheme
Internal block as a result of an opening failure
This status is entered if, following the elapse of the breaker fault time after a trip, the breaker remains closed.
This status is cancelled when the breaker opens. The opening failure time is the same as that of the opening fault with
contact function.

User Manual 146
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 69 Opening failure block scheme
DGITAL SIGNAL
General trip Time
DIGITAL SIGNAL S RECLAIM T

OPENING
52 DIGITAL SIGNAL
Phase A open command Recloser Lock opening failure
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL R
52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)
Internal block as a result of a closure failure
This status is entered of any of the following conditions are met:
❑ If the breaker remains open following the elapse of the breaker closure failure time after a closure
command. “Definitive trip” is also signalled.
❑ If the trip circuit failure block is enabled. If, when activating the closure command, the command activates
the trip and closure circuits’ monitoring logic’s "trip circuit failure” signal, the closure command is not
issued and “closure command blocked" is signalled. Following the elapse of the closure failure time, the
block by closure failure status is entered.
This status is cancelled by the manual closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
Internal block by open breaker (manual opening)
This status is entered by a manual opening or by means of a breaker command when the 79 is in standby or in a current
cycle.
It is cancelled by a manual breaker closure. The transitory Manual Closure status is entered.
Definitive trip
This status is activated following a trip that fails to produce a reclosure due to a 79 block or for having reached the end of
the cycle with the fault intact:
❑ A trip is produced within a period that is inferior to the reclaim time following a manual breaker closure.
❑ A trip is produced in a period that is inferior to the reclaim time following the last reclosure.
❑ A protection trip is produced while the block status is active.
❑ A protection trip is produced while the recloser is out of service.
❑ An excessive number of trips is produced within a defined time.
❑ The recloser does not issue a closure command due a voltage monitoring failure (synchronism).
❑ The recloser issues a closure command and the recloser does not close in the closure failure time.
❑ The recloser does not issue a closure command due to an interlock (for example, a trip circuit failure) and
the recloser does not close in the closure failure time.
❑ The voltage presence conditions are not met during a current cycle.
❑ If a trip does not produce a reclosure due the programming of a block (with the block taking precedence
over other functions with permissions) or the absence of the programming of a reclosure (unless there is
another function with reclosure permission trips simultaneously).
❑ A switch onto fault function trip following a manual closure.
❑ By incomplete sequence.
This status is cancelled by one of the following causes.
❑ Manual breaker closure, following which the transitory MC (Manual Closure) status is activated.
❑ Reception of recloser’s reset input.

User Manual 147
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 70 Internal block statuses diagram
Incomplete sequence block.
See the “Incomplete sequence block” section.
5.2.16.1.5 External block

This status is activated by:
❑ Activation of the recloser’s logical block input.

❑ Reception of a block command. There are block and unblock commands.
No cycles are started while the block is active and any cycles which had already been started are terminated. “internal 79
block”, “external 79 block by communication” or “external 79 block by input” is signalled. “Definitive trip + Trip &
extern.block” is also signalled if the breaker has been opened by a protection trip (general trip) or by an external protection.
5.2.16.1.6 Successful reclosure

Successful reclosure is signalled when, following the issue of a closure command and the closure of the three 52 poles, the
reclaim time elapses without a new trip being produced.
The “successful reclosure” signal is activated and remains so until the relay trips once again.
5.2.16.2 Transitory statuses

Those statuses in which the system can not remain for longer than a specific time.
5.2.16.2.1 Manual closure

This status is activated as a result of a manual breaker closure or by means of a command (not be reclosure), independently
of whether a cycle is in progress. It maximum duration is equivalent to the reclaim time following manual closure.
This status is cancelled by one of the following causes:
❑ Due to the manual opening of the breaker. An internal block due to manual opening is activated.
❑ Due to the action of the protection. An internal block due to definitive trip is activated.
❑ Following the elapse of the safety time. Standby is activated.
❑ Due to the activation of the external block input or block command. An external block is activated.

User Manual 148
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Due to the action of the protection following an opening failure (52 does not open or the unit remains
tripped). An internal block due to an opening fault is activated.
Figure 71 Reclaim time following manual closure
5.2.16.2.2 First closure. Phase 1: Timed.

This is reached at the start of the cycle. Its maximum duration is equivalent to the first closure time. If monitoring by
synchronism is activated, the synchronism timeout is added, if there is no synchronism upon the termination of the
reclosure time count.
At the same time as the closure time count, the monitoring by VREF (during a maximum “VREF timeout” period) and by
synchronism.
This is cancelled by:
❑ Manual breaker closure. “Internal block” is activated and “Temporary block by manual closure” is signalled.
❑ Following the elapse of the reclosure time. Phase 2 of the closure is entered.
❑ Activation of the external block input. “External block” is activated.
❑ Failure to meet the reference voltage (VREF) monitoring conditions. An internal block is activated and
Internal block due to absence of VREF and Definitive trip is signalled.
❑ Failure to meet the synchronism monitoring conditions. An internal block is activated and Internal block
due to synchronism fault and Definitive trip is signalled.
Figure 72 Reclosure line scheme

User Manual 149
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 73 Opening timeout scheme
Figure 74 Reclosure timeout scheme
5.2.16.2.3 First closure. Phase 2: closure command.

This is reached once the first closure timed is complied with. It activates the closure command and increments the closures
meter.
It is cancelled:
❑ Because the breaker has closed in the permitted time. Phase 3 entered.
❑ Because the permitted time has elapsed without the closure of the breaker. An internal block is activated
and “Internal block due to closure failure” and “Definitive trip” is signalled. The relay’s Breaker failure due
to contact signal is also activated.

User Manual 150
AUTOMATISMS 
5.2.16.2.4 First closure. Phase 3: breaker closure.

This is reached following the closure command issued in phase 2 when the breaker has closed. It maximum duration is
equivalent to the reclaim time following automatic closure. It deactivates the closure signal.
It is cancelled:
❑ Due to the manual opening of the breaker. “Internal block” is activated and “Internal block by manual
opening” is signalled.
❑ Due to a protection trip. The second reclosure process is entered, phase 1.
❑ Because the block time has elapsed without the opening of the breaker. Standby is activated.
A low current permanent fault may cause tripping following the elapse of the safety period. To avoid, in the event of all the
reclosures being first reclosures and no definitive trip is produced, the automatic extension of the timeout due the pick up
of a unit capable of producing a reclosable general trip in standby (“Trip permission with 79 in standby” set to YES) until
reset or a trip is produced.
Figure 75 Closure scheme
Figure 76 Timeout following closure scheme
5.2.16.2.5 Second closure.

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure originated by the first closure. Its
functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.) is the same as that of the first closure.
5.2.16.2.6 Third closure.

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure originated by the second closure. Its
functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.) is the same as that of the first closure.

User Manual 151
AUTOMATISMS 
5.2.16.2.7 Fourth closure

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure originated by the third closure. Its
functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.) is the same as that of the first closure, with the exception that if a protection trip
is produced within the block time the definitive trip status is activated. In this case, the end of the cycle is reached.
5.2.16.2.8 Ongoing cycle

The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip and the opening of the breaker up to the closure of the breaker
and the elapse of the safety period (successful reclosure), or until all the programmed reclosures have been unsuccessfully
executed. In the first case, the recloser switches to “supervising” and, in the second, to “definitive trip”
If, during the operating cycle, a manual order (or command) is given to the circuit breaker, the recloser suspends the cycle
and switches "internal block due to manual opening" or "manual closure".
These same applies if a reset signal is received.
Figure 77 Ongoing cycle scheme

User Manual 152
MONITORING 
6. MONITORING
6.1 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY MONITORING
This function checks if the external supply voltage is within the set range. It generates two signals:
❑ Auxiliary power supply greater than maximum threshold. If the supply voltage exceeds the set maximum threshold.
❑ Auxiliary power supply lower than minimum threshold. If the supply voltage is below the set minimum threshold.
The settings for configuring the external power supply monitoring (Table 69):
❑ Enabled: Enables the external power supply monitoring function.

❑ Minimum threshold. Indicates the minimum power supply voltage threshold, below which an alarm is issued.
❑ Maximum threshold. Indicates the maximum power supply voltage threshold, above which an alarm is issued.
Table 69 External power supply monitoring settings

SupSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LoSuppV Minimum threshold 10 280 1 float
HiSuppV Maximum threshold 10 280 1 float
MaskEna Enable Events record NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
There are two independent functions with settings, commands and outputs:
❑ Node:
 PROT/CESS1 for power supply 1
 PROT/CESS2 for power supply 2 (only in devices with redundant power supply)
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 69.
 Vcc Supervision Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 HH Infeed. Indicates that the power supply has exceeded the maximum threshold.
 LL Infeed. Indicates that the power supply is below the minimum threshold.
❑ Measurement. The external power supply values are available in the node GEN/LLN0 (see Table 71)
Table 70 Power supply monitoring outputs
Signal (CESS1) Signal (CESS2: redundant power supply) Data Attribute

Vcc Supervision Status Vcc 2 Supervision Status StEna stVal
HH Infeed HH Infeed 2 OverVcc general
LL Infeed LL Infeed 2 UnderVcc general

User Manual 153
MONITORING 
Table 71 Power supply measurement
Measurement Data Attribute

Power supply Psup net
Power supply2 Psup2 net
6.2 TEMPERATURE MONITORING
This function checks if the temperature is within the set range. It generates two signals:
❑ Temperature greater than maximum threshold. If the temperature exceeds the set maximum threshold.
❑ Temperature lower than minimum threshold. If the temperature is below the set minimum threshold.
The settings for configuring the external power supply monitoring (Table 69):
❑ Enabled: Enables the temperature monitoring function.

❑ Minimum temperature (ºC). Indicates the minimum temperature threshold, below which an alarm is issued.
❑ Maximum temperature (ºC). Indicates the maximum temperature threshold, above which an alarm is issued.
Table 72 Temperature monitoring settings

TmpSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LoTmpVal Minimum temperature (ºC) -40 0 1 float
HiTmpVal Maximum temperature (ºC) 50 100 1 float
❑ PROT/CTSU1 node
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 72.
❑ Outputs: Measurement. The temperature value is available (see Table 74)
❑ Table 73 shows the function’s output data.
 Enabled. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Temperature greater than maximum threshold. Indicates that the temperature has exceeded the maximum threshold.
 Temperature lower than minimum threshold. Indicates that the temperature is below the minimum threshold.
❑ Measurement. The temperature value is available (see Table 74)
Table 73 Temperature monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
Power supply greater than maximum OverTemp general
Power supply lower than minimum UnderTemp general
Table 74 Temperature measurement

Temperature Temp net

User Manual 154
MONITORING 
6.3 DIS BLOCKING BY LACK OF VAUX
If enabled, it checks that the external power supply exceeds the battery failure threshold, generating an alarm signal when it is below
the threshold.
In devices with redundant power supply, every power supply generates an independent DFFA signal. With the setting "Power Supply" a
general DFFA signal in generated.
The settings for configuring the battery failure monitoring (Table 75)
❑ Enabled: Enables the battery failure monitoring function.

❑ Power Supply: In devices with redundant power supply, selects which power supply generates the DFFA signal:
 PS1. Only Power supply 1 generates DFFA
 PS2. Only Power supply 2 generates DFFA
 PS1 or PS2. Weak Infeed DFFA1 or DFF2 indicates DFFA
 PS1 and PS2. Both power supplies must indicate DFFA.
Table 75 Battery failure monitoring settings

SupSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
PS1
PS2
SrcSpv Power Supply enum
PS1 or PS2
PS1 and PS2
There are independent settings and outputs:
❑ PROT/CSUS1 node
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 75.
 Enabled. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Weak Infeed DFFA. Indicates that the external power supply is below the minimum threshold as indicated in the
setting "Power supply".
 Weak Infeed DFFA1. Indicates that the external power supply 1 is below the minimum threshold.
 Weak Infeed DFFA2. Indicates that the external power supply 2 is below the minimum threshold.
Table 76 Battery failure monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
Weak Infeed DFFA DFFA general
Weak Infeed DFFA1 DFFA1 general
Weak Infeed DFFA2 DFFA2 general
6.4 INTERNAL BATTERY FAILURE MONITORING
The internal battery used for data maintenance is checked to ensure that it does not fall below a security level.
There are independent outputs:

User Manual 155
MONITORING 
❑ GEN/LPHD1 node
❑ It does not use settings.
❑ There are no logical inputs or commands.
 Internal battery failure. Indicates that the internal battery level is below the minimum threshold.
❑ Measurement. The battery value is available (see Table 78)
Table 77 Internal battery failure outputs

Battery failure BatAlm general
Table 78 Internal battery measurement

internal battery IntBat net
6.5 UNIT CHECKS
The unit continually checks the various incorporated elements and cards. If an error is detected in any of the elements or cards, an
alarm is generated. If the error affects the unit’s operation, a critical error is generated, which in addition to the signal acts on :
❑ Colour front LED. Non-configurable status LED, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is green, it indicates
that everything is correct, while if it is red it indicates a critical error in the unit.
❑ CPU Relay. Non-configurable 3-contact relay, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is active (common
terminal – NO), it indicates that everything is correct, while if it is deactivated (common terminal– NC) it indicates a critical
error in the unit. If the unit is switched off, the relay is deactivated.
❑ The unit's alarm signals are to be found in the LPHD node. The available signals indicate faults in the card check, in the
communications between the cards, in the unit’s configuration, etc.:
❑ Critical hardware error. Indicates that a critical error has been produced. In addition to this signal, the cause that produced
the signal will be indicated.
❑ CPU error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the CPU. It generates critical error signal.
❑ Analogue error. Indicates an error in transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
❑ I/O micro error. Indicates an error in the I/O cards’ micro.
❑ Analogue connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and the
transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
❑ I/O connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communication between the CPU and an I/O card. It
generates critical error signal. Additionally, it will indicate the card which has suffered the failure:
 Error card address x. Indicates that there is a communication error with the card with the address x.
❑ Front connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and the unit’s
front card. It generates critical error signal.
❑ Shared analogue memory error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the CPU
and the transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
❑ Error shared I/O memory. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the CPU and
the I/O cards. It generates critical error signal.
❑ RTC clock error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the real time clock.
❑ Continuous component monitoring alarm. Indicates that an error in the continuous measurement monitoring has been
detected in the transformers card.

User Manual 156
MONITORING 
❑ Alarm settings. Indicates that errors have been detected in the storage of the unit’s settings. It generates critical error
signal.
❑ FW Alarm. Indicates that the relay firmware versions are incompatible.
❑ Memory check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the checking of the unit’s memory. It generates critical
error signal.
❑ Converter check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card AD converter. It generates
critical error signal.
❑ Converter voltage level alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card reference voltages. It
generates critical error signal.
❑ Relay activation alarm. Indicates that an error has been detected in the activation of at least one of the I/O cards’ relays. It
generates critical error signal.
❑ I/O configuration error. Indicates that the configuration of the I/O cards does not coincide with the unit’s correct
configuration. It generates critical error signal.
❑ General Vdc error. Indicates a failure in the internal power supply levels. It generates critical error signal.
❑ Frequency configuration error. This is not a unit failure, but rather a configuration failure. Indicates that the frequency
measurement of the signals being injected into the unit do not match the set measurement, that is, the unit is configured
as 50Hz and the signals which are being injected are greater than 55Hz; or that the unit is configured as 60 Hz and the
signals being injected are less than 55 Hz.
❑ Internal battery failure. Indicates that the data storage battery is below the security levels and that the data may be lost at
shutdown.
❑ Version compatibility error. Indicates that the versions of the unit's firmware are not correct.
❑ Time setting configuration alarm. Indicates that there is an error in the configuration of the unit’s time setting.
❑ For each I/O card there is are 5 signals, indicating:
 Status OK. Indicates that the card is configured correctly and without errors.
 Configured & No_detected. Indicates that the card is configured by the user, but not detected in the unit. This may be
because it is not assembled or because it has an error. Equivalent to the current communication error.
 Different configuration. The type indicated by the user and the type detected by the unit do not coincide.
 No_configured & detected. Indicates that card that has not been configured by the user has been detected in an
address.
 Internal card error. A card check error has been received (includes relay check).
❑ ICD error. Indicates the last ICD received by the device was wrong and it was refused by the device. Once activated, this
signal is deactivated when a correct ICD is received.
❑ Power supply 1 OFF. Indicates that the power supply 1 is turned off. It is only available in devices with redundant power
supply.
❑ Power supply 2 OFF. Indicates that the power supply 2 is turned off. It is only available in devices with redundant power
supply.
❑ SV Board Error. Indicates that there is an error in the sampled values board.

User Manual 157
MONITORING 
Table 79 Checking signals

Critical hardware error HwCrAlm stVal
CPU error CPUAlm stVal
Analogue error AnaAlm stVal
I/O micro error ESAlm stVal
Analogue connection error AnaComAlm stVal
I/O connection error ESComAlm stVal
Front connection error MMIComAlm stVal
Shared analogue memory error AnDPMAlm stVal
Shared I/O memory error ESDPMAlm stVal
RTC clock error RTCAlm stVal
Continuous component monitoring alarm Harm0Alm stVal
Alarm settings SettingAlm stVal
Firmware alarm FwAlm stVal
Memory check alarm MemAlm stVal
Converter check alarm ADCAlm stVal
Converter voltage level alarm VRefAlm stVal
Relay activation alarm DOAlm stVal
I/O configuration error IOCnfError stVal
Card address error 1 GGIO1Alm stVal
Same as rest of I/O up to 8
Card address error x (x from 2 to 8) GGIOxAlm stVal
General Vdc error VccError stVal
Frequency configuration error FrConfAl stVal
Internal battery failure BatAlm stVal
Version compatibility error VerAlm stVal
Time setting configuration alarm HSetAlm stVal
ICD error FailICD stVal
Card 1 ok GGIO1Ok stVal
Card 1 ConfiguredYNo_detected GGIO1Nodet stVal
Card 1 Different configuration GGIO1Dif stVal
Card 1 No_configured Y Detected GGIO1NConf stVal
Card 1 Internal card error GGIO1HwErr stVal
Same as rest of I/O up to 8
Front ok FRONTOk stVal
Front Configured Y No_detected FRONTNodet stVal
Different front configuration FRONTDif stVal
Front No_configured Y Detected FRONTNConf stVal
Front Internal card error FRONTHwErr stVal
Power supply 1 OFF FailSup1 stVal
Power supply 2 OFF FailSup2 stVal
SV Board Error SVError stVal

User Manual 158
CONFIGURATION 
7. CONFIGURATION
7.1 CID
7.1.1 Data Storage

The unit has a CID file that follows the format defined in section 6 of the IEC 61850 standard. It is available via the following path by
FTP “SCL/validated”, in which all the unit’s configuration information is saved, either structured in nodes that follow the IEC 61850
format or in private parts.
7.1.2 Updating CID

There are different ways to change the settings. They are listed below:
❑ Using MMS in IEC 61850

❑ Using local display
❑ Using the pacFactory (PC tool)
❑ By sending the CID by FTP to the “SCL/notvalidated” directory
Independently of the form used from among those listed above, the changes to the affected setting are stored in the unit’s CID file.
CONFIGURATIONS USING ED1:
On devices with IEC61850 Edition 1 configurations, when any setting is changed, the paramRev field in the node in which the
new setting has been written, as well as the LLN0 node of the Logical Device to which the node belongs, are updated in the CID
file.
The format of the paramRev data is as follows:
XXX year.month.day.time.minute.second [paramRev origin text]
❑ Where “XXX” is an integer counter that is incremented each time paramRev is updated by a setting change.
❑ "paramRev origin text“depends on the origin of the setting change:
Origin of settings change paramRev text origin

MMS IEC 61850 client BROWSER IP
Local display USER DISPLAY
pacFactory USER TOOL
New CID CID UPDATE
In the case of “New CID”, only those settings in the CID sent to the unit and which are out of range will be updated in
paramRev.
7.2 GENERAL
Two nodes are used for the general configuration of the unit
❑ GEN/LLN0. Includes the unit’s generic configuration settings

❑ PROT/LLN0. Includes the protection units’ generic configuration settings

User Manual 159
CONFIGURATION 
The settings available in the GEN/LLN0 node are shown in protection events mask enablind. Allows the generation of protection events
associated to the function. If set to "NO", the function's protection events are not generated. If set to "YES", the function's specific
mask is contemplated:
❑ Language. Indicates the unit’s language. Affects the display, reports, etc.
❑ Functional key block
❑ Command key block
❑ Remote functional key mode
❑ LED block. Allows the activation of the LEDs to be blocked.
❑ Blocks from commands
❑ IRIG B format. Select whether the year is taken into account in the synchronization by IRIG. The options are:
 “B002”. The year is not taken into account.
 “B002 IEEE 1344”. The year is taken into account.
❑ Local/remote mode change
❑ Queue deletion logical input. Indicates the logic input that, when activated, deletes the unit’s report queues. Affects
protection events, faults, disturbance reports, historical measurement reports, etc.
❑ CID load mode
❑ CID validation type
❑ Remote/ Local type. It indicates how the unit will behave when it has to block the commands it is sent. See 14.2.1
❑ Flicker Enable. Enables the digital inputs’ swing supervising function.See 7.4.3
❑ Protection events mask enabled. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the
Table 80 General settings

Lang Language Spanish (0) / English (1) Boolean
BlkFKeys Functional key block NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
BlkOKeys Command key block NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
FKeysRem Remote functional key mode Boolean
BlkFrCom LED block NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
BlkComm Blocks from commands Boolean
B002 (without year) /
IrgType IRIG-B format enum
B002 IEEE 1344 (with year)
LogInLR Local/remote mode change Int32
LogInDelRe Queue deletion logical input Int32
LoadMod CID load mode enum
ValActAuto CID validation type Boolean
Not treated (0)
Iberdrola (1)
LRmode Remote/Local Type 0 3 1 enum
Exclusive (2)
No HMI (3)
FlickerEna Flicker Enable 0 1 1 NO (0) / YES (1) enum
Protection event recordign
MaskEna NO (0) / YES (1)
enabled
The settings available in the PROT/LLN0 node are shown in protection events mask enablind. Allows the generation of protection
events associated to the function. If set to "NO", the function's protection events are not generated. If set to "YES", the function's
specific mask is contemplated:
❑ Relay ON. Indicates whether the relay in service or not. If it is out of service, the protection functions do not act.
❑ Phase order. Selects the phase sequence ABC/CBA. Affects the direct and inverse sequences and, therefore, the functions
that use them. To check whether the order corresponds to wiring, check that the values expected for the indicated

User Manual 160
CONFIGURATION 
configuration are obtained in the sequence measurements and that the phase current arguments (as seen in the status
screen) match selected sequence.
❑ Select Setting group 1. Indicates the logic input which, when activated, selects the settings table 1 as active.
❑ Fault reports (Prim./sec.). Select the measurements of the display fault reports between primary and secondary.
Table 81 General protection settings

OnLine Relay ON NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
PhsOrd Phase order ABC (0) /CBA (1) enum
LogInSet1 Select Setting group 1 Int32
LogInSet6 Setting change table 6 Int32
FaRepTy Fault reports (Prim./sec.) Secondary (0) / Primary (1) enum
7.3 FRECUENCY, MEASUREMENT AND TRANSFORMERS
The current and voltage transformers are configured in independent nodes, in which the units’ rated values, transformation ratios and
frequencies are indicated.
7.3.1 Current
Two PROT/TCTR nodes are used for the transformation ratios and PROT/TCIN for rated currents.
The settings used for the configuration of the current transformers ratios, which are used to provide primary measurements, are
(see Table 79):
❑ Phase current ratio. Indicates the phase current transformation ratio.

❑ Neutral current ratio. Indicates the neutral current transformation ratio.
❑ Unbalance 1 current. Indicates the unbalance 1 current transformation ratio.
The settings used for configuring the rated currents are (see
Table 83):
❑ I rated phases. Selects the value of the rated phase current.

❑ I rated neutral. Selects the value of the rated neutral current.
❑ I rated unbalance 1 neutral. Selects the value of the rated unbalance 1 neutral current.

User Manual 161
CONFIGURATION 
❑ 3I0-IN measurement type. Selects the neutral measurement from between the measurement calculated for the
phase currents and the transformer measurement.
Table 82 Current transformation ratios

PhsRat Phase current ratio 1 3000 0.1 float
GndRat Neutral current ratio 1 3000 0.1 float
UnbRat1 Unbalance 1 current 1 3000 0.1 float
PolARat Polarization current 1 3000 0.1 float
Table 83 Rated currents

PhsInom I rated phases 1A (1)/ 5A (2) enum
GndInom I rated neutral 1A (1)/ 5A (2) enum
SgndInom I rated unbalance 1 neutral 0.025A (1)/ 1A (2) enum
PolInom I rated unbalance 2 neutralv 0.025A (1)/ 1A (2) enum
Unb3Inom I rated unbalance 3 neutral 0.025A (1)/ 1A (2) enum
SelI0 3I0-IN measurement type Calculated (0)/Trafo (1) enum
7.3.2 Frequency and voltage

The PROT/TVTR node is used for the voltage and rated voltage transformation ratios (see Table 84).
❑ Phase transformation ratio. Indicates the phase voltage transformation ratio.

❑ Rated phase-earth V (V sec). Selects the rated voltage.
❑ Voltage phases used. Selects the voltage phases used in the protection functions. Different phase combinations
(both earth to phase and phase to phase) can be selected:
 None. No voltage is enabled
 A. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase A
 B. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase B
 A-B. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases A and B
 C. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase C
 A-C. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases A and C
 B-C. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases B and C
 A-B-C. The three earth-phase voltage operate
 AB. The AB phase-phase voltage operates
 BC. The BC phase-phase voltage operates
 AB-BC. The AB and BC phase-phase voltage operates
 CA. The CA phase-phase voltage operates
 AB-CA. The AB and CA phase-phase voltage operates
 BC-CA. The BC and CA phase-phase voltage operates
 AB-BC-CA. The three phase-phase voltages operate
If a phase-phase option is selected, the wiring is considered to be P-P. To the contrary, is considered P-N.
❑ Frequency. Selects the unit’s rated operating frequency 50Hz or 60Hz
❑ VN transformation ratio. Indicates the neutral voltage transformer ratio.

User Manual 162
CONFIGURATION 
Table 84 Voltage characteristics

VRat Phase transformation ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
VRtg Rated phase-earth V (V sec) 40 200 0.1 float
VSel Voltage phases used 0 15 1 enum
HzRtg (HzVal in Ed2) Frequency 50Hz (0) /60Hz (1) enum
VNRat VN transformation ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
7.3.3 Power and energy

The PROT/MPWE node, which indicates the conditions for the power calculation, is used (see Table 85):
❑ Change sign P. Indicates if the sign change in the real power calculation is enabled.
❑ Change sign Q. Indicates if the sign change in the reactive calculation is enabled.
❑ Real energy constant. Indicates the real energy impulse factor, i.e., the number of kWh by virtue of which the
counter is incremented by one unit.
❑ Reactive energy constant. Indicates the reactive energy impulse factor, i.e., the number of kWh by virtue of which
the counter is incremented by one unit.
The energy counters value is available in the PROT/MMTR node, with the data:
❑ Positive real energy counter: SupWh.

❑ Negative real energy counter: DmdWh.
❑ Positive reactive energy counter: SupVArh.
❑ Negative reactive energy counter: DmdVArh.
Table 85 Power characteristics

PSiCh Sign change P NO (0) / YES (1) float
QSiCh Sing change Q NO (0) / YES (1) float
CorWh Constant real power (kWh) 1 1000 1 enum
CorVArh Constant reactive power 1 1000 1 enum
7.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The unit can host a variable number of input-output cards variable (from 1 to 7). Each card is configured with an internal address from
2 to 7. The power supply is assigned address 1, which is not configurable.
Each card is represented in the IEC 61850 data model as an instance of the GGIO node in the Logical Device called “GEN”. Each GGIO
has the internal address of the physical card as an instance. Thus, for example, if a unit has two input-output cards with internal
addresses 1 and 4, the GEN/GGIO1 and GEN/GGIO4 nodes will exist in the data model.
The number of digital input settings and signals present in each GGIO depends on the type of card used. Continuing the example, if the
card with the internal address 1 has 6 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs, the GGIO1 node will have 6 digital input signals and 4 digital
output signals, as well as the settings corresponding to each digital input and output available.
The data model associated to the GGIOs is common to all and has 32 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs. Nevertheless, in each card
only the data associated with its own inputs and outputs are updated.
For each GGIO there is a boolean setting called MaskEna (event record enabled). If set to “YES”, the activation/deactivation of the
digital inputs and outputs will generate protection events. To the contrary, they will not be stored as event records.

User Manual 163
CONFIGURATION 
7.4.1 Inputs
There are 2 settings available for each digital input:
❑ DIxTmms: Digital input time x (ms). This is a software filter for the activation/deactivation of digital inputs. It indicates the
milliseconds (range 0 to 20 ms) which a digital input must be seen to be active in order to be considered active. In order to
calculate an input's total activation time, the input’s hardware filter delay – which is approximately 1ms – must be added
to this time.
❑ DIxType: Digital input type x. Defines whether the input is to be interpreted as active when it is seen as closed (NO) or
when it is seen as open (NC)
Each digital input has an associated digital signal indicating its status (see Table 86). Each GGIO indicates the status of all its digital
inputs (up to 32).
Table 86 Digital input signals

Digital input 1 Ind1 stVal
Remaining inputs
7.4.2 Outputs
There are 3 settings available for each digital output:
❑ DOxSig: Assignment digital output x. Assigns the activation of the digital output. There are several assignment possibilities:
 Signals: They can be signals generated by the unit (trips, logics, hw check, digital inputs and outputs)
 Commands: All of the commands available in the unit can be directly programmed to a physical output
❑ DOxTmms: Digital output time x (ms). The output activation time defines the minimum operational time of each physical
output following activation (in milliseconds). The range is 0.05 to 5000 ms. The output remains active in accordance with
this time setting or the duration of the associated signal, whichever is greater.
❑ DOxTyp: Digital output type. Each output’s type is defined from among the options:
 “Not”. The output follows the assigned signal, i.e., the output is activate when the signal is active. When the
signal is deactivated, the output will deactivate if the digital output time has elapsed. To the contrary, the
output will remain active until this time elapses.
 “Stored”. Once activated, the output remains active until the relay deactivation command is issued, with the
signal assigned to the output deactivated. The command can be issued by the action of a digital input
programmed as “Local reset”, a command or by keyboard/display.
 “Trip”. Once activated, the output remains active until the following conditions are met: the signal assigned to
the output is deactivated and the breaker is open.
 “Close”. Once activated, the output remains active until the following conditions are met: the signal assigned
to the output is deactivated and the breaker is closed.
Each digital input has an associated digital signal indicating its status (see Table 85) Each GGIO indicates the status of all its digital
outputs (up to 16).

User Manual 164
CONFIGURATION 
Table 87 Input/output settings

MaskEna Protection event recording enabled NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
OscTms Input oscillation time (s) 1 60 1 Int32
Nchanges Number of changes 0 255 1 Int32
DI1Tmms Digital Input Time 1 (ms) 0 20 1 Int32
DI1Type Digital Input Type 1 NO (0) / NC (1) enum
DI2Tmms Digital Input Time 2 (ms) 0 20 1 Int32
DI2Type Digital Input Type 2 NO (0) / NC (1) enum
Remaining inputs DI3x, DI4x..
DO1Sig Digital Output Assignment 1 Int32
DO1Tmms Minimum Output Time 1 (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
DO1Ty Digital Output Type 1 enum
DO2Sig Digital Output Assignment 2 enum
DO2Tmms Minimum Output Time 2 (ms) 0 5000 1 enum
DO2Ty Digital Output Type 2 Int32
Remaining inputs DI3x, DI4x..
Table 88 Digital output signals

Digital output 1 SPCSO1 stVal
Remaining outputs
7.4.3 Treatment of digital input flicker

Flicker consists of a fast and continuous change of a digital input, usually associated with a failure in the input’s contact. The
function allows a control to be performed to disable the flickering digital inputs or signals in order to prevent them from interfering
with the control system, as a disabled digital does not generate status changes.
The supervising of the swing in the digital inputs or the supervising of the flicker is conducted in accordance with certain user-
configurable settings.
On the one hand, there is a general setting that allows this function to be enabled or disabled. If this setting is disabled, not flicker
treatment is performed.
General setting for the configuration of the flicker treatment (Table 89):
❑ FlickerEna: Enables the digital inputs’ swing supervising function.
Table 89 General flicker treatment setting

FlickerEna Flicker enabled 0 1 1 NO (0) / YES (1) enum
❑ GEN/LLN0 node
Once the general flicker setting has been enabled (Table 89), there are two more setting per card for treating the swing.
They are “OscTms” and “Nchanges” which can be seen in Table 87:
❑ OscTms: The time between changes in the same direction in order for a signal to be deemed to be swinging. When a signal
is swinging a swinging signal is produced. The unit is seconds.
❑ Nchanges: The number of changes that must be produced in a swinging signal in order for the signal to become invalid and
cease from sending changes. If this setting is set to zero, it disables the swing treatment for this card, i.e., the flicker
treatment is not performed for this card.
❑ GEN/GGIOx node, in which x depends on the card’s internal address (see section 7.4)
Once a signal has been detected as swinging, it becomes questionable and oscillatory.

User Manual 165
CONFIGURATION 
If this situation continues and the number of set changes (“Nchanges” setting) is exceed, the signal becomes invalid and oscillatory.
It ceases to send the changes and sends the signal's last known valid status.
When the time difference between two changes is greater than the inputs’ swing time (“OscTms” setting), the signal changes to
valid.
7.5 LEDS
7.5.1 Via GEN/IHMI node

The LEDs are programmed within the IHMI node located in the “GEN” Logical Device. There are 2 settings available for each LED:
❑ LexSig: Assignment led x. Assigns the activation of LED x using any of the signals generated by the unit
❑ LExTyp: LED type x. It can be programmed as “not” and “stored”. In the first case, the activation of the LED follows
the activation of the signal programmed in the setting described above. If it is programmed as “stored”, the LED’s
activation will remain even if the signal that provoked its activation drops out, until the signal programmed in the
LogInReLed setting available in the IHMI node is activated.
There is a general setting for all the LEDs that indicates the logic signal used to switch of the LEDs:
❑ LED reset. Selects the signal which, when active, switches off the LEDs.
The LEDs are updated every 200ms. Thus, for the correct activation of the LEDs, the assigned signal must remain active for at least
150 ms. To the contrary, the LED cannot be activated.
Table 90 LED settings

LogInReLed LED reset Int32
Le1Sig Led 1 assignment 0 20 1 Int32
Le1Ty Led 1 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Le2Sig Led 2 assignment 0 20 1 Int32
Le2Ty Led 2 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Remaining LEDs up to 19
7.5.2 Via CTRL/IHMI node

If the unit, in addition to the “GEN” Logical Device’s IHMI node defined in the previous section, has an IHMI node located in “CTRL”
Logical Device, the unit’s treatment in relation to the configuration of the LEDs differs as follows:
❑ The parameterization of the assignment of LEDs is carried out by the settings present in the CTRL/IHMI node.
❑ The parameterization of the LEDs type is carried out by the settings present in the CTRL/IHMI node.
The settings present in this node are detailed below

InRef1 Led 1 assignment - - - InRef
LEDSe1 Led 1 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
InRef2 Led 2 assignment - - - InRef
LEDSe2 Led 2 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Remaining LEDs up to 19
There are 2 settings available for each LED:
❑ InRefx: Assignment led x. Assings the activation of LED x using any of the signals generated by the unit. The
assignment is carried out by means of a character string (see next section “Configuration with InRef”)
❑ LEDSex: LED type x. It can be programmed as “not” and “stored”. In the first case, the activation of the LED follows
the activation of the signal programmed in the setting described above. If it is programmed as “stored”, the LED’s

User Manual 166
CONFIGURATION 
activation will remain even if the signal that provoked its activation drops out, until the signal programmed in the
LogInReLed setting available in the GEN/IHMI node (defined in the previous section) is activated.
7.6 CONFIGURATION WITH INREF
The InRef type settings are programmed by a string of characters in which the reference of the IEC 61850 object containing the value to
be employed as an input is indicated. The following format, as defined in the part 7.2 of the IEC 61850 standard, is employed:
LDName/LNName.DataObjectName[.SubDataObjectName[. ...]].DataAttributeName
For example,
❑ In order to program InRef1 with the GGIO1 input signal 1, the reference to be written in the InRef is:
GEN/GGIO1.Ind1.stVal
❑ In order to program the PTOC 1 phase A trip, the reference is:
PROT/PTOC1.Op.phsA
7.7 GENERIC COMMAND
Generic commands are available within the Logical Device "GEN" on the ordGGIO1 node, which will be active for 100msg.
The commnad are the following:
❑ SPCS01, Generic command 1

❑ ………..
Are available signals associated with these generic commands, which will be available in logic, output, etc.

Generic command 1 activation Ind1 stVal
--------- stVal
Generic command 1 desactivation Ind17 stVal
--------- stVal
7.8 NAMES
The PROT/LPHD node is used for the general configuration of the units’ names and the installation.
Short names are used for the generation of the disturbance recorder and fault file names.
The settings for this node are shown in Table 91:
❑ Installation name: Full name of the installation.

User Manual 167
CONFIGURATION 
❑ Short name of the installation. Short name of the installation. Limited to 10 characters, this is used in the generation of
disturbance recorder and fault files. Neither spaces nor commas are permitted in the name.
❑ Relay name. Full name of the relay.
❑ Short relay name. Short name of the installation. Limited to 10 characters, this is used in the generation of disturbance
recorder and fault files. Neither spaces nor commas are permitted in the name.
❑ Name of breaker 1. Full name of breaker 1.
❑ Name of breaker 2. Full name of breaker 1.
Table 91 Name settings

InstNam Installation name String
InstShNam Short name of the installation 10 characters String
RelNam Relay name. String
RelShNam Short relay name 10 characters String
BkrNam1 Name of breaker 1 String
BkrNam2 Name of breaker 2 String
7.9 IPRV NODES CONFIGURATION
7.9.1 General IPRV settings

The device has several settings (included in the GEN/genIPRV logical node) to set certain operating modes.
These settings are considered special and they are configurable via an IEC 61850 connection or sending the CID file after editing the
values from pacFactory tool (menu Settings -> IPRV). They do not appear in the display or section pacFactory protection settings.
The settings included in this logical node are:
❑ LocalTim: Allows to force sending local time in IEC 61850 timestamps. It is important to know that this is not normative
because IEC 61850 standard defines that the timestamps must be sent in UTC format. However, with this option the device
is adapted to systems that only use local time. The default value is 0, which indicates the use of UTC. The value 1 indicates
the use of local time.
❑ MaxConn: Sets the maximum number of IEC 61850 connections that are accepted. Limited to a maximum value of 16.
❑ AplicTms: Defines the disconnection timeout at the application level. After this time (in seconds) without receiving any IEC
61850 messages the server automatically closes the connection.
❑ TipoServ: Defines some operation modes of the device.
 Value 0: Default operation mode.
 Value 1: Special operation mode that includes:
 Enable IP checking to validate a new ICD/CID file. If the IP address indicated in the communications section of
the ICD/CID file does not match the address of the device the file is not validated. If the IP address of the
device is changed once the file has been validated, the IEC 61850 server is disabled and waits for the change of
the IP address of the device with the one in the file or to receive a new CID file with the correct IP.
 When a command is received, the value that the device saves in "orIdent" attribute is the IP address from
which the command was sent, regardless of the value that the client sent in the message.
❑ AuthReq: Allows activating the password authentication in the establishment of IEC 61850 connection. The password
received is checked against the one assigned to the user “user61850”.
 The default password for this user is: user61850.
❑ DevGoose: Selects the Ethernet port for GOOSE messages. Any online change of this value requires the reset of the device
and therefore the signal ResetDev is activated.
 Eth1: GOOSE publication and reception enabled on interface ETH1.

User Manual 168
CONFIGURATION 
 Eth2: GOOSE publication and reception enabled on interface ETH2.

 Both (Eth1): Reception on both interfaces (ETH1 and ETH2). Publication is sent by only one configurable
interface for each GOOSE. By default port ETH1.
 Both (Eth2): Reception on both interfaces (ETH1 and ETH2). Publication is sent by only one configurable
interface for each GOOSE. By default port ETH2.
❑ NoGsVlan: Defines the use of the VLAN tag in GOOSE messages. Any change in this value causes the activation of the signal
ResetDev. Default value is 0.
 Value 0: GOOSE messages are sent with VLAN TAG and are received with or without VLAN TAG.
 Value 1: GOOSE messages are sent and received only without VLAN TAG.
❑ IprvMod: Sets the access level to reports, commands and logs from the different IP addresses configured in the IPRV logical
nodes defined in the following paragraph:
 Permissive: By default all IP addresses not configured in the IPRV logical nodes have access to reports,
commands and logs. The IP addresses included in the IPRV logical nodes will have the configured access level.
 Restrictive: Only IP addresses configured in the IPRV logical nodes have access to reports, commands and logs.
The access level is configured individually for each IP address. Other IP addresses do not have access.
❑ IprvConn: The value 1 limits the IEC 61850 connections only to IP addresses configured on IPRV logical nodes and any
connection from other IP address will be rejected. The value 0 allows the connection from any IP address.
Only the settings that indicate the activation of the signal ResetDev require a restart of the device to be effective.
7.9.2 IEC 61850 clients IPRV settings

There are 8 instances of this logical node (GEN/IPRVx) to configure the level access to reports, commands and logs of up to 8 IEC
61850 clients. Each client is identify by its IP address. The available settings for each logical node are:
❑ Addr: IP address of the client.

❑ EnaRpt: Enumerated value to configure the access level to reports from the defined IP address.
 [0] All: Allows access to all reports.
 [1] Yes: Allows access only to the reports defined in RptNam fields.
 [2] No: Not allowed access to any report.
❑ CmdEna: Boolean setting that with value 1 allows the execution of commands from the defined IP address.
❑ EnaLog: Enumerated value to configure the access level to logs from the defined IP address.
 [0] Read only: Only read access to the logs.
 [1] Read/write: Read and write access to the logs.
The signal GEN/IPRVx.St.stVal indicates whether the address configured on that node is in communication with the device. In case
of multiple connections from the same IP, the signal is 0 when all are closed.
These settings are considered special and they are configurable via an IEC 61850 connection or sending the CID file after editing the
values from pacFactory tool (menu Settings -> IPRV). They do not appear in the display or section pacFactory protection settings.
7.10 MEASUREMENT’S RANGE AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION
Measures logical nodes which have the AdRanMea setting have the possibility of the automatic configuration of the measures
ranges (with value 1 in the AdRanMea setting).
AdRanMea settings in different logical nodes are independent. Each logical node can be configured independently.
Only de ranges of measures with a sAddress value are calculated.

User Manual 169
CONFIGURATION 
If the value of AdRanMea setting is 1, the range configuration cannot be modified via IEC 61850 protocol.
The values that are automatically calculated are:
Measures:
❑ rangeC.hhLim.f
❑ rangeC.hLim.f
❑ rangeC.lLim.f
❑ rangeC.llLim.f
❑ rangeC.min.f
❑ rangeC.max.f
Angles:
❑ rangeAngC.hhLim.f
❑ rangeAngC.hLim.f
❑ rangeAngC.lLim.f
❑ rangeAngC.llLim.f
❑ rangeAngC.min.f
❑ rangeAngC.max.f
The calculation is made based on the values of scale range and transformation ratio of each measure as follows:
❑ Signed measures:
❑ max: scale range * transformation ratio
❑ min: - (scale range * transformation ratio)
❑ Unsigned measures
❑ max: scale range * transformation ratio
❑ min: 0
And the value of the factor configured in the multiplier attribute is applied:
❑ If multiplier > 0 it is divided by 10 multiplier

❑ If multiplier < 0 it is multiplied by 10 multiplier
In both cases the limits are configured as:
❑ hLim = max
❑ hhLim = max
❑ lLim = max * 4 / 5
❑ llLim = max * 4 / 5
The rest of the configuration values of each measurement (db, SIUnits, multiplier, dbAng, limDb) are not modified.

User Manual 170
SYNCHRONIZATION 
8. SYNCHRONIZATION
Several synchronization sources are permitted, with the following priority:
❑ IEEE1588v21
❑ IRIG-B
❑ SNTP
❑ Communication protocols
❑ pacFactory (see specific user manual)
❑ Local display
In case of active synchronization with any of the sources, the sources of lower priority are blocked. Some examples:
❑ If there is synchronization by IEEE1588v2, synchronization for any other cause is not permitted. In order to consider the absence of
IEEE1588v2 synchronization and to allow other sources, 1.5 minutes must elapse without synchronization:
 When disabled by setting
 When you lose IEEE 1588v2 communication through the port (synchronization does not arrive)
 When it loses traceability or precision (the master is not synchronized)
❑ If there is synchronization by IRIG, synchronization for any other cause is not permitted. In order to consider the absence of IRIG
synchronization and to allow other sources, 1.5 minutes must elapse without the reception of correct IRIG frames.
❑ If there SNTP synchronization, the synchronization of protocols is not permitted, nor pacFactory nor display. However, if IRIG
synchronization is received, the SNTP is blocked and IRIG is synchronized.
❑ Synchronization by pacFactory and by display have the same priority and can be run simultaneously.
8.1 GENERAL SETTINGS
The unit’s data model has a GEN/LTIM node for the configuring the summer/winter time change. The node has the following settings
(see Table 92):
❑ Offset Local Time-UTC (min): Offset Local Time-UTC (min). A setting that indicates the number of minutes by which the time setting
must be put forward/put back when changing between summer/winter time. Range between -720 and 720 minutes (-12 to + 12
hours)
❑ Summer-winter time change enabled: Time change enabled. A boolean setting that allows the time setting to be changed
❑ Summer Calendar Pattern: Summer Calendar Pattern. Three selectable values:
 Last of month: Last week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 First of month: First week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Second of month: Second week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Third of month: Third week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Fourth of month: Fourth week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Day of month: Selects the day of the month indicated in DayD
❑ Day Week Summer: Indicates the day of the week for the change to summer time (Monday.. Sunday)
❑ Month Summer: Indicates the month in which the change to summer time occurs (January.. December)
❑ Day Summer: Indicates the day in which the change to summer time occurs (1.. 31)
❑ Time Summer: Indicates the time at which the time changes to summer time
❑ Minute Summer: Indicates the minute (within the time set on HrD) when the time changes to summer time
❑ Winter Calendar Pattern: Winter Calendar Pattern. Equivalent to OccD but from winter to summer
1
Available from firmware version 6.0.18.0
User Manual 171
SYNCHRONIZATION 
❑ Day Week Winter: Indicates the day of the week for the change to winter time (Monday.. Sunday)
❑ Month Winter: Indicates the month in which the change to winter time occurs (January.. December)
❑ Day Winter: Indicates the day in which the change to winter time occurs (1.. 31)
❑ Time Winter: Indicates the time at which the time changes to winter time
❑ Minute Winter: Indicates the minute (within the time set on HrS) when the time changes to winter time
❑ Not Synchro Time (min): Timeout to activate synchronization alarm.
Table 92 Synchronization settings

TmOfsTmm Offset Local Time-UTC (min) -720 720 1 Int32
TmUseDT Summer-winter time change enabled NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
OccD Summer Calendar Pattern 0 2 1 enum
WkDayD Day Week Summer 0 6 1 enum
MthD Month Summer 1 12 1 enum
DayD Day Summer 1 31 1 Int32
HrD Time Summer 0 23 1 Int32
MnD Minute Summer 0 59 1 Int32
OccS Winter Calendar Pattern 0 2 1 enum
WkDayS Day Week Winter 0 6 1 enum
Mths Month Winter 1 12 1 enum
DayS Day Winter 1 31 1 Int32
HrS Time Winter 0 23 1 Int32
MnS Minute Winter 0 59 1 Int32
SyncAlmTm Not Synchro Time (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
There are signals indicating the synchronization source (Table 93):
❑ Synchronization by IEEE1588: Active when the device is synchronized by IEEE1588. It is maintained activated for 90 seconds after
an IEEE1588 synchronization.
❑ Synchronization by IRIG-B: Active when the device is synchronized by IRIG-B. It is maintained activated for 90 seconds after an IRIG-
B synchronization.
❑ SNTP synchronization: Active when the device is synchronized by SNTP. It is maintained activated the period defined by not synchro
timeout SNTP setting (ValTm) after an SNTP synchronization.
❑ Synchronization by protocols: Active if the last synchronization was been received by communications protocols.
❑ Synchronization by display: Active if the last synchronization was been received by the front keyboard.
❑ Synchronization by console: Active if the last synchronization has been received from the PacFactory console.
❑ Device not synchronized: Synchronization alarm. Active if a valid synchronization (IRIG-B, SNTP or protocols) has not been received
during the timeout configured by the not synchro time setting (SyncAlmTm).
❑ Daylight saving time: Active if the local time has summer correction.
Table 93 Synchronization source

Synchronization by IEEE1588 SyncPTP stVal
Synchronization by IRIG-B SyncIRIGB stVal
Synchronization by SNTP SyncSNTP stVal
Synchronization by protocols SyncProt stVal
Synchronization by display SyncDispl stVal
Synchronization by console SyncCons stVal
Device not synchronized SyncAlm stVal
Daylight saving time TmDT stVal

User Manual 172
SYNCHRONIZATION 
8.2 IEEE 1588V2
The IEEE Std. 1588-2008, also known as IEEE 1588v2 or PTPv2, offers a good solution for clock synchronization in distributed systems
with high accuracy requirements. It works through Ethernet networks and achieves accuracy in the submicrosecond range.
Ingepac EF IEDs support IEEE 1588v2 and specifically the IEC 61850-9-3:2016 Ed1, also nown as Power Utility Profile (PUP), which allows
compliance with the highest synchronization classes of IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61869-9.
Following the IEC 61850-9-3:2016 Ed1 profile:
❑ The PTP over IEEE 802.3 transport mapping, specified in Annex F of IEEE 1588v2, shall be the only transport mechanism used.
❑ The peer delay request mechanism specified in Chapter 11.4 and Annex J.4 of IEEE 1588v2 shall be the only path delay
measurement mechanism in operation.
Ingepac EF IEDs support IEEE 62439-3:2016 Ed 3 Annex A when 1588 synchronization over PRP or HSR is needed.
8.2.1 Settings
There are 3 settings to set up IEEE 1588v2. They all belong to the GEN/LTMS logical node described in 1.4.1.
❑ Main Time Source: The string “1588” must be set up in this setting in order to enable 1588v2.
❑ PTP interface: This setting specifies the interface in which the IED will listen to IEEE 1588v2 messages.
❑ PTP delay mechanism: The Mechanism used peer to peer (P2P).
8.3 IRIG-B
The device is equipped with an input for synchronization by GPS, using IRIG-B time codes (consult chapter 2 for more details about the
input).
The supported IRIG-B formats are B002, B003, B006, B007 and IEEE1344. The configuration is with the IrgType setting in the GEN\LLN0
logical node (General configuration). The different options are (depending on whether the GPS send UTC or local time):
❑ “UTC without year”. The year is not taken into account and all the formats are admitted.
❑ “UTC with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used with formats
B002 and B003 because they set the year to zero value.
❑ “Local without year”. The year is not taken into account. All the formats are admitted.
❑ “Local with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used with formats
B002 and B003 because they set the year to zero value.
8.4 SNTP
The available implementation of the SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is based on the points described in RFC5905. To improve the
accuracy of the synchronization and to take into account the possible delays introduced by the network, the "On-Wire" protocol, which
is described within the RFC itself, is used.
This correction algorithm uses four timestamps numbered from T1 to T4, with the timestamp of sending or receiving each message, to
calculate the offset that is required to apply to the time of the equipment after sending each synchronization request.

User Manual 173
SYNCHRONIZATION 
The following image shows in a general way the synchronization scheme:
The time offset obtained using this calculation is the deviation to be applied in the SNTP client clock to obtain the time of the SNTP
server that synchronizes it. It is a valid method for both LAN networks as well as for WAN networks that have higher response times.
The SNTP settings are included in the LTMS logical node.
Note: There is an optional configuration mode with the SNTP-IP value in the communications section of the ICD file, which is
maintained for backward compatibility with previous configuration files. The IED only uses that option if no configuration is included in
the LTMS node. Nevertheless, the recommended configuration option is through the LTMS node settings.
8.4.1 Settings
The SNTP settings are in the GEN/LTMS logical node:
❑ Main Time Source: IP address of the main NTP server. Broadcast addresses are not allowed. Value 0.0.0.0 disables the
main source.
❑ Secondary Time Source: IP address of the secondary NTP server. Broadcast addresses are not allowed. Value 0.0.0.0
disables the secondary source.
❑ Not Synchro time SNTP (min): Elapsed time in which it has not been received any correct SNTP response (the checked
fields are detailed below) from any of the sources configured for SNTP synchronization to consider the SNTP as not
synchronized. Range value is 1 to 1440 min.
❑ SNTP Polling Time (seg): Time interval between synchronization requests to the NTP servers. Range value is 10 to 3600
seconds. If the configured time is less than the real polling communication process (requests and retries in case of failure)
the synchronization active request will finish normally and a new polling timer will be started.
❑ SNTP Time delay Unicast message (seg): Waiting time for the response to an unicast synchronization request. If no
response is received in that time interval a unicast request retry cycle will be started. Range value is 1 to 60 seg.
❑ Retry number: Number of unicast request retries in case there is no response from the NTP server to a request. If the
configured number of retries finishes without response with the main source the device tries to synchronize with the
secondary source. If the configured number of retries finishes without response with the secondary source that
synchronization process is finished and the device waits the polling period to send a new request. Range value is 0 to 9.
❑ PTP interface: This setting specifies the interface in which the IED will listen to IEEE 1588v2 messages.
❑ PTP delay mechanism: This settings specifies which delay Mechanism to use: peer to peer (P2P) or end to end (E2E) delay
mechanism.
(*) Available from firmware version 6.3.20.0, the necessary settings to enable and configure symmetric key authentication in SNTP
requests:
❑ SNTP authentication: This setting enables the authentication in SNTP messages based on the keys file configured.
❑ SNTP key: The number of the key used for the authentication. It shall match with the value configured in the SNTP server
used as synchronization source.

User Manual 174
SYNCHRONIZATION 
Table 94 SNTP settings LTMS node

TmSrcSet1 Main Time Source IP address VisString255
TmSrcSet2 Secondary Time Source IP address VisString255
ValTm Not Synchro timeout SNTP (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
PollTms SNTP Polling Time (seg) 10 3600 1 Int32
EspTms SNTP Time delay Unicast message (seg) 1 60 1 Int32
NRetry Retry number 0 9 1 Int32
PTPIface PTP Interface 1 2 1 Eth1/Eth2 enum
PTPDelM PTP delay mechanism 0 1 1 P2P / E2P enum
SNTPAuth SNTP authentication (*) NO / YES Boolean
TrustedKey SNTP key (*) 1 65535 1 Int32
The keys file is configurable from the website2, and it shall be shared between the IED and the SNTP server. The following key types are
supported by the IED:
❑ MD5
❑ SHA
❑ SHA1
❑ RIPEMD160
To provide additional information, a digital signal and a counter have been added with data about the status of the SNTP
authentication:
❑ AuthCfgErr: Configuration error boolean signal. Indicates that there is some type of error in the configuration of the keys
file or in the selected settings. In this case, the IED sends SNTP requests without authentication so it can be synchronized.
❑ AuthRspErr: Counter with the number of not authenticated responses or with authentication failure. When this occurs, the
response obtained is discarded and the device is not synchronized. This counter is increased in case of:
 The SNTP server rejected the request (because the key was not configured or the expected signed value did
not match).
 The received authentication is not considered valid (the calculated signed value does not match the expected
one).
The following diagram details the synchronization process:
2
Available from firmware version 6.5.22.0

User Manual 175
SYNCHRONIZATION 
The following values are checked in the synchronization responses to consider them valid and apply the time to the internal clock:
❑ Message length.
❑ Flags mode: Server.
❑ Flags version number: NTP version 4.
❑ Flags leap indicator: Different from 3.
From the following firmware versions of Ingepac EF these checks are also available:
 Ingepac EF version 6.1.18.5:

❑ Flags version number: NTP version 3 or 4.
❑ Valid stratum value: Between 1 and 15.
❑
 Ingepac EF version 6.3.20.0:
❑ The origin timestamp received in the response packet must match with the transmitted timestamp on the request.

User Manual 176
SYNCHRONIZATION 
8.5 QUALITY FLAGS IEC 61850
In the IEC 61850 data there are quality flags which detail the validity of the time in a timestamp sent by communications. These are the
used quality flags:
❑ Clock Not Synchronized: Active jointly with the synchronization failure alarm.
❑ Leap Second: It is activated if the synchronization source provides this data. Active for SNTP, IRIG-B and 1588.
❑ Clock Failure: Active jointly with the failure of the internal RTC clock.

User Manual 177
DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS 
9. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS

The information generated by the unit is stored in xml format files, except the format of the oscillography, which is stored in comtrade
format.
9.1 STATUS REPORT
The status report indicates the current status of the protection, showing instantaneous values. This report is updated approximately
every 1 second.
The information available in the status message is:
❑ Version. Indicates the unit version:

 CPU: Shows the CPU’s main firmware version.
 CPU2: Shows the firmware version of the FPGA and interface with I/O modules.
 OTHER: Shows the analogue card's firmware and I/O modules.
 Only in models with sampled values reception modules:
 SV: Shows the module main firmware version
 SV-FPGA: Shows the firmware version of the FPGA.
❑ General. Displays the unit’s general data:
 Relay date and time. Within the <Date> tag, the date (Date) and time (Time) are shown.
 Active table. Within the <Setting Group> tag, the active table number is shown.
❑ Measurements: Within the Measurements tag, the unit’s measurements are shown. The measurements correspond to
the fundamental frequency.
 <Analog>: Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12 transformers.
 <Sequence>: Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).
 <Power>: Total real, reactive and apparent power.
 <Frequency>. Frequency value.
 <Battery> External power supply battery voltage.
 <InternalBattery> Internal battery voltage for maintenance of Data.
 <Maximeter>. Indicates the maximeter value for each current and voltage phase. It has a “Reset” button.
 <Thermal>. Phase and neutral thermal image value. It also has a “Reset” button.
 <Temperature> Indicates the unit’s temperature.
 The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases.
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 End measures. For each end, indicates the fundamental and 2° harmonic of the total currents (module and
angle) of the three phases.
 Total current. Indicates the total current of the three phases. Only in 52 ½ configurations.
 The TD models show information of:
 2° to 5th harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 Sequences of current, maximeter and thermal image are independent of each winding.
 The CB models show information of:

User Manual 178
 <CapacitorBank.> Indicate the input measurements to capacitor bank connect/disconnection automatism, voltage
and reactive.
❑ Input and output status. The status of the digital inputs and outputs is indicated in each of the cards available in the unit.
Each card is distinguished by its address, indicated in GGIO1 to GGIO8.
 Digital inputs. Ind1.stVal to Ind32.stVal indicate “Y” if enabled and “N” if not. There are as many values as there are
inputs in the card.
 Digital outputs. SPCSO1.stVal to SPCSO16.stVal indicate “Y” if enabled and “N” if not. There are as many values as
there are outputs in the card.
❑ Protection units. Indicates the current status of each of the functions: enabled, pick up, trip and last trip. In each of the
functions the data available in each node are indicated.
 Status. In <StEna.stVal>, the function is indicated as active and not blocked with “Y”. “N” is used to indicate that the
function is not enabled or blocked or in operation
 Pick up. Indicates in <Str> whether the unit is picked up “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example, for
phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Activation. Indicates in <Op> whether the unit is tripped “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example, for
phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Last trip. Indicated within <l>. “Y” is used to indicate if the last trip was due to this cause, whilst "N" is used to indicate
otherwise.
❑ Recloser status: Indicates the current status of the recloser. The signals are in <RREC1>. “Y” is used to indicate active
signals, whereas "N" is used to indicate inactive signals. The available signals and their references are indicated in the
recloser section. These include:
 in service/blocked.
 in stand-by.
 ongoing cycle, indicating the closure cycle that is currently active.
 definitive trip.
 internal block, distinguishing different causes.
 External block.
 “Put Into Service and “Put Out of Service” buttons
❑ Frequency recloser status: Indicates the current status of the frequency recloser. The signals are in <FRREC1>. “Y” is used
to indicate active signals, whereas "N" is used to indicate inactive signals. The available signals and their references are
indicated in the frequency recloser section.
❑ Synchronism check unit status. The general status of the synchronism is displayed in RSYN1 and the presence of voltage in
RVRS1. “Y” is used indicated active signals and "N" for inactive signals. The available signals and their references are
indicated in the synchronism section.
❑ In CB models (Capacitor Bank): Status of capacitor bank connect/disconnection automatism. Indicates the actual state of
automatism. The signals are in <ZCAP>, indicating for each of the signals if is active "Y" or no "N". In the section of
capacitor bank automatism are indicated available signals and their reference, among which are:
 Automatism Status
 Trip Block 86
 Reactive Converter Fail
 Manoeuvre Inhibit for each breaker
 Excesive Manoeuvre
 Open command
 Period type (Rush, Off-peak, Normal)
 Season
❑ Protection status. With the “PROT” data in LLN0, “Y” indicates whether the relay is in service, “N” indicates if the relay is
out of service.
❑ General status. Indicated in LLN0 with the “GEN” data, in which the following is indicated:

User Manual 179
 Unit hw status. Indicating if there is failure "Y" or "N".

 Local/remote mode. Indicating if it is local, "Y" or "N".
 Events pending dispatch. Indicating if there is an event pending dispatch, "Y" or "N".
 Failure in IRIG synchronization. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 V2 and Vn voltage monitoring. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 Check on internal communication between cards. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
❑ Open pole logic status. Shown in POPD1, indicating:
 StEna.stVal. Indicates whether the function is enabled, “Y” or “N”.
 OpenPole. For each pole and general, indicating whether open “Y” or closed “N”
 Number of open poles. One (OneOpPole), two (TwoOpPole), three (ThreeOpPol) or at least one (OpenPole)
 Broken conductor. Indicating whether the phase is broken for each of the poles, “Y” or “N”.
 Deal line. Indicating whether there is a dead line for each of the poles, “Y” or “N”.
❑ Breaker status. Shown in XCBR. There is independent information of every breaker, indicating:
 BrDISt. For each pole and general, the status of the associated digital input: closed “Y”, open “N”.
 CloseOrdBr. For each pole and general, the status of the closure command: active “Y”, inactive “N”.
 OpenOrdBr. For each pole and general, the status of the opening command: active “Y”, inactive “N”.
 ClsFailBr. For each pole and general, indicating whether there has been a failure in the closure command, “Y” or “N”
 OpenFailBr. For each pole and general, indicating whether there has been a failure in the opening command, “Y” or
“N”
❑ Breaker monitoring status. Shown in CBOU1, indicating the value of the ki2 sum for each pole.
❑ Monitoring units.
 CCTS1. CT monitoring. There is function enabled data (StEna.stVal) and CT monitoring activation data (CTSpv.general)
 CTSU1. Temperature monitoring. There is a function enabling data (StEna.stVal) and an indication of the temperature
above (OverTemp) and below (UnderTemp) the threshold.
 CESS1. External power supply monitoring. Indication of external power supply above (OverVcc) or below (UnderVcc)
the threshold. Also indicates whether the function is enabled or not (StEna.stVal).
 CSUS1. Indicates battery failure status (DFFA), if it is activated “Y" or deactivated “N”.
The status data are displayed on the PacFactory console and in the unit's display:
❑ PacFactory. All the status message information is displayed, grouped in tabs according to the information:
 General. The date, active table, versions and measurements are displayed.
 I/O. The digital inputs and outputs are displayed.
 Enabled. Indicates whether the units are operative (enabled and not blocked) or not.
 Protection status. The status of the protection units is displayed, i.e., if they are picked up and/or tripped.
 Breaker and monitoring. The breaker, breaker monitoring and circuits statuses are displayed.
 Recloser, synchronism or capacitor bank. The status of the recloser, synchronism or capacitor bank units is displayed.
 Check. The results of the various checks that are carried out in the unit are displayed.
❑ Display. Grouped into several screens and displaying:
 General: Date and active table.
 Transformer measurements and configuration.
 Current and voltage maximeters.
 I/O. The digital inputs and outputs are displayed.

User Manual 180
Figure 78 PacFactory status screen
9.2 PRIMARY MEASUREMENTS REPORT
This report indicates the measurement transformers’ primary measurements, applying the transformer ratio. The maximeter
information is used for the maximeter reports.
The information available in the measurements message is:
❑ Distance. In the <Distance> tag, indicating the distance of the last fault.
❑ Currents. Within the <Currents> tag, showing the rms current measurements in primary:
 Earth-phase.
 The module and angle of each phase, neutral and sensitive neutral.
 The average current module of the three phases.
 THD of each phase, neutral and sensitive neutral.
 Thermal image <Thermal>. Value of phase and neutral thermal image.
 Sequences <Sequence>. Current sequences module (I0, I1, I2)
❑ Voltages Within the <Voltage> tag, showing the rms voltage measurements in primary:
 Earth-phase.
 The module and angle of each phase and neutral.
 The average voltage module of the three phases.
 THD of each phase and neutral.
 Phase-phase <Phase>.
 Phase pair module (AB, BC and CA) and average.
❑ Sequences. Voltage sequences module (V0, V1, V2)
 Frequency. Frequency value.
 Powers. Within the <Power> tag, showing the rms measurements for each phase and total:
 Real power. Per phase and total.

User Manual 181
 Reactive power. Per phase and total.

 Apparent power. Per phase and total.
 Power factor <Power Factor>. Per phase and average.
 Energy counters <Energy>. There is a reset button for the energy counters.
 Last reset command date
 Positive and negative real energy counter value
 Positive and negative reactive energy counter value
❑ Maximeters. Shows the maximum value and the date on which it was produced. There is a reset button for the
maximeter.
 Current. For each phase.
 Voltage. For each phase.
 Real power. For phase and total.
 Reactive power. For phase and total.
 Apparent power. For phase and total.
Figure 79 PacFactory measurements screen
9.3 FAULT REPORT
The fault reports include information about the unit’s data during the fault, as well as the active settings during the fault. The last 20
faults are stored in a non-volatile memory.
The name of the file uses the standard IEEE C37.232-2007, using the fields:
Start Date, Start Time, Time Code, Station Identifier, Device Identifier, Company Name
For example, “100626, 46702262,+2h30t,Substation,Rele1,Ingeteam”, which means:
❑ Start Date: Trip date with a 2-character format for the year, the month and the day. For example, 26/june/2010 would be 100626.
❑ Start Time: Indicates the milliseconds as of 00:00 of the day, that is, milliseconds as of midnight.

User Manual 182
❑ Time Code: Indicates the time zone amplitude sign, and can indicate minutes if necessary. For example, “t +2” indicates time zone
2, while “+2 h30t” indicates that the time zone is 2 hours 30 minutes.
❑ Station Identifier. Indicates the substation name. The installation’s short name (InsShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is used"
❑ Device Identifier. Indicates the unit’s name. The relay’s short name (RelShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is used"
❑ Company Name. Indicates the name of unit’s manufacturer, in this case, Ingeteam.
The information available in the fault is:
❑ Date and time: <Fecha>. Indicates the date as a string in the “dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.ms” format, i.e., “23/04/09 10_41_30_256”.
There are three dates available
 Start of the fault (first unit picked up): <Inicio>
 Trip (first unit tripped): <Disparo>.
 End of fault (when the trip signal disappears): <Fin>
❑ Configuration: <Config>. Indicates the configuration of each of the 12 transformers: type and scale range.
❑ Pre-fault and fault. Indicates the values measured before the fault and upon the fault. They are grouped into “Pre-fault” and
“Fault”, and the same data is available in both cases:
 Transformer measurements <Analog>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of each transformer.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the current sequences (I0, I1 and I2) and the voltage
(V0, V1 and V2).
 Powers. Indicates the measurements of the total real, reactive and apparent powers.
 The LD models show information of:
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 End measures. For each end, indicates the fundamental and 2° harmonic of the total currents (module and
angle) of the three phases.
 The TD models show information of:
 Sequences of current, maximeter and thermal image are independent of each winding.
❑ Distance to fault.
❑ Frequency in the moment of the fault.
❑ Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
❑ Fault max. Maximum values of the current channels and I0 during the fault.
❑ Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault.
 Open current. For each phase, indicates the current value upon the trip.
 Sigma ki. For each phase, indicates the sigma ki2 value.
 Num. reclose. Number of recloser performances.
❑ Fault and trip type <Tipo/Type>: Summary of the fault with the 3-letter code formed by combinations of the characters A, B, C, N,
NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF (differential), RG (restricted earth), RTP (teleprotection),
IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV
(undervoltage), RTP (teleprotection), DT (transferred trip), DP (pole discordance), v/f (overexcitation v/f), IT (thermal image).
Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Fault type: Indicates the pick up type.
 Trip type: Indicates the trip type.
❑ Details of units. Indicates the picked up and tripped units. Indicates whether the unit is active “Y” or not “N” for each logical node
available in the unit.

User Manual 183
 Pick up. Indicates in <Str> whether the unit is picked up “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example, for phase A
it would be Str.phsA.
 Activation. Indicates in <Op> whether the unit is tripped “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example, for phase
A it would be Str.phsA.
❑ Active settings. Active settings in the moment of the fault. Indicates the setting file name. It can be accessed to consult the settings.
Figure 80 PacFactory fault screen
9.4 INCIDENT REPORT
The unit stores in a queue of 1000 non-simultaneous protection events in a non-volatile memory. Each protection event is recorded
with its date and time, as well as the current and voltage measurements of all the transformers and the frequency.
The protection events can be masked individually, so that only protection events configured by the user are generated. These enablings
are available in the GEN/RSUC node.
The information available in each record is:
❑ Date: With a resolution of one millisecond.

❑ Information. Within the <Inf> tag the protection event signal number and its status 0 (Deactivation) / 1 (Activation) are
indicated. Each protection event record can have up to 16 simultaneous signals.
❑ Measurements. The transformer measurements at the time of the protection event (module and angle) and frequency
measurement are shown for each of the unit’s transformers.
❑ The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.

User Manual 184
Figure 81 Example of protection event record
<Reg Fecha="15-06-10 21:50:38:792">

<Inf Sen="8426" Status="1"/>
<Inf Sen="8433" Status="0"/>
<Med>
<T1 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T2 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T3 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T4 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T5 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T6 Mod="0.00" Arg="38.10"/>
<T7 Mod="31.68" Arg="58.53"/>
<T8 Mod="99.94" Arg="-62.01"/>
<T9 Mod="99.95" Arg="178.00"/>
<T10 Mod="31.67" Arg="58.54"/>
<T11 Mod="99.98" Arg="-62.02"/>
<T12 Mod="99.94" Arg="178.00"/>
<FRE Hz="50.00"/>
</Med>
</Reg>
Figure 82 PacFactory protection event screen
9.5 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT
The unit saves a queue of historical measurement reports in the non-volatile memory. Depending on the registered measurements,
4000 or 1000 registers are available.
Each record includes the maximum, minimum and average currents of each measurement, calculated within a programmable time
window, detected during a programmable recording period. The measurements are secondary.
The historical measurement report is grouped into records in which the first corresponds to the oldest and the last to most recent, so
that when the file is opened, the first item we see is the oldest.
The format of this file for each record is:
❑ Record number
❑ Date: With second precision: Day and Time
❑ Measurements: Maximum/minimum/average magnitude values:
The settings employed by this unit are in the PROT/MHRE node:

User Manual 185
❑ Sample time window. Indicates the time in minutes during which the average is calculated
❑ Record interval. Indicates the time in minutes in which each record is created
❑ Start time. Indicates the time after which the historical measurement record is started
❑ End time. Indicating the time up to which the historical measurements record is carried out
❑ Calendar mask. Indicates whether the historical measurements record is created every day (YES) or if it is only created on
the days indicated in the day selection mask.
❑ Day selection. It indicated, for each day of the week, whether the record was created.
❑ Register mode3. Selects between standard or extended:
 Standard. It saves 4000 registers, with máximum, mínimum and average of the mean currents and voltages, real,
reactive and apparent power, frequency and external power supply.
 Extended. Extended number of measures. It saves 1000 registers, with máximum, mínimum and average of the phase
and neutral currents, phase voltages, current and voltage sequences, real, reactive and apparent power, power factor
and the result of 10 measurements data logics AutGGIO.AnIn.
The units of the measurements are:
❑ Current. The units are secondary amps.

❑ Voltage. The units are secondary volts.
❑ Real power. The units are secondary watts.
❑ Reactive power. The units are secondary VAR.
❑ Apparent power. The units are secondary VA.
❑ Frequency. Units are Hz.
❑ External power supply. The units are volts.
Table 95 Historical measurement settings
Data Setting Min. Max Step Remarks Type

SmTmm Sample time window 1 15 1 minutes uint32
RegIntTmm Record interval 1 1440 minutes uint32
StH Start time 0 23 1 uint32
EndH End time 0 23 1 uint32
DayEna Calendar mask YES/NO Boolean
SunEna Selection Sunday YES/NO Boolean
MonEna Selection Monday YES/NO Boolean
TueEna Selection Tuesday YES/NO Boolean
WedEna Selection Wednesday YES/NO Boolean
ThuEna Selection Thursday YES/NO Boolean
FriEna Selection Friday YES/NO Boolean
SatEna Selection Saturday YES/NO Boolean
RegType Register mode Standard / Extended Boolean
3
Available from firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.3.0.0. Previous versions is fixed “Standard”.

User Manual 186
Figure 83 Example of records
<REG Num="0" Day="18/04/10" Time="00:00:37">
<I_A Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<V_V Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<P_W Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<Q_VAR Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<S_VA Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<f_Hz Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<Batery_V Max="120.51" Min="120.51" Media="120.51"/>
</REG>
9.6 STATISTICAL DATA REPORT
Displays the statistical data calculated in the unit: currents, action times and counters. It has reset buttons.
The values available are:
❑ The current statistics are grouped in the <Current> tag and include:
 <ki2> Ki2 accumulated by each of the 3 phases. Each phase can be independently reset to the initial value.
 <Cut> Opened current. Indicates the last (Last) and maximum (Maximum) open current per phase
❑ The counters are grouped in the <Counters> tag and include:
 <Reclose> Reclosure counter. Indicates the number of reclosures effected, separating them according to first, second,
third and fourth reclosure. There is a command for resetting the counter.
 <Openings>. Opening counter for each of the 3 phases, includes trips and manual openings. There are commands for
resetting each phase's counter and a global counter for all the phases.
 <Trip>. Trip counter for each of the 3 phases. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter and a global
counter for all the phases.
 <Close>. Closure counter for each of the 3 phases. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter and a global
counter for all the phases.
❑ The timers are grouped in the <Timers> tag and include:
 <Opening>. Indicates the electric (Electrical) and mechanical (Mechanical) opening times in milliseconds per phase
(maximum, average and last) and the dispersion for each pair of phases (maximum, average and last).
 <Close>. Indicates the electric (Electrical) and mechanical (Mechanical) closure times in milliseconds per phase
(maximum, average and last) and the dispersion for each pair of phases (maximum, average and last).
 <Inactivity> Indicates the days of breaker inactivity for each phase.
❑ There are commands to reset:
 Opening and close times
 Inactivity days
 Dispersion times.
❑ There is a command for the complete reset of each breaker: opening, trip and close counters, ki2, cut current and times.
The reclose counter is not reset.
❑ Models with two breakers, current, counters and times are independent for each breaker.
❑ <Time> Indicates the time in seconds during which the current has been within specific ranges.
 From 2 to 5 times In

User Manual 187
 From 5 to 12.5 times In

 From 12.5 to 20 times In
 From 20 to 40 times In
Figure 84 PacFactory statistics screen
9.7 MAXIMETER/MINIMETER REPORT
Displays the maximum and minimum values integrated in the time. It has buttons to individually reset the maximeters and/or
minimeters.
The Data displayed are:
❑ Each phase’s current

❑ Each phase’s voltage
❑ Real power per phase and total
❑ Reactive power per phase and total
❑ Apparent power per phase and total
❑ Frequency
❑ External battery measurement

User Manual 188
Figure 85 PacFactory maximeter/minimeter screen
9.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
The oscillography is stored in binary comtrade format. There is a CFG config file and a DAT data file for each.
For additional information see on “IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power Systems”.
It allows 16 analogue signals:
❑ 12 analogue inputs from the transformers (current and voltages)

❑ 4 frequency measurements4 (V phase B, V synchronism, frequency 2Va-Vb-Vc, V synchronism 24)
❑ External battery used as the power supply of the equipment
❑ LD models show the differential and restraint currents of the three phases.
It allows up to 1504 digital signals, selected among all the signal of the equipment.
The trigger signals are selected among the registered signals, when the set “Trigger Signal” is set to “YES”. If it is set to “NO”, that signal
is registered but does not start the oscillography.
The length is set in cycles (Total Duration), from 20 up to 420 cycles (8,4 seconds for 50Hz and 7 seconds for 60Hz).
Pre-fault duration (cycles) indicates the pre-fault cycles that are stored in each disturbance recorder prior to the trigger, being able to
vary between 1 and 415 cycles.
The number of samples can be selected among the options of the following table. Depending on the device and ICD used, the number
of the samples per cycle is different to adapt to the different devices. The relationship between them is shown in the following table
4
Available since firmware version 6.0.18.2 and ICD 8.2.0.0. Up to that version there are 100 digital signals and 3 frequencies

User Manual 189
Table 96 Options of samples per cycle
Equivalent Conventional Sampled values Sampled values

Setting5
setting Devices 80/cycle 96/cycle
Full 144 144 80 96
1 de 2 72 72 40 48
1 de 3 48 48 40 32
1 de 4 36 36 20 24
1 de 6 24 24 20 16
1 de 9 16 16 20 16
The continuous mode allows increasing the length if at the end of the register there is a trigger signal activated. In that case, the
register continues the number of cycles set in the “Total Duration (cycles)”, checking again the trigger signals at the end of the new
register. The total register is limited to 5Mb or 3 times the setting “Total Duration (cycles)” (the most restrictive of both).
In order for the trigger signal to act, it has to change the status, that is, it has to pass from deactivated to activated. If one trigger signal
is continuously activated, it does not start, nor extend the oscillography register.
The digital signals set to “NO” in the “Trigger signal” setting are displayed, but do not start, nor extend the oscillography register.
The oscillography allows to display signals that do not start the register. For example, the protection trip signal can initialize an
oscillography register, where the start signals are displayed. Table 97 shows an example of an oscillography configuration, with 11
digital signals registered but only three signals start the register (General trip, 51 trip and GGIO1 Digital input 1). At the end of the
register, if one of these three signals, continues activated, the oscillography is extended the cycles set in “Total Duration (cycles)”;
otherwise the oscillography is finished.
Table 97 Oscillography configuration example
Settings Value
Recorded signal 01 General trip
Trigger Signal 01 YES
Recorded signal 02 General start
Trigger Signal 02 NO
Recorded signal 03 51 start
Recorded signal 04 51 trip
Señal registrada oscilo 05 IOC1 Trip phase A
Recorded signal 06 IOC1 Trip phase B
Recorded signal 07 IOC1 Trip phase C
Recorded signal 08 IOC1 Start phase A
Recorded signal 09 IOC1 Start phase B
Recorded signal 10 IOC1 Start phase C
Recorded signal 11 GGIO1Digital input 1
10Mb of non volatile memory is available to store oscillography registers. The total number of registers depends on the settings. Table
98 shows some examples of the capacity (with the continuous mode set to “NO”), where the most influential settings are the length
and the number of samples.
5
Available since ICD version 8.1.0.18

User Manual 190
Table 98 Oscillography capacity
Total Duration
Number of samples/cycle Number of digital signals Number of oscillographys
(cycles)
420 144 100 3
420 144 32 3
420 36 100 13
420 36 32 15
50 144 100 27
50 144 32 32
50 36 100 98
50 36 32 121
20 144 100 34
20 144 32 78
20 36 100 206
20 36 32 271
20 16 100 350
20 16 32 499
The settings employed by this unit are in the PROT/RDRE node:
❑ Total Duration (cycles). Indicates the total duration of disturbance recorder (in cycles).
❑ Pre-fault duration (cycles). Indicates the pre-fault cycles that are stored in each disturbance recorder
❑ Number of samples/cycle. Indicates the samples per cycle stored in the disturbance recorder.
❑ Recorded signal X. Indicates the signal that is stored in record position X. If programmed as -1, no signals are recorded.
❑ Trigger X signal. If the signal is configured, it indicates whether it provokes a disturbance recorder pick up (1) or not (0). If
set to “No”, it is only displayed.
The trigger and recorded signals are repeated up to 100 possible signals.
Table 99 Oscillography settings
Data Setting Min. Max Step Remarks Type

OscCyc Total Duration (cycles) 20 420 1 cycles Int32
PreCyc Prefault duration (cycles) 1 415 1 cycles Int32
NuSaCy Number of samples/cycle enum
OscReg1 Recorded signal 1 Int32
OscTrg1 Trigger 1 signal 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
OscReg2 Recorded signal 2 Int32
OscTrg2 Trigger 2 signal 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
Recorded signal and trigger up to 1504 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
The disturbance record configuration file (CFG) contains the general disturbance recorder information (Figure 86):
❑ Total number of analogue and digital channels available in the disturbance recorder.
❑ Analogue channel data: bay, identification, measurements scaled (multiplier "a", offset "b") and limits (maximum and
minimum).
The real value of the signal, using the value of the sample is "a·sample + b".
❑ Indication that samples are secondary values ("S") and conversion factor to primary values (it`s the setting “transformer
ratio” of the channel). As the samples are secondary values, the conversion factor to secondary is “1”.
❑ Digital input data: bay and identification.
❑ Sample data: signal frequency, sampling frequency, number of the last sample.
❑ Disturbance recorder start and end dates.
❑ Data file format
The disturbance recorder data file (DAT) includes the information captured in the disturbance recorder, with the following
available for each sample:

User Manual 191
❑ Sample number
❑ Sample time
❑ Analogue samples values
❑ Digital signals values
The name of the file uses the standard IEEE C37.232-2007, using the fields:
Start Date, Start Time, Time Code, Station Identifier, Device Identifier, Company Name
For example, “20100626, 46702262,+2h30t,Substation,Rele1,Ingeteam”, which means:
❑ Start Date: Trip date with a 4-character format for the year, the month and the day. For example,
26/june/2010 would be 20100626.
❑ Start Time: Indicates the milliseconds since 00:00 of the day, that is, milliseconds since midnight.
❑ Time Code: Indicates the time zone amplitude sign, and can indicate minutes if necessary. For example, “t +2”
indicates time zone 2, while “+2 h30t” indicates that the time zone is 2 hours 30 minutes.
❑ Station Identifier. Indicates the substation name. The installation’s short name (InsShNam) from the
“PROT/LPHD1” node is used".
❑ Device Identifier. Indicates the unit’s name. The relay’s short name (RelShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node
is used".
❑ Company Name. Indicates the name of unit’s manufacturer, in this case, Ingeteam.
Figure 86 Configuration file

User Manual 192
USB ACCESS 
10. USB ACCESS

The unit can be accessed via the front USB to retrieve reports and CID from the device and to load a new CID or a firmware update.
The USB port can be configured from the local HMI (Menu: Password -> USB Configuration).
The configuration options are:
❑ Without password: No password is needed.

❑ With password: The local HMI password must be entered before any USB operation.
❑ Disabled: The USB port is disabled.
10.1 DOWNLOADING REPORTS
When a pendrive is inserted, the following appears in the front above the current screen, indicating that the device has been detected:
USB Detected
The unit’s reports are automatically dumped onto the pendrive.
While the data is being downloaded, the following appears in the front above the current screen:
USB Detected
Downloading data
Just in case there is a CID, an ICD or and IID in the pendrive, the user will be asked for a confirmation to load this file into the unit.
WANT TO START
THE CID UPDATE
CANCEL
ACCEPT
PRESS ENTER: RUN OPTION
If accepted, the following appears on the screen:
USB Detected
Downloading data
If canceled, downloading is assumed to be complete, and the following appears on the screen for 5 seconds:
REMOVE THE
USB DEVICE
As of this moment, the pendrive can be removed.
Only the reports existent in the unit at the time of the download will appear in the pendrive, with the data structure:
User Manual 193
USB ACCESS 
❑ Root with the short installation and relay name (PROT/LPHD node), and the iedName, separated by “_”·, i.e.,
“Instalacion_Rele_iedName”
❑ COMTRADE. This directory contains the disturbance recorders generated in the unit
❑ FAULT RECORDS. This directory contains the fault records generated in the unit.
❑ The rest of the unit’s reports are dependent on the root:
 Maximetro.xml
 Sucesos.xml
 Informe_Estadisticos.xml
 Registro.xml
 CID
For detailed information about these reports, see Chapter 10, “DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
”.
Figure 87 USB Tree
10.2 LOADING CID
When a pendrive is inserted into the front USB port, a check is run to see if an ICD exists. If there is an ICD, it is copied into the directory
“public/SCL/notvalidated” in order that it may be operative in the unit.
During the search for the ICD, the existence of a file with an ICD, icd, CID, cid, IID or iid extension is checked. There is not a established
filename as only the extension is checked.
If there is more than one file with one of the indicated extensions, the ICD is considered invalid and not ICD is captured.
10.3 LOADING FIREWALL CONFIGURATION
When a pendrive is inserted into the front USB port, a check is run to see if a firewall configuration file exists. In that case, it is copied
into the directory “public/SCL/notvalidated” in order that it may be operative in the unit.
During the search, the existence of a file with “fwc” extension is checked. There is not a established filename as only the extension is
checked.
If there is more than one file with one of the indicated extensions, the file is considered invalid and not captured.
10.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE
For firmware update via USB, a USB flash drive must be inserted in the front USB port, with a "FW" directory with a valid firmware file.

User Manual 194
USB ACCESS 
In the local display, the user will be prompted for a confirmation to start the update. It is very important that during the process of
updating firmware the device is not turned off since in that case the device could become unusable.
After the update the device will restart automatically and the result of the update can be consulted either in the device versions screen
or in the latest updates screen (consult display section).
10.5 USB ENABLING
To increase the security of the device, the USB port can be disabled, preventing access to the device via USB. With the USB disabled,
ICD and firmware loading and data download of the equipment are not allowed.
USB enable / disable can only be performed from the display (consult display section). It is done from the Password screen. The setting
will have 3 possible values:
❑ Disabled: USB is not available.

❑ With Password: USB processing is available but you need to enter the password of the settings menu.
❑ Without Password: USB processing is available without the need to enter a password.

User Manual 195
FTP ACCESS 
11. FTP ACCESS

The public user for FTP access is as follows:
❑ User: ftpuser
❑ Password: ftpuser
Available from firmware version 5.25.16.1, the device implements a sFTP access for secure connections as follows:
❑ User: sftpuser
❑ Password: sftpuser
The passwords can be modified from the local display or from the software tool pacFactory.
The key modification meets the criteria defined by the IEEE1686 standard (available from firmware version 6.3.20.0):
 Minimum length of 8 characters.

 At least one character of each type: uppercase, lowercase, numeric and special (not alphanumeric).
In addition to some own criteria to provide additional security:
 It is not allowed to reuse the previous key: including modifying only uppercase / lowercase. It is required a minimum of 4
characters modified with respect to the previous string.
 Palindromes are not accepted.
These user profiles allows direct access to the following directorys and files:
Config directory:
❑ config/SYSTEM_LOG: Text files with system information.

❑ CIDupdates.log: Log of events of the CID files received.
❑ swupdates.log: Log of events of the firmware upddates.
❑ System.log: Los of system information events.
❑ Versions.log: Versions of the device.
❑ ftp.log: Log of events of the FTP access (available from firmware version 5.25.16.1)
❑ config/VALIDATION_TRACES: Text files with the received CIDs validation information.

❑ log_lib850.log: Log of events related with the IEC 61850 parser.
❑ validation_traces.log: Los of events of general parser.
LD directory:
❑ LD/PROT/COMTRADE: Oscilografy files in Comtrade format.

❑ LD/PROT/FAULT_RECORDS: Fault report files.
❑ LD/PROT/FAULT_SETTINGS: Settings files associated with fault reports.
SCL directory:
❑ SCL/NotValidated: Directory to copy the new CID file to configure the device.
❑ SCL/Validated: Directory with the active CID configuracion file (read only).
The user for ftp firmware update is as follows:
❑ User: ftpUpdat

User Manual 196
FTP ACCESS 
❑ Password: ftpUpdat
With this user you can access the directory "downloads" where a valid firmware file should be copied. Once the file is copied the update
will start automatically.
It is very important that during the process of updating firmware the device is not turned off since in that case the device could become
unusable.
After the update the device will restart automatically and the result of the update can be consulted either in the device versions screen or
in the latest updates screen (consult display section).
11.1 ACCESS CONTROL
Available from firmware version 5.25.16.1: The device incorporates a management of failed accesses which after 5 consecutive
attempts to establish a connection using a wrong password, the access to that user is blocked for 10 minutes. From this moment, any
failed attempt blocks the user 10 more minutes. While a user is blocked the correct password is also not accepted to access.
The goal is to harden the system to avoid "brute-force attacks" to recover a key by trying all possible combinations until finding the one
that gains access.
There is a signal on GEN/LLN0 indicating the activation of this block for some user.
 AccAlm: Access alarm. Active when access control is blocking a user.
In addition, all FTP accesses are registered in a log file located in /config/SYSTEM_LOG folder called ftp.log.
In this file, the accesses of any FTP client are recorded, indicating the source IP address and the date and time. Any uploads or
downloads of files are also recorded.

User Manual 197
MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND METERS
12. MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND METERS

The binding of the IED internal data to the IEC 61850 data model is configured in the short address (sAddress) attribute.
The sAddr attribute allows the allocation of a short address to DO attributes. According to the IEC 61850 standard short addresses can be
used as IED internal identification for the attribute. In this scope the format of the content is private to the IED and any tool that process
the ICD/CID file shall preserve imported contents in exported SCL files.
All the signals (trips, logics, hw check, digital inputs-outputs, etc.), measurements and meters that are generated in the unit are identified
by a number that appears in the sAddress of each of these elements.
In the factory ICD configuration file, all the internal data is preconfigured, and the user cannot modified them apart from the description
texts.
For new data created at engineering phase, as control logics output data, the software configuration tool allows the creation of sAddress
values.
12.1 SIGNALS
The distribution of the unit’s signals is effected using four numbers as a base: 0, 8192, 16384, 24576. All the unit’s signals are divided
into four types, taking these four digits as references:
12.1.1 Type A signals

This type of signal refers to all those signals with sAddress identification numbers between digits 0 and 8191.
These signals include digital inputs and Goose signals.
❑ Digital Inputs
 Identification number between 0 and 287.
Example: sAddr="S,0,5,0;TX1:GGIO1.Digital input 6,TX2:GGIO1.Digital Input 6,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of digital input number six from the first card in the ICD
sAddress.
 GEN/GGIO node
❑ Goose Signals
 In turn, the Goose signals are divided into RIO modules and LGOS nodes.
 RIO modules
Example: sAddr="GS,0,288,0;TX1:RIO1.St,TX2:RIO1.St,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first signal from the first RIO module in the ICD
sAddress.
 GEN/RIO node
❑ LGOS nodes
Example: sAddr="GS,0,608,0;TX1:LGOS1.St,TX2:LGOS1.St,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first signal from the first LGOS node in the ICD
sAddress.
 GEN/LGOS node
Therefore, the distribution of these signals based on their identification number is as follows:

User Manual 198
Table 100 Type A signal mapping
DIGITAL
INPUTS
(0 - 287)
GOOSE
SIGNALS
(288 - 1695)
The number of this type of signal reserved in the unit is 1696.
12.1.2 Type B signals

This type of signal includes type B protection signals, fast protection logic signals and fast control logic signals.
❑ Type B protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,9091,0;TX1:TOC1 Phase trip,TX2:TOC1 Phase Trip,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of a type B protection signal in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional type B protection signals: Identification number between 9472 and 10399
 PROT node
❑ Fast protection logics
Example: sAddr="PS,0,9216,0;TX1:Protection logic 1,TX2:Protection logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
 In the example, we can see the identification number of the first protection logic in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/pGGIO node
❑ Fast control logics
Example: sAddr="LS,0,9344,0;TX1:Fst logic 1,TX2:Fast logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first fast control logic in the ICD sAddress.
 CTRL/AutGGIO2 node

User Manual 199
Table 101.Type B signal mapping
PROTECTION SIGNALS
TYPE B
(8192 - 9215)
FAST PROTECTION LOGIC

SIGNALS
(9216 - 9343)
FAST CONTROL LOGIC

SIGNALS
(9344 - 9471)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION SIGNALS
TYPE B
(9472 -10399)
12.1.3 Type C signals

These signals include the type C protection signals.
❑ Type C protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,16384,0;TX1:Recloser in service,TX2:,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first type C protection signal in the ICD sAddress.
 PROT node

User Manual 200
Table 102.Type C signal mapping
TYPE C PROTECTION
SIGNALS
(16384 - 16831)
12.1.4 Type D signals

This type of signal refers to all those signals with sAddress identification numbers between digits 24576 and higher.
This type of signal includes the type D protection signals, the communication failure signals for all the bays that are connected to
the unit, the slow logic control signals, signals resulting from orders and Loc and LocSta signals (for more information about these
signals go to 1.2.1 Command blocks by command hierarchies, in IEC 61850 commands)
❑ Type D protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,24576,0;TX1:Relay in service,TX2:OnLine,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first type D protection signal in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional protection signals: Identification number between 27936 and 27967
 PROT node
❑ Communication failure control signals
❑ Slow control logics
Example: sAddr="LS,0,25120,0;TX1:Slow logic 1,TX2:Slow logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first slow control logic in the ICD sAddress.
❑ Signals resulting from orders
 Example: sAddr=" RS,0,26908,4;TX1:CSWI4 opClsOr,TX2:,AC:3.7.8.4,ED:1.1.1.1,AD:0.0.0.0"
❑ Loc signals
 Example: sAddr=" S,0,27424,0;TX1:GEN.LLN0.Loc,TX2:GEN.LLN0.Loc,AC:1.2,ED:0.0,AD:0.0"
❑ LocSta signals
 Example: sAddr="S,0,27680,0;TX1:GEN.RIOGGIO1.LocSta,TX2:GEN.RIOGGIO1.LocSta,AC:1.2,ED:0.0,AD:0.0"

User Manual 201
Table 103 Type D signal mapping
TYPE D PROTECTION SIGNALS

(24576 - 24991)
CONTROL SIGNALS (COM FAILURE)

(24992 - 25119)
SLOW LOGIC CONTROL SIGNALS

(25120 - 26399)
SIGNALS RESULTING FROM

ORDERS
(26400 - 27423)
LOC SIGNALS
(27424 - 27679)
LOCSTA SIGNALS
(27680 – 27935)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION SIGNALS
(27936 - 27967)
12.2 MEASUREMENTS
All the unit's measurements are divided into four types:
❑ Protection measurements.
Example: sAddr="M,0,124,1;TX1:I average,TX2: AVERAGE I"
In the example, we can see the identification number of a protection measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional measurements: Identification number between 744 – 948 and 979 - 1266.
 PROT node
❑ Goose Measurements
Example: sAddr="GM,0,300,0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first Goose measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/LGOS node

User Manual 202
❑ Measurements resulting from logics

Example: sAddr="LM,0,556,0;TX1:Logic measurement 1,TX2:Logic analog 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first logic measurement in the ICD sAddress.
❑ Measurements resulting from analogical input boards
Example: sAddr="M,0,688,0;TX1:Measure 1,TX2:Measure 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/GGIO node
❑ RTD boards measurements
Example: sAddr="M,0,949,0;TX1:Temperatura 1,TX2:Temperature 1"
 GEN/RTD
Therefore, the distribution of these measurements based on their identification number is as follows:
Table 104 Measurement mapping
PROTECTION MEASUREMENTS
(0 - 299)
GOOSE MEASUREMENTS
(300 - 555)
MEASUREMENTS RESULTING FROM CONTROL LOGICS

(556 - 687)
MEASUREMENTS RESULTING FROM ANALOGICAL

INPUT BOARDS
(688 - 743)
ADDITIONAL
(744 - 948)
RTD BOARDS MEASUREMENTS

(949 - 978)
ADDITIONAL
(979 - 1266)
The number of measurements reserved in the unit is 1267.

User Manual 203
12.3 COUNTERS
All the unit's counters are divided into two types:
❑ Protection counters
Example: sAddr="C,0,0;TX1:Active energy out,TX2:Active Energy Out"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first protection counter in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional protection counters: Identification number between 150 and 192.
 GEN and PROT node
❑ Counters resulting from logics
Example: sAddr="LC,0,32;TX1:Logic counter 1,TX2:Logic counter 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first logic counter in the ICD sAddress.
Therefore, the distribution of these counters based on their identification number is as follows:
Table 105 Counter mapping
PROTECTION COUNTERS
(0 - 31)
COUNTERS RESULTING FROM CONTROL LOGICS

(32 - 149)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION COUNTERS
(150 - 192)
The number of counters reserved in the unit is 193.

User Manual 204
LOGICS
13. LOGICS
This document explains the operating mode of the logics generation tool of logic devices.
The EF family’s logics are fragments of executable code generated by the user using a PC tool, both in text and graphic formats. These
logics can be defined in an IED’s data model (using iedFactory) or in a particular instance (using substationFactory or the pacFactory
settings tool).
There are two different types of logics: control logics and protection logics.
In this chapter the device logics are defined and an introduction to the configuration options is presented. For more details about the logics
configuration consult the user manual of the software configuration tool (pacFactory / energyFactorySuite).
13.1 CONTROL LOGICS
The logics can be used to customize the behaviour of an IED. For example, automatism can be added or calculations between different
magnitudes can be carried out.
The logics are run in two different tasks, each with different priorities: one for fast logics and one for slow logics.
The running time for the fast logics is 2 milliseconds. The running time for the slow logics is approximately 10 milliseconds, although
given that this is a lower priority task it may occasionally be affected by other higher priority tasks.
Each configured logic must be included in one of these two tasks, in accordance with the manner in which they are to be run – fast
logics or slow logics.
To edit a control logic from substationFactory, the user must select the corresponding IED and click on the editor icon. To edit the
control logic from pacFactory, click on the "Logics" option in the “Configuration” menu or in the side menu.
The logics are defined in program blocks called POU (program organization unit). Two of the languages defined in the IEC-61131-3
standard are offered for the creation of each POU: one textual (ST) and one graphic (FBD).
There are three types of POU, as defined in the IEC-61131-3 standard: PROGRAM, FUNCTION_BLOCK and FUNCTION. The programs are
the senior hierarchy POUs, with each one corresponding to a task to be run on the device. Each PROGRAM can refer to several
FUNCTION_BLOCK and FUNCTION. In turn, a FUNCTION_BLOCK can refer to one or more FUNCTION.
At the IED level, two PROGRAM corresponding to the two above tasks are automatically defined: one for the fast logics (FastLog) and
the other for the slow logics (SlowLog). These PROGRAM cannot be deleted nor can their names be modified. New PROGRAM cannot
be created at any level, either.
All the new signals, measurements and counters that are created in the data model must be assigned a number that appears in the
sAddress of each of these elements.
The range values are:
❑ Fast control logics signals: Value between 9344 and 9471.

❑ Slow control logics signals: Value between 25120 and 26399.
❑ Measurements: Value between 556 and 687.
❑ Counters: Value between 32 and 149.

User Manual 205
LOGICS
13.2 PROTECTION LOGICS
The various protection functions can be configured by means of settings associated to the unit’s internal signals, vg enablings or blocks.
The protection functions treat these signals as inputs, although they do not modify their value. In order to assign them a value, the
protection logics are used.
The protection logics have two main differences in relation to the control logics:
❑ The result of a protection logic is always a Boolean value, to be assigned in one of the protection function's settings.
❑ The protection logic editor has been simplified to facilitate the programming of this type of logic.
The number of available logics is defined by the unit’s data model.
Each logic signal has a value obtained from an associated logic. These logics are fragments of code created in one of the two possible
languages - ST (text) or FBD (graphic). The corresponding language must be selected when a logic corresponding to a signal is edited for
the first time.
Each protection logic is independent from the rest and need not be included in a POU in order to be run. When a protection logic is
saved in the editor, an attempt is made to compile the information. If no error is found, a call to the logic in question is automatically
generated so that the logic is run when a CID (configured IED description) message is sent to the device or sent from pacFactory.
The protection logics are run every 2 milliseconds, as are the fast control logics.
To edit a protection logic from substationFactory, the user must select the corresponding logic signal and click on the editor icon. This
icon has three statuses to indicate the status of the corresponding logic:
Icon Logic statuses:

No logic has been edited for this signal. The value of the signal will be 0 (false).
Logic edited and ready to be run.
Logic edited, but with errors. Logic will not be run.
The following image shows a detail of the expander with four signals with logic signals of different statuses:
Details of the expander with protection logic signals
To edit a protection logic from pacFactory, click on the "Protection Logics" option in the “Configuration” menu or in the side menu.
A screen with a list of the available protection logic signals, along with the logic’s status icon and an access button for each logic’s
editor, will be shown.

User Manual 206
LOGICS
Details of the protection logics list in pacFactory
13.3 DATABASE SIGNALS
All of the IED’s database signals, measurements, meters and commands can be accessed as readings from the logics (the data model’s
basic data with valid sAddress). There is a set of data within this database that can be modified from the control logics:
Signal type Description

Critical signals Digital signals that can be modified from the fast task (FastLog)
Non-critical signals Digital signals that can be modified from the slow task (SlowLog)
Measurements Floating point data that can be modified from both tasks
Meters Whole numbers that can modified from both tasks
Commands Commands can only be generated from the slow task (SlowLog)
Both the data’s value and its quality can be accessed. If data is modifiable from the logic, the same will apply to the value and the
quality.
The data that can be modified from the logic may be preset in the unit's data model or they can be configured in the engineering
phase.
Only the status of the signal to which the logic in question is associated can be modified from the protection logics.
13.4 OUTPUT DATA UPON POWER-UP
Output data can maintain its value after the device is powered off and on.
In the logics, user can define variables of type RETAIN, which have the property of remaining with the value that they had before the
power off of the device.

User Manual 207
LOGICS
The maximum size allowed for all the logics of each group (protection and control) is 96 bytes. This means that if the variables that we
define with this property are of type BOOL (that is, the type associated to the logical signals) we can define a maximum of 96 RETAIN
variables.
Example of using variables in the logics:
There are global variables belonging to the model that can be used in the logic. For example all the signals like Trips or Starts of
protection functions. In the protection logics, each logic has a variable associated with it that is the output of that logic. That output is
also visible as a signal and can be sent in reports or GOOSES, assign it to a digital output, etc.
Each logic can also have internal variables. Once inside the logic editor, click on the "Show interface editor" option to see and / or add
internal variables to the logic (select the VAR tab).
A new variable can be created in 2 ways:
1.- When a non-recognized text is written in the algorithm, an assistant appears asking if you want to add it as a variable.
2.- Writing directly in the cell (if in tabular mode), as shown in next figure.
An internal variable to the logic can be made permanent selecting the RETAIN option in the Retain column.

User Manual 208
LOGICS
The initial value is optional. If it is assigned, it is the value it takes the first time the logic is executed. In the case of the variables not
marked as Retain each time the device is started, the variable is restarted with that value. In the case of Retain variables, it is only
started when the logic has been created or changed. Of course, it is highly recommended to initialize the variables.
When a "Function Block" is used in a logic, it is also considered a variable. If one of the predefined "Function Block" in the editor's right-
hand tab is dragged into the editing window, such as a SR flip-flop (SetReset), an SR1 variable of type SR is added. By activating the
option "Show interface editor" we can see how it is in the list of variables (next figure). In this case, if we want to store the internal
states of this block, we must also select the corresponding RETAIN option.
In the case of the "Function Blocks" with RETAIN option, the size in bytes used depends on the number of internal variables of that
block. In the case of the SR they are 3 bytes.
The example (previous figure) is a simple logic in graphic language to demonstrate how to make permanent the internal state of a SR
flip-flop.

User Manual 209
IEC 61850 COMMANDS
14. IEC 61850 COMMANDS
14.1 RUNNING IEC 61850 COMMANDS
Commands can be issued for controllable elements (elements whose functional constraint is “CO”) that may
belong to different Data classes (detailed in IEC 61850-7-3). Control class model implemented by the IED are:
❑ Controllable single point (SPC)

❑ Controllable double point (DPC)
❑ Controllable enumerated status (ENC)
The device implements the following services defined by IEC 61850 standard:
❑ Select (Sel) / SelectWithValue (SelVal)

❑ Cancel
❑ Operate (Oper)
❑ CommandTermination (CmdTerm)
The structure required to operate the command has the following fields:
❑ CtlVal. Command value. The type will be different, in accordance with element’s the CDC (Common
Data Class).
❑ Origin. It includes information about the origin of the command, divided into two fields:
 orCat. Origin category. Indicates the type of origin that issues the command (local, substation,
remote command, etc.)
 orIdent. Octect string that allows the identification of the command origin.
❑ CtlNum. It is the sequence number of the command.
❑ T: The timestamp when the command was generated.
❑ Test: It defines whether the control service request is going to be used with test purposes or not.
❑ Check: Delimits the kind of checkup that must be performed to the command before running it.
Because the Ingepac EF device implements edition 2 of the IEC61850 standard but maintains compatibility with the existing
configurations of edition 1, the differences in the data used to track orders are explained below:
In addition to informing of the changes in the status signals of the elements on which the commands are to be run,
the reports also provide information on the changes in the status of the two data associated with the command
process itself: OpOpnOr and OpClsOr.
These data have four possible statuses:
Table 106 OpOpnOr and OpClsOr statuses
Value Explanation enum

STANDBY Command in standby 0
IN PROGRESS Command in process 1
SUCCESSFUL Command run successfully 2
UNSUCCESSFUL Failure in running of command 3
For opening commands in general, OpClsOr remains in STANDBY, the sequence for OpOpnOr would be STANDBY -
IN PROGRESS - SUCCESSFUL / UNSUCCESSFUL – STANDBY. In the case of a closure command, OpOpnOr would
remain in standby and OpClsOr would continue the complete sequence. If the command’s CtlModel indicates that

User Manual 210
the command has normal security, no return information is available from the device and, therefore, the sequence
would be STANDBY - IN PROGRESS – STANDY.
CONFIGURACIONES USING ED2:
In the second edition of IEC61850 standard, three new data elements are defined in order to follow the command
process: opOk, OpRcvd and tOpOk. These new elements have a new functional constraint, “OR”.
OpRcvd is activated upon the reception of a command and deactivated about 10 milliseconds later.
OpOk is activated at the same time as the command pulse (the pulse that will afterwards be transmitted to a digital
output, for example) and tOpOk shows the timestamp when opOk was activated.
OpOk and OpRcvd may be set as RS signals, editing their sAddr in the CID using the configuration tool. In this way,
their values will be refreshed in the internal database and will be available for internal logics.
In addition to these elements, it is also possible to generate a series of indications, through signals from the
database, to provide complementary information on the return of the orders.
In the logical nodes where it is necessary to have this return information of the controls, the normative class has
been extended defining the following data objects with CDC = "ACT", which in turn includes the optional data
"originSrc".
❑ OpOpnPrg / OpClsPrg: Execution of opening and closing controls (order in progress).

❑ OpOpnFail / OpClsFail: Failure of opening and closing controls (command failure).
The configuration for the use of these return signals is done through the configuration tool, through the sAddr field
of the command itself. However, the return signals have an RS type sAddr.
In both configurations, upon completion of an order execution, part 7-2 of the IEC 61850 standard defines the possible
reasons for termination. The following table lists the AddCause values used by the device:

User Manual 211
Table 107 AddCause considered
Value Cause Explanation enum

Unknown Unknown cause Command not successful due to unknown causes 0
Not-Supported Not configured 1
Blocked-by-switching- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches like in CSWI has
Blocked by hierarchy 2
hierarchy the value TRUE
Select-failed Selection failure Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) 3
Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos in XCBR or
Invalid-position Invalid position 4
XSWI) or the switch reaches an invalid position.
Position-reached Position reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR or XSWI) 5
Parameter-change-in- Parameter change in
Control action is blocked due to running parameter change 6
execution execution
Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR/XSWI) is in a
Blocked-by-Mode 8
mode (Mod) which does not allow any switching
Blocked-by- Block signal Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching devices (in CILO
10
interlocking activated attribute EnaOpn.stVal=“FALSE” or EnaCls.stVal=“FALSE”
Command-already-in- Command in Control service or cancel is rejected, because control action is already
12
execution execution running
Health signal Control action is blocked due to some internal event that prevents a
Blocked-by-health 13
activated successful operation (Health)
Control action is blocked, because another control action in a domain (for
1-of-n-control 1 of n block example, substation) is already running (in any XCBR or XSWI, the 14
DPC.stSeld=“TRUE”).
Abortion-by-cancel Command cancelled Control action is aborted due to cancel service 15
Time-limit-over Time exceeded Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time limit 16
Object not selected Object not selected Control action is rejected, since object is not selected 18
Object-already- Object already Select action is not executed, because the addressed object is already
19
selected selected selected
Abortion-by- Abortion by Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with the client that
23
communication-loss communication loss issued the control
None Command accepted Control action successfully executed 25
Inconsistent- Inconsistent
The parameters between successive control services are not consistent 26
parameters parameters
Locked-by-other- Locked by other
Another client has already reserved the objet 27
client client
On the other hand, the operating mode of a specific command is defined by the ctlModel configuration parameter
associated with that command, according to the following table:
Table 108 Possible ctlModel
Value Explanation enum

The object is not controllable, only the services that apply to a status object are supported. The
status-only 0
attribute ctlVal does not exist.
direct-with-normal-
Direct control with normal security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 1
security
sbo-with-normal-security SBO control with normal security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 2
direct-with-enhanced-
Direct control with enhanced security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 3
security
sbo-with-enhanced-
SBO control with enhanced security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 4
security
Other configuration parameters that determine the progress of the command are:
❑ PulseConfig. This data structure defines the command’s output pulse type (pulse, duration, pulse
train). The command is not terminated until the last pulse ends.
❑ OperTimeOut. Maximum switching time, after which, failure occurs if the command has not been
successfully executed.
❑ sboTimeout. The time during which the command selection remains activated.
In the following sections, the operation process of a command depending on the ctlModel is described in detail.

User Manual 212
14.1.1 DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1)
If the command’s ctlModel is DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1), the process to follow will be as shown in
the following figure:
Figure 88 Direct command process with normal security
IEC 61850 Client IEC 61850 Server Process
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response
Upon receiving a request to run a command by an Operate Request, the device analyses the validity of the
request, checking the client’s authorization and any possible blocks, and responds positively or negatively by an
Operate Response to the client. If the response is positive, the command is sent to the device.
14.1.2 SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2)
If the command’s ctlModel is SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2), the process is similar, but including a
selection prior to execution:
Figure 89 Command process with select before operate and normal security
Select
Checkup for
selection
Origin,
selection…
Select
Response
Operate Checkup for

operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response

User Manual 213
In this case, after receiving a selection request the selection's permission is checked and, when applicable, a
positive response is sent. At that moment a timer starts. This timer will cancel the selection after the sboTimeOut
timeout ends. If an operate request is received before the conclusion of the timeout, the same process as
described for the direct commands with normal security is followed.
If the selection is not accepted, the response will be negative and the process is concluded.
14.1.3 DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3)

When the command’s ctlModel is DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3), the process starts exactly as the
direct commands with normal security, as shown in the diagram below:
Figure 90 Direct command process with enhanced security
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response
Command
Termination
After sending the operate request to the device, the return information of the element on which the command is
executed is expected, so that the device can inform the client throught a Command Termination if the operation
has been successfully executed.
If the device’s return information is received before the conclusion of the operTimeout (the maximum execution
time) and the position requested has been reached, the IED then sends to the client a positive Command
Termination.
If the operTimeout time is exceeded without having received the information from the device, or if it is received but
the position requested has not been reached, the Command Termination will be negative. In this case, the cause
of the failure of the command will be included in the AddCause field.
14.1.4 SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4)
The ctlModel SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) includes, in addition to the enhanced security process of
the commands modelled as DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY, the SelectWithValue service in order to
select the command before operate. In this way, it is verified that the value sent in the selection process is the
same as the one sent during the execution. The scheme to be followed is:

User Manual 214
Figure 91 Command process with select before operate and enhanced security
IEC 61850 Client 61850 Server Process

Select
Checkup for
selection
Origin,
Select selection…
Response
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Operate Origin, blocks…
Response
Command
Terminationn
Similarly to direct orders with enhanced security, if the order fails, the cause of the failure is reported in the
AddCause field.

User Manual 215
14.2 COMMAND BLOCKS
The commands sent to the device can be blocked for different reasons in which the execution cannot be allowed.
In part 7-2, of the IEC 61850 standard, the possible reasons for failure of a command are detailed.
The following subsections describe the different blocks implemented by the device.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The order of these sections matches exactly with the order of blocking verification
that the IED follows. So once a block is applied, the command will not prosper and next blocks will not be
checked.
14.2.1 Command blocks by inconsistent parameters

The parameters of the command are checked to ensure that there have been no changes to them.
This block only affects commands with ctlModel SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) that are performed
through the SelectWithValue service.
The reason for command failure when this block is generated is "inconsistent parameters" (AddCause = 26).
14.2.2 Command blocks by switching hierarchy

The next possible cause of locking a command is switching hierarchy blocking (AddCause = 2). The IED
implements a hierarchy of commands that implies the blocking of the orders according to their origin and the
configuration of the device.
In the standard IEC 61850, part 7-3, it is defined the possible origins of a command that are affected by
blockages due to the switching hierarchy.
 "not-supported": Only accepted in the mode that the order hierarchy is not handled.
 "remote-control": corresponds to a remote origin.
 "station-control" or "maintenance": corresponds to a console.
 "bay-control": corresponds to a console at bay / local level or to the display.
 "automatic-bay", "automatic-static" or "automatic-remote". By default, orders sent by
IEC61850 with these origins are allowed, except for the modes that strictly check the local
origin of the order (LRMode, Edition 2 and Exclusive Edition 2).
Under the section "Command blocks by interlocking" it is explained the particular operation
for these origins in H automation architectures.
 "process": Commands with this origin are not accepted in any case. The process source is
reserved for changes in the state of control elements that do not come from commands. If
there is a change in a signal associated with a command but the change of state has not
been a consequence of an order, but a spontaneous change, the order orCat will be written
to "PROCESS".
The "Remote/Local Type" setting determines how the device will behave at the moment of blocking the
commands by hierarchy. It is found in the data model as "GEN/LLN0.LRmode" or in the display under
"General configuration: Remote / Local Type". The following values are available:
Table 109. Available values for LRMode
LRmode Numeric Value

Not treated 0
Iberdrola 1
Exclusive 2
No HMI 3
ExclusiveBR 4
Edition2 5
ExclusiveEd2 6

User Manual 216

Depending on the mode selected, it can be taken into account the status of the signals GEN/LLN0.RemCtlBlk
(remote control signal status) and GEN/LLN0.Lockey (HMI signal status).
To interpret the tables in the next sections with edition 1 configurations, it is necessary to consider the first columns
according to the following relation:
❑ Loc = RemCtlBlk
❑ LocSta = Lockey
In any case, for these configurations, as the data model specific to ICD Ed2 is required, any LRMode associated with
Edition 2 is not available.

Depending on the mode selected, the MltLev setting of the LLN0 of the logical device GEN can be taken into
account, as well as the status of the Loc and LocSta signals.
MltLev is a boolean setting that can be found in the data model in "GEN/LLN0.MltLev", and indicates if more than
one level (Originator) has the switching authority. This setting only applies to Edition2 and ExclusiveEd2 modes.
Loc is a boolean status signal ("GEN/LLN0.Loc.stVal"). It shows the local status, which is unique for the device, so all
the Loc signals show always the same status (the standard defines this signal in several nodes with configured
commands). To be able to modify this state, we have two options:
 Sending a command on the RemCtlBlk ("GEN/LLN0.RemCltBlk") element. This way, every Loc signal
will be set to the same value as "GEN/LLN0.RemCltBlk.stVal".
 Configuring the LogInLR setting ("GEN/LLN0.LogInLR") to a valid signal reference, so that this signal
status stablishes the value of every Loc. It is important to note that this setting predominates over
sending the command to the RemCtlBlk element explained in the previous point. Therefore, when
this setting is configured the command over the RemCtlBlk element is not allowed.
LocSta is a boolean status signal ("GEN/LLN0.LocSta.stVal"). Its status shows if station or remote origins are
accepted, and as in the case of Loc, it is unique for the device although it may exist in several logical nodes. To
modify the status of LocSta, a command on the controllable LocSta element "GEN/LLN0.LocSta" can be issued. Every
LocSta element in the device will show the same status value.
The operating characteristics of each of the LRmode values are detailed in the following points:
❑ LRMode: Not treated
No switching hierarchy blocking on commands is applied. It is the only mode that allows commands
from the "not-supported" origin.
❑ LRMode: Iberdrola
The status of Loc and LocSta signals is taken into account. The following tables show for each
combination whether the order is blocked or allowed, depending on the origin of the order.
Table 110. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Iberdrola"
Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(1) (1) allowed blocked blocked
(1) (0) allowed allowed blocked
(0) (1) blocked blocked allowed

User Manual 217
Table 111. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "Iberdrola"

Table 112. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "Iberdrola"

(0) (1) blocked blocked blocked
❑ LRMode: Exclusive
This mode of operation implies that when activating the status of the RemCtlBlk (associated with Loc),
the activation of the value of the LocSta signal is automatically generated. Deactivation is independent.
The status of Loc and LocSta signals is taken into account in this mode.
Because the activation of the RemCtlBlk signal triggers the activation of the LocSta, in the "Exclusive"
LRMode, it is not possible to reach the Loc = 1 and LocSta = 0 state from the table’s origins. It is only
possible to reach this value after a LRMode change or using "automatic" origin, however, the behavior
is exactly the same as for Loc = 1 and LocSta = 1.
Table 113. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Exclusive"

(0) (0) blocked allowed blocked
Table 114. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "Exclusive"

Table 115. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "Exclusive"

❑ LRMode: No HMI

User Manual 218
Only the status of the Loc signal is taken into account. The following table shows for each combination
whether the command is blocked or allowed, depending on the origin.
Table 116. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "No HMI"
Loc Bay Station Remote

(1) allowed blocked blocked
(0) blocked allowed allowed
Table 117. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "No HMI"
Loc Bay Station Remote

* The LocSta table has not been included because is not used in this mode. The command blocks
applied will be those of RemCtlBlk.
❑ LRMode: ExclusiveBR
This is a particular case of the "Exclusive" LRMode mode. This LRMode differs in that the LocSta
variable is not activated automatically when the RemCtlBlk is activated and it is possible to modify the
LocSta if the equipment is in local mode (Loc = 1) from the same origin (bay-control).
The following tables show for each combination whether the order is blocked or allowed, depending on
the origin of the order.
Table 118. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "ExclusiveBR"

Table 119. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "ExclusiveBR"

Table 120. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "ExclusiveBR"

❑ LRMode: Edition2
Only for Edition 2 configurations. If LRMode is "Edition2", the normative hierarchies of commands
described in Part 7-4 of Edition 2 of IEC61850 standard (Annex B) apply.

User Manual 219
This implies that the local origin of the command is considered strictly, so that if Loc = 1, no command
(nor selection) from IEC61850 communications is accepted regardless of what is indicated in the origin
field (even if it is a bay-level console and commands with 'bay-control' origin). Therefore, when the
equipment is in local mode (Loc = 1) only commands sent from display or logic are accepted.
In this mode, the MltLev setting of the LLN0 of the logical device GEN, as well as the status of Loc and
LocSta signals, is used to determine if a command is required to be blocked by switching hierarchy.
The following table shows for each combination whether the command is blocked or allowed,
depending on the origin. This table affects all orders, including RemCtlBlk and LocSta.
Table 121. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Edition2"
MltLev Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(0) (1) (1) allowed* blocked blocked
(0) (1) (0) allowed* blocked blocked
(0) (0) (1) blocked allowed blocked
(0) (0) (0) blocked blocked allowed
(1) (1) (1) allowed blocked blocked

(1) (1) (0) allowed blocked blocked
(1) (0) (1) allowed allowed blocked
(1) (0) (0) allowed allowed allowed
* The local origin is checked strictly: Only display or logics.
❑ LRMode: ExclusiveEd2
Only for Edition 2 configurations. If the LRMode is set to "ExclusiveEd2", the command switching
hierarchy blocks are the same as in the "Edition2" case, except for the commands over the LocSta and
RemCtlBlk.
When operating a command on these two elements, the verification of the local origin is not strict, that
is, commands received from IEC61850 communications with origin 'bay-control' or 'automatic' sources
are allowed.
The following tables show the behavior of the switching hierarchy blocks on these two orders:
Table 122. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "ExclusiveEd2"

NOTE: MtlLev is not included as it does not modify the table.
Table 123. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "ExclusiveEd2"
MltLev Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(0) (1) (1) blocked blocked blocked

For all other commands, the local origin check remains strict, as detailed in the LRMode "Edition2"
mode.
User Manual 220
14.2.2.1 Exceptions to switching hierarchy blocks

Any order sent from the logics or from the pacFactory tool is not affected by switching hierarchy blocks.
In protection commands, hierarchy locks are the same as those in control commands, with the exception
of the following commands, that are never blocked by switching hierarchy.
 Reset commands for statistical data

 Reset commands for maximeter and minimeters
 Reset commands for energy counters
 Reset commands for queues
 Reset commands for LEDs and relays
 Battery connection/disconnection commands
In the LLN0 node of the logical device GEN the FKeysRem setting is defined. When is set to '1', it allows any
order given from the device’s display without any hierarchical blocking.
Additionally, with the configuration tool it is possible to set (in the sAddress), for each command of type SPC
and DPC, if the switching hierarchy blocks shall be avoided. It can be choosen whether this affects the
opening command, the closing command, or both.
14.2.3 Command 1 of n blocks

It ensures that multiple orders are not executed simultaneously. If a second command is received before the first
command is completed, the error is indicated as "1 of n" block (AddCause = 14).
14.2.4 Command blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)

This block is performed depending on whether the test bit of the received command is activated or not, and based on the
Beh status of the logic node. It has to be taken into account that the mode block is not checked in the case of making
commands over the Mod element. In case of blocking, the order is rejected with "blocked by mode" reason (AddCause =
8).
Table 124. Blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)
Command Test Bit Beh=On(1) Beh=Test(3) Beh=Off(5)

0 Allowed BLOCKED_BY_MODE BLOCKED_BY_MODE
1 BLOCKED_BY_MODE Allowed BLOCKED_BY_MODE
The IED contemplates 3 possible Beh / Mod values: 1: ON / 3: TEST / 5: OFF.
When the Beh is Off this block also applies to the selection of the command. As the test bit is not sent in the selection
request, it can not be checked in the other cases. The value Off is only defined in those logical nodes that it makes sense
to disable the node (for example protection functions).
Only with Edition2 configurations, to determine the Beh status of the logical node on which the command is executed,
different levels of hierarchy are defined:
❑ Mod of the own logical node.

❑ Mod of the LLN0 of the logical device to which the logical node belongs.
❑ Mod of the LLN0 of the logical device defined in the GrRef.
The GrRef setting is defined in the Edition2 of the standard and allows to relate a logical device to depend on a higher
hierarchy logical device. Its data type is objRef and it is found in the LLN0. The format to be used is the own logical
device concatenated to the IEDname of the installation.
The following table details the calculation of Beh of a logical node according to the different levels of hierarchy. The
GrRef can have an empty value and therefore considered unconfigured (NC):

User Manual 221
Table 125. Calculation of Beh according to hierarchy
GrRef LD LDMode LNMode LNBeh

➔
LLN0.Mod LLN0.Mod LN.Mod LN.Beh
On / NC On On ➔ On
On / NC On Test ➔ Test
On / NC On Off ➔ Off
On / NC Test On ➔ Test
On / NC Test Test ➔ Test
On / NC Test Off ➔ Off
Test On On ➔ Test
Test On Test ➔ Test
Test On Off ➔ Off
Test Test On ➔ Test
Test Test Test ➔ Test
Test Test Off ➔ Off
NOTE: Mod / Beh to Off is not accepted in LLN0 nodes.
14.2.5 Command blocks by Heatlh

The possibility of blocking commands based on a selectable alarm signal via the configuration tool (in a sAddress field) is
available. If this alarm signal is activated, the command will be blocked by "Blocked by Health" reason (AddCause = 13).
It is possible to set a different configuration for each command.
14.2.6 Command blocks by Interlocking

In IEC61850 Edition 2 configurations, the blocks by interlocking (EnaOpn/EnaCls) are only checked if the command is
issued with the “interlock-check” bit activated. If not, the command will not be checked against this blocking conditions.
On the other hand, in edition 1 configurations or other protocols different than IEC61850, the block by interlocking is
always checked.
The standard defines that the signals of the CILO logical nodes shall be used, but using the configuration tool it is
allowed to select these or any other signal in a generic way to perform the interlocking block. Signals can be set for both
the opening and closing blocks. The reason for the failure associated with this type of block is the "blocked by
Interlocking" (AddCause = 10).
In addition, within interlocking blocks, there is a check for installations in H automation architectures. This configuration is
performed using the configuration tool (automation signal sAddress field). When this signal is configured, the following
logic is followed:
❑ Automation signal activated:

 Only commands whose origin is "automatic" are accepted.
❑ Automation signal deactivated:
 Commands whose origin is "automatic" will be blocked.
For this section it is important to take into account the order followed to check the blocks, so that for example, with
LRMode configured to Edition2, and with the IED in local mode, automatic orders will be blocked by switching hierarchy
before reaching this kind of block.
14.2.7 Commands blocks due to invalid/reached position

The IED allows configuring blocks on commands based on the status of the item on which the order is intended and
taking into account whether an opening or closing is sent.

User Manual 222
These blocks are configured through the configuration tool (in a sAddress field) indicating the desired operating mode for
each command.
The commands will be blocked in accordance with the following table:

Table 126 Blocks in accordance with the command mode
Estado invalido /
Open status Close status
desconocido
Open Close Open Close Open Close
Command Mode 0 / -1 ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED
Command Mode 1 BLOCK (1) ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) BLOCK (2) BLOCK (2)
Command Mode 2 BLOCK (1) ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) ALLOWED BLOCK (2)
Command Mode 3 ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) ALLOWED BLOCK (2)
Thus, the blocks marked with (1) are blocks by "position reached" (AddCause = 5) and those marked with (2) are by
"invalid position" (AddCause = 4).
14.3 COMMANDS FOR OTHER POSITIONS
The configuration of these commands is related to the protocol by which they are propagated.
When the command is configured as a command of another device or UCL, the order will be sent to the corresponding
device behaving as a direct order with normal security (ctlModel = 1). The check of return information, pulseConfig, timeouts
and blocks must be performed on the device to which the order belongs.
14.4 COMMAND SADDRESS
Through the sAddress fields of each command the behavior explained in some of the previous sections can be modified.
The method for modifying the sAddress fields must always be the configuration tool. Manually changing these values can
cause errors and malfunction of the associated command.
Indicatively, the sAddress of a command has the following format:
sAddr = " a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s;TX1:Language 1 text,TX2: Language 2 text "
❑ a:= O (letter corresponding to the command) / LO (Letters corresponding to the command logics)
❑ b:= Command UCL number. Maximum 4 characters.
Value 0 is used to select internal Ucl.
❑ c:= Command number. Maximum 4 characters.

Number of the first associated internal command. Each control element has two internal commands associated.
The first corresponds to the “ON” command (ctlVal = 1) and the second to the “OFF” command (ctlVal = 0). The
sAddress value has to be configured always as the number of the first command, which corresponds to the “ON”.
❑ d:= Enabling off/aperture signal number (EnaOpn). Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the signal that allows or blocks the OFF/aperture command, in case of it is
activated or deactivated respectively.
❑ e:= Enabling on/close signal number (EnaCls). Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the signal that allows or blocks the ON/close command, in case of it is
activated or deactivated respectively.
❑ f:= Expected status inverted. (1 character)

When set to 1 indicates that the expected status of the signal associated with the command is inverted.

User Manual 223
❑ g:= Health signal number. Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the alarm signal that is used to block the order. If the alarm signal is not
active, the remaining locks are checked.
❑ h:= Command Mode. It accepts four possible values (0-3)

Depending on this field, the commands will be blocked for "invalid position" or "position reached". The absence of
this field or a -1 value, assumes the same operation as that corresponds to a 0 value.
The table with the explanation of each mode can be found in the corresponding blocks section.
❑ i:= H automation signal number. Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: If it is a valid signal number, the status of the signal is checked to know if the equipment is in
automatic or not:
 If signal value is '1', H automation is activated, so command requests over this element from any
origin that is not “automatic” will be blocked
 If signal value is '0', H automation is not activated, so command requests over this element from any
“automatic” origin will be blocked
❑ j:= UCL number of the enabling off/aperture signal (field d). Maximum 4 characters.
The value 0 is used to refer to internal ucl. If it is empty the ucl number of the command is used.
❑ k:= UCL number of the enabling on/close signal (field e). Maximum 4 characters.
❑ l:= UCL number of the H automation signal (field i). Maximum 4 characters.
❑ m:= Disable block by switching hierarchy (ON/close). 1 character.

Setting this field to value 1 disables blocks per switching hierarchy for the ON command.
❑ n:= Disable block by switching hierarchy (OFF/aperture). 1 character.

Setting this field to value 1 disables blocks per switching hierarchy for the OFF command.
❑ o:= UCL number of the H automation signal (field i). Maximum 4 characters.
❑ p: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opOpnPrg. Maximum 5 characters.
❑ q: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opClsPrg. Maximum 5 characters.
❑ r: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opOpnFail. Maximum 5 characters.
❑ s: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opClsFail. Maximum 5 characters.
The UCL associated to the four return signals of commands Ed2 is the UCL of the command itself.
❑ TX1:= Command text language1. Maximum 16 characters.
❑ TX2:= Command text language2. Maximum 16 characters.

User Manual 224
RIO MODULES
15. RIO MODULES
15.1 CONFIGURATION
The RIO modules are configured using the RIOGGIO logic nodes A maximum of 8 nodes of this type is contemplated.
Each node has series of attributes that allow us to select the RIO modules with which we are to communicate and to configure the
outputs to be published:
Table 127 RIO module configuration attributes in Edition 1
ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION
The RIO number to which we want to associate the current node. It is a configurable value
NumRIO.setVal
between 0 and 99.
The RIO module to which we want to associate. It can accept the 1 (12 inputs / 4 outputs) or 2
TypeRIO.setVal
(8 inputs / 2 outputs). The value 0 is reserved to indicate that the node is not configured.
InRef1.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s first output.
InRef2.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s second output.
InRef3.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s third output.
InRef4.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s fourth output.
Table 128 RIO module configuration attributes in Edition 2
The RIO number to which we want to associate the current node. It is a configurable value
NumRIO.setVal
between 0 and 99.
The RIO module to which we want to associate. It can accept the 1 (12 inputs / 4 outputs) or 2
TypeRIO.setVal
(8 inputs / 2 outputs). The value 0 is reserved to indicate that the node is not configured.
InRef1.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s first output.
InRef2.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s second output.
InRef3.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s third output.
InRef4.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s fourth output.
15.2 OPERATION
When we have configured a RIOGGIO logical node correctly, the expected performance in the different attributes is as follows:

User Manual 225
RIO MODULES
Table 129 Operation of RIO module attributes
Status of the communication with the associated RIO module. The value 1 indicates that it is
St.stVal
correct.
Indicates that the configured RIO type does not match that which is being received. This value
CfgErr.stVal
is only displayed in IEC 61850, it has no associated signal in the internal data base.
Ind[1..17].stVal The values received from the RIO module.
The values sent to the RIO module. The value always coincides with the signals configured in
SPSCO[1..4].stVal
the InRefs in the same index.
Both the elements received and the communication status has associated signals with fixed position in the internal database. The
signals are distributed as follows:
Table 130 Internal signals associated with RIO modules
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASSOCIATED INTERNAL SIGNALS
Communication status 288

RIOGGIO1
Values received in command From 289 to 305.

RIOGGIO2

RIOGGIO3

RIOGGIO4

RIOGGIO5

RIOGGIO6

RIOGGIO7

RIOGGIO8

User Manual 226
CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE
16. CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE

The modification of the value of certain attributes requires the resetting of the device in order for the modification to have effect. In order
to inform of the need to manually reset of the device, the ResetDev.stVal signal has been defined within the GEN node’s LLN0. In some
cases, it is enough to send a new ICD / CID file.
For standard IEC61850 Ed1 configurations only, after a change on LGOS logical node subscription settings, the server does not require a
reset only if the LGOS was completely configured when the server started. In other case, the change of any of the settings will activate the
reset required signal.
The following table details the possible causes to activate this signal:
Table 131 Setting changes that require the manual reset of the device
LOGICAL NODE ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEACTIVATION WITH ICD FILE

The multicast reception MAC associated to
MAC.setVal YES
the goose
GoCBRef.setRef Goose control block reference YES
LGOS – Applies only on

IEC61850 Ed1 GoDatSetRef.setRef Dataset reference YES
configurations.
(Only if not completely GoID.setVal Goose identifier YES

configured at start-up)
ConfRev.setVal Configuration revision YES
LGOS data attribute assigned to one goose

InRef_.intAddr YES
data value
RIO module Type. Involves modifying the

RIOGGIO TypeRIO.setVal YES
structure of the goose.
Network interface associated to the Goose

genIPRV DevGoose.setVal YES
messages.
genIPRV NoGsVlan.setVal VLAN use in Goose messages YES
YES, it is also deactivated after the

LLN0 IRMod.setVal InRefs mode
modification of an InRef data
Change of the I/O cards configuration from
- Commercial code the local HMI (change in the commercial NO
code)

User Manual 227
RECEPTION GOOSES
17. RECEPTION GOOSES

The IEC 61850 server is conforming to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
For the details of the IEC 61850 interface implementation consult the following documents for the Ingepac EF family:
❑ PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for the IEC 61850 interface
❑ PIXIT: Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing for the IEC 61850 interface
❑ TICS: Technical Issues Implementation Conformance Statement
The Ingepac EF family maintains compatibility with the existing ICDs developed following Edition 1. The last point of this section
describes the GOOSEs subscription for that case. The remaining points refer to functionalities associated with Edition 2
configurations.
17.1 GOOSE SUBSCRIPTION
According to IEC 61850 Edition 2 the GOOSE subscription is configured using the Inputs-ExtRef elements in the CID file.
The Inputs section defines all external signals that will be received via GOOSE messages from other IEDs. In this section,
each ExtRef element references to one external item and the intAddr element makes the binding of the external signal to an
IED internal configured data.
The CID file of an IED with configured GOOSE subscriptions contains several IED sections. The IED section of the server device itself and
IED sections from each of the IEDs sending GOOSE messages to which the device is subscribed.
These external IED sections only contain the data model needed for the subscription to reduce the size of the CID file.
LGOS logical node is used to monitor GOOSE subscriptions. There are 32 instances of LGOS logical node, which allow
monitoring up to 32 GOOSE subscriptions.
The only configuration value in the LGOS logical node is the GoCBRef (Reference to the subscribed GOOSE control block).
The monitored values are:
❑ NdsCom: Subscription needs commissioning. When true, the received GOOSE message does not conform the current
subscription configuration; either the dataSetRef is wrong, the data set members, the configuration revision number, ...
❑ St:If true, the GOOSE subscription is active, other is inactive
❑ SimSt: If true, subscribed GOOSE messages with the simulation bit set are being received and accepted
❑ LastStNum: Last state number received
❑ ConfRevNum: Expected configuration revision number of the GOOSE messages
❑ RxConfRevNum: Configuration revision number of the received GOOSE messages
The St and SimSt data are mapped to the internal database to be used in for example logics or local display. The other
values are only available through the IEC 61850 communication.
The factory CID file contains 2 logical nodes (GOOGGIO1 and GOOGGIO2) with available data for the internal binding of
the received values.
Each of these logical nodes contains:

User Manual 228
RECEPTION GOOSES
❑ 32 boolean signals (Ind1 to Ind32 data)

❑ 4 dbpos signals (DPSInd1 to DPSInd4 data)
❑ 4 float values (AnIn1 to AnIn4 data)
In models with the "Extended control" option the IED data model can be extended with more logical nodes in the control
logical device for internal binding of the data received in GOOSE messages.
Extension capacity:
❑ Signals: Up to a total of 1024 internal signals (including the 2 GOOGGIO nodes) and taking into account that the dbpos
signals occupy 4 internal signals.
❑ Measures: Up to a total of 256 measures (float values).
As established in Edition 2 of the standard, it is possible to subscribe to both data attributes and data objects. The recommendation
following criteria of efficiency and response time is to use data attributes in GOOSE messages. In any case, the device supports the
subscription to data objects of the following CDCs:
❑ Status: SPS, DPS, ENS, ACT, ACD.

❑ Measured: MV, CMV, WYE, DEL, SEQ, DEL y SEQ.
❑ Controllable: SPC, DPC, ENC.
For more information about the GOOSE subscription configuration process consult the software tool manual
(energyFactorySuite/pacFactory).
17.2 GOOSE SIMULATION
The device implements the GOOSE simulation mode defined in the IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This mode allows the simulation of any GOOSE that is present in the communication network so that two GOOSES with the same
information data will be present at the same moment, the real one without the simulation bit active and the simulated one with the
simulation bit active. If the subscriber is in simulation mode, once it has received the first simulation GOOSE its values will be used
instead of the values of the original GOOSE.
Therefore, if the device is in simulation mode, it still accepts 'original' GOOSE messages, and only discards the 'original' GOOSE
messages for those GOOSEs which are simulated.
Simulation mode is enabled with the controllable data "Sim" included in the LPHD logical node in the GEN logical device.
In each LGOS logical node, used to monitor GOOSE subscription, the SimSt status shows with TRUE value that subscribed GOOSE
messages with the simulation bit set are being received and accepted.
When the subscriber is not in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=false) the simulated GOOSEs are ignored. The device keep on
using the "real" GOOSE messages.
When the subscriber is in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=true) the simulated GOOSEs are used for operational purposes. The
device ignore the "real" GOOSE messages after a first simulated one has been received. The corresponding LGOS.SimSt is set when the
first simulated message is received and only cleared when LPHD.Sim.stVal is set to false.
Once the device has received a simulated message for one of the subscribed GOOSE messages, it will not process the real one until the
simulation mode of the device (LPHD.Sim.stVal) is set to false.

User Manual 229
RECEPTION GOOSES
The following state machine, from IEC 61850 TISSUES data base (num. 1151), displays the different states and illustrates the
supervision of GOOSE subscription with regards to LGOS.St and LGOS.SimSt
stm LGOS
[LPHD.Sim.stVal==FALSE]
Initial
LPHD.Sim.stVal
== TRUE
[y] [n]
subscription normal
goose as long as no
[LPHD.Sim.stVal == TRUE] subscribtion normal [normal GOOSE message received] w ait for normal GOOSE
w ait for normal or [TAL expired] simulated GOOSE
goose
simulated GOOSE receiv ed
[LPHD.Sim.stVal == FALSE] [TAL expired] SimSt.stVal = FALSE
SimSt.stVal = FALSE St.stVal = FALSE
SimSt.stVal = FALSE SimSt.stVal = FALSE
St.stVal = TRUE
St.stVal = FALSE [normal GOOSE received] St.stVal = TRUE
[LPHD.Sim.stVal==FALSE]
[simulated GOOSE received] [LPHD.Sim.stVal == FALSE]
[simulated GOOSE received]
w ait for Simulated

subscription simulated [TAL expired] GOOSE
GOOSE
[simulated GOOSE received] SimSt.stVal = TRUE
SimSt.stVal = TRUE St.stVal = FALSE
St.stVal = TRUE
It is possible to enable a GOOSE transmission simulation mode with the "TestEna" and "LogInTest" setpoints, included in GEN\LPHD
logical node:
❑ TestEna: If this setpoint is TRUE enables the GOOSE transmission simulation mode
❑ LogInTest: This setpoint allows to configure a signal which, when active, enables the GOOSE transmission simulation mode
In this mode all the GOOSEs transmitted by the device have the simulation field with TRUE value and the mode is indicated in the status
data GEN\LPHD.TestSt.
The following logic for the two configuration setpoints is used:
❑ TestEna=FALSE : TestSt=FALSE
❑ TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(not configured) : TestSt=TRUE
❑ TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(Signal data with value=TRUE) : TestSt=TRUE
❑ TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(Signal data with value=FALSE) : TestSt=FALSE

User Manual 230
RECEPTION GOOSES
17.3 TEST MODE
The device implements the Test mode defined in the IEC 61850 Edition 2.
Switching between the modes (Mod.stVal) only happen as a result of an operator command to the data object Mod.
The values of Mod and Beh that are used are:
❑ On:
❑ The application represented by the LN works.
❑ All communication services work and get updated values.
❑ Control commands with test bit will be rejected with AddCause "Blocked-by-mode".
❑ Test:
❑ The application represented by the LN works.
❑ All communication services work and get updated values.
❑ Data objects will be transmitted with quality “test”.
❑ Control commands with test bit will be accepted only by LNs in “test” mode.
❑ Off:
❑ The application represented by the LN doesn’t work.
❑ No process output is possible. No control command should be acknowledged (negative response).
❑ Data objects will be transmitted with quality “invalid”.
❑ Only the data object Mod and Beh should be accessible by the services.
On-blocked and test/blocked values are not supported.
17.3.1 Logical devices management hierarchy

Logical devices or LD, are used to represent a group of typical automation, protection or other functions. The functions
are defined as logical nodes contained and managed in logical devices. The hierarchy determines how the mode (e.g.
On, Off, Test …) of these functions and sub-functions is managed, so that a change in the value of the mode at higher
level influences the lower levels.
LLN0 of the logical devices that can be configured with a hierarchy contains a setting data named GrRef whose type is
objRef.
In order to configure a hierarchy the format of the GrRef value must be set with the name of the higher level logical device
concatenated to the IEDname of the installation. It is also possible that it is not configured.
The device implements the hierarchy on these logical devices:
❑ CTRL: Control functions (only present in devices with "Extended control")

❑ GEN: General functions
❑ PROT: Protection functions
GEN is considered the main logical node and its LLN0 logical node does not have the GrRef setting. CTRL and PROT
logical devices can be configured with a hierarchy.
So the typical hierarchy configuration is to assign the GEN logical device as higher level of CTRL and PROT. In this case, the
functions of CTRL and PROT logical devices are considered sub-functions of the GEN logical node and if the mode of
the GEN logical device is modified (GEN/LLN0.Mod) it will affect the CTRL and PROT logical devices also.

User Manual 231
RECEPTION GOOSES
The mode of the LNs in any logical device may be changed individually with its own Mod, or globally by means of LLN0 of
each logical device. Only changes in GEN/LLN0.Mod will affect the other logical devices that are configured as lower level
in the hierarchy.
For more details about how hierarchy affects commands behaviour, consult on this manual the "Command Blocks: Commands
blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)" section.
17.4 SERVICE TRACKING
Service tracking is represented by the logical node LTRK and is defined as the function in charge of recording the
parameters values used by any service defined in IEC 61850-7-2 (after a service execution). It is thus possible to read, report
or log these values for system behavior analysis.
The trigger option for these data is "data-update", so it has to be configured in the associated control block if, for example, it is
included in a report.
Service type values tracked by Ingepac EF:
❑ 16 - SelectActiveSG
❑ 17 - SelectEditSG
❑ 19 - ConfirmEditSGValues
❑ 24 - SetBRCBValues
❑ 26 - SetURCBValues
❑ 34 - SetGoCBValues
❑ 43 - Select
❑ 44 - SelectWithValue
❑ 45 - Cancel
❑ 46 - Operate
❑ 47 - CommandTermination
❑ 54 - InternalChange
Service error implemented values:
❑ 0 - no-error
❑ 1 - instance-not-available
❑ 2 - instance-in-use
❑ 3 - access-violation
❑ 4 - access-not-allowed-in-current-state
❑ 5 - parameter-value-inappropriate
❑ 6 - parameter-value-inconsistent
❑ 7 - class-not-supported
❑ 8 - instance-locked-by-other-client
❑ 9 - control-must-be-selected
❑ 10 - type-conflict
❑ 11 - failed-due-to-communications-constraint
❑ 12 - failed-due-to-server-constraint

User Manual 232
RECEPTION GOOSES
The logical node LTRK contains data classes with functional constraint FC=SR needed for track the previously defined services. The
following common attributes are included in all services:
❑ objRef: Reference of the object that is being tracked: either a control block that is being accessed or a control object that is
being controlled.
❑ serviceType: Type of the tracked service.
❑ errorCode: Error associated to the service that is specified by serviceType; value no-error for successful service.
❑ originatorID: Originator of the service. In general, the IP address of the client.
❑ t: TimeStamp of the completion of the service.
❑ d: Description
The following specific data objects are and included in the LTRK logical node:
Command service tracking:
Each enumerated has its own particular EncTrk, in which the ctlVal matches with the enumerated type defined for the controllable
object.
The index at the end may be incremented (For example EncTrk2) to define different instances.
❑ SpcTrk: Control service tracking for controllable single point.

❑ DpcTrk: Control service tracking for controllable double point.
❑ EncTrk1: Control service tracking for enumerated controllable. Mod (OFF)
❑ EncTrk2: Control service tracking for enumerated controllable. Mod (Test)
 Associated services:
▪ Select, SelectWithValue, Cancel, Operate
 Specific attributes (in addition to common attributes):

▪ ctlVal
▪ origin
▪ ctlNum
▪ T
▪ Test
▪ Check
▪ respAddCause
Unbuffered report service tracking:
The IED generates a tracking register when a SetURCBValues is done over the following attributes: rptID, rptEna, datSet, optFlds,
bufTm, trgOps, intPd and resv, what is according to IEC 61850-7-2 Subclause 15.3.2.3.1.
The change of other attributes associated to a URCB like confRev, gi, etc. will not generate a tracking register.
The attributes RptEna and Resv of the URCB instances are tracked at loss of association with the Client, with ServiceType =
InternalChange, with “127.0.0.1” as content of the originatorID field.
❑ UrcbTrk: Access service tracking for unbuffered report control block.

User Manual 233
RECEPTION GOOSES
▪ SetURCBValues

▪ rptID
▪ rptEna
▪ resv
▪ datSet
▪ confRev
▪ optFlds
▪ bufTm
▪ sqNum
▪ trgOps
▪ intgPd
▪ gi
▪ owner
Buffered report service tracking:
The IED generates a tracking register when a SetBRCBValues is done over the following attributes: rptID, rptEna, datSet, optFlds,
bufTm, trgOps, intPd, purgeBuf, entryID, and resvTms, what is according to IEC 61850-7-2 Subclause 15.3.2.2.1.
The setting of other attributes associated to a BRCB like confRev, gi, etc. will not generate a tracking register.
The attributes RptEna and ResvTms of the control block are tracked at loss of association with the Client with ServiceType =
InternalChange, with “127.0.0.1” as content of the originatorID field.
❑ BrcbTrk: Access service tracking for buffered report control block.

▪ SetBRCBValues

▪ rptID
▪ rptEna
▪ datSet
▪ confRev
▪ optFlds
▪ bufTm
▪ sqNum
▪ trgOps
▪ intgPd
▪ gi
▪ purgeBuf
▪ entryID
▪ timeOfEntry
▪ resvTms
▪ owner
Goose service tracking:
❑ GocbTrk: Access service tracking for goose control block.


User Manual 234
RECEPTION GOOSES
▪ SetGoCBValues

▪ goEna
▪ goID
▪ datSet
▪ confRev
▪ ndsCom
▪ dstAddress
▪ minTime
▪ maxTime
▪ fixedOffs
Settings service tracking
❑ SgcbTrk: Access service tracking for setting group control block.

▪ SelectActiveSG
▪ SelectEditSG
▪ ConfirmEditSGValues

▪ numOfSG
▪ actSG
▪ editSG
▪ cnfEdit
▪ lActTm
▪ resvTms
17.5 SUBSTITUTION MODEL
It allows to establish individually the values of some data that are sent through the protocol IEC61850.
Usually, input from the process or the result of the calculation from a function provides the value of a data (in that case, the
source is called "process"). In case of substitution model, the value of the data may be provided by an operator making use
of an IEC 61850 client.
Substitution model is available for the following common data classes:
❑ SPS (Single Point Status)

❑ DPS (Double Point Status)
❑ INS (Integer Status)
❑ SPC (Single Point Control)
❑ DPC (Double Point Control)
❑ MV (Measured Value)
❑ CMV (Complex Measured Value)
The IEC 61850 standard does not define the substitution model for other classes like ACT (Protection activation
information), ACD (Directional protection activation information), VSS (Visible String Status) or any of the settings classes.
Data classes that allow substitution have an attribute "subEna". If it is set to TRUE, the value of the data used for the IEC
61850 communications is the value configured in the following attribute (depending on the data type):

User Manual 235
RECEPTION GOOSES
❑ Value:
❑ subVal: SPS, DPS, INS, SPC, DPC
❑ subMag: MV
❑ subCVal: CMV
❑ Quality: The attribute "subQ" is the value used to substitute the data attribute q. When subEna is true, the source quality
bit substituted is always set.
On measurement data substitution, the value is checked against the configuration of the measure (max, min, db …) so the
substituted value is affected by such configuration.
It is the responsibility of the client application, in particular in the case of multiple attributes to be substituted, to set the
relevant substitution values before enabling substitution, as well as, disable substitution on all substituted values.
The substituted values only apply to the IEC 61850 communication values. These means that the substituted values are not
used in the logics or protection functions of the device.
There are several data with a special behavior for which the substitution of the value affects to the behaviour of the
IEC61850 server:
❑ BlkGoose.stVal: It allows blocking the transmission of all gooses.

❑ TestSt.stVal: It allows enabling the simulation bit in transmitted gooses.
❑ Sim.stVal: It allows activating the simulation mode.
Also defined in the substitution model, it is available the attribute "subID". When the substitution is activated, the device
automatically sets the subId to the IP address of the client device that activated the substitution. After this moment, the client can
write any other string to identify itself. Later when substitution is deactivated, the value is modified to a fixed empty string. In
conclusion, this attribute can be only modified after setting subEna to true.
17.6 FILE TRANSFER
The IED implements the IEC61850 MMS file services. Following the Edition 2 of the IEC61850 standard, the structure of files and
directories is based on a FLAT FILESYSTEM with pseudofolders. This means that it is not accessed through folders, it is only allowed to
read the root directory where all the existing files in the different subfolders are shown concatenating the path to the file name.
The available permissions are the same as those of the user 'ftpuser', and only writing the pseudofolder /SCL/notvalidated/ is allowed.
This behavior is used from firmware version 6.0.17.0 for both Edition 1 and Edition 2 configurations. In firmware versions prior to this
(only Edition 1 configurations were supported) the file and directory structure is based on folders, being able to access and read each
one separately.
17.7 EDITION1 SUBSCRIPTION. LGOS MODEL.
Only for ICD configured as Ed1: This model makes it possible to configure and supervise the complete status of each reception goose
within a single logical node.
Each goose subscription is associated with one LGOS logical node wich contains the configuration for that subscription, so there can be
as many subscriptions as LGOS logical nodes in the data model. The factory CID file contains up to 32 LGOS logical nodes that allow the
subcription to up to 32 goose messages.
To use the received data in the goose message they must be mapped to LGOS data. Each LGOS has:
❑ 17 boolean signals (Ind1 to Ind17 data)

❑ 4 dbpos signals (DPSInd1 to DPSInd4 data)

User Manual 236
RECEPTION GOOSES
❑ 8 float values (AnIn1 to AnIn8 data)
17.7.1 Configuration values

Used to establish the desired subscription parameters for each goose.
To create a subscription it must be configured:
❑ Configuration data of the Goose message to subscribe.

❑ Data assignment: Each data from the received Goose message can be assigned to one data in the LGOS logical node
in which the received value will be copied.
Table 132 LGOS model configuration values
ConfRev.setVal Must match the value received in the goose.
GoCBRef.setRef The goose reference to which we subscribe.
GoDatSetRef.setRef The reference of the dataset to which we subscribe.
GoID.setVal The identifier of the goose to which we subscribe.
The reference to the signal in which the goose element established by the InRef index is
InRef[..].intAddr
received. It must be a mapped signal within the goose signals range.
MAC.setVal The multicast MAC to which we subscribe.
These values, apart from the “intAddr” for the internal data assignement, must be the same ones received in the Goose message.
The data mapping is configured with the InRef data (InRef1 to InRef34). The InRef index indicates the reception goose data position
associated with that InRef (InRef1 associated to first goose data, InRef2 associated to second goose data, etc.)
In the InRefx.intAddr attibute must be configured the LGOS data in which the value will be copied. The value must be:
❑ Boolean signals: Indx.stVal / Indx.q

❑ Dbpos signals: DPSIndx.stVal / DPSIndx.q
❑ Float values: AnInx.mag.f / AnInx.q
If in the Goose message the qualities of the data are also received they must be assigned to a “q” data of one of the LGOS node
data, like the rest of the Goose data.
To configure this assignment the user must know the format of the data of the Goose message because the selected data in the
LGOS node to copy the received value must have the same format.
Each LGOS logical node in the the factory CID data model has 34 InRef data so the device can subscribe to Gooses with up to 34
elements.
For example if the configured value is InRef3.intAddr = Ind2.stVal this means that the third value in the received goose (that must
be a boolean value) will be copied to the LGOSx.Ind2.stVal data.
The software tool allows configuring these goose subscritpions manually or automatically (for more information consult the
pacFactory software tool manual).

User Manual 237
RECEPTION GOOSES
17.7.2 Supervision values

They indicate information about the status of the goose subscription at all times. The status signal conditions the updating of the
rest of the Data. If the status is incorrect, the rest of the signals will not be updated with the values received.
Table 133 LGOS model supervision values
St.stVal Subscription status. Value “1” indicates that the subscription was successful.
Sim.stVal Activated when the subscription is received in test mode.
NdsCom.stVal Activated when the subscription has the “Needs Commissioning” flag activated.
LastStNum.stVal The last status number received.
ConfRevNum.stVal The configuration revision received.
Note: Only the St data is mapped to the internal database to be used in for example logics or local display. The other values are
only available through the IEC 61850 communication.
17.7.3 Checked values

The following values are checked to decide if the goose message is valid:
❑ TAL (Time Allowed to Live) not zero

❑ MAC multicast
❑ Dataset
❑ GoCBRef
❑ GoID
It is also checked that the types of each goose data mach the types of the LGOS data in which they will be copied.

User Manual 238
TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION
18. TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION
18.1 DESCRIPTION
In the device has a front Ethernet interface and may have up to two rear Ethernet interfaces. Each of which can be configured to
belong to the network that the user wants, as seen in the figure below:
❑ ETH0, frontal Ethernet.

❑ ETH1, rear Ethernet.
❑ ETH2, rear Ethernet.
The rear ethernets can be selected from one of the following options (see commercial code):
❑ Independent port
❑ Redundancy module configurable between PRP, HSR and Switch mode
❑ Link failover redundancy (both ethernet ports used)
The configuration of each network can be made:
❑ From the device Display (see section of the display).

❑ From PacFactory configuration tool (see user manual pacFactory).
The device has signals to indicate the link status of each of the ethernet ports in the LPHD1 node of the logical device GEN:
Table 134. Link status signals

Link Ethernet 0 Eth0Link stVal
Link Ethernet 1 Eth1ALink stVal
Link Ethernet 1 redundant Eth1BLink stVal
Link Ethernet 2 Eth2ALink stVal
Link Ethernet 2 redundant Eth2BLink stVal

User Manual 239
Redundant Link indications are only used in the case of redundant communications. In non-redundant communications, the link
indications are shown in the Eth1ALink and Eth2ALink data.
In the link failover redundancy the link indications are shown in the Eth1ALink and Eth1BLink data.
18.2 COMMUNICATIONS REDUNDANCY
The device has several options of physical communications redundancy divided into two hardware solutions:
❑ PRP / HSR / Switch mode (Options O and P of the commercial code)

❑ Link redundancy (Options I, J and K of the commercial code)
When the device has the PRP/HSR/Switch mode module, the user can configure any of the three options or consult the configured
option from the local display (Initial menu - Communications - Configuration PRP / HSR / Sw) or from the web server of the device
(Maintenance menu - Communications - IP network configuration).
18.2.1 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)

The PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) is a redundancy communication protocol defined in the IEC 62439-3 standard and it is one
of the redundancy mechanism recommended in IEC 61850 networks.
In the PRP protocol the device use two redundant ethernet ports and the protocol is based on the simultaneous transmission and
reception of data via both independent ports.
In PRP solutions two independent ethernet networks are used. Each device is attached to both networks and sends and receives all
the frames over both LANs simultaneously, consumes the first frame and discards the duplicate. With this mechanism PRP ensures
zero-packet loss and zero recovery time upon single network failures.
The two LANs have no connection between them and are assumed to be fail-independent, both are identical in protocol at the
MAC-LLC level, but they can differ in performance and topology.
With the PRP protocol additional information called RCT (Redundancy Control Trailer) is added to the Ethernet frame at the link
layer in order to control redundancy. This information is transparent for devices that do not use PRP protocol and it is used by PRP
devices to discard the duplicate frames.
Devices without PRP can be connected to one of the redundant ethernet networks but in that case they only can communicate with
the devices connected to the same network. In order to enable redundancy in non-PRP devices an external converter called RedBox
(Redundancy Box) can be used.
18.2.2 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR)

The HSR is a redundancy communication protocol defined in the IEC 62439-3 standard and it is one of the redundancy mechanism
recommended in IEC 61850 networks.
In the HSR protocol the device use two redundant ethernet ports and the protocol is based on the simultaneous transmission and
reception of data via both independent ports.
In the HSR networks no external switches are used, instead each device has two ring ports, and all the devices are connected in a
ring topology, with one port of the device connected to the previous device and the other connected to the following device.
For each frame to send, the device sends it duplicated over both ports. So one frame travels in the ring in the clockwise direction
and the other frame travels in counter-clockwise direction. Each direction is treated as a separate network. So if there is a failure in
one point of the network, the frames reach the destination using the other direction in the ring. With this mechanism HSR ensures
zero-packet loss and zero recovery time upon single network failure.
An HSR tag is placed at the beginning of each frame to allow early identification of frames. With this tag each device can identify
the HSR tagged traffic and reject the duplicated frames coming from the both ports of a device and the frames circulating in the
ring. When a device receives a frame directed to it or that it sent, the frame is discarded and it is not forwarded again in the ring.
The frame is also discarded if it is a frame that it already sent in the same direction (i.e. multicast frames).

User Manual 240
Devices within the ring are restricted to be HSR-capable IEDs. In order to enable redundancy in non-HSR devices an external
converter called RedBox (Redundancy Box) can be used.
18.2.3 SWITCH MODE

In the switch mode both ethernet ports act as an unmanaged switch forwarding the network traffic.
The recommended network topology would be a cascade or Daisy-chain connection without closing a communication ring because
the IED integrated switch does not implement the RSTP protocol.
18.2.4 LINK FAILOVER REDUNDANCY

With the link failover redundancy the device uses two ethernet ports for a redundant communication.
In this redundancy mode the device communicates by one of the ethernet ports and if there is a link failure in that port, switches to
the redundant port if the link status of that port is active.
If the link status of the passive port returns to normal, the communication is maintained in the active port and the devices only
change the active port in case of link failure.
In this redundancy, unlike the case of PRP redundancy, it should not be used two independent ethernet networks. The two
Ethernet ports of the equipment must be connected to different network switches, but must belong to the same network, so that
the switches should be connected at some point in the network.
This switching is almost instantaneous, allowing even Gooses redundancy without loss or minimal loss (1 repetition). Regarding
communications with IEC 61850 clients, depending on the ring reconfiguration time communications, we even could not lose the
connection or the open session.
The device has link failover redundancy status signals in the logical node LPHD1 of the GEN logic device, to indicate which of the
two channels is active and to indicate possible failures in the redundancy.
Table 135. Link failover redundacy status signals

Channel A active Ethernet 1 Eth1Ast stVal
Channel B active Ethernet 1 Eth1Bst stVal
Ethernet redundancy Alarm EthRAlm stVal
18.3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT NETWORK CONFIGURATION
When configuring the network of the device it must be taken into account the following considerations:
❑ Basic concepta about networks:

 The format of the IP address or mask have the dotted decimal notation. The checks are performed according to this
standard.
 Addresses ending in 0 correspond to networks, not devices. For example : 192.168.200.0
 Addresses ending in 255 correspond to broadcast messages. For example : 192.168.200.255
 All network traffic for an IP address that is not included in the configured networks, will be redirected to the default
gateway configured.
❑ It is not allowed the IP address or mask 0.0.0.0.
❑ It is not allowed the IP address or mask 255.255.255.255.

User Manual 241
❑ From version 5.25.16.1 of firmware it is possible to configure several IP addresses in the same ethernet interface. For
previous versions it is not allowed.
❑ Gateways configuration:
 There can be only one default Gateway in the devices and it will be associated to a specific Ethernet interface.
 If a Gateway is configurec, the static routes for the ethernet traffic will be determined by up to 10 groups or three
parameters:
 IP address of the network or destination host. This IP address indicates the network or the device you want
to connect to.
 Network mask or destination host mask.
 Gateway IP address. It must be in the same net segment than the IP address configured in that ethernet
port; because in another way the device will not access to the gateway.
 If the IP address of the network or destination host or the mask of the network or destination host are not configured,
the default values are:
 IP address: 0.0.0.0, it will be all the networks or default gateway.
 Network Mask: 255.255.255.255, it will be all networks or default gateway.
 The configuration of gateways can only be done from the Display.
 When changing the IP address, the gateways that are no longer accessible by the new IP will be removed
permanently.
 The IP change command keeps the mask that was associated with that Ethernet interface.
 Do not configure two different Ethernet interfaces within the same network segment. When you configure
two interfaces within the same network segment, the device will use only one of them.
18.4 GOOSES
GOOSE messages (IEC 61850 peer-to-peer communications) are not on the TCP/IP layer, they are Ethernet packets and are configured
at the MAC level.
The devices subscribes to multicast MAC addresses for receiving messages and transmit to a specific Multicast MAC address.
Ethernet interface ETH0 is not ready to receive / transmit packets GOOSE.
18.5 FIREWALL
From firmware version 5.25.16.1 the device incorporates a firewall functionality through which any port in TCP/IP communications (eg
PING, FTP, sFTP, HTTP, etc.) can be blocked.
The firewall function can be enabled or disabled independently for each of the network interfaces. In case of link failover redundancy
interfaces, only the ETH1 interface shall be configured for both rear Ethernets.
Each TCP or UDP port can be configured as "closed" or "opened". When the firewall function is enabled on a network interface by
default all TCP ports are closed and those that want to be left opened must be configured. And in the case of configuring a port as open
the IP addresses from which the port will be accessible can be configured or leave it open for any IP address.
Configuration is done from the pacFactory / energyFactorySuite software tool. Refer to the user manual of the tool for more details on
the configuration.

User Manual 242
KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY
19. KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY
19.1 GENERAL OPERATION
19.1.1 Display structure

The screens are grouped into the following types:
❑ Graphic pages. Only available in models featuring "extended monitoring functions".

❑ I/O pages
❑ Secuence of Events (SOE)
❑ Protection events pages
❑ Alarm pages. Only available in models featuring "extended monitoring functions".
❑ Device status pages
❑ Fault pages. Not available in CDx models.
❑ Measurements pages. Only available in CD1 y CD2 models
❑ Grouping of other screens
Each display type has its own treatment.
There are also menu pages (which include the protection, control and general settings, such as the date and time, password, FW
versions, etc.), which are treated differently to those mentioned above.
19.1.2 Organization of the pages

The pages are organized into screen types, whose order of presentation is configurable using an external tool. The tool also enables
the unit’s start page to be assigned. The keys “(Left), →(Right)” allow the user to scroll through the different screen types
defined as main screens. The screens can be scrolled in both directions: upon reaching the last screen type the display returns to
the first screen, and vice-versa.
By clicking on the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys in any screen, the screens belonging to the same type are shown. The I/O, SOE, and fault
pages are presented in a preconfigured order. However, in the graphic and alarm screens the presentation order is defined using an
external tool.
If, when in any screen belonging to specific type, we press “(Left), →(Right)”, the following screen type is displayed whilst the
screen position remains within the type in question. Thus, when scrolling through the screen types the last screen types selected
when exiting a specific type are shown.
If no keys are pressed within a period greater than 5 minutes, the unit returns to the start page and the first page of each type is
selected.
By pressing on <ESC> from any screen we return to the start page, whilst the current page of each screen type is maintained.
There is a special screen type called “Menu to Other Screens” that contains an index of screens not considered important enough
to have been defined as main screens and which enables access to the same. This screen is configurable via a PC tool.
By pressing <MENU> from within any screen, the first page of the settings menus is displayed.
The possibility of multi-language is available.
Device with IP protection covers
If the unit is fitted with an IP protection cover, only certain buttons will be accessible from the front, depending on the model in
question:

User Manual 243
❑ Preset Keys (1/2 chassis – 5U and 19” chassis – 4U)

The only keys available are I, O, SEL, INF and DES.
The INF button allows the different screens to be displayed in a circular mode, whilst the order is configurable via a PC tool.
❑ Functional Keys (1/2 chassis – 5U and 19” chassis – 4U)

The only keys available are I, O, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 and the DOT key.
The DOT button allows the different screens to be displayed in a circular mode, whilst the order is configurable via a PC tool.
19.1.3 Treatment of the functional keys

The functional keys are configured with the PC tool, with the control and associated status being configured for each key. In
addition there is a check box to reverse the status of the signal associated with the functional key. This option only applies to
Boolean (not double) signals.
The possible values of the status signal associated to the functional key and its corresponding representation via the LEDs are:
❑ Not configured: the 2 LEDs OFF.

❑ Unknown Status: the 2 LEDs OFF.
❑ OFF Status: upper LED OFF and lower LED ON.
❑ ON Status: upper LED ON and lower LED OFF.
❑ Invalid Status: the 2 LEDs ON.
The functional keys have 3 operating modes configurable by setting “GEN/LLN0/FbuttType”:
❑ “Functional keys” Mode:

 By pressing the key, the associated item is selected and the corresponding LED or LEDs blink.
 Once the item has been selected, the associated command can be executed by pressing the “I” or “O” keys.
 Once the above-mentioned key has been pressed, the unit executes the command and the lit LED or LEDs cease to
blink.
 Once a command has been executed, the status of the associated LED or LEDs is updated. In case of a failure, a
window indicating the cause of the failure will appear in the display.
❑ “Command 52 + Functional” Mode:

 By pressing the key, the associated item is selected and the corresponding LED or LEDs blink.
 Once the item is selected, depending on its status one of this windows is shown:
 ON Status: displays the confirmation window for the OFF command.
 OFF Status: displays the confirmation window for the ON command.
 Unknown / Undetermined Status: Displays the confirmation window for the two possible ON and OFF
commands. With the " (Up) or  (Down)" keys the desired command is selected and with the  (Enter) key
the command confirmation window appears. With the "ESC" key to exit the selection screen.
 Once a command has been executed, the status of the associated LED or LEDs is updated. In case of a failure, a
window indicating the cause of the failure will appear in the display.
❑ “Command Confirmation” Mode:

 The operation is the same as the "Functional Keys" mode but with the particularity that every time the user executes
an command (I / O buttons) a confirmation message will appear on the display (pressing the ENTER key executes the
command and Pressing ESC cancels).

User Manual 244
This mode will be applied for both the graphical screens commands and the functional key commands (contemplating
that we can be in any of the display screens)
NOTE 1: To change this setting from the display, the settings menu is accessed and in the initial menu select the 'general settings'
menu and press the ENTER key. Within this node, the setting is 'Command Type'. The 'With confitmation' option is selected and the
settings are validated.
NOTE 2: When a function key has not a configured signal but it has a configured command the 2 LEDs remain OFF until the function
key is pressed. At that moment the 2 LEDs start blinking.

User Manual 245
19.1.4 Graphics pages

The maximum number of graphic screens is 9.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from one group of graphic screens to another.
The order of the “live points” that have commands and the sequence of the graphic screens can be modified using the PC tool.
Figure 1 Single Line diagram Figure 2 Single Line diagram with indication of non-run command
The treatment of controls WITH Preset Keys:
❑ To run a command, we must first select the item to be sent. To do so, and once we have selected the screen
containing the item to be sent, we must press “SEL”. The symbol of the item that has been configured to priority 1
and which has an associated command will appear and begin to flash.
❑ By pressing “SEL” we scroll through the different “live points” with commands, in accordance with the preset
order.
❑ Once the item to be sent has been selected, the process is as follows:
 Press the key “I” for the following commands: close, in service, automatic, remote control, etc.
 Press the key “O” for the following commands: open, out of order, manual, local, etc.
 By pressing the key “DES” (if the item has maintenance configured), the command will be run, in accordance
with the item's status – if it is set to maintenance, the command will be “remove maintenance”, if it is not in
maintenance, the command will be “set to maintenance”.
If the command fails or if it can not be run due to a block, a small screen indicating the reason for the failure will be
displayed. This indication appears for 5 seconds, during which no operations can be carried out on the item.
❑ If the command is successful, no additional screen will be shown and the item's status will be refreshed.
❑ If it is in the control selection, only the “SEL”, <ESC> and “I, O, DES” keys are allowed.
The treatment of controls WITHOUT Preset Keys:
❑ To run a command, we must first select the item to be sent. To do so, and once we have selected the screen
containing the item to be sent, we must press  (Enter). The symbol of the item that has been configured to
priority 1 and which has an associated command will appear and begin to flash.
❑ By pressing the “(Left), →(Right)” keys, we scroll through the different “live points” with commands, in
accordance with the preset order.

User Manual 246
❑ Once the item to be sent has been selected, the process is as follows:
 Press the key “I” for the following commands: close, in services, automatic, remote control, etc.
 Press the key “O” for the following commands: open, out of order, manual, local, etc.
❑ If the command fails or if it can not be run due to a block, a small screen indicating the reason for the failure will be
displayed. This indication appears for 5 seconds, during which no operations can be carried out on the item.
❑ If the command is successful, no additional screen will be shown and the item's status will be refreshed to show
"normal".
❑ If it is in the control selection, only the <ESC>, (Left), →(Right) and “I, O” keys are allowed.
By pressing <ESC>, we exit the control selection, as we also do if we refrain from pressing any keys for a period of more than “10
sec”.
The measurements are displayed with the number of decimal points and digits preset with the configuration tool. The possible
situations that are covered when viewing a measurement are:
❑ Invalid: An '*' is placed in front of the measurement, there is no associated flashing. E.g.: * 25.3
❑ Outside range: '####' is displayed without flashing when the measurement’s value exceeds the maximum value for
the specified nº of digits and decimal points. E.g.: measurement value = 100 and number of digits = 2.
❑ Alarm: An 'A' is displayed in front of the measurement, with flashing, when the measurement exceeds the set
range. There is an upper and a lower limit. E.g.: If an alarm is activated when the upper limit is greater than 200 A,
the measurement will be displayed as follows: A 202.
Each of the measurements displayed in the graphic screens can be configured so that their values are referred to the primary or the
secondary.

User Manual 247
19.1.5 I/O pages

The device may be equipped with different types of cards, which are distinguished by the combination of inputs and outputs
grouped in 2 columns. Each card’s information is grouped in a page.
A text indicating the type of card, the address of the module assigned by HW and an indication of the current page number/number
of total pages, which is the same as that of the card, is displayed at the top of the screen.
An indication of a card failure is shown in the lower part of the screen. If the circle is filled, the card is in failure, whereas if it is
empty, the card is functioning correctly (Figure 92).The order of this type of screen is defined by the different card’s addresses –
the card with the lowest address is displayed first and the pages can be scrolled using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys.
The digital I/O data are listed in 2 columns. Each column contains a graphic symbol (a circle), followed by the input or output text
and the corresponding number of terminals:
The digital signals are displayed as an empty circle, when disabled, or a filled circle, when enabled. In the event of an invalid signal,
an empty circle with a cross is displayed to represent a disabled status and a filled circle with an inverted cross is displayed to
represent an enabled status (Figure 93).
Figure 92 I/O Screen Figure 93 I/O Screen with card failure

User Manual 248
19.1.6 Event pages

The event screens display a chronological record of all the changes that take place in the signals that have been configured as
events in the display.
Each event’s presentation includes the date and time to the millisecond, a 29 character text and a 7 character acronym.
The texts to be displayed, as well as the signals’ identification, are set in attributes of the CID and may be modified using an
external tool.
The screen order is defined chronologically. Their display order goes from the newest to the oldest. Within each screen, the most
recent are shown at the top of the page and the oldest at the bottom.
We can scroll through the pages using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys, going from the last page to the first, and vice-versa. The page
order runs from the first page, which has the most recent events, to the last page, which has the oldest events. The “ (Down)” key
is used to scroll from the first page to the following in increasing order, whereas the “ (Up)” key is used to scroll from the last page
to the previous pages.
Only the last 160 events are displayed in these pages.
The total number of pages and the number of the page currently displayed, as well as the number of events in the display, is shown
in the last row.
Treatment:
When accessing this screen for the first time, the most recent events are displayed. The “ (Down)” and “ (Up)” arrows are used
to scroll through the pages, as indicated above.
If new changes are registered whilst we are viewing the 1st page of this type of screen, the Display is refreshed accordingly and the
older changes are moved downwards.
When viewing any page other than the 1st page if new changes are registered, the Display will not be refreshed and the previous
data is shown. In such a case, a flashing, inverted video “NEW CHANGES” message is shown at the top of the page.
This indication is cleared when the most recent changes are viewed. To do so, we must go to the first screen.
Figure 94 Event Screen

User Manual 249
19.1.7 Protection event pages

The protection event screens display a chronological record of all the changes that take place in the signals that have been set as
such. Each protection event’s presentation includes the date and time to the millisecond, a 29 character text and a 7 character
acronym.
The texts to be displayed are defined in attributes of the CID. Signals are identified as protection events by means of the
corresponding enabling function in the corresponding settings node and by configuring the event masks. They can be modified
using the PC tool.
Figure 95 Protection event Screen
The screen order is defined chronologically. Their display order goes from the most recent to the oldest. Within each screen, the
most recent are shown at the top of the page and the oldest at the bottom (Figure 95). If the protection event list is empty, a text
indicating that the protection event queue is empty will appear.
We can scroll through the pages using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys, going from the last page to the first, and vice-versa. The page
order runs from the first page, which has the most recent protection events, to the last page, which has the oldest protection
events. The “ (Down)” key is used to scroll from the first page to the following in increasing order, whereas the “ (Up)” key is
used to scroll from the last page to the previous pages.
Only the last 160 protection events are displayed in these pages.
The  (Enter) key is used to select the first protection event from the screen being viewed, whilst the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys are
used to scroll to the next protection event, with the following treatments:
❑ If, whilst at the bottom of the page, we press “ (Down)”, we are taken to the next page with the first selected
protection event, unless we are already viewing the last page, which case the display will not be changed.
❑ If we are in the protection event selected and we press “ (Up)” key, we are taken to the previous page, although
the last protection event remains activated, unless we are in the first page and in which case the display will remain
unchanged.
Once this protection event has been selected, we can press  (Enter) to view the page with the measurements associated to the
protection event. Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from one page to another if there is more than one measurements
page per protection event. These pages are browsed in a cyclical manner, going from the first to the last, and vice-versa, as
corresponds.
Use <ESC> to exit the screen displaying the measurements associated to the protection event. Within the protection events’
screen, the change is deselected by clicking on <ESC> once again.
The total number of pages and the number of the page is currently displayed, as well as the number of protection events in the
display’s queue, is shown in the last row.

User Manual 250
Treatment:
When accessing this screen for the first time, the most recent protection events are displayed.
The “ (Down)” and “ (Up)” arrows are used to scroll through the pages, as indicated above
If the appearance of new protection events is detected, a flashing, inverted video “NEW INC” (new protection event) message is
shown at the top of the page.
This indication is cleared when the latest protection events are viewed. To do so, no protection events must be selected and we
must go to the first screen. Once we have arrived at this screen, if we scroll back the first screen with the most recent protection
events to have been registered will be displayed.
19.1.8 Alarm pages

These screens emulate an alarm panel, displaying each alarm as a rectangle with a text inside. The page format is set and includes 2
columns containing 6 rectangles each. There will be a maximum of 15 alarm pages, i.e., a maximum of 180 alarms.
2 lines of 12 characters can be displayed within each rectangle. Each alarm’s texts, identification and the number of alarms are
configured using an external tool.
When in standby status, the text is displayed in a normal video with white background and, when enabled, in an inverted video
with a dark background.
When the alarm changes status, the signal’s text begins to flash and appears and disappears within the new status.
If the signal is invalid, the text will be displayed with a cross covering the entire rectangle. If the signal does not exist, the
corresponding alarm's gap will be displayed.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from page to another.
Individual acknowledgements of receipt are not issued for the alarms. Instead, it is possible to issue acknowledgement for all the
alarms displayed in the page that is being viewed. To do so, we must press  (Enter) in an active alarm page and the following
message will appear in a small screen:
Confirm receipt of all alarms of the page?
If we then press <ESC>, the message is cleared and no acknowledgment of the alarms is issued. If we press  (Enter), the message
disappears and an acknowledgment is issued for all the alarms displayed on the page.
An indication of the total pages and the number of the page displayed will appear at the top of the page.

User Manual 251
Figure 96 Alarm panel
19.1.9 Device status pages

The device status displays may differ depending on the model. Values may be referred to the primary or secondary.
NOTE: The measurements correspond to the fundamental frequency.
The different screens depending on the model samples of the device:
19.1.9.1 MDx, CDx, ZTx, CBx and BFx Models

There are 3 pages which describe the device status.
❑ Screen 1:
 Relay date and time.
 Frequency value.
 Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12 transformers.
❑ Screen 2:
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).
 Total real, reactive and apparent power.
❑ Screen 3:
 Active table number (not available in CDx models).
 External power supply battery voltage.
 Phase and neutral thermal image value (only for MDx models).
 Restricted Earth value (only for MD0, MD2, TDx and LDx models).
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase (not available in CD0 model).
 Device temperature.
 Measures reactive power (only for CB model).
NOTE: The CD0 model only has a single screen with the following information:


User Manual 252
Figure 97 Device Status page 1, page 2 and page 3
19.1.9.2 TDx Models

❑ Screen 1:
❑ Screen 2:
 Maximeter value for each current phase of each winding
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage in TD0 model
❑ Screen 3:
 Active table number (not available in CDx models).
 Phase and neutral thermal image value (only for MDx models).
 Restricted Earth value (only for MD0, MD2, TDx and LDx models).
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase (not available in CD0 model).
 Measures reactive power (only for CB model).
❑ Measurements screen (4)
 Differential measures
 Restraint measures
 Differential 2º harmonics measures.
 Restricted Earth values.
❑ Measurements screen (5)
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents (module and angle) of each winding.
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of voltages (module and angle) in TD0 model.

User Manual 253
Figure 98 Device Status page 1, page 2 and page 3
Figure 99 Device Status page 4 and page 5
19.1.9.3 LDx Models

❑ Measurements Screen 1:
❑ Measurements screen 2
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).

User Manual 254

❑ Measurements Screen 3:
 Active table number.
 Phase and neutral thermal image value.
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase.
❑ Measurements screen (4) Figure 99
 Differential measures
 Restraint measures
 Differential 2º harmonics measures
❑ Terminal Measurements screen (5)
 Synchronized measurements all terminals.
NOTE: The LD3 model does not have voltages and power.

User Manual 255
19.1.10 Fault pages

These pages display the last 20 fault reports filed by the protection.
These screens are divided into two levels. The first level displays a list of the most recent faults, as well as the fault number and the
fault trip date for each case (Figure 101). The total number of pages and the number of the page being displayed is shown at the
top, whilst the number of faults stored in the unit is shown in the last row.
If the fault list is empty, a text indicating that the fault queue is empty will appear (Figure 100).
The faults are ordered from the most recent or latest (Fault nº 1) to the oldest.
Figure 100 Empty fault list Figure 101 Fault list
The second level displays all the information related to the fault, organized in several pages. The page is displayed with the number
of the fault being displayed, as well as an indication of the number of the current page and the total number of pages per fault.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to navigate through the first level screen. The page scroll is cyclical - when the end of the page is
reached we are taken to the next first level page and we are taken from the first page to the last page and vice-versa in accordance
with the key we press.
By pressing  (Enter), we access the second level of the selected fault. Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to move between the
second level screens pertaining to a single fault. Use <ESC> to return to the first level page.
The values can refer to the primary or to the secondary. It is allowed to enable / disable the treatment to automatically display the
last fault on the display from the Configuration / Settings section of the display configuration tool.
Each screen’s content will be displayed as follows:
The contents of each screen may differ depending on the model, then the different possibilities:
19.1.10.1 MD, ZT, BC, BF and PB Models

There are 4 screens with data for each fault:
❑ Start Screen, which includes fault’s data.

 Date and time: Indicates the date in the “dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.ms” format. There are three dates:
 Start of the fault (first unit picked up).
 Trip (first unit tripped).
 End of fault (when the trip signal disappears).

User Manual 256
 Frequency in the moment of the fault.

 Pick up and trip types: Summary of the fault with the 3-letter code formed by combinations of the characters
A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), RTP (teleprotection), IF (phase
overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV
(overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), RTP (teleprotection), DT (transferred trip), DP (pole discordance), IT (thermal
image). Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Distance: distance to the fault.
 Rf: resistance fault.
 LOC: locator code.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault:
 Open current. For each phase, indicates the current value upon the trip.
 Sigma ki. For each phase, indicates the sigma ki2 value.
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”.
Figure 102 2nd level Fault Screens, page 1 and page 2
 Pre-fault and fault. Indicates the values measured before the fault and upon the fault. This screen displays the
following values:
 Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of
each transformer.
 Restricted Earth value.
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (II)”.
following values:
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the current sequences (I0,
I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1 and V2).
 Power. Indicates the measurements of the total real, reactive and apparent powers.
❑ Tripped units screen, displays the picked up and the tripped units.

User Manual 257
Figure 103 2nd level Fault Screens, page 3 and page 4
NOTE: only the first 7 picked up and tripped units are displayed. If the number is greater than 7, a text appears at the bottom of
the screen indicating that there are more picked up units.
19.1.10.2 TDx Models

❑ Start Screen, which includes fault’s data.

A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF (differential), RG (restricted
earth), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence
overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), v/f (overexcitation v/f), IT (thermal image). Example: AC is a
two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral of each winding.
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”
 Breaker. Indicates breakers monitoring data upon the fault of each winding:

following values:
 Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of
each transformer.

User Manual 258
Figure 104 2nd level Fault Screens, page 1, page 2 and page 3
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (III)”.

following values:
 Differential current measure
 Restraint current measure
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (IV)”.
following values:
I1 and I2) of each winding.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the voltage (V0, V1 and V2)
in TD0 model.
Figure 105 2nd level Fault Screens, page 4, page 5 and page 6

User Manual 259
19.1.10.3 LDx Models

❑ 0Start Screen, which includes fault’s data.

A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF (differential), RG (restricted
earth), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence
overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), v/f (overexcitation v/f), IT (thermal image). Example: AC is a
two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Distance: distance to the fault.
 Rf: resistance fault.
 LOC: locator code.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault:
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”

Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of each
transformer.
following values:
I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1 and V2).
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (III)”.
following values: Differential current measure and Restraint current measure.
 Restricted Earth value.
19.1.11 Measurement pages

There are 5 screens displaying the unit’s rms measurements referred to the primary (not available for devices without measure
module, for example CD0).
NOTE: Certain wiring diagrams have invalid measurements that do not exist. They are represented by “---“.

User Manual 260
❑ Measurements screen (I)

 Module and angle of each of the unit’s 8 transformers and phase to phase voltages.
❑ Measurements screen (II)
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module).
 Frequency.
❑ Measurements screen (III)
 Power by real and reactive phase and apparent rms.
 Power factor per phase.
❑ Measurements screen (IV)
 Total real, reactive and apparent rms power.
 Total power factor.
 Real and Reactive Energy.
❑ Measurements screen (V)
 The harmonic distortion (%) of the 8 transformers’ measurements.

User Manual 261
Figure 106 Screen 1 Figure 107 Screen 2 Figure 108 Screen 3
Figure 109 Screen 4 Figure 110 Screen5
19.1.12 Menu to other screens page

This screen allows an access menu for the other types of screen that have not been given the consideration of main screens to be
displayed. We can group little-used screens within this screen and thus reduce the size of the main loop, making the movement
between those screens that are considered the most important quicker.
The content of this screen is set using the external configuration tool. Screens that are included in the main screen list cannot be
included in this menu.
The image below shows the following types of screen grouped in this screen: Events and Faults.

User Manual 262
Figure 111 Other screens
19.1.13 Shortcut menu page

This screen appears when we press “R”.
It contains those commands that can be given to the unit without having to enter a Password. The commands will vary in
accordance with the unit’s family.
Some examples are given below.

❑ Recloser command.
❑ Bank automatism command (for unit’s with a capacitor bank).
❑ .....
By pressing “R”, this page appears showing the first selected command. By clicking on the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys we can move
between the commands. By pressing “ (Enter)”, the selected command is run.
Figure 112 Quick access menu

User Manual 263
19.2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION MENUS PAGES
19.2.1 Operation of the menus

These screens enable us to view and modify the control and protection settings values. They consist of several levels of menus and
sub-menus.
19.2.1.1 Access to settings Menus

By pressing <MENU> from any of the other types of screen, a screen such as the one shown in Figure 122 will appear and
request that a password be entered.
Figure 113 Password request screen
We can access the menu pages with either viewing or modification permissions.
If we enter the correct password and press  (Enter), we will have permission to change settings. The “♦” symbol will appear in
the bottom left of the screen, as will the text “CHANGE SETTINGS”. However, if we press <ESC>, we will only be permitted to
consult the settings. Further more, a text indicating “VIEW SETTINGS” will be shown. The <ESC> key will function even when
some of the password’s numbers have been entered.
For more information, consult the point 4.2 of the Password Management section in this manual.
19.2.1.2 General operation

We can access the start menu screen by pressing <MENU> from any of the other pages described in the preceding paragraphs.
To exit the menus pages from the start page we must press <MENU> or <ESC>.
To move from a menu to a submenu we must select the menu that we want to explore and press  (Enter). To return to the
previous menu, we must press <ESC>. The <MENU> key enables us to return to the start menu from any submenu.
The  (Up),  (Down) keys can be used to change a menu's active line. If all the menu’s options can be displayed on the screen,
only the active line is changed when we change line. On the other hand, if not all of the menu’s options can be displayed on the
screen at the same time and the cursor is situated over the first or the last of the screen's menus, the menu will scroll up or
down, in accordance with the key used.
An indication of the number of the item selected from the total number of items in the menu on the screen currently displayed
is shown in the bottom right of the screen.
In the settings screens when a node does not exist in the cid an '*' before the text is displayed, indicating that the
node is disabled.

User Manual 264
The display change active table indicated by the following "(A)" the active table at that time.
Figure 114 Initial Settings Menu
19.2.1.3 Settings change operation

By pressing  (Enter) on an item from a settings menu screen that has no submenus, the settings changes screen will appear
(Figure 115). This screen displays the data corresponding to the first 6 settings. The selected setting can be modified using 
(Up),  (Down).
If all the node’s settings can be displayed on the screen, only the selected setting is changed when we change setting. On the
other hand, if not all of the menu’s options can be displayed on the screen at the same time and the cursor is situated over the
first or the last of the screen's settings, the settings will scroll up or down, in accordance with the key used. To return to the
menu screen, we must press <ESC>.
If the node is disabled, it is not allowed to modify settings and the display of the settings would be similar to the one you have
when entering the settings only mode. In the last row the text "DISABLED NODE" is displayed.
The following data can be seen on this screen:
❑ The following will appear at the top of the screen:

 Description of the settings node.
 Name of the settings node in IEC 61850.
 Current table (for settings which have the possibility of multiple tables).
 The number of the selected setting and the total number of the node’s settings.
❑ There are 3 lines for each setting, indicating the following:
 Description of the setting.
 Name of the setting in IEC 61850 and its corresponding value.
 New value of the setting. When this screen is accessed for the first time, the current value and the new value
coincide.
❑ The “VALIDATE PARAMETERS?” text appears in the last line. When selected and after pressing  (Enter), all the
changes to the screen's settings are validated. Until we press  (Enter) with the last line selected the changed
settings will not be validated.
❑ WARNING: If the user only has viewing permissions, the last line will not appear on the settings change screens.

User Manual 265
Figure 115 Settings change screen Figure 116 Setting Validated Screen
By pressing <ESC> after modifying a setting in the page, a confirmation message indicating that the user is about exit without
saving the settings in the CID appears:
Exit without changing settings?
Thus, by pressing  (Enter) we exit the screen and all the changes made so far in that menu are cleared. If we press <ESC> when
the message appears, we remain where we were.
By pressing  (Enter) after having modified one of the page's settings, another window appears. At this point, the user has 2
options:
❑ Wait until the CID modification process is completed with the new settings. At this point there are 3 possible
situations:
 If the modification is carried out successfully, a “Changing the settings OK” text will appear (Figure 116).
 If an error occurs during the CID modification process, an “Error in changing settings” text will appear.
 If a time out failure occurs whilst saving the modified settings, a “Time out in changing settings " message will
appear.
❑ Press  (Enter) and return to the settings change screen without the assurance of having modified the CID.
19.2.1.4 Settings Types

By pressing  (Enter) on one of the items that enables settings to be changed (the settings are text strings only be
displayed), and providing that the user has modification permissions, one of different types of small window will appear:
19.2.1.4.1 Option Type

By pressing  (Enter) on a setting of this type, a small window (Figure 117) displaying the following data appears:
❑ Setting name in IEC 61850.

❑ Setting description.
❑ Current setting value.
❑ New value of the setting. When this screen is accessed for the first time, the current value and the new value
coincide.
❑ The number of the current option from among the options available

User Manual 266
Using the  (Up),  (Down) keys, we can move through the different options in a circular manner, that is, when we reach
the last option we are returned to the first option. The selection option is chosen by pressing  (Enter). To exit without
selecting, press <ESC>.
Figure 117 Small screen for modifying OPTION type setting
19.2.1.4.2 Numeric Type

These can be changed using the numeric keys. The number is validated by pressing  (Enter), whilst <ESC> is used to cancel
and start again. The following data is displayed in each small window:
❑ Setting name in IEC 61850.

❑ Setting description.
❑ Current setting value.
❑ The setting’s new value. This field, which is empty, is where the value of the new setting entered via the keyboard
will be displayed.
❑ Maximum setting value.
❑ Minimum setting value.
❑ Setting step or increase.
The desired value is entered directly. The digits are entered from left to right. For example, to enter the number 2345, we
must successively press 2, 3, 4, 5,  (Enter).
The entered value is checked in order to ensure that it meets the maximum, minimum and step restrictions. Should it fail to
meet any of these restrictions, the “INVALID VALUE” text is shown. This text disappears when a number key is pressed.
There are 2 possibilities within this type, depending on the number, decimal or integer format.
Decimal: See Figure 118.
Integer: There are some integer type settings whose value is a signal number. In such cases, the “NOT DEFINED” text (Figure
120) indicates that this setting has no associated signal. If we wish to associate a signal, we must enter the desired signal
number with numeric keypad and press  (Enter).

User Manual 267
Figure 118 Small screen for modifying DECIMAL Figure 119 Small screen for modifying INTEGER Figure 120 Small screen for modifying INTEGER
type setting type setting type setting
19.2.1.4.3 Date Type

Equivalent to a numeric, although the numeric data entered are successively allocated in blocks of two to Day, month, year,
hour, minute, second. When the seconds have been entered, no further data can be entered until we have press  (Enter)
or <ESC> (the latter key deletes the data entered. If no data has been entered, we exit the settings modification). The
format displayed on the screen is: Day/Month/Year Hour:Min:sec
2 digits must always be entered for year, month and date. This means that in order to enter “1” we must enter “01”.
If the user enters an incorrect value, the last character entered can be deleted with the “” (Left) key.
To exit without saving any changes, press <ESC>.
Once the correct data have been entered, press  (Enter) to check that the values entered are valid. In the event of an
error, an “INCORRECT DATE” text will be shown. If the data are valid, no windows will be shown.
Figure 121 Unit date and time setting screen

User Manual 268
19.2.2 Password management
19.2.2.1 Changing the Settings Menu Password

The password may contain between 4 and 8 digits. The password is 1357 by default.
When we press a numeric key within the password screen, each keystroke will be considered part of the password and will be
indicated in the display with “*”. When we have entered between 4 and 8 characters and pressed "Enter", the data entered will
be validated against the unit’s password. If the password entered is incorrect, a warning text will be displayed.
Pressing <ESC> enables us to access the settings menus with viewing only permissions. If we enter the correct password we will
be able to view and modify. <ESC> will function even when certain of the password’s numbers have been entered, i.e., if we
press <ESC> while we are entering the password we will access the menu with viewing only permission.
The user can change the password, providing that he or she knows the former password.
You will be asked to type the password twice before changing it. The password numbers will appear hidden as they are entered
(the “*” will appear for each number entered). Once the first password has been entered, press  (Enter) and enter the second
password. Once the second password has been entered, press  (Enter) and the password will be changed (providing the two
passwords entered are the same). As with the numbers, they are entered from left to right.
Figure 122 Password modification screen
19.2.2.2 Changing FTP and SFTP Passwords

The FTP or SFTP password modification screen is accessed via the settings menu. This screen shows a virtual keyboard with
numbers from 0 to 9, the alphabet in uppercase and in lowercase.
Operation
❑ We must use the  (Up),  (Down),  (Left) and → (Right) keys to navigate around the virtual keyboard,
whilst  (Enter) is used to confirm the selected keyboard field.
❑ We must enter the old password and select the "Validate" field before finally pressing  (Enter).
❑ We must then enter the new password and select the "Validate" field before finally pressing  (Enter).
❑ A small window showing the result of the password modification (OK or the cause of the failure) will be
displayed.
If the user enters an incorrect value, must leave and enter the screen and start again.

User Manual 269
Figure 123 FTP Password modification screen
19.2.2.3 Commands management

19.2.2.3.1 Commands from the keyboard
There is a new settings menu within the Password screen to set the handling of commands from the keyboard. These
settings can only be changed from the display. There are 2 settings:
❑ Enabling key request to execute a command.

❑ Maximum time in which the entered password is valid, after this time you must enter the password again (time in
seconds).
Operation:
In graphic displays when you press the select key command the small screen that will ask the key display, after entering the
correct password will have some time to execute orders. After this time, the execution of orders will not be allowed. The
function keys have the same function.
The key settings menu and commands execution is the same, if you access the settings menu with the correct password will
be able to execute commands from the function keys without re-enter the password.
On the other hand, if you accessed the settings menu but only with permission from view settings, if you want to run a
command from the function keys will have to enter the password, same operation as if they were in a main menu screen.
19.2.2.3.2 PacFactory commands

From firmware version 6.1.18.5, the device implements the possibility of receiving remote control commands from the
pacFactory software tool as an alternative control channel to the telecontrol center.
The device considers the origin of these commands as "Remote" and applies the configured Local / Remote command
hierarchy.
For security reasons this functionality is disabled in the factory configuration and can only be enabled or disabled from the
local HMI of the device. It is not possible to modify the configuration by communications or from the pacFactory
configuration tool.
The function is configured by the setting "pacFactory Commands" ("YES": enabled / "NO": disabled).
If the device has this functionality enabled, the pacFactory configuration tool will detect it at the beginning of the
communication and enable an access to the command window in the "Tools -> Sending commands" menu.

User Manual 270
19.3 NETWORK CONFIGURATION
From the display it is possible to view and modify the network parameters of the equipment. For this there are a series Network
configuration menus.
Figure 124 Figure 125
The previous figures show 2 examples of possible situations:
❑ Figure 124 shows that the equipment has a network configuration with the 3 independent and enabled interfaces.
❑ Figure 125 shows that the device has a network configuration of ETH1 and ETH2 in Link Redundancy mode, and ETH1 has
been disabled.
19.3.1 Ethernet Configuration

❑ Ethernets Viewing
When accessing the data of an interface from the main menu of network configuration, a screen similar to Figure 126 will
be displayed, where the list of ips is presented, and 2 additional menus: Create new ips and enable or disable the interface
It is showing.
Figure 127 shows how the network interface, IP address, netmask, MAC address, and status link parameters are displayed
on the display, indicating whether the network cable is connected.
Depending on the configuration of the back ethernets the representation of some data of these interfaces varies:
ETH2 link: When a device is configured as a switch or link redundancy in the Network configuration screen on the ETH2
interface line, the text of Switch or Link Redundancy. The network parameters are the same as the ETH1 interface except
the link. For this reason, the ETH2 link status is displayed on the ETH1 screen.

User Manual 271
Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128
❑ Ips Editing
From the display screen (Figure 127) and having permissions to change settings by pressing the  (Enter) key, the screen in
Figure 129 shows the current data and a second row where you can enter the new values. Use the  (Up),  (Down) keys to
navigate the IP and MASK fields in a circular way, that is, when you reach the last, you return to the first one.
Figure 129 Ethernet parameters setting changes screen
To exit, press <ESC>.
Only the IP and MASK fields can be modified. If you want to change any of these fields, you must activate the special
mode keypad to do this, press the <MENU> key. For more information, consult the point 1.2.1 in this manual.
error, a small screen displaying the cause of the error will be shown.
❑ Ips Removing
From the ip display screen (Figure 127) you can delete the ip that is being displayed by pressing the (Left) key.

User Manual 272
❑ Creating new ips

Once on this screen (Figure 130) you can use the following keys:
 For information on how to enter the numbers, refer to the Functioning of the menus in this manual.
 The  (Left) key is used to delete the last entered value.
 The  (Up) and  (Down) keys to move between the IP line and the MASK line.
 The <ESC> key is used to exit the previous menu.
 The  (Enter) key is used to apply the change.
❑ Disabling / Enabling Ethernets

Once on this screen (Figure 132 and Figure 133) you can use the following keys:
 The  (Up),  (Down) and  (Left) keys to change the setting value.
 The <ESC> key is used to exit the previous menu.
 The  (Enter) key is used to apply the change.

User Manual 273
When an ethernet is disabled, all ips associated with that interface will be deleted. The DISABLED text will appear in the
Network Setup menu. If we access the menu of this interface will be shown the screen of Figure 134, with the ip 0.0.0.0.
If you want to enable again, change the setting to YES and then edit the IP1 to add the desired ip and mask
❑ Network configuration screen when there is a failure in the display configuration.

When there is a fault in the configuration of the display, there is the possibility to see the network configuration of the
equipment, pressing the  (Enter) key alternates the display of the error message and the screen with the network
configuration. The network configuration screen is shown below.
Figure 134
❑ Restore factory settings

At the end of the Network Configuration menu there is an option to restore the factory settings of the ethernets.

User Manual 274
19.3.2 Gateway Configuration

From the display it is also possible to view, add, modify and delete the gateways that are configured on the device. Up to 10
gateways can be configured, ONLY 1 of which can be a default gateway.
The following figures show the screens with the different interfaces for the unit’s network and gateways. We can see that a default
gateway with IP address 192.169.183.4 and a gateway with IP address 192.168.183.1 have been configured. The remaining
gateways have not been configured.
❑ Viewing a Gateway
If we select Gateway 2 and press  (Enter), the following screen appears (Figure 136) showing the Gateway’s data values
and a legend at the bottom with the different options available to the user.
Figure 135 Network Configuration Figure 136 Gateway display screen Figure 137 Default Gateway edition screen
If we select Gateway 1 and press  (Enter), the default gateway screen appears (Figure 137).
❑ Editing or creating a Gateway

If we press  (Enter) in the Gateway configuration screen and we have permission to change settings (having entered the
correct password into the password screen), the Gateway edition and creation screen will appear with the current data and
a second row into which the new values can be entered.
The following situations may arise when configuring a Gateway:
❑ Gateway Not Configured

 To add a default Gateway, we only have to complete the GATEWAY field (the Gateway IP address) and press 
(Enter). If not, an error will occur.
 To add a Gateway with a specific network destination, we must complete the 3 fields and press  (Enter). If
not, an error will occur.
❑ Gateway Configured
 To edit a default Gateway (Figure 137), we only have to modify the GATEWAY field (the Gateway’s IP address)
and, once the desired value has been entered, press  (Enter) for the change to become effective.
 To edit a Gateway with a specific network destination, we change the desired parameter(s) and press 
(Enter). Any parameters that are not modified will retain the current values.
To add a new Gateway, select a non-configured gateway, for example Gateway 3, and press  (Enter).
This screen shows the values of the Gateway’s 3 fields as non-configured. In such a case, we can only exit or edit (add) the
Gateway. By pressing  (Enter) again, the Gateway edition/creation screen will be displayed.

User Manual 275
The  (Up),  (Down) keys are used to move between destination IP address, destination network mask and the Gateway IP
address fields in a circular manner. This is not possible in the default Gateway, which has a single editable field.
To exit without saving any changes, press <ESC>.
If we want to enter the Gateway with the destination IP 10.15.1.6, Gateway mask 255.255.255.255 and Gateway IP address
192.168.182.252, you must activate the special mode keypad to do this, press the <MENU> key. For more
information, consult the point 1.2.1 in this manual.
error, a small screen displaying the cause of the error will be shown.
The screen will display the new configuration and the new Gateway introduced.
NOTE: If a default Gateway is configured, the last Gateway will ALWAYS be displayed, even if more gateways with a specific
network destination are added.
Figure 138 Gateway parameters setting changes screen
❑ Deleting a Gateway
If we press the “” (Left) key in the Gateway configuration screen and we have permission to change settings (having
entered the correct password into the password screen), the Gateway that is being displayed will be deleted.

User Manual 276
19.4 OTHER SCREENS
19.4.1 Contrast setting

To access the contrast setting screen we must press “0” and “9” at the same time in a screen that is not within the unit's settings
menu. Once we have pressed these two keys, the following image will appear in the display:
Figure 139 Contrast setting screen
If we then press  (Up) the contrast’s intensity will increase, and if we press  (Down), the intensity will decrease. To exit this
screen, press  (Enter).
19.4.2 USB treatment

When the user inserts a USB key, a small window will appear in the display indicating that a USB device has been detected and the
USB treatment will begin.
Figure 140 USB detected Figure 141 Remove the USB device

User Manual 277
Once the treatment has terminated, the following window will appear in the display indicating that we can remove the USB device.
NOTE: If the USB device is not removed within 5 seconds, the small screen will disappear and the display will return to the previous
screen.
Added a new menu of settings in the Password screen to set the USB treatment, this setting can only be changed from the display.
The setting will have 3 possible values:
❑ Disabled: The USB treatment is not available.

❑ With password: The USB treatment is available but needs the introduction of the key settings menu.
❑ Without password: The USB treatment is available without having to enter the password.
19.4.3 System Information

In this menu the information concerning Product Information and detailed version of the device.
The content of each submenu is:
❑ Product information: commercial computer code and the serial number of the CPU is displayed.
❑ Device versions:
 Versions of the CPU and the boards of the device are displayed.
 Sampled values firmware version. Only in models with sampled values modules.
 Micros expansion boards versions (CPU and HMI).
 Logic and CID versions.
❑ Last updates: last 18 updates are shown, for each update there is a record with the following data:
 Date and time of the update.
 Filename update.
 Result of the update.
❑ Last CIDs loaded: The display will show the latest cids loaded from the device boots where the following
information is displayed:
 Date and time.
 Cid name.
 Result validation.

User Manual 278
19.4.4 CID validation

Messages relating to the receipt and processing of a new CID on the device are displayed in a small window, the operation is as
follows:
❑ After a new CID give the device a small window indicating that you are validating the CID is displayed. Throughout
the process of validation when any key is pressed, the window disappears and you can access the different
menus display.
❑ Once the validation process resulting CID (CID Validated / CID unvalidated) is indicated in a new window, which will
remain on the display until you press any key or two minutes have elapsed.
Messages received new setting display is visualized between the windows and the window CID validating the result.
19.4.5 Security Logs

Are available which record user actions from the keyboard / display, such as:
❑ if the password setting menu or the key is modified FTP

❑ If the password is correct or incorrect
❑ Whether to enable / disable Enabling Ethernet ports
❑ If there is a change in the network configuration
19.4.6 Test Screens

There are 2 test screens on your device for digital outputs and programmable LEDs. To enter these screens need to have entered
the correct password to enter the settings menu.
The output test screen is in the Setup menu of GGIO cards. It defines the different cards and display equipment shown to modify
the time setting output activation.
Once access to one of the cards all outputs and the corresponding connection is. To activate the desired output is only necessary to
select and press  (Enter).
Pressing  (Up) or  (Down), keys allow to select different outputs. To return to the previous menu, press the '<ESC> key.

User Manual 279
Figure 142 Digital Output Test Figure 143 GGIO1 Test Figure 144 Leds Test
The LED screen test is in the I/O/Leds configuration menu.
To activate the desired LED is only necessary to select and press  (Enter) key. Pressing  (Up) or  (Down), keys allow to select
different led. To return to the previous menu, press the '<ESC> key.
19.4.7 Other Communications Menu Screens

The following submenus are available within the Communications menu:
❑ Network Configuration: mentioned in its corresponding section.
❑ PRP / HSR / Sw configuration: the ethernet corresponding to PRP, HSR or switch is configured (only available in models
with redundancy module PRP/HSR/Switch mode).
❑ Process Bus: shows the information of ethernets 3 and 4 if they are available (only available in models with sampled
values subscriptions).
❑ Communications protocols: a series of slave / server and master protocols are available depending on the model of the
equipment.

User Manual 280
WEB APPLICATION 
20. WEB APPLICATION
20.1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the features and capabilities of the Web Application, which is supplied within the firmware and allows to set
up and monitor the target IED.
The Web Application has been built in order to be responsive, HTML5 and CSS3 compliant and as lightweight as possible. It is supported
by the following browsers and versions:
❑ Google Chrome version 40.0.2214 or higher.

❑ Mozilla Firefox version 35.0.1 or higher.
❑ Internet Explorer version 10 or higher.
20.2 WEB APPLICATION LOGIN
First, the IP address of the IED must be entered into the browser's address bar in order to load the login page, i.e.: http://100.0.0.1.
20.2.1 Login
The login page needs a username and its password to login.
There are two users defined by default: a management user and a read-only user. The main difference between them is that
management user is able to modify parameters while read-only user is not. However, when a user with management permissions
logs in, it is asked whether he would like to login with management permissions or with read-only permissions. The corresponding
user name and passwords are the following by default:
Management user: user name admin and password modifica.
Read-only user: user name consulta and password consulta.

Manual de usuario 281
WEB APPLICATION 
When a management user tries to login, if there is already a management user logged in, the new user will be asked whether to log
in as read-only user or throw away already logged user.
Once the login has been successful the web page starts to load several tabs described below.
20.3 TABS
The main tabs are the following:
❑ Reports
❑ Settings
❑ Maintenance
❑ SW/Configuration
❑ Logout
20.3.1 Reports
The following subtabs are displayed in this tab:
❑ Status
❑ Events
20.3.1.1 Status
In the Status tab real-time information about measures and signals is shown. It is possible to read this information periodically or
each time the read button is clicked.
In the Measurements menu, the main measures taken in the secondary are shown.

WEB APPLICATION 
In the Signals menu, the most important signals regarding IED status, protection units, input and outputs status, etc. are shown.

WEB APPLICATION 
20.3.1.2 Events
In this tab, the list of events recorded by the IED can be displayed and a compressed file with all the events can be downloaded.

WEB APPLICATION 
20.3.2 Settings
In this tab, it is possible to read and change the settings of the IED.
The settings are arranged in menus regarding their functionality and they are read from the IED according to these menus. At the
bottom of the page there are three buttons in order to read settings, erase changes and send changes to the IED.
The settings are displayed as tables where the first column is the description of the setting, the second column is its value in the IED
and the last column is its value in the web. The background color of each setting's row changes according to its value. If the value in
the IED and the value in the web do not match the background will turn into yellow. On the other hand, if the value in the web is
not valid the background will turn into red.
In addition, it is possible to change the active table and view the value of each setting for every table.

WEB APPLICATION 
20.3.3 Maintenance
This tab contains the following tabs:
❑ Communications
❑ Users
20.3.3.1 Communications
The following menus are available:
❑ Synchronization. It is possible to synchronize the IED with the desired date and time.
❑ IP Network configuration. It allows to configure the IED's IP addresses and static routes configuration
❑ IP Network Tools. It is possible to execute a ping command from the IED and view IED's actual IP configuration and
routing tables.

WEB APPLICATION 
20.3.3.2 Users
In this tab, detailed information about current active sessions logged into the web is shown.
Additionally, it is possible to change username and password.
20.3.4 SW/Configuration
The SW/Configuration tab contains the following tabs:
❑ Configuration
20.3.4.1 Configuration
In this tab it is possible to load the configuration file.

WEB APPLICATION 
20.3.5 Logout
This tab is to end the session in the web.

DNP PROTOCOL 
21. DNP PROTOCOL
21.1 INTRODUCTION
The device provides a DNP interface to act as RTU and to communicate with a DNP master (for example a remote control station).
The communication can be selected for a serial line or via Ethernet, using encapsulation by means of the TCP/IP protocol.
Below are described the following topics:
❑ Protocol configuration settings

❑ Protocol configuration tables for digital signals, measurements, counters and commands (which are configured with the
software configuration tool)
❑ Implemented Device Profile and object table.
21.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
The protocol has the following configuration settings:
❑ Enable protocol:
 Yes
 No
❑ Slave address: DNP slave address of the device. Value between 0 and 65532.
❑ Master address: DNP master address of the master device. Value between 0 and 65532.
❑ Port Number: This setting enables the selection between the available communication channels:
 Disable
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet 1
 Ethernet2
❑ Comm speed (bauds): This setting enables the selection of the serial baud rate.
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud

DNP PROTOCOL 
❑ Parity: Enables the selection of the parity type to be used in transmission. The recommended default value is 0 (without
parity), as indicated by the DNP protocol.
 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of Stop bits: Enables the selection of the number of stop bits.
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
❑ Communication control: Enables de selection of the communication control type.
 Normal
 Fixed + DCD
 RTS
 RTS+CTS
 RTS+CTS+DCD
 RS485
❑ Min. respond delay (ms): Waiting time for the activation of the RTS and the transmission of a message after the reception
of a message. Value between 0 and 1000.
❑ CTS max delay (ms): Waiting time for the CTS activation after the RTS activation. Value between 0 and 1000.
❑ Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time for the transmission of the message after the CTS detection in order to allow the
carrier stabilization. Value between 0 and 1000.
❑ RTS drop-off time (ms): Waiting time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission.
❑ ACK delay time(ms): Timeout for Link Confirm. Value between 0 and 1000.
❑ Need time delay (m): Waiting time in minutes that must elapse before the validity of the clock is checked after receiving a
synchronization or start up message. If it is invalid, synchronization is requested to the master. Value between 0 and 10.
❑ Permission to synchronize: Synchronization permission from control centre.
 Yes
 No
It is used to configure the synchronization source when there are several available.
❑ Local time offset (h): Local offset for the time.

❑ Communication fail T.(min): Waiting time in minutes without receiving any valid measure before indicate communication
failure. Value between 0 and 10000 minutes.
❑ Data link confirm: Indicates if confirm is requested at the connection level. The value must be set to NO for TCP/IP.
 NO
 YES
❑ Max. App Fragment Size: Maximum number of bytes in an application message. Value between 512 and 3072.
❑ Freeze time counters: : Indicates if the counters are frozen with or without time. Only acts when zero variation is
requested.
 NO
 YES
❑ Default Status: Indicates whether the digital signal objects, measurements and counters are sent with status or without
status in messages sent in response to requests in which variation is not specified. Also valid for responses to class 0
requests. The bits have the following meanings:

DNP PROTOCOL 
Bit Value
0 Send all with status
1 Send digitals with status
2 Send measurements with status
3 Send counters with status
4 Send frozen counters with status
Bin. output status default: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data request also includes the object corresponding to the
binary outputs with status.
 NO
 YES
❑ Analog output status def.: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data request also includes the object
corresponding to the analog outputs with status.
 NO
 YES
❑ Frozen Counters status def.: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data request also includes the object
corresponding to the frozen counters with status.
 NO
 SI
❑ Analog input bits default: Indicates the default value for the "Var" field in the analog objects when no variation is
requested.
 16 Bits
 32 Bits
 Short floating point
❑ Normalized: Indicates the analog format.
 Secondary.
 Normalized.
 Primary. (Not operative in the current version, if used, the device configures Normalized)
❑ Counter bits default: Indicates the default value for the "Var" field in the counter objects when no variation is requested.
 16 Bits
 32 Bits
❑ Enable unsolicited: Enables the use of unsolicited responses with class 1, 2 o 3.
 NO
 YES
❑ Enable collision avoidance: Enables the collision avoidance detection with DCD method.
 NO
 YES
❑ Fixed Unsolicited T.out (ms): Fixed waiting time before transmitting an unsolicited response. Value between 0 and 5000.
❑ Variable Unsolicited T.out (ms): Variable waiting time additional to the previous setting of fixed time. The value options
are :

DNP PROTOCOL 
Setting Value Time in ms

0 255
1 127
2 63
3 31
4 15
5 7
6 3
7 1
❑ Unsolicited Repeat T.out (s): Waiting time in seconds before a retransmission of an unsolicited response when there is
not a link or application acknowledge to the previous message. Value between 0 and 630 seconds.
❑ Max.number rep. without solic.: Maximum number of retransmission of an unsolicited response. Value between 0 and
65535. Infinite for value 0.
❑ Special operations: Enables the activation of certain operational characteristics.
Bit Bit indication at 1

0 Dispatch of current counters with OBJ = 21
1 Reserve
2 Dispatch of unsolicited responses up to the IIN included each 10 seconds
3 Reserve
4 Reserve
5 Reserve
6 Restart message not sent on start up
❑ Change wait time (s): Waiting time for the SOE in the internal queue before processing the events. It is only necessary if
there are data from different IEDs in order to sort them chronologically.
❑ TCP Listen Port: TCP port used as server.
❑ Unsolicited react. delay (s): The waiting time to retry again the maximum number of retries an unsolicited message. Value
between 0 and 3600 seconds. Zero does not apply.
❑ Command selection time (ms): The waiting time to abort the selection command. Value between 100 and 15000
miliseconds. Default 15000.
❑ Max command wait time (ms): The maximum time waiting the protocol to the result of the command before responding
to the master. If expired is indicated “Not supported” Default 0.
❑ Enable T.correct.buf.events: True value performs the correction date all still digital events queues when the first
syncrhronization is received. The device does not answer with digital events since the first synchronization. Default No.
The configuration settings for the first DNP are in the GEN\DNPITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, as detailed in the following
table:

DNP PROTOCOL 
Table 136 DNP protocol settings

ProtEna Enable protocol NO/YES Boolean
Slave Slave address 0 65532 1 Int32
Master Master address 0 65532 1 Int32
Disable
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet 1
Ethernet2
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
Speed Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
Parity Parity None, Even, Odd Enum
Stopbit Number of Stop bits 1Bit, 2 Bit Enum
Normal
Fixed + DCD
RTS
RtsType Communication control Enum
RTS+CTS
RTS+CTS+DCD
RS485
RtsTmms Min. respond delay(ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
RtsOffTmms RTS drop-off time (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
AckTmms ACK delay time(ms) 100 10000 10 Int32
SynDl Need time delay(m) 0 10 1 Int32
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Boolean
SynOfs Local time offset(h) -12 12 1 Int32
ComFailTm Communication fail T.(min) 0 10000 1 Int32
LinkAck Data link confirm NO/YES Boolean
MaxAppSize Max. App Fragment Size 512 3072 256 Int32
FrzCnt Freeze time counters NO/YES Boolean
StDefault Default status 0 31 1 Meaning of bits (1) Int32
BinOutSt Bin. output status default NO/YES Boolean
AnOutSt Analog output status def. NO/YES Boolean
FrCntSt Frozen Counters status def. NO/YES Boolean
16 Bits
AnInBits Analog input bits default 32 Bits Enum
Short floating point
Primary, Normalized
Normalized Normalized Enum
Secondary
CntBits Counter bits default 16 Bits, 32 Bits Enum
UnSolEna Enable unsolicited NO/YES Boolean
CollEna Enable collision avoidance NO/YES Boolean
FixedTmms Fixed Unsolicit.Timeout (ms) 0 5000 10 Int32
255, 127, 63, 31, 15, 7,
VarTmms Var. Unsolicit. Timeout (ms) Enum
3, 1
UnSolTmms Unsolicit. Repeat T.out (s) 0 630 1 Int32
UnSolMaxR Max.number rep. without solic. 0 65535 1 Int32
SpecialBeh Special operations 0 255 1 Int32
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Int32
TcpPort TCP Listen Port 0 65535 1 Int32

DNP PROTOCOL 
ReacTms Unsolicited react. delay (s) 0 3600 1 Int32

TselecTmms Command selection time (ms) 100 15000 10 Int32
TOWaitTmms Max command wait time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
FixSynEna Enable T.correct.buf.events 0 1 1 Boolean
Where:
Meaning of bits (1) Bit Value

Send all with status 0 YES/NO
Send digitals with status 1 YES/NO
Send measurements with status 2 YES/NO
Send counters with status 3 YES/NO
Send frozen counters with status 4 YES/NO
21.3 TABLES
There are 4 tables to configure the list of digital status (binary inputs), analogs, counters and commands.
21.3.1 Digital status table

For each element the following fields must be configured*:
❑ Type: Type of signal.

 Simple.
❑ DNP Signal: Signal number with respect to the DNP protocol. Values from 0 to 4093. It should start at 0 and gaps
are not allowed.
❑ CIN: Signal incidence code:
 SP→ Value change in simple signaling
❑ InternalIED: IED of the signal. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal ID: Internal signal number that identifies the element inside the device.
❑ Class: Default class assigned to the signal. With value 0 the signal does not cause changes.
 Class 0
 Class 1
 Class 2
 Class 3
❑ Time: Time format for changes.
 Without time
 Absolute time
 Relative time
❑ Inverted: Indicates if the signal status is inverted. By default is not inverted.
 Not inverted
 Inverted
*The protocol configurator allows other non-operational options in this version.
21.3.2 Analog values table

For each element the following fields must be configured:
❑ DNP signal: DNP analog number. Values between 0 and 1023. Gaps are allowed.

DNP PROTOCOL 
❑ Internal IED: IED of the analog value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal ID: Internal analog number that identifies the element inside the device. Selectable from a list.
❑ Class: Class assigned to the analog value. With value 0 the analog value does not cause events.
 Class 0
 Class 1
 Class 2
 Class 3
❑ Dead band: Absolute variation value to cause an event. Values between 0 and 10000. It is applied over the value
stored in 16 bits.
❑ Dec: Number of decimal places for the analog value when the setting “Normalizado” is set to Primary or Secondary.
(Factor of 10 raised to the number of decimal). Values between 0 to 4. At value 0, the value is sent without
modifications.
❑ Limit scale: Full scale used when the setting “Normalizado” takes the Normalized value. It is the value that causes
32767 to be sent in DNP.
❑ The deadband is defined as the value that the analog value must vary to be sent as a event. It is always applied on
the current value of the measure to be sent.
When the analog values are to be sent, the current value is compared to the last sent value and if the difference is greater than
the DeadBand the current value is transmitted. A zero value does not generate any events.
21.3.3 Counters table
❑ DNP signal: DNP counter number. Values between 0 and 63. Gaps are allowed.
❑ Internal IED: IED of the counter value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal ID: Internal counter number that identifies the element inside the device. Selectable from a list.
❑ Class: Class assigned to the counter. With value 0 the counter value does not cause changes.
 Class 0
 Class 1
 Class 2
 Class 3
❑ Dead band: Absolute variation value to cause an event. Values between 0 and 10000.
21.3.4 Commands table

Fields that are expected to be received in the DNP command message:
❑ DNP command: DNP command number. Values between 0 and 255.

❑ Op type: DNP command value.
 TRIP

DNP PROTOCOL 
 CLOSE
 Latch ON
 Latch OFF
 Pulse ON
 Pulse OFF (deprecated)
❑ Comand type:
 All. All types supported.
 SBO. Only Selec Before Operate supported.
 DO. OnlyDirect operate supported.
Order configuration fields on the device itself:
❑ Internal IED: IED of the command. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal ID: Internal counter number that identifies the element inside the device. Selectable from a list. The
internal value is affected by the next field.
❑ ON_OFF: Internal command value. Use to select Internal ID.
 ON
 OFF
❑ Origin:
 Bay Control
 Station Control
 Remote Control
 Automatic Bay
 Automatic Station
 Automatic Remote
 Maintenance
 Process
Only one command is accepted in each message, count = 1. The On Time and Off Time fields are not used.

DNP PROTOCOL 
21.4 DEVICE PROFILE
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

Vendor Name: INGETEAM S.A.
Device Name: INGEPAC EF
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests Level 3
 Master  Slave
For Responses Level 3
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the
attached table):
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 1024< >3072( configurable)
Received 292 Received 1024
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
 None
 None
 Fixed at 1
 Configurable, range ____ to ____
 Configurable, range __ to __
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
 When reporting Event Data
 When sending multi-fragment responses
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm  None  Fixed at __10 sg____  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Response  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Others
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific
requested: variation requested:
 Never  Never
 Only time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable to send both, one or the other (attach explanation)  Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
 Never Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Never
 Only certain objects  When Device Restarts
 Sometimes (attach explanation)  When Status Flags Change
 ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Supports Collision Avoidance: Configurable Collision Avoidance Detection Method: DCD
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:
 No Counters Reported  No Counters Reported
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Configurable (attach explanation)
 Default Object _________  16 Bits
Default Variation ______  32 Bits
 Point-by-point list attached  Other Value _____________

DNP PROTOCOL 
 Point-by-point list attached

Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:  Yes  No
21.4.1 OBJECT TABLE

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes Func Codes
Obj Var Description Qual Codes (hex)
(dec) (hex) (dec)
1 0 Binary Input – All Variations 1,22 00,01,06
1 1 Binary Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
2 0 Binary Input Change - All Variations 1 06,07,08
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 00,01,06
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3, 4, 5, 6 17, 28 129 Echo of request
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 00,01,06
10,22
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 00,01,06 129 00,01
10
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 00,01,06 129 00,01
10
20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 0 Frozen Counters - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of
21 7 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Freeze
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of
21 8 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Freeze
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
22 0 Counter Change Event – All Variations 1 06,07,08
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28

32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without
22 3 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Time
16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without
22 4 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Time
23 0 Frozen Counter Events – All Variations 1 06, 07, 08 129
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28

DNP PROTOCOL 
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes Func Codes
Obj Var Description Qual Codes (hex)
(dec) (hex) (dec)
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 5 Analog Input — Single-prec flt-pt with flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
32 0 Analog Change Event - All Variations 1 06,07,08
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
Analog Input Event — Single-prec flt-pt without
32 5 1 06,07,08 129,130 28
time
2 07, quantity=1
50 1 Time and Date
1 07, quantity=1 129 07, quantity=1
51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 07, quantity=1
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06
1 06,07,08
60 2 Class 1 Data
20, 21,22 06
1 06,07,08
60 3 Class 2 Data
20, 21, 22 06
1 06,07,08
60 4 Class 3 Data
20, 21, 22 06
1 00, 01 129 00
80 1 Internal Indications
2 00, index=7
No Object 13, 14
No Object 23

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL 
22. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
22.1 INTRODUCTION
The device provides an IEC 60870-5-103 interface to act as RTU and to communicate with a IEC 60870-5-103 master (for example a
remote control station).

❑ Protocol configuration tables for digital signals, measurements and commands (which are configured with the software
configuration tool)
Depending on the model, the device has the following settings:
 Yes
 No
❑ Slave address: Slave address of the device. Value between 1 and 254.
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
❑ Parity: Enables the selection of the parity type to be used in transmission.
 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of Stop bits: Enables the selection of the number of stop bits.
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
❑ Communication control: Enables de selection of the communication control type.

 Normal
 Fixed + DCD
 RTS
 RTS+CTS
 RTS+CTS+DCD
 RS485
❑ Min. respond delay (ms): Waiting time for the activation of the RTS and the transmission of a message after the reception
❑ CTS max delay (ms): Waiting time for the CTS activation after the RTS activation. Value between 0 and 1000.
❑ RTS drop-off time (ms): Waiting time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission.
 Yes
 No
It is used to select the synchronization source when there are several available.
❑ Communication fail T.(min): Waiting time in minutes without receiving any valid measure before indicate communication
failure. Value between 0 and 10000.
❑ VDEW Compatible: A “No” value allows the use of private data range.
 No
 Yes
Compatible mode (Yes):
Digital control signals that are sent are those configured with a compatible Funtion Type. The zero value in the table
indicates Funtion Type = Compatible. The other signals do not appear.
The user is responsible for selecting the digital signals of the device in accordance to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Analog measurements are at most the first nine measures configured in the table. The Function Type and Information
Number to use (144, 145, 146 o 148) depends on the number of configured measures. 1, 2, 4 or 9 measures in the
measurements table respectively. In the last case the ASDU 9 is used instead of ASDU 3. The user is responsible for selecting
the device measures in accordance with IEC 60870-5-103.
Only the compatible commands are processed, those which in the table are configured by Function type = 0. The user is
responsible for selecting them according to IEC 60870-5-103.
Private mode (No):
All programmed control signals are sent.
The measures are sent with the Function Type field equal to "TYP in measurands ASDU" and Information Number field
equal to "INF in measuransds ASDU".
Supported commands are all that are programmed in the table.
❑ Function type: Value used to describe the type of protection equipment used.
 distance protection ( 128 )
 overcurrent protection ( 160 )
 transformer differential protection ( 176 )
 line differential protection ( 192 )

❑ TYP in measurands ASDU: This setting only applies when the adjustment VDEW is set to No. Indicates the Function Type
that is used in measurands ASDU.
❑ INF in measurands ASDU: The setting only applies when the adjustment VDEW is set to not. The field indicates the
Information Number used in measurands ASDU.
❑ Transformation ratio: Transformation ratio applied in the measurands.
 Secundary
 Primary
The configuration settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 are in the GEN\103ITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, as detailed in the following
table:
Table 137 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol settings

Slave Slave address 1 254 1 Int32
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number Enum
COM4
COM5
COM6
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
Speed Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
None
Parity Parity Even Enum
Odd
1Bit
Stopbit Number of Stop bits Enum
2 Bit
Normal
Fixed + DCD
RTS
RtsType Communication control Enum
RTS+CTS
RTS+CTS+DCD
RS485
RtsTmms Min. respond delay(ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
RtsOffTmms RTS drop-off time (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Int32
VDEW VDEW Compatible NO/YES Boolean
distance protection
overcurrent -
protection
FunTyp Function type transformer - Enum
differential protection-
line differential
protection
FunTypMed TYP in measurands ASDU 0 255 1 Int32
InfMed INF in measurands ASDU 0 255 1 Int32
RT Transformation ratio Secundary/Primary Boolean

22.3 TABLES
There are 3 tables to configure the list of digital signals, measurements and commands.
22.3.1 Digital signals table

Each digital signal device is identified in the IEC60870-5-103 protocol by the pair of fields Function Type and Information Number.
For each element the following fields must be configured with the software configuration tool:
❑ Type: Tipe of signal. Simple or double.

 Simple. (Default)
 DP
❑ CIN: Signal incidence code:
 SP→Value change in simple signaling. (Default)
 DP Open→ If the field Type = DP: Change in the calculated signal giving the 01 or open state of a double signal.
 DP Closed→ Change in the calculated signal giving the 10 or closed state of a double signal.
 DP Intermediate→ Change in the calculated signal giving the state 00 or intermediate of a double signal.
 DP Indeterminate→ Change in the calculated signal that gives the 11 or indeterminate of a double signal.
❑ Function type: Function type field of the signal. In the case that the signal belongs to the compatible range, (128,
160, 176 o 192), it should be configured a value of 0. The following values are not allowed: 129, 144, 145, 161, 177,
193, 208, 209, 224, 225, 240, 241, 254, 255.
❑ Information number: Information Number for the signal.
❑ Internal IED: IED of the signal value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal ID: Internal signal number that identifies the element inside the device. In the case that the signal belongs
to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the digital signals of the device in accordance to the
IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
❑ General interrogation: When selected it indicates that the information is included in the general interrogation (GI).
For these Information Numbers both status changes (OFF to ON and ON to OFF) are transmitted spontaneously.
For the others Information Numbers only the status OFF to ON are transmitted.
❑ Inverted: Indicates if the signal status is inverted. By default is not inverted
In the case of using a double-type signal, the four signals forming the double signal must be configured (Open, Close, Intermediate
and Indeterminate). Using this type of signal expands the meaning of the DPI field sent in the ASDUs:
When simple type signals are used, the field is sent as is the norm in section 7.2.6.5. Double-point information:
DPI := UI2[1..2] <0..3>
With <0> := not used
<1> := OFF
<2> := ON
<3> := not used
When using DP type signals, the meaning of the values 0 and 3 changes, becoming:
DPI := UI2[1..2] <0..3>
With <0> := Intermediate, (transitioning between end conditions)
<1> := OFF
<2> := ON
<3> := Indeterminate, (abnormal or custom condition)

22.3.2 Measurements table

❑ Measure number: Measure position inside the ASDU. The first position is zero.
❑ Internal IED: IED of the signal value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal ID: Internal measure number that identifies the element inside the device. In the case that the measure
belongs to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the measure of the device in accordance to
the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
❑ Límit scale: Real positive measurement value corresponding to 4095 internal units. If the value is zero and the
transformation ratio setting indicates secondary, the database limit scale is applied to the measure. If the value is
zero and transformation ratio setting indicates primary, the database limit scale is applied to the measure
multiplied by the transformation ratio.

❑ Function type: Function Type field for the signal. In the case that the signal belongs to the compatible range, (128,
160, 176 o 192), it should be configured a value of 0.
❑ Information number: Information Number for the signal.
❑ DCO: ON/OFF value of the command.
❑ IED interno: IED of the command value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself
❑ Internal ID: Internal command number that identifies the element inside the device. In the case that the command
belongs to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the command of the device in accordance to
the IEC 60870-5-103 standard
❑ Origin: Command origin. Allowed values:
 Bay Control
 Station Control
 Remote Control
 Automatic Bay
 Maintenance
 Process

SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL 
23. SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL
23.1 INTRODUCTION
The device provides a Procome interface to act as RTU and to communicate with a Procome master (for example a remote control
station).
The communication can be selected for a serial line or via Ethernet, using encapsulation by means of the TCP/IP protocol.

❑ Protocol configuration tables for digital signals, measurements, counters and commands (which are configured with the
software configuration tool)
 Disable
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet 1
 Ethernet 2
❑ Procome address: Procome slave address of the device. Value between 0 and 254.
 300 baud
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
 115200 baud
❑ Parity: Enables the selection of the parity type to be used in transmission.
 Without parity
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of Stop bits: Value between 1 and 2.

User Manual 305
❑ CTS wait time (ms): Waiting time for the CTS activation after the RTS activation. Value between 0 and 10000.
❑ RTS activation time (ms): Waiting time for the activation of the RTS and the transmission of a message after the reception
❑ RTS drop out time (ms): Waiting time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission.
❑ Channel Type: Enables de selection of the communication control type.
 Standard
 RTS Control
 By Phone
 Yes
 No
It is used to configure the synchronization source when there are several available.
❑ TCP Listen Port: TCP port used as server.
The configuration settings for the first PROCOME are in the GEN\ITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, as detailed in the following
table:

User Manual 306
Table 138 Slave Procome protocol settings
Data Setting Mín. Max. Step Remarks Type

Disable
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2
DirEnl Procome Address 0 254 1 Uint32
300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
VelTrans Speed (Bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
115200 baud
Parity Parity None / Even / Odd Enum
Stopbit Number of Stop Bits 1 2 1 Uint32
PorTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Uint32
ActCtsTmms CTS wait time (ms) 0 10000 5 Uint32
ActRtsTmms RTS activation time (ms) 0 5000 10 Uint32
DesRtsTmms RTS drop out time (ms) 0 5000 1 Uint32
Standard
TipoCan Channel type RTS Control Enum
By Phone
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Uint32
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Enum
TcpPort TCP Listen Port 0 65535 1 Uint32
23.3 TABLES
There are 4 tables to configure the list of digital status (binary inputs), analogs, counters and commands.
23.3.1 Digital status table

❑ Remte Signal, (nP): Procome signal number. Values between 0 and 1023.
❑ IED, (UCL): IED of the signal. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal signal, (nUCL): Internal signal number that identifies the element inside the device.
❑ Inverted, (Inv): Indicates if the signal status is inverted. By default is not inverted.
 Not inverted (0)
 Inverted (1)
❑ Reference 61850 of signal.
23.3.2 Analog values table

❑ Remote Measure, (nP): number of measure Procome. Values between 0 and 255. Gaps are allowed.
❑ Internal IED, (UCL): IED of the analog value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.

User Manual 307
❑ Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal analog number that identifies the element inside the device.
❑ Reference 61850 of measure.
23.3.3 Counters table

❑ Remote counter, (nP): Procome counter number. Values between 0 and 255. Gaps are allowed.
❑ Internal IED, (UCL): IED of the counter value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal counter number that identifies the element inside the device.
❑ Reference 61850 of counter.

❑ Remote command, (nP): Procome command number. Values between 0 and 1023.
❑ Internal IED: IED of the command. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
❑ Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal command number that identifies the element inside the device. The value of the
Internal command ON corresponds to the number of even order and the value to be the odd OFF
❑ Source (origen):
 Station Control
 Remote Control
NOTE: If the 'source' field does not exist in the file, it takes as default Control Station.
❑ Reference 61850 of command.

User Manual 308
MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL
24. MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL
24.1 INTRODUCTION
The Modbus master protocol allows communication with control and/or protection and measuring devices.
Currently, the device has only asynchronous serial communication, with a start bit, 8 bits of data and configurable parity and stop bits.
The protocol allows the database to update with digital signals, measurements and counters. It also allows to send commands. For
some type of devices it allows to send synchronization messages and request for signal changes or events.
A configuration table, generated with a software tool dedicated to this effect, will indicate the number of information elements of each
type that each equipment has, as well as its address according to the Modbus RTU protocol.
The following are detailed:

❑ Data types that can be requested/written from/to slave devices
❑ Modbus functions that are implemented in the protocol
❑ Types of RTU to communicate with
❑ Configuration software tool
❑ Modbus messages supported
 No
 Yes
❑ Port Number: It allows to set the communication channel between the available serial COMs.
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
❑ Comm speed (bauds): It allows to select the serial transmission speed.
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud

User Manual
309
❑ Parity: It allows to select the type of parity to be used in the transmission.

 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of stop bits:
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
❑ Communication control: It allows to select the type of communication channel.
 RS232_FO
 RS485
❑ RTS activation delay Time (ms): Minimum waiting time to activate the RTS and start the transmission. Value between 0 and 5000.
❑ CTS max delay (ms): How much time the device will wait to activate the CTS after the activation of the RTS. Value between 0 and
10000.
❑ Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time to start the transmission, once CTS has been detected, in order to stabilize the carrier. Value
between 0 and 5000
❑ RTS dropoff time (ms): This is the time that the RTS signal keeps activated after the transmission of the last byte. Value between 0
and 5000.
❑ Respond delay time (ms): Maximum time that the master waits to receive the slave response. Value between 10 and 30000.
❑ Inter request time (ms): The time between two request cycles of the master device. Value between 10 and 30000.
❑ Transmission retries number: Indicates the number of data request retries the master device does, if it does not receive any
response from the slave device at a given time (Respond delay time). Value between 0 and 10.
Table 139 Modbus Master protocol settings

COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number Enum
COM4
COM5
COM6
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
BaudRate Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
Stopbit Number of stop bits 1 Bit / 2 Bit Enum
RS232_FO
ChType Communication control Enum
RS485
ActRtsTmms RTS activation delay Time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
ActCtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 10000 10 int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
DesRtsTmms RTS dropoff time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
RespTmms Respond delay time (ms) 10 30000 10 int32
IntgcTmms Inter request time (min) 10 30000 10 int32
RetryNumb Transmission retries number 0 10 1 Int32

User Manual
310
24.3 DATA TYPES
The protocol allows the master device to read signals, measurements and counters from the slave devices. It also allows sending
commands to the devices. In addition it allows to request signal changes and synchronization for the next devices: PL300 and TCP-IH.
Different types and formats of signals, measurements and counters are supported. The device configuration will indicate the data and
formats to be requested for each slave.
24.3.1 Digital signals

The Modbus master has the following signal types:
Table 140 Digital signal types
Type Description Remarks

1 Relay status Status of relays bit by bit
4 Digital signal (16 signals/WORD) Digital inputs as 16-bit registers, 16 signals in each word
Similar to type 1 and 14 but to read the information of one
5 Device status
single byte: Fast read of a byte.
12 Digital signal (1 signal/WORD) Digital inputs as 16-bit registers. One digital input per word
14 Input status Digital inputs bit by bit
Type 14 can only be used for RTU type 5.
24.3.2 Measurements
The Modbus master has the following measurement types:
Table 141 Measurement types

2 Measurement For reading measurements with F03/F04 functions
7 Additional measurement For reading measurements with F03 function
Type 7 can only be used for RTU type 5.
The Modbus master has the following measurement formats:
Table 142 Measurement format types
Format Description Remarks
0 8 bits, unsigned Measurements in 8-bit unsigned format
1 8 bits, signed Measurements in 8-bit signed format
6 Float point Measurements in floating format
10 Procome Measurements in Procome format in accounts
11 15 bits plus sign Measurements in 16-bit signed format with sign in the higher bit

User Manual
311
24.3.3 Counters
Table 143 Counter types
3 Counter Counter reading
The following counter formats are supported
Table 144 Counter format types
Format Description Remarks
0 8 bits, unsigned Counters in 8-bit unsigned format
1 8 bits, signed Counters in 8-bit signed format
6 Float point Counters in floating format
Counters in 32-bit floating format:

7 Float point / 1000
The value is sent divided by 1000
24.3.4 Commands
The Modbus functions implemented in the device for the execution of commands are F05 and F16. Only one type of function can
be used for each device.
The information related to the Modbus functions is in the sections of Implemented functions and RTU types of this manual.
24.3.5 Request of events to Ingeteam Power Technology devices

Currently, the request of events or signal changes it is only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH. This request may be enabled from
the “Modbus master configurator”.
24.3.6 Synchronization
Currently, the synchronization it is only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH.

User Manual
312
24.4 IMPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS
The Modbus master functions that may be used for requesting and writing data in the slave devices are the following:
Table 145 Implemented Modbus functions
Function Code Description

01 Read Coils
02 Read Discrete Inputs
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Write single coil
07 Read exception status
16 Write multiple registers
The Modbus master will use these functions taking into account the type and database of the device configured in the “Modbus master
configurator”
24.5 RTU TYPES
The following table shows the type of devices currently considered in the Modbus master and the Modbus functions used for each
type:
Table 146 Characteristics of RTU types
RTU types Signal changes/Events Data request Command execution Synchronization

F01
1 NO F05 NO
F04
F01
3 NO F16 NO
F03
F02
F03
4 NO F05 NO
F04
F07
F01
F02
5 NO F16 NO
F03
F04
F01
10 YES F16 YES
F03
14 NO F04 NOT IMPLEMENTED NO
❑ RTU type 1: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing digital outputs bit by bit
 F01: Function for reading digital outputs bit by bit
 F04: Function for reading registers
 F05: Function for writing digital outputs bit by bit
❑ RTU type 3: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F16: Function for writing multiple registers
❑ RTU type 4: It supports reading digital inputs bit by bit, reading registers and exception states and writing digital outputs bit by bit
 F02: Function for reading digital inputs bit by bit

User Manual
313

 F07: Function for reading exception states
 F05: Function for writing digital outputs bit by bit
❑ RTU type 5: It supports reading outputs and digital inputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F02: Function for reading digital inputs bit by bit
 F16: Function for reading multiple registers
❑ RTU type 10: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F16: Function for reading multiple registers
The request of events and synchronization is currently only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH.
 F03: Function for event requests
 F16: Function for synchronizing
❑ RTU type 14: It supports reading registers
24.6 SW CONFIGURATION TOOL
The Modbus master protocol is configured using the “Modbus master configurator” available in the PacFactory configuration SW and
EFS tools. This tool generates a configuration file that is sent to the device.
24.6.1 Fields to be configured

The tool has different tabs that are filled based on what is going to be integrated. Each tab has several fields.
❑ IED
 Modbus address
Address of the slave device (1 - 128). It is the value of the Modbus address of the device to communicate with.
 Internal address
Address of the slave device in the internal database. Its value is between 1 and 32. All the elements that are requested from
the device will be mapped on this address of the master database.
 RTU type
This field can take the following values: 1, 3, 4, 5, 10 and 14. The characteristics of each of these values are given in the RTU
Types section of this manual. It shows the functions used for each type of device.
 Sync RTU

User Manual
314
Enables sending synchronization to the slave device. It is only implemented for RTU type 10 (TCP-IH or PL300).
To enable synchronization, the Sync RTU flag is activated. Once enabled, the following screen appears:
The synchronization address of the device is indicated in the Sync address field.
PL300 = 240 and TCP-IH = 240.
Sync adjust (ftrans) is the time in ms that will be added to the synchronization time to correct possible drifts.
 Events request
It enables the request of signal changes of the slave device. It is only supported for RTU type 10 (PL300 or TCP-IH).
Once enabled, the following screen appears:
In the Event address field, the signal change start address for the given device is indicated. PL300 = 20480 and TCP-IH =
1664.

User Manual
315
 Endianness
It can take two values: Big Endian and Little Endian. Default value: Big endian.
It indicates the way in which the slave equipment sends the data.
Examples:
 Big endian
Description Floating data
Decimal value 212.5
Hexadecimal value 43 54 80 00
Data sent by communications 43 54 80 00
 Little endian
Description Floating data
212.5
Decimal value
❑ Digital signals
 Modbus address
Modbus address of the slave device. It can take values between 1 and 128.
 Modbus signal
Initial memory address of the signal to be read in the slave device database.
 Type
Type of signal to be read. See the “Digital signals” section of this manual.
 No. of registers
It is the number of signals or the number of registers to be read, depending on the type of signal.
Relay status, Device status or Input status: number of signals.

User Manual
316
Digital signal (16 signals / WORD) or Digital signal (1 signal / WORD): number of registers.
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database on which these signals will be mapped. The
automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set internal IDs
❑ Measurements
 Modbus address
 Modbus measurement
First memory address of the measurement to be read in the slave device database.
 Type
Type of measurement to be read. See the “Measurements” section of this manual.
 Format
Format of the measurement to be read. See the “Measurements” section of this manual.
 Swapping
Possible values: No swap, Byte Word swap, Byte swap and Word swap. Default value: No swap.
It indicates the order in which the slave device sends data greater than one byte. Usually used for measurements and / or
32bit counters.
Examples:
 No swap
Description Integer data
Decimal value 70000
This is the most usual option.

User Manual
317
 Byte Word swap
Decimal value 70000
 Byte swap
Decimal value 70000
 Word swap
Decimal value 70000
 No. of elements
It is the number of measurements to be read from the “Modbus measurement” field.
 Scale factor
The measurement value in the internal database is the value read multiplied by the scale factor.
By double-clicking on this field, it appears a screen for the scale factor configuration for this measurement.

User Manual
318
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database, where these measurements will be mapped.
The automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set internal IDs.
❑ Counters
 Modbus address
 Modbus counter
Initial memory address of the counters to be read in the slave device database.
 Format
Format of the counters to be read. See the “Counters” section of this manual.
 Swapping
Possible values: No swap, Byte Word swap, Byte swap and Word swap. Default value: No swap.
It indicates the order in which the slave device sends data greater than one byte. Usually used for measurements and / or
32 bit counters.

User Manual
319
Examples:
 No swap
Decimal value 120000
Hexadecimal value 00 01 D4 C0
Data sent by communications 00 01 D4 C0
This is the most usual option.
 Byte Word swap
Data sent by communications C0 D4 01 00
 Byte swap
Data sent by communications 01 00 C0 D4
 Word swap
Data sent by communications D4 C0 00 01

User Manual
320
 No. of elements
It is the number of counters to be read from the “Modbus counter” field.
 Scale factor
The counter value in the internal database is the value read, multiplied by the scale factor.
By double-clicking on this field, it appears a screen for the scale factor configuration for that counter.
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database where these counters will be mapped. The
automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set internal IDs.
❑ Commands
 Modbus address
 Command No.
Number of command in the master internal database (0-3071).
 Modbus command
Modbus address for the command to be executed.
 Value
Value to be written on the Modbus command field.

User Manual
321
24.6.2 Configuration example

Database of the device to be integrated:
❑ Big endian
❑ Events request: No
❑ Synchronization: No
❑ Signals to be read
 From address 0
 Number of signals: 2
 Type: Digital outputs
❑ Measurements to read
 From address 0
 Number of measurements: 2
 Format: 16-bit unsigned
 Swapping: No swap
 Scale factors
▪ Measurement 0: 0.1
 From address 40
 Format: 16-bit signed
 Scale factors
 From address 66
 Scale factors
▪ Measurement 0: 1
 From address 500
 Format: 32-bit signed
 Scale factors
 From address 530
 Format: float
 Scale factors
❑ Counters to read

User Manual
322
 From address 60
 Number of counters: 4
 Scale factors
▪ Counter 0: 0.001
▪ Counter 1: 0.001
▪ Counter 2: 0.001
▪ Counter 3: 0.001
❑ Commands to execute
 Number of command 0
 Address: 0
 Value: 255
With this configuration, digital output 1 is activated.
 Address: 1
 Value: 255
With this configuration, digital output 2 is activated.
 Address: 0
 Value: 0
With this configuration, digital output 1 is deactivated.
 Address: 1
 Value: 0
With this configuration, digital output 2 is deactivated.
Database configuration:
❑ IED
❑ Digital signals

User Manual
323
❑ Measurements
❑ Counters
❑ Commands
24.7 SERIAL MESSAGES
The format of the serial communication messages used by the Modbus Master protocol is shown below, with the functions used by the
device as an example.
24.7.1 Format
❑ Master request:
 Remote address - 1 byte
 Function code - 1 byte
 Data - variable number of bytes
 CRC - 2 byte
❑ Slave response:

User Manual
324
 Data – variable number of bytes

 CRC - 2 byte
Remote address: Modbus address (Value between 1 and 128). Broadcast messages (address 0) are not allowed.
Function code: If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote has not performed the required function and will answer with
an error code.
CRC: LSB is sent first, followed by the MSB.
CRC generator (polynomial): x16 + x15 + x2 +1
24.7.2 Examples
❑ Function code 01 – Read n output bits
❑ Example:
 Remote address: 1
 Request of 12 output bits, from output 3 to 14 (All of these bits are activated)
Table 147 Request
Description Bytes Example (Hex)
Remote address 1 0x01
Function code 1 0x01

0x00
Starting address 2
0x03 Start reading on digital output 3
0x00
Number of digital outputs 2
0x0C Reading of 12 digital outputs
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 148 Response

0x02
Byte count 1
2 bytes
0x0F
Outputs status 2
0xFF
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ In the request response, the LSB of the Outputs status byte contains the value of the first output (output 3). The rest of the
bytes are sent in lowest to highest order. If the number of bits requested is not a multiple of 8, the byte will be filled with
zeros.
❑ Function code 02 – Read n input bits
❑ Request and response frames are identical to the function 01.
❑ Function code 03 – Read n output words
❑ To read digital signals, measurements and counters.
❑ Example:

User Manual
325
 Address: 0400h - Data: 00AAh
 Address: 0401h - Data: 00FFh
Table 149 Request

0x04
Starting address 2
0x00
0x00
Number of registers (words) 2
0x02
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 150 Response

0x04
Byte count 1
2 registers = 4 bytes
0x00
Register value 1 2
0xAA Value in address 0x400
0x00
Register value 2 2
0xFF Value in address 0x401
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 04 – Read n input words

❑ For reading digital signals, measurements and counters.
❑ Function code 05 – One-bit writing
❑ For writing a bit to ON or OFF.
❑ Example:
 Writing command number 24 to 1

User Manual
326
Table 151 Request

0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Output value 2
0x00 Writing to 1
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 152 Response

0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Output value 2
0x00 Writing to 1
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 07 – Read exception status

❑ Quick reading of a byte.
❑ Example:
Table 153 Request
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 154 Response
Output data 1 0x6D
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 16 – Write multiple registers

User Manual
327
Writing of values on the device.
Example:
Table 155 Request

0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
0x00
0x01
0x02
Byte count 1
1 register = 2 bytes
0x00
Register value 2
0x18 Number of command to execute
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 156 Response

0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
0x00
0x01
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual
328
MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL
25. MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL

Available since 6.2.19.0 version of firmware and 8.3.0.5 of CID.
25.1 INTRODUCTION
The device has a Modbus slave protocol which can communicate with a telecontrol station or with any system that works as a master.
The device has two types of communication:
❑ RTU (Remote terminal unit): Asynchronous serial communication, with a start bit, 8 bits of data and configurable parity and stop
bits.
❑ TCP/IP: Uses a TCP/IP network connecting through the registered port 502.
The protocol allows sending digital signals, measurements and counters to the master. It also allows the synchronization of the device
and the execution of commands.
A configuration table, generated with a software tool dedicated to this effect, will indicate the number of information elements that
the equipment has.
The following are detailed:

❑ Protocol profile
❑ Control processes
❑ Equipment address map
❑ Data format
❑ Configuration software tool
❑ Modbus messages supported (serial and TCP/IP)
 No
 Yes
❑ Modbus address: Modbus address of the slave device. Value between 1 and 128.
❑ Port number: It allows to set the communication channel
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet
❑ TCP listen port: It allows to set a number of network port to communicate via TCP/IP. Value between 0 and 65535. Default value
502.

User Manual
329
❑ Comm speed(bauds): It allows to set the speed of the serial transmission

 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
❑ Parity: It allows to select the type of parity to use in the transmission
 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of stop bits:
 1Bit
 2Bit
❑ Communication control: It allows to select the type of communication channel
 RS232_FO
 RS485
❑ RTS activation delay time (ms): Minimum waiting time to activate the RTS and start the transmission. Value between 0 and 5000.
❑ CTS max delay (ms): How much time the device will wait to activate the CTS after the activation of the RTS. Value between 0 and
10000.
❑ Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time to start the transmission, once CTS has been detected, in order to stabilize the carrier. Value
between 0 and 5000.
❑ RTS dropoff time (ms): This is the time that the RTS signal keeps activated after the transmission of the last byte. Value between 0
and 5000.
❑ Change wait time (s): Waiting time in queue of the changes configured in the protocol tables before starting their treatment. It only
makes sense if signals from different IEDs are configured for their previous chronological ordering.
❑ Request for changes: It allows to set if the master device makes the request for changes to the slave equipment
 No
 Yes
❑ Data transmission type: It allows to set the order of the data to be transmitted
 Big endian
 Little endian
❑ Permission to synchronize: It allows to set if the master device makes the synchronization of the slave equipment
 No
 Yes
❑ Server IP address: It filters the possible connections available in the slave device configuring an IP. Possible values in the IP address
range. The value 255.255.255.255 allows connecting to any available connection

User Manual
330
Table 157. Modbus slave protocol settings
Data Setting Min. Max. Step Possible values Type

DirEnl Modbus address 1 128 1 int32
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet
TcpPort TCP listen port 0 65535 1 int32
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
BaudRate Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
Stopbit Number of stop bits 1Bit / 2 Bit Enum
RS232_FO
ChType Communication control Enum
RS485
ActRtsTmms RTS activation delay time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
ActCtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 10000 10 int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
DesRtsTmms RTS dropoff time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
EspColTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 int32
SolicChgs Request for changes NO/YES Boolean
Big endian
Endianness Data transmission type Enum
Little endian
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Boolean
IPRTU Server IP address 0 65535 1 IP

User Manual
331
25.3 PROTOCOL PROFILE
25.3.1 Implemented functions in Modbus RTU

The implemented functions for serial communication are shown below:
Function
Description Use
Code
This function code is used to read contiguous status of

01 Read Coils
signals in a remote device
This function code is used to read the contents of a
contiguous block of registers in a remote device

This function code is used to write a single output to either

05 Write Single Coil
ON or OFF in a remote device
Writes a single register in a remote device (it is used to
06 Write Single Register
execute commands)
15 Write Multiple Coils
16 Write Multiple Registers
execute commands)
25.3.2 Implemented functions in Modbus TCP/IP

The implemented functions for TCP/IP communication are shown below:
Function
Description Use
Code

01 Read Coils


05 Write Single Coil
06 Write Single Register
execute commands)
15 Write Multiple Coils
16 Write Multiple Registers
execute commands)

User Manual
332
25.3.3 Exception codes

The protocol has the following exception codes:
Function Description Meaning

Code
The function code received in the query is
01 Illegal function
unknown by the server
The data address received in the query is not an
02 Illegal data address
allowable address for the server
A value contained in the query data field is not

03 Illegal data value
an allowable value for server
The server is processing other task. The client
06 Server device busy should retransmit the message later when the
server is free
25.4 CONTROL PROCESSES
25.4.1 Request for equipment status

Two functions can be used:
❑ Function 03
❑ Reading a register on 0000h address (see "Equipment address map" section of this manual). The device respond is a byte
with the LOCAL/REMOTE STATE of the device.
❑ Function 04
❑ It works the same way as Function F03.
25.4.2 Request for digital signals

The following functions can be used:
❑ Function 01
❑ Reading boolean data.
❑ Function 02
❑ Reading boolean data.
❑ Function 03
❑ Reading registers.
❑ Function 04
❑
Address range:
 Digital signals: 0400h - 0480h
25.4.3 Request for measurements and counters


User Manual
333
❑ Function 03
❑ Function 04
❑
Address range:
 Integer measurements: Address range 0480h - 0580h

 Counters: Address range 0580h - 0680h
 Floating type measurements: Address range 0700h - 0900h
25.4.4 Request for digital signal changes

The master device can get the information of all digital signal changes of the slave device, with the instant of time in which they
have happened. The process to do it is the following:
❑ Reading the address 0680h gets the number of changes to send by the slave device
❑ To obtain the information of the changes, reading the quantity of "number of changes x 5" on address 0682h is needed.
Reading range 0682h - 06FFh.
❑ The maximum quantity of registers that can be read is 125. This is the same as reading 25 changes since the information of
a digital signal change is stored in 5 registers. The number of registers to be read must be multiple of 5.
❑ Signal change structure format:
Number
MSB LSB
of Address
(Most Signifant Byte) (Least Significant Byte)
change (n)
0682h e v E V Bits and Signal number Signal number
0683h Milliseconds Milliseconds
n=1 0684h Hours Minutes
0685h Month Day of the week and day of the month
0686h --- Year
1 < n < 25 … … …
06FBh e v E V Bits and Signal number Signal number
06FCh Milliseconds Milliseconds
n = 25 06FDh Hours Minutes
06FEh Month Day of the week and day of the month
06FFh --- Year
 Signal number: It is stored in the first byte of the information of a digital signal change and in the first four bits of the
next byte.
 V Bit: Validity of the signal after its change (0: valid / 1: invalid)
 E Bit: State of the signal after its change (0 / 1)
 v Bit: It indicates if the signal change is due to a change in the validity V (0 / 1)
 e Bit: It indicates if the signal change is due to a change in the state E (0 / 1)
 Milliseconds: It is stored in the second register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 59999.
 Minutes: It is stored in the first byte of the third register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 59.
 Hours: It is stored in the second byte of the third register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 23.
 Day of the month: It is stored in the first byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Its value is
registered in the first five bits of that byte. Range of values 1 - 31.
 Day of the week: It is stored in the first byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Its value is
registered in the last three bits of that byte. Range of values 1 - 7.

User Manual
334
 Month: It is stored in the second byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 1 -
12.
 Year: It is stored in the fifth register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 99.
❑ Writing the value 0 in address 0681h the last signal changes sent are validated. This means that the signal changes of the
device are considered as sent.
❑ If the signal changes are not validated, the device will consider that they have not been sent.
❑ If the device had more signal changes it will indicate it in the address 0680h and the master station could request them
repeating the process
❑ To read all the signal changes of the device, the process must continue until the reading of the address 0680h indicates
value 0
The requests are made with functions F03 and F04 and the writings with function F16.
25.4.5 Requesting data via memory map

The data of the configured addresses can be read in a single request. The addresses can be non-consecutive.
Functioning:
❑ The configured addresses must be written using function F16. Range of the writing area 0180h - 01FCh
❑ The data of the configured addresses must be read using function F03 or F04. Range of the reading area 0100h - 017Ch
❑ Up to 124 registers can be read and written
❑ The configured addresses must be in the range 0400h - 0680h and 0700h - 0900h
❑ To read the data of the configured addresses, the following must be taken into account:
 The position in the reading area from which to request the data, must be the same as the position in the writing area
where the configured addresses have been written
 Example:
 For a writing in address 0185h the reading has to be in address 0105h.
 Writing
 Writing address: 0185h
 Position in the writing area: 0185h - 0180h(initial address) = 0005h
 Reading
 The reading address must be: 0105h
 Position in the reading area: 0105h - 0100h(initial address) = 0005h
 The number of registers to be requested must be equal to the number of registers that add up the data of the
configured addresses
 Example:
 For a writing in address 0185h of the address 0400h, 0486h and 0581h the number of registers to be requested must
be 4.
 It must be ask for a register for the signals, another for the measurements of integer type and two registers for the
counters.
 Writing
 Writing address: 0185h
 Addresses configured:
▪ 0400h: First word of digital signals
▪ 0486h: Seventh measurement of integer type
▪ 0581h: Second counter
 Reading
 Reading address: 0105h
 The number of registers to request must be 4:

User Manual
335
▪ 0400h: Occupies a register (G9)

▪ 0486h: Occupies a register (G10)
▪ 0581h: Occupies two registers (G11)
 See section "Equipment address map" and "Data format" for G9, G10 and G11.
25.4.6 Synchronization
To synchronize the device it must be written with the function F16 the following information in the address 00F0h:
MSB LSB
Address
(Most Signifant Byte) (Least Significant Byte)
00F0h Milliseconds Milliseconds
00F1h Hours Minutes
00F2h Month Day
00F3h - Year
 To synchronize the device the four words must always be written. The partial writing of some data is not allowed, it is
always necessary to write the whole structure
 It is possible to read the address 00F0h to get the current time of the equipment. Any register can be read as long as
the range does not exceed the address 00F3h. For reading, functions F03 or F04 must be used
25.4.7 Command execution

❑ Function F05
❑ It allows the execution of commands to OFF and ON in the slave device database.
 For an OFF command it must be sent the number of command to execute and the operation value field to 0x0000.
 For an ON command it must be sent the number of command to execute and the operation value field to 0xFF00.
❑ Function F06
❑ It allows the execution of commands to ON in the slave device database.
 It must be written the number of command to execute in the address 0080h.
❑ Function F15
❑ It allows the execution of commands to OFF and ON in the slave device database.
 For an OFF command it must be sent the number of command to execute, the number of coils to be forced to one and
the operation value field to 0.
 For an ON command it must be sent the number of command to execute, the number of coils to be forced to one and
the operation value field to 1.
 It is only allowed the writing of one coil.
❑ Function F16
❑ It allows the execution of commands to ON in the slave device database.
 It must be written the number of command to execute in the address 0080h.
 It is only allowed the writing of one register.
Range of number of command to execute: 0 - 511
25.5 EQUIPMENT ADDRESS MAP
Distribution of the equipment address map:

User Manual
336
Register Memory
Description Length (words)
address(hex) zone
Identification of the equipment
0000 Device status 1 G1
Command address (*)
0080 Number of command to be executed 1 G2
System date
00F0 Milliseconds 1 G3
00F1 Hours and minutes 1 G4
00F2 Month and day 1 G5
00F3 Year 1 G6
User map
0100 User map values 124 G7
0180 User map addresses 124 G8
Reading zone
0400 Digital signal states 128 G9
0480 Measurements 256 G10
0580 Counters 256 G11
Digital signal changes zone
0680 Number of changes to be sent 1 G12
0681 Validation of sent changes (*) 1 G13
0682 Digital signal changes reading zone 125 G14
Reading zone
0700 Measurement 512 G15
Free memory zone
0900 Free
0HF Free
(*) Only for writing
The values of the Memory zone column are explained in the "Data format" section.

User Manual
337
25.6 DATA FORMAT
Data format depending on the memory zone (see section "Equipment address map"):
Memory
Format Description
zone
READING AREA OF THE DEVICE MODE
In the bit 0 LOCAL/REMOTE STATE of the device is indicated
G1 16 bits Value 0: REMOTE STATE
Value 1: LOCAL
Size of the area: A register (word)
WRITING AREA OF THE NUMBER OF COMMAND TO BE EXECUTED IN THE SLAVE DEVICE
DATABASE
G2 16 bits
Range of values: 0 - 511
MILLISECONDS READING AREA
G3 Unsigned 16 bits Range of values: 0 - 59999
READING AREA OF MINUTES AND HOURS
- Minutes: 0 to 7 bits
G4 16 bits
- Hours: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE DAY OF THE WEEK AND MONTH
- Day: 0 to 7 bits
G5
16 bits - Month: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE YEAR
- Year: 0 to 7 bits
G6 16 bits Range of values: 0 - 99
- It is not used: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE VALUES OF THE CONFIGURED DATA ADDRESSES
- The unsigned 16 bits format is used for reading signals
16 bits - The signed 16 bits format is used for reading integer measurements
G7
Unsigned 32 bits - The unsigned 32 bits format is used for reading counters
Float - The Float format is used for reading floating type measurements
Size of the area: 124 registers (words)
WRITING AREA OF THE CONFIGURED ADDRESSES
G8 16 bits Range of values: 0400h - 0680h and 0700h - 0900h
READING AREA OF SIGNALS
G9 16 bits Compacted bits. A bit to 0 value means signal deactivated and to value 1 activated
READING AREA OF INTEGER MEASUREMENTS
G10 Signed 16 bits
READING AREA OF COUNTERS
G11 Unsigned 32 bits
READING AREA OF SIGNAL CHANGES TO BE SENT
G12 16 bits
WRITING AREA OF VALUE 0 TO VALIDATE THE SIGNAL CHANGES THAT HAS BEEN SENT
G13 16 bits
SIGNAL CHANGES INFORMATION AREA
G14
Unsigned 16 bits For more information go to the section "Request for digital signal changes"
Size of the area: 125 registers (word)
READING AREA OF FLOATING TYPE MEASUREMENTS
G15 Float

User Manual
338
25.7 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TOOL
The Modbus slave protocol is configured with the "Modbus Slave Configurator" available in the PacFactory configuration SW and the
EFS tools. This tool generates a configuration file that is sent to the device.
25.7.1 Fields to be configured

❑ Digital signals
 Modbus address
The number of the signal in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 2047.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the signals. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of the
device itself.
 Internal ID
The number of the signal in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing the signal
to be read. This signal will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus address.
 Description
It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
 IEC-61850 ref
 Inverted
 It allows to invert the value of the signal.
❑ Measurements
 Modbus address
The number of the measurement in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 255.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the measurements. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of
the device itself.
 Internal ID
The number of the measurement in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing
the measurement to be read. This measurement will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus address.

User Manual
339
 Description
 It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
 IEC-61850 ref
 It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
❑ Counters
 Modbus address
The number of the counter in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 127.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the counters. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of the
device itself.
 Internal ID
The number of the counter in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing the
counter to be read. This counter will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus address.
 Description
 IEC-61850 ref
❑ Commands
❑ There are two options for the execution of commands depending on the function that is used (go to the section
"Command execution" for more detail): Commands to ON and to OFF/ON.
❑ The default configuration allows executing ON commands only.
❑ COMMANDS TO ON:
 Command
Number of the command in the Modbus slave database. Range of values: 0 - 511.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device in which execute the commands. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of the
device itself.
 Internal ID

User Manual
340
The number of the command in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing the
command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the activation of the command number that
appears in the field Command.
 Description
 IEC-61850 ref
 ON/OFF
 Origin
It is the origin from where the commands are executed.
 COMMANDS TO ON AND OFF:

To execute commands to OFF the option in the "Modbus Slave Configurator" must to be enabled.
To do this, go to the "View" menu, click on "Options…" and the following image appears:
Enabling "Show OFF command" option in Modbus Slave and clicking on OK the following image where commands to ON
and OFF are configured is shown:

User Manual
341
 Command
Number of the command in the Modbus slave database. Range of values: 0 - 511.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device in which execute the commands. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of the
device itself.
 Internal ID(ON)
command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the activation of the command number that
appears in field Command.
 Description (ON)
 IEC-61850 ref (ON)

 ON/OFF (ON)
 Internal ID(OFF)
command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the deactivation of the command number that
appears in field Command.
 Description (OFF)
 IEC-61850 ref (OFF)

 ON/OFF (OFF)
 Origin
It is the origin from where the commands are executed.
25.7.2 Configuration example

Below is an example of a Modbus slave database. This database contains elements which the master device can read or in which
can write.
Elements of the Modbus slave database:
❑ 10 digital signals
❑ 5 measurements
❑ 5 counters
❑ 4 commands

User Manual
342
Database configuration:
❑ Digital signals
 This configuration allows the access to:

 The state of eight digital inputs of the input/output board 1 of the device, which value is stored in the first eight
positions of the Modbus slave signal database.
 The state of two digital inputs of the input/output board 2 of the device, storing the state of the first input in the
position 15 of the Modbus slave signal database and the state of the second input in the position 31.
❑ Measurements
❑ This configuration allows the access to:

 Five logical measurements of the device, whose value is stored in the positions 0,3,7,8 and 9 of the Modbus slave
measurements database.
❑ Counters
❑ This configuration allows the access to:

User Manual
343
 Five logical counters of the device, whose value is stored in the positions 0, 5, 10, 15 and 20 of the Modbus slave
counters database.
❑ Commands
❑ This configuration allows:

 Activate the digital output 1 of the input/output board 1 of the device, activating the command number 0 of the
Modbus slave database.
 Activate the digital output 2 of the input/output board 2 of the device, deactivating the command 10 of the Modbus
slave database.
25.8 SERIAL MESSAGES
The format of the serial communication messages used by the Modbus slave protocol is shown below, with the functions used by the
device as an example.
25.8.1 Format
❑ Master request:
 CRC - 2 byte
❑ Slave response:
 CRC - 2 byte

Remote address: Modbus address (Value between 1 and 128). Broadcast messages (address 0) are not allowed.
Function code: If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote device has not performed the required function and will answer
with an error code.
CRC: LSB is sent first, followed by the MSB.

User Manual
344
25.8.2 Examples
❑ Function code 01 – Read coils
❑ For reading boolean data.
❑ Example:
 Request of 12 output bits, from output 3 to 14 (All of these bits are activated)
Table 158. Request

Address of the first digital 0x00
2
output 0x03
0x00
Number of digital outputs 2
0x0C
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 3. Response

Number of bytes to store
the state of the digital 1 0x02
outputs
0xFF (LSB)
Digital outputs value 2
0x0F (MSB)
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ In the request response, the LSB of the Digital outputs value contains the value of the first output (output 3). The rest of
the bytes are sent in lowest to highest order. If the number of bits requested is not a multiple of 8, the byte will be filled
with zeros.
❑ Function code 02 – Read discrete inputs
❑ For reading boolean data.
❑ Function code 03 – Read holding registers
❑ Example:
 Address: 0400h - Data: 00AAh
 Address: 0401h - Data: 00FFh

User Manual
345
Table 4. Request

0x04
Starting address 2
0x00
0x00
0x02
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 5. Response
Byte count 1 0x04
0x00
Register value 1 2
0xAA
0x00
Register value 2 2
0xFF
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 04 – Read input registers

❑ Function code 05 – Write single coil
❑ For writing a bit to ON or OFF.
❑ Example:
Table 6. Request

0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Writing to 1 2
0x00
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual
346
Table 7. Response

0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Writing to 1 2
0x00
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 06 – Write single register

For writing a single register.
Example:
Table 8. Request

0x00
Register address 2
0x80
0x00
Number of command to execute 2
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 9. Response

0x00
Register address 2
0x80
0x00
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 15 – Write multiple coils

For writing a bit to ON or OFF.
Example:

User Manual
347
Table 10. Response
Function code 1 0x0F

0x00
Number of command 2
0x18
Number of bits to 0x00
2
be forced 0x01
Byte count 1 0x01
Command value 1 0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 11. Request
Function code 1 0x0F

0x00
Number of command 2
0x18
0x00
Number of forced bits 2
0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 16 – Write multiple registers

For writing a single register.
Example:
Table 12. Request

0x00
Register address 2
0x80
Number of registers to be 0x00
2
written (words) 0x01
Byte count 1 0x02
0x00
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual
348
Table 13. Response

0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
Number of written registers 0x00
2
(words) 0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
25.9 TCP/IP MESSAGES
25.9.1 Format
The message contains the following elements:
❑ Header
❑ It contains the following fields:
Length
Fields Description Client Server
(bytes)
Identification of a Modbus Recopied by the
Transaction Initialized by the
2 request/response server from the
identifier client
transaction received request
Recopied by the
Protocol It takes value 0 for Initialized by the
2 server from the
identifier Modbus protocol client
received request
Number of following Initialized by the Initialized by the

Length 2
bytes client (request) server (response)
Recopied by the
Identification of the Initialized by the
Unit identifier 1 server from the
connected slave device client
received request
❑ This fields are transmitted by communications as Big Endian.

❑ Function code
❑ Function code of the request/response. Size: 1 byte. If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote has not
performed the required function and will answer with an error code.
❑ Data
TCP/IP complete message:
Transaction Protocol
Length Unit identifier Function code Data
identifier identifier
(2 bytes) (1 byte) (1 byte) (n bytes)
(2 bytes) (2 bytes)
All the messages are sent via TCP to registered port 502.
❑ Master request:

User Manual
349
 Transaction Id. - Unique per transaction or 0x00

 Protocol Id. - Always 0
 Length - Number of bytes of Unity Id. + Function code + Data
 Unity Id. - Possible values: 0x00,0xFF or remote device number
 Function code
 Data - Number of variable bytes
❑ Slave response:
 Transaction Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Protocol Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Length - Number of bytes of Unity Id. + Function code + Data
 Unity Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Function code
 Data - Number of variable bytes
25.9.2 Examples
The types of message are the same as the serial ones. The address map of the device and the way to treat it is the same as explained
before, only changes the structure of the message to send/receive.

User Manual
350
QUALITY ANALYSIS 
26. QUALITY ANALYSIS

This chapter shows the functions available on the device for the analysis of signal quality. There are included:
❑ Dips (or sags) and swells. Available from firmware version 6.0.18.0 / 2.0.0.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.0.
❑ THD overexcitation
❑ Individual measurements of voltage and current harmonics
for measurements of individual harmonics and THD, specific hardware is required and firmware version 6.1.18.7 / 2.0.0.0 and ICD version
8.4.0.0 or greater. If the signal "Harmonic Analysis" of the GEN/MHAI1 node is active, the hardware is appropriate for the calculation of
harmonics and THD.
26.1 SAGS AND SWELLS
The device analyses the sags and swells of the voltages generating a chronological list of 256 events, stored in non-volatile memory. In
the event queue, it is available the information of each of the phases individually.
The parameters defining these analyses are the depth of the sag or swell and the time this event lasts. The depth is calculated
according to the rated voltage:
Un − Uhs
Depth% = • 100
Un
Where:
❑ Un phase to ground rated voltage (setting of TVTR node)

❑ Uhs phase maximum voltage in situation of sag or swell.
The analysis is carried out independently for each channel. The refreshed measurement of a cycle is used every half cycle, so that we
have an updated measurement every half cycle.
Sag is considered to occur when the sag threshold is exceeded in any of the three voltages. The sag is considered to be over, when
none of the three voltages is in situation of gap (exceeding in the hysteresis the setting threshold). The duration is considered from the
very moment the first channel enters the sag until all of them return to normality. The sag width is the highest depth (minimum
voltage) of all the channels in swell.
Swell is considered to occur when the swell threshold is exceeded in any of the three voltages. The overvoltage is considered to be over
when none of the three voltages is already in overvoltage situation (exceeding in the hysteresis the setting threshold). The swell
duration is considered to be from the very moment the first channel enters in swell until all of them return to normality. The swell
width is the highest depth (maximum voltage) of all the channels in swell.
The hysteresis can be programmed. For example for a 2% hysteresis, if sag is considered to be a drop higher than the 10%, the voltage
measured must be over the 8%, in order to consider it has recovered.
For example, having the rated voltage set to 80V, if considering a sag starts from 72V on, the sag threshold must be set in 10%. It is
deduced from 3.1 equation:
80 − 72
Sag _ threshold % = • 100
80
In the same way, if considering the swell starts from 88V on, the swell threshold must be set in 10%.
The settings used for the sag and swell detection are shown in Table 1:
❑ Enabled dip. Indicates whether the dip detection is enabled or not.

❑ Dip Threshold (%).Minimum variation respecting to the rated voltage to consider sag.
❑ Dip hysteresis (%).Minimum variation to recover from the sag.

User manual 351
❑ Blocking dips. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the dip detection.
❑ Enabled swells. Indicates whether the swell detection is enabled or not.
❑ Swell Threshold (%).Minimum variation respecting to the rated voltage to consider swell.
❑ Swell hysteresis (%).Minimum variation to recover from the swell.
❑ Blocking swells. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the swell detection.
❑ Min. separation events (ms). Minimum separation between events in order to be considered the same event or a new one.
Table 2 shows the outputs of this function:
❑ Dip status. Indicates the dip detection’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
❑ Start dip. Indicates that a dip has been detected in any phase.
❑ Start dip phase A. Indicates that a dip has been detected in phase A.
❑ Start dip phase B. Indicates that a dip has been detected in phase B.
❑ Start dip phase C. Indicates that a dip has been detected in phase C.
❑ Swell status. Indicates the swell detection’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
❑ Start swell. Indicates that a swell has been detected in any phase.
❑ Start swell phase A. Indicates that a swell has been detected in phase A.
❑ Start swell phase B. Indicates that a swell has been detected in phase B.
❑ Start swell phase C. Indicates that a swell has been detected in phase C.
❑ Start tension variation. Indicates that a dip or swell has been detected in any phase.
Table 3 shows the measurements of this function:
❑ Event number. Indicates the number of events detected.

❑ Last event duration. Indicates the last event duration (ms). Time elapsed since the first channel enters the sag or swell until all of
them return to normality.
❑ Dip/Swell A start. Phase A initial voltage detected, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell A end. Phase A final voltage detected, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell A max. Maximum voltage detected in phase A, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell A avg. Average voltage detected in phase A, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell B start. Phase B initial voltage detected, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell B end. Phase B final voltage detected, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell B max. Maximum voltage detected in phase B, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell B avg. Average voltage detected in phase B, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell C start. Phase C initial voltage detected, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell C end. Phase C final voltage detected, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell C max. Maximum voltage detected in phase C, in the event.
❑ Dip/Swell C avg. Average voltage detected in phase C, in the event.

User manual 352
Table 1 Sag and swell settings
Data Setting Min Maxi Step Remarks Type

DipEna Enabled dip NO/YES Bolean
DipStrVal Dip Threshold (%) 1 100 1 float
DipRep Dip hysteresis (%) 2 10 1 float
LogInBlkDip Blocking dips logical input Int32
SwlEna Enabled swells NO/YES Bolean
SwlStrVal Swell Threshold (%) 1 100 1 float
SwlRep Swell hysteresis (%) 2 10 1 float
LogInBlkSwl Blocking swells Logical input Int32
EvTms Min. separation events (ms) 10 30000 10 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/YES bolean
❑ Node:
 PROT/QVVR1.
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 1. Rated Voltage setting is available in TVTR node.
❑ Commands:
 BlkDip. Dip detection blocking and unblocking.
 BlkSwl. Swell detection blocking and unblocking.
❑ Measurements: Table 3 shows the function’s measurements.
Table 2 Sag and swell outputs

Dip status DipStEna general
Swell status DipStr general
Start dip DipStr phsA
Start dip phase A DipStr phsB
Start dip phase B DipStr phsC
Start dip phase C SwlStEna general
Start swell SwlStr general
Start swell phase A SwlStr phsA
Start swell phase B SwlStr phsB
Start swell phase C SwlStr phsC
Start voltage variation VarStr general
Table 3 Sag and swell measurement

Event number EvtCnt mag
Last event duration VVaTm mag
Dip/Swell A start DipSwlIniA mag
Dip/Swell A end DipSwlEndA mag
Dip/Swell A max. DipSwlMaxA mag
Dip/Swell A avg. DipSwlAvgA mag
Dip/Swell B start DipSwlIniB mag
Dip/Swell B end DipSwlEndB mag
Dip/Swell B max. DipSwlMaxB mag
Dip/Swell B avg. DipSwlAvgB mag
Dip/Swell C start DipSwlIniC mag
Dip/Swell C end DipSwlEndC mag
Dip/Swell C max. DipSwlMaxC mag
Dip/Swell C avg. DipSwlAvgC mag

User manual 353
26.1.1 Presentation of results

Event and swell chronological queue is available in a xml file (Figure 145) showing:
❑ Type: Event type: D (sag) or S (swell)

❑ Ph: Phases implicated: Va, Vb or Vc.
❑ Start: Event start date and time.
❑ End: Event start date and time.
❑ Max: Date and time of the Maximum/minimum voltage deviation detected in the event.
❑ Duration
❑ Resume:
 Dur: Duration of the event (ms)
 Aver: Average value of the voltage during the event
 Pre: Voltage value 3 cycles before the event starts
 Post: Voltage value 3 cycles after the event finishes
❑ Values. Three phases real voltage values. It is stored a value per cycle during 180 cycles, that is, 3,6 second for 50Hz and 3
seconds for 60Hz.
Figure 146 shows an example of the visualization with the PacFactory.
Figure 145 File of results

User manual 354
Figure 146 Screen of results
26.2 4.2 THD OVEREXCITATION
It checks the harmonic percentage regarding the fundamental one, over the phase current and the voltage. The analysis is carried out
over the three phases, using the rms and fundamental values.
Being this function enabled, when the measured THD value excesses the threshold (setting), the signalling is generated and it indicates
that an overexcitation has occurred. Once it is activated, the THD value must drop under the 95% of the setting, to deactivate it.
It is available a chronological list of 256 events, stored in non-volatile memory. In the event queue, it is available the information of
each of the phases individually.
The settings used for the sag and swell detection are shown in Table 4:
❑ Enabled THD I. Indicates whether the current THD overexcitation is enabled or not.
❑ Threshold THD I (%). It indicates the THD threshold for current overexcitation.
❑ Additional Time (ms) THD I. It indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the current THD must be met.
❑ Blocking input THD I. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the current THD overexcitation.
❑ Enabled THD V. Indicates whether the voltage THD overexcitation is enabled or not.
❑ Threshold THD V (%).It indicates the THD threshold for voltage overexcitation.
❑ Additional Time (ms) THD V. It indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the voltage THD must be met.
❑ Blocking input THD V. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the voltage THD overexcitation.
Table 2 shows the outputs of this function:
❑ THD I status. Indicates current THD overexcitation function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
❑ Start THD I. Indicates that a current THD overexcitation has been detected in any phase

User manual 355
❑ Start THD IA. Indicates that a current THD overexcitation has been detected in phase A.
❑ Start THD IB. Indicates that a current THD overexcitation has been detected in phase B.
❑ Start THD IC. Indicates that a current THD overexcitation has been detected in phase C.
❑ Activation THD I. Indicates that the current THD overexcitation has been activated.
❑ Activation THD IA. Indicates that the phase A current THD overexcitation has been activated.
❑ Activation THD IB. Indicates that the phase B current THD overexcitation has been activated.
❑ Activation THD IC. Indicates that the phase C current THD overexcitation has been activated.
❑ THD V status. Indicates voltage overexcitation function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
❑ Start THD V. Indicates that a voltage THD overexcitation has been detected.
❑ Start THD VA. Indicates that a voltage THD overexcitation has been detected in phase A.
❑ Start THD VB. Indicates that a voltage THD overexcitation has been detected in phase B.
❑ Start THD VC. Indicates that a voltage THD overexcitation has been detected in phase C.
❑ Activation THD V. Indicates that the voltage THD overexcitation has been activated.
❑ Activation THD VA. Indicates that the phase A voltage THD overexcitation has been activated.
❑ Activation THD VB. Indicates that the phase B voltage THD overexcitation has been activated.
❑ Activation THD VC. Indicates that the phase C voltage THD overexcitation has been activated.
❑ Harmonic Analysis. Indicates that it has the appropriate hardware for the calculation of harmonics and THD overexcitation.
Table 6 shows the measurements of this function:
❑ THD phase A Current. Indicates the value of the phase A current THD.
❑ THD phase B Current. Indicates the value of the phase B current THD.
❑ THD phase C Current. Indicates the value of the phase C current THD.
❑ THD Average Current. Indicates the average value of the current THD.
❑ THD phase A Voltage. Indicates the value of the phase A voltage THD.
❑ THD phase B Voltage. Indicates the value of the phase B voltage THD.
❑ THD phase C Voltage. Indicates the value of the phase C voltage THD.
❑ THD Average Voltage. Indicates the average value of the voltage THD.
Table 4 THD overexcitation settings
Data Setting Min Maxi Step Remarks Type

ThdAEna Enabled THD I NO/YES Bolean
ThdAVal Threshold THD I (%) 1 100 0,1 float
ThdATmms Additional Time (ms) THD I 0 60000 20 Int32
LogInBlkA Blocking input THD I Logic input Int32
ThdVEna Enabled THD V NO/YES Bolean
ThdVVal Threshold THD V (%) 1 100 0,1 float
ThdVTmms Additional Time (ms) THD V 0 60000 20 Int32
LogInBlkV Blocking input THD V Logic input Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/YES bolean
❑ Node:
 PROT/MHAI1.

User manual 356
❑ Commands:
 BlkTHDI. Current THD overexcitation detection blocking and unblocking.
 BlkTHDV. Voltage THD overexcitation detection blocking and unblocking.
❑ Measurements: Table 3 shows the function’s measurements.
Table 5 THD overexcitation outputs
Signal Data (Edition 1) Attribute (Edition 1) Data (Edition 2) Attribute (Edition 2)

THD I status IStEna general IStEna general
Start THD I IStr general IStr general
Start THD IA IStr phsA IStr phsA
Start THD IB IStr phsB IStr phsB
Start THD IC IStr phsC IStr phsC
Activation THD I IOp general IOp general
Activation THD IA IOp phsA IOp phsA
Activation THD IB IOp phsB IOp phsB
Activation THD IC IOp phsC IOp phsC
THD V status VStEna general VStEna general
Start THD V VStr general ThdVStr general
Start THD VA VStr phsA ThdVStr phsA
Start THD VB VStr phsB ThdVStr phsB
Start THD VC VStr phsC ThdVStr phsC
Activation THD V VOp general ThdVOp general
Activation THD VA VOp phsA ThdVOp phsA
Activation THD VB VOp phsB ThdVOp phsB
Activation THD VC VOp phsC ThdVOp phsC
Harmonic Analysis HarAnaEna general HarAnaEna general
Table 6 THD overexcitation measurement

THD phase A Current ThdA phsA
THD phase B Current ThdA phsB
THD phase C Current ThdA phsC
THD Average Current ThdA net
THD phase A Voltage ThdPhV phsA
THD phase B Voltage ThdPhV phsB
THD phase C Voltage ThdPhV phsC
THD Average Voltage ThdPhV net
26.2.1 Presentation of results

THD overexcitation chronological queue is available in a xml file (Figure 147) showing:
❑ Ph: Phases with overexcitation.

❑ Start: Event start date and time.
❑ End: Event start date and time.
❑ Values. THD values of the three current and voltage phase at the beginning and end of the overexcitation.
Figure 146 shows an example of the visualization with the PacFactory.

User manual 357
Figure 147 File of results
26.3 HARMONIC INDIVIDUAL MEASUREMENTS
There are available individual measurements of phase voltage and current harmonics up to the 25th. The measurements are
percentage (%) of the fundamental.
The measurements are showed in PC with the PacFactory (Figure 149) and the display of the device.
Table 7 shows the individual harmonic measurements; they are available in the MHAI node. There are 15 individual harmonics for
every phase of current and voltage.
Table 7 Individual THD measurements

THD phase A Current HA phsAHar
THD phase B Current HA phsBHar
THD phase C Current HA phsCHar
THD phase A Voltage HPhV phsAHar
THD phase B Voltage HPhV phsBHar
THD phase C Voltage HPhV phsCHar

User manual 358

User manual 359
CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS 
27. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
27.1 CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the following types:
❑ Inverse or Normal Inverse

❑ Very Inverse
❑ Extremely Inverse
❑ Short-Time Inverse
❑ Long-Time Inverse
❑ Very Inverse Special Time
❑ User Curve.
These curves comply with the general formula
k tr
T = M  TRECAIDA = M 
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
In which:
❑ T : trip time (sec)

❑ TDROP : drop time (sec)
❑ M: multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0.005
❑ I: Measured current
❑ Io: Pickup current setting
❑ K, , tr: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Inverse / Short-Time Long-Time Extremely Very Inverse

Constants Very inverse
Normal inverse inverse inverse inverse Especial
K 0.14 0.05 120 13.50 80.00 2.60
 0.02 0.04 1 1.00 2.00 1.00
tr 9.7 0.5 120 43.2 58.2 21.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for each type of
characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except between 0.05 and 0.1,
between which there are another 4.
For the values of I/Io greater than 40, the trip time is the correspond time of I/Io=40.

User manual 360
Inverse or normal inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 0,14,  = 0,02 tr = 9.7
Theoretical values given by the formula:
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.485 0.517 0.647 1.109 7.170 3.669 1.916 1.331 0.860 0.501 0.378 0.315 0.214 0.149 0.113 0.091
0.06 0.582 0.621 0.776 1.330 8.604 4.402 2.299 1.597 1.032 0.602 0.454 0.378 0.257 0.178 0.136 0.110
0.07 0.679 0.724 0.905 1.552 10.038 5.136 2.683 1.863 1.204 0.702 0.530 0.441 0.300 0.208 0.159 0.128
0.08 0.776 0.828 1.035 1.774 11.472 5.870 3.066 2.129 1.376 0.802 0.606 0.504 0.342 0.238 0.181 0.146
0.09 0.873 0.931 1.164 1.995 12.906 6.604 3.449 2.395 1.547 0.903 0.681 0.567 0.385 0.267 0.204 0.165
0.10 0.970 1.035 1.293 2.217 14.340 7.337 3.832 2.661 1.719 1.003 0.757 0.630 0.428 0.297 0.227 0.183
0.11 1.067 1.138 1.423 2.439 15.774 8.071 4.216 2.927 1.891 1.103 0.833 0.693 0.471 0.327 0.249 0.201
0.12 1.164 1.242 1.552 2.661 17.208 8.805 4.599 3.193 2.063 1.203 0.908 0.756 0.514 0.356 0.272 0.219
0.13 1.261 1.345 1.681 2.882 18.642 9.539 4.982 3.459 2.235 1.304 0.984 0.819 0.556 0.386 0.295 0.238
0.14 1.358 1.449 1.811 3.104 20.076 10.272 5.365 3.725 2.407 1.404 1.060 0.882 0.599 0.416 0.317 0.256
0.15 1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 21.510 11.006 5.749 3.992 2.579 1.504 1.135 0.945 0.642 0.446 0.340 0.274
0.16 1.552 1.655 2.069 3.547 22.944 11.740 6.132 4.258 2.751 1.605 1.211 1.008 0.685 0.475 0.363 0.293
0.17 1.649 1.759 2.199 3.769 24.378 12.474 6.515 4.524 2.923 1.705 1.287 1.071 0.728 0.505 0.385 0.311
0.18 1.746 1.862 2.328 3.991 25.812 13.207 6.898 4.790 3.095 1.805 1.363 1.134 0.770 0.535 0.408 0.329
0.19 1.843 1.966 2.457 4.213 27.246 13.941 7.282 5.056 3.267 1.906 1.438 1.197 0.813 0.564 0.431 0.347
0.20 1.940 2.069 2.587 4.434 28.680 14.675 7.665 5.322 3.439 2.006 1.514 1.260 0.856 0.594 0.453 0.366
0.25 2.425 2.587 3.233 5.543 35.850 18.344 9.581 6.653 4.299 2.507 1.892 1.575 1.070 0.743 0.567 0.457
0.30 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 43.021 22.012 11.497 7.983 5.158 3.009 2.271 1.891 1.284 0.891 0.680 0.549
0.35 3.395 3.621 4.527 7.760 50.191 25.681 13.413 9.314 6.018 3.510 2.649 2.206 1.498 1.040 0.794 0.640
0.40 3.880 4.139 5.173 8.869 57.361 29.350 15.329 10.644 6.878 4.012 3.028 2.521 1.712 1.188 0.907 0.731
0.45 4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 64.531 33.018 17.246 11.975 7.737 4.513 3.406 2.836 1.926 1.337 1.020 0.823
0.50 4.850 5.173 6.467 11.086 71.701 36.687 19.162 13.305 8.597 5.015 3.785 3.151 2.140 1.485 1.134 0.914
0.55 5.335 5.691 7.113 12.194 78.871 40.356 21.078 14.636 9.457 5.516 4.163 3.466 2.354 1.634 1.247 1.006
0.60 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 86.041 44.025 22.994 15.966 10.317 6.017 4.542 3.781 2.568 1.782 1.360 1.097
0.65 6.305 6.725 8.407 14.411 93.211 47.693 24.910 17.297 11.176 6.519 4.920 4.096 2.782 1.931 1.474 1.188
0.70 6.790 7.243 9.053 15.520 100.381 51.362 26.827 18.627 12.036 7.020 5.299 4.411 2.996 2.079 1.587 1.280
0.75 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 107.551 55.031 28.743 19.958 12.896 7.522 5.677 4.726 3.210 2.228 1.701 1.371
0.80 7.760 8.277 10.347 17.737 114.721 58.700 30.659 21.288 13.755 8.023 6.056 5.042 3.424 2.376 1.814 1.463
0.85 8.245 8.795 10.993 18.846 121.891 62.368 32.575 22.619 14.615 8.525 6.434 5.357 3.638 2.525 1.927 1.554
0.90 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 129.062 66.037 34.491 23.949 15.475 9.026 6.813 5.672 3.852 2.674 2.041 1.646
0.95 9.215 9.829 12.287 21.063 136.232 69.706 36.408 25.280 16.335 9.528 7.191 5.987 4.066 2.822 2.154 1.737
1.00 9.700 10.347 12.933 22.171 143.402 73.374 38.324 26.611 17.194 10.029 7.570 6.302 4.280 2.971 2.267 1.828
1.05 10.185 10.864 13.580 23.280 150.572 77.043 40.240 27.941 18.054 10.530 7.948 6.617 4.494 3.119 2.381 1.920

User manual 361

User manual 362
Long duration curve (IEC)
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0
@Fig.160.png-H:61,65-W:103,7@ @Fig.161.png-H:62,2-W:145,75@
 0
K = 120,  = 1 tr = 120
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 120.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 1.500 0.667 0.316 0.154
0.06 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 14.400 7.200 4.800 3.600 1.800 0.800 0.379 0.185
0.07 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 168.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 16.800 8.400 5.600 4.200 2.100 0.933 0.442 0.215
0.08 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 19.200 9.600 6.400 4.800 2.400 1.067 0.505 0.246
0.09 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 216.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.10 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 3.000 1.333 0.632 0.308
0.11 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 264.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 26.400 13.200 8.800 6.600 3.300 1.467 0.695 0.338
0.12 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 288.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 28.800 14.400 9.600 7.200 3.600 1.600 0.758 0.369
0.13 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 312.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 31.200 15.600 10.400 7.800 3.900 1.733 0.821 0.400
0.14 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 336.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 33.600 16.800 11.200 8.400 4.200 1.867 0.884 0.431
0.15 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 360.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 36.000 18.000 12.000 9.000 4.500 2.000 0.947 0.462
0.16 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 384.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 38.400 19.200 12.800 9.600 4.800 2.133 1.011 0.492
0.17 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 408.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 40.800 20.400 13.600 10.200 5.100 2.267 1.074 0.523
0.18 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 432.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 43.200 21.600 14.400 10.800 5.400 2.400 1.137 0.554
0.19 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 456.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 45.600 22.800 15.200 11.400 5.700 2.533 1.200 0.585
0.20 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 480.001 240.000 120.000 80.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 6.000 2.667 1.263 0.615
0.25 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 600.001 300.000 150.000 100.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 15.000 7.500 3.333 1.579 0.769
0.30 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 720.001 360.000 180.000 120.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 9.000 4.000 1.895 0.923
0.35 42.000 44.800 56.000 96.000 840.001 420.000 210.000 140.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 21.000 10.500 4.667 2.211 1.077
0.40 48.000 51.200 64.000 109.714 960.001 480.000 240.000 160.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 12.000 5.333 2.526 1.231
0.45 54.000 57.600 72.000 123.429 1080.001 540.000 270.000 180.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 27.000 13.500 6.000 2.842 1.385
0.50 60.000 64.000 80.000 137.143 1200.001 600.000 300.000 200.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 15.000 6.667 3.158 1.538
0.55 66.000 70.400 88.000 150.857 1320.001 660.000 330.000 220.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 33.000 16.500 7.333 3.474 1.692
0.60 72.000 76.800 96.000 164.571 1440.002 720.000 360.000 240.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 36.000 18.000 8.000 3.789 1.846
0.65 78.000 83.200 104.000 178.286 1560.002 780.000 390.000 260.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 39.000 19.500 8.667 4.105 2.000
0.70 84.000 89.600 112.000 192.000 1680.002 840.000 420.000 280.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 42.000 21.000 9.333 4.421 2.154
0.75 90.000 96.000 120.000 205.714 1800.002 900.000 450.000 300.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 45.000 22.500 10.000 4.737 2.308
0.80 96.000 102.400 128.000 219.429 1920.002 960.000 480.000 320.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 48.000 24.000 10.667 5.053 2.462
0.85 102.000 108.800 136.000 233.143 2040.002 1020.000 510.000 340.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 51.000 25.500 11.333 5.368 2.615
0.90 108.000 115.200 144.000 246.857 2160.002 1080.000 540.000 360.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 54.000 27.000 12.000 5.684 2.769
0.95 114.000 121.600 152.000 260.571 2280.003 1140.000 570.000 380.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 57.000 28.500 12.667 6.000 2.923
1.00 120.000 128.000 160.000 274.286 2400.003 1200.000 600.000 400.000 240.000 120.000 80.000 60.000 30.000 13.333 6.316 3.077
1.05 126.000 134.400 168.000 288.000 2520.003 1260.000 630.000 420.000 252.000 126.000 84.000 63.000 31.500 14.000 6.632 3.231

User manual 363

User manual 364
Short duration curve IEC
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 0.05,  = 0.04 tr = 0.5
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.025 0.027 0.033 0.057 1.280 0.655 0.342 0.237 0.153 0.089 0.067 0.056 0.038 0.026 0.020 0.016
0.06 0.030 0.032 0.040 0.069 1.536 0.785 0.410 0.284 0.183 0.107 0.080 0.067 0.045 0.031 0.024 0.019
0.07 0.035 0.037 0.047 0.080 1.792 0.916 0.478 0.332 0.214 0.124 0.094 0.078 0.053 0.036 0.027 0.022
0.08 0.040 0.043 0.053 0.091 2.048 1.047 0.546 0.379 0.245 0.142 0.107 0.089 0.060 0.041 0.031 0.025
0.09 0.045 0.048 0.060 0.103 2.304 1.178 0.615 0.427 0.275 0.160 0.121 0.100 0.068 0.047 0.035 0.028
0.10 0.050 0.053 0.067 0.114 2.559 1.309 0.683 0.474 0.306 0.178 0.134 0.111 0.075 0.052 0.039 0.031
0.11 0.055 0.059 0.073 0.126 2.815 1.440 0.751 0.521 0.336 0.196 0.147 0.122 0.083 0.057 0.043 0.035
0.12 0.060 0.064 0.080 0.137 3.071 1.571 0.820 0.569 0.367 0.213 0.161 0.134 0.090 0.062 0.047 0.038
0.13 0.065 0.069 0.087 0.149 3.327 1.702 0.888 0.616 0.398 0.231 0.174 0.145 0.098 0.067 0.051 0.041
0.14 0.070 0.075 0.093 0.160 3.583 1.833 0.956 0.664 0.428 0.249 0.188 0.156 0.105 0.073 0.055 0.044
0.15 0.075 0.080 0.100 0.171 3.839 1.964 1.025 0.711 0.459 0.267 0.201 0.167 0.113 0.078 0.059 0.047
0.16 0.080 0.085 0.107 0.183 4.095 2.094 1.093 0.758 0.489 0.285 0.214 0.178 0.120 0.083 0.063 0.050
0.17 0.085 0.091 0.113 0.194 4.351 2.225 1.161 0.806 0.520 0.302 0.228 0.189 0.128 0.088 0.067 0.053
0.18 0.090 0.096 0.120 0.206 4.607 2.356 1.230 0.853 0.550 0.320 0.241 0.200 0.135 0.093 0.071 0.057
0.19 0.095 0.101 0.127 0.217 4.863 2.487 1.298 0.900 0.581 0.338 0.254 0.211 0.143 0.098 0.075 0.060
0.20 0.100 0.107 0.133 0.229 5.119 2.618 1.366 0.948 0.612 0.356 0.268 0.223 0.150 0.104 0.079 0.063
0.25 0.125 0.133 0.167 0.286 6.399 3.273 1.708 1.185 0.764 0.445 0.335 0.278 0.188 0.130 0.098 0.079
0.30 0.150 0.160 0.200 0.343 7.678 3.927 2.049 1.422 0.917 0.534 0.402 0.334 0.226 0.155 0.118 0.094
0.35 0.175 0.187 0.233 0.400 8.958 4.582 2.391 1.659 1.070 0.622 0.469 0.390 0.263 0.181 0.137 0.110
0.40 0.200 0.213 0.267 0.457 10.238 5.236 2.732 1.896 1.223 0.711 0.536 0.445 0.301 0.207 0.157 0.126
0.45 0.225 0.240 0.300 0.514 11.518 5.891 3.074 2.133 1.376 0.800 0.603 0.501 0.338 0.233 0.177 0.142
0.50 0.250 0.267 0.333 0.571 12.797 6.545 3.416 2.370 1.529 0.889 0.670 0.556 0.376 0.259 0.196 0.157
0.55 0.275 0.293 0.367 0.629 14.077 7.200 3.757 2.607 1.682 0.978 0.737 0.612 0.414 0.285 0.216 0.173
0.60 0.300 0.320 0.400 0.686 15.357 7.854 4.099 2.844 1.835 1.067 0.804 0.668 0.451 0.311 0.236 0.189
0.65 0.325 0.347 0.433 0.743 16.637 8.509 4.440 3.081 1.988 1.156 0.871 0.723 0.489 0.337 0.255 0.204
0.70 0.350 0.373 0.467 0.800 17.916 9.163 4.782 3.318 2.141 1.245 0.938 0.779 0.526 0.363 0.275 0.220
0.75 0.375 0.400 0.500 0.857 19.196 9.818 5.123 3.555 2.293 1.334 1.005 0.835 0.564 0.389 0.295 0.236
0.80 0.400 0.427 0.533 0.914 20.476 10.472 5.465 3.792 2.446 1.423 1.071 0.890 0.602 0.415 0.314 0.252
0.85 0.425 0.453 0.567 0.971 21.756 11.127 5.806 4.029 2.599 1.512 1.138 0.946 0.639 0.441 0.334 0.267
0.90 0.450 0.480 0.600 1.029 23.035 11.781 6.148 4.265 2.752 1.601 1.205 1.002 0.677 0.466 0.353 0.283
0.95 0.475 0.507 0.633 1.086 24.315 12.436 6.489 4.502 2.905 1.690 1.272 1.057 0.714 0.492 0.373 0.299
1.00 0.500 0.533 0.667 1.143 25.595 13.090 6.831 4.739 3.058 1.778 1.339 1.113 0.752 0.518 0.393 0.314
1.05 0.525 0.560 0.700 1.200 26.875 13.745 7.173 4.976 3.211 1.867 1.406 1.169 0.790 0.544 0.412 0.330

User manual 365

User manual 366
Very inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 13,5,  = 1 tr = 43.2
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.160 2.304 2.880 4.937 13.500 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.169 0.075 0.036 0.017
0.06 2.592 2.765 3.456 5.925 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 1.620 0.810 0.540 0.405 0.203 0.090 0.043 0.021
0.07 3.024 3.226 4.032 6.912 18.900 9.450 4.725 3.150 1.890 0.945 0.630 0.472 0.236 0.105 0.050 0.024
0.08 3.456 3.686 4.608 7.899 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.160 1.080 0.720 0.540 0.270 0.120 0.057 0.028
0.09 3.888 4.147 5.184 8.887 24.300 12.150 6.075 4.050 2.430 1.215 0.810 0.607 0.304 0.135 0.064 0.031
0.10 4.320 4.608 5.760 9.874 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.337 0.150 0.071 0.035
0.11 4.752 5.069 6.336 10.862 29.700 14.850 7.425 4.950 2.970 1.485 0.990 0.742 0.371 0.165 0.078 0.038
0.12 5.184 5.530 6.912 11.849 32.400 16.200 8.100 5.400 3.240 1.620 1.080 0.810 0.405 0.180 0.085 0.042
0.13 5.616 5.990 7.488 12.837 35.100 17.550 8.775 5.850 3.510 1.755 1.170 0.877 0.439 0.195 0.092 0.045
0.14 6.048 6.451 8.064 13.824 37.800 18.900 9.450 6.300 3.780 1.890 1.260 0.945 0.472 0.210 0.099 0.048
0.15 6.480 6.912 8.640 14.811 40.500 20.250 10.125 6.750 4.050 2.025 1.350 1.013 0.506 0.225 0.107 0.052
0.16 6.912 7.373 9.216 15.799 43.200 21.600 10.800 7.200 4.320 2.160 1.440 1.080 0.540 0.240 0.114 0.055
0.17 7.344 7.834 9.792 16.786 45.900 22.950 11.475 7.650 4.590 2.295 1.530 1.148 0.574 0.255 0.121 0.059
0.18 7.776 8.294 10.368 17.774 48.600 24.300 12.150 8.100 4.860 2.430 1.620 1.215 0.608 0.270 0.128 0.062
0.19 8.208 8.755 10.944 18.761 51.300 25.650 12.825 8.550 5.130 2.565 1.710 1.283 0.641 0.285 0.135 0.066
0.20 8.640 9.216 11.520 19.749 54.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.675 0.300 0.142 0.069
0.25 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 67.500 33.750 16.875 11.250 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.688 0.844 0.375 0.178 0.087
0.30 12.960 13.824 17.280 29.623 81.000 40.500 20.250 13.500 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.013 0.450 0.213 0.104
0.35 15.120 16.128 20.160 34.560 94.500 47.250 23.625 15.750 9.450 4.725 3.150 2.363 1.181 0.525 0.249 0.121
0.40 17.280 18.432 23.040 39.497 108.000 54.000 27.000 18.000 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 1.350 0.600 0.284 0.138
0.45 19.440 20.736 25.920 44.434 121.500 60.750 30.375 20.250 12.150 6.075 4.050 3.038 1.519 0.675 0.320 0.156
0.50 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 135.000 67.500 33.750 22.500 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 1.688 0.750 0.355 0.173
0.55 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 148.500 74.250 37.125 24.750 14.850 7.425 4.950 3.713 1.856 0.825 0.391 0.190
0.60 25.920 27.648 34.560 59.246 162.000 81.000 40.500 27.000 16.200 8.100 5.400 4.050 2.025 0.900 0.426 0.208
0.65 28.080 29.952 37.440 64.183 175.500 87.750 43.875 29.250 17.550 8.775 5.850 4.388 2.194 0.975 0.462 0.225
0.70 30.240 32.256 40.320 69.120 189.000 94.500 47.250 31.500 18.900 9.450 6.300 4.725 2.363 1.050 0.497 0.242
0.75 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 202.500 101.25 50.625 33.750 20.250 10.125 6.750 5.063 2.531 1.125 0.533 0.260
0.80 34.560 36.864 46.080 78.994 216.000 108.00 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.85 36.720 39.168 48.960 83.931 229.500 114.75 57.375 38.250 22.950 11.475 7.650 5.738 2.869 1.275 0.604 0.294
0.90 38.880 41.472 51.840 88.869 243.000 121.50 60.750 40.500 24.300 12.150 8.100 6.075 3.038 1.350 0.639 0.312
0.95 41.040 43.776 54.720 93.806 256.500 128.25 64.125 42.750 25.650 12.825 8.550 6.413 3.206 1.425 0.675 0.329
1.00 43.200 46.080 57.600 98.743 270.000 135.00 67.500 45.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 6.750 3.375 1.500 0.711 0.346
1.05 45.360 48.384 60.480 103.68 283.500 141.75 70.875 47.250 28.350 14.175 9.450 7.088 3.544 1.575 0.746 0.363

User manual 367

User manual 368
Extremely inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 80,  = 2 tr =58.2
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 39.024 19.048 9.091 5.797 3.200 1.333 0.762 0.500 0.167 0.040 0.010 0.003
0.06 3.492 3.725 4.656 7.982 46.829 22.857 10.909 6.957 3.840 1.600 0.914 0.600 0.200 0.048 0.012 0.003
0.07 4.074 4.346 5.432 9.312 54.634 26.667 12.727 8.116 4.480 1.867 1.067 0.700 0.233 0.057 0.014 0.004
0.08 4.656 4.966 6.208 10.642 62.439 30.476 14.545 9.275 5.120 2.133 1.219 0.800 0.267 0.065 0.016 0.004
0.09 5.238 5.587 6.984 11.973 70.244 34.286 16.364 10.435 5.760 2.400 1.371 0.900 0.300 0.073 0.018 0.005
0.10 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 78.049 38.095 18.182 11.594 6.400 2.667 1.524 1.000 0.333 0.081 0.020 0.005
0.11 6.402 6.829 8.536 14.633 85.854 41.905 20.000 12.754 7.040 2.933 1.676 1.100 0.367 0.089 0.022 0.006
0.12 6.984 7.450 9.312 15.963 93.659 45.714 21.818 13.913 7.680 3.200 1.829 1.200 0.400 0.097 0.024 0.006
0.13 7.566 8.070 10.088 17.294 101.464 49.524 23.636 15.072 8.320 3.467 1.981 1.300 0.433 0.105 0.026 0.007
0.14 8.148 8.691 10.864 18.624 109.268 53.333 25.455 16.232 8.960 3.733 2.133 1.400 0.467 0.113 0.028 0.007
0.15 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 117.073 57.143 27.273 17.391 9.600 4.000 2.286 1.500 0.500 0.121 0.030 0.008
0.16 9.312 9.933 12.416 21.285 124.878 60.952 29.091 18.551 10.240 4.267 2.438 1.600 0.533 0.129 0.032 0.008
0.17 9.894 10.554 13.192 22.615 132.683 64.762 30.909 19.710 10.880 4.533 2.590 1.700 0.567 0.137 0.034 0.009
0.18 10.476 11.174 13.968 23.945 140.488 68.571 32.727 20.870 11.520 4.800 2.743 1.800 0.600 0.145 0.036 0.009
0.19 11.058 11.795 14.744 25.275 148.293 72.381 34.545 22.029 12.160 5.067 2.895 1.900 0.633 0.154 0.038 0.010
0.20 11.640 12.416 15.520 26.606 156.098 76.190 36.364 23.188 12.800 5.333 3.048 2.000 0.667 0.162 0.040 0.010
0.25 14.550 15.520 19.400 33.257 195.122 95.238 45.455 28.986 16.000 6.667 3.810 2.500 0.833 0.202 0.050 0.013
0.30 17.460 18.624 23.280 39.909 234.147 114.286 54.545 34.783 19.200 8.000 4.571 3.000 1.000 0.242 0.060 0.015
0.35 20.370 21.728 27.160 46.560 273.171 133.333 63.636 40.580 22.400 9.333 5.333 3.500 1.167 0.283 0.070 0.018
0.40 23.280 24.832 31.040 53.211 312.195 152.381 72.727 46.377 25.600 10.667 6.095 4.000 1.333 0.323 0.080 0.020
0.45 26.190 27.936 34.920 59.863 351.220 171.429 81.818 52.174 28.800 12.000 6.857 4.500 1.500 0.364 0.090 0.023
0.50 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 390.244 190.476 90.909 57.971 32.000 13.333 7.619 5.000 1.667 0.404 0.100 0.025
0.55 32.010 34.144 42.680 73.166 429.269 209.524 100.000 63.768 35.200 14.667 8.381 5.500 1.833 0.444 0.110 0.028
0.60 34.920 37.248 46.560 79.817 468.293 228.571 109.091 69.565 38.400 16.000 9.143 6.000 2.000 0.485 0.120 0.030
0.65 37.830 40.352 50.440 86.469 507.318 247.619 118.182 75.362 41.600 17.333 9.905 6.500 2.167 0.525 0.130 0.033
0.70 40.740 43.456 54.320 93.120 546.342 266.667 127.273 81.159 44.800 18.667 10.667 7.000 2.333 0.566 0.140 0.035
0.75 43.650 46.560 58.200 99.771 585.367 285.714 136.364 86.957 48.000 20.000 11.429 7.500 2.500 0.606 0.150 0.038
0.80 46.560 49.664 62.080 106.423 624.391 304.762 145.455 92.754 51.200 21.333 12.190 8.000 2.667 0.646 0.160 0.040
0.85 49.470 52.768 65.960 113.074 663.415 323.810 154.545 98.551 54.400 22.667 12.952 8.500 2.833 0.687 0.170 0.043
0.90 52.380 55.872 69.840 119.726 702.440 342.857 163.636 104.348 57.600 24.000 13.714 9.000 3.000 0.727 0.180 0.045
0.95 55.290 58.976 73.720 126.377 741.464 361.905 172.727 110.145 60.800 25.333 14.476 9.500 3.167 0.768 0.190 0.048
1.00 58.200 62.080 77.600 133.029 780.489 380.952 181.818 115.942 64.000 26.667 15.238 10.000 3.333 0.808 0.201 0.050
1.05 61.110 65.184 81.480 139.680 819.513 400.000 190.909 121.739 67.200 28.000 16.000 10.500 3.500 0.848 0.211 0.053

User manual 369

User manual 370
Very Inverse Special Curve
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0
 0
K = 2,6 =1
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.05 2.600 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.260 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.032 0.022 0.014 0.012 0.009 0.007 0.004 0.003
0.06 3.120 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.312 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.039 0.026 0.017 0.014 0.011 0.008 0.005 0.004
0.07 3.640 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.364 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.045 0.030 0.020 0.017 0.013 0.010 0.006 0.005
0.08 4.160 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.416 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.052 0.035 0.023 0.019 0.015 0.011 0.007 0.005
0.09 4.680 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.468 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.058 0.039 0.026 0.021 0.017 0.012 0.008 0.006
0.10 5.200 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.520 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.029 0.024 0.019 0.014 0.009 0.007
0.11 5.720 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.572 0.286 0.191 0.143 0.095 0.071 0.048 0.032 0.026 0.020 0.015 0.010 0.007
0.12 6.240 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.624 0.312 0.208 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.035 0.028 0.022 0.016 0.011 0.008
0.13 6.760 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.676 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.113 0.084 0.056 0.038 0.031 0.024 0.018 0.012 0.009
0.14 7.280 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.728 0.364 0.243 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.040 0.033 0.026 0.019 0.013 0.009
0.15 7.800 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.780 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.098 0.065 0.043 0.035 0.028 0.021 0.013 0.010
0.16 8.320 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.832 0.416 0.277 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.046 0.038 0.030 0.022 0.014 0.011
0.17 8.840 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.884 0.442 0.295 0.221 0.147 0.111 0.074 0.049 0.040 0.032 0.023 0.015 0.011
0.18 9.360 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.936 0.468 0.312 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.052 0.043 0.033 0.025 0.016 0.012
0.19 9.880 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.988 0.494 0.329 0.247 0.165 0.124 0.082 0.055 0.045 0.035 0.026 0.017 0.013
0.20 10.400 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 1.040 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.058 0.047 0.037 0.027 0.018 0.013
0.25 13.000 6.500 3.250 2.167 1.625 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.163 0.108 0.072 0.059 0.046 0.034 0.022 0.017
0.30 15.600 7.800 3.900 2.600 1.950 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.087 0.071 0.056 0.041 0.027 0.020
0.35 18.200 9.100 4.550 3.033 2.275 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.228 0.152 0.101 0.083 0.065 0.048 0.031 0.023
0.40 20.800 10.400 5.200 3.467 2.600 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.116 0.095 0.074 0.055 0.036 0.027
0.45 23.400 11.700 5.850 3.900 2.925 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.293 0.195 0.130 0.106 0.084 0.062 0.040 0.030
0.50 26.000 13.000 6.500 4.333 3.250 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.144 0.118 0.093 0.068 0.045 0.033
0.55 28.600 14.300 7.150 4.767 3.575 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.477 0.358 0.238 0.159 0.130 0.102 0.075 0.049 0.037
0.60 31.200 15.600 7.800 5.200 3.900 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.173 0.142 0.111 0.082 0.054 0.040
0.65 33.800 16.900 8.450 5.633 4.225 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.563 0.423 0.282 0.188 0.154 0.121 0.089 0.058 0.043
0.70 36.400 18.200 9.100 6.067 4.550 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.202 0.165 0.130 0.096 0.063 0.047
0.75 39.000 19.500 9.750 6.500 4.875 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.650 0.488 0.325 0.217 0.177 0.139 0.103 0.067 0.050
0.80 41.600 20.800 10.400 6.933 5.200 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.231 0.189 0.149 0.109 0.072 0.053
0.85 44.200 22.100 11.050 7.367 5.525 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.737 0.553 0.368 0.246 0.201 0.158 0.116 0.076 0.057
0.90 46.800 23.400 11.700 7.800 5.850 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.260 0.213 0.167 0.123 0.081 0.060
0.95 49.400 24.700 12.350 8.233 6.175 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.823 0.618 0.412 0.274 0.225 0.176 0.130 0.085 0.063
1.00 52.000 26.000 13.000 8.667 6.500 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.289 0.236 0.186 0.137 0.090 0.067
1.05 54.600 27.300 13.650 9.100 6.825 5.460 2.730 1.820 1.365 0.910 0.683 0.455 0.303 0.248 0.195 0.144 0.094 0.070

User manual 371

User manual 372
27.2 ANSI CURVES
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the following types:
❑ Normal Inverse.
❑ Very Inverse.
❑ Extremely Inverse.
❑ Moderate Inverse.
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
+ + TRECAIDA = M 
  − CI 2  3
 I   I − C  I − C  2
 I  −1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
in which:

❑ M : multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.05 to 30.0, in steps of 0.1
❑ A, B, C, D, E, tr: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants Inverse. Very inverse Extremely inverse Moderate inverse

A 0.0274 0.0615 0.0399 0.1735
B 2.2614 0.7989 0.2294 0.6791
C 0.3000 0.3400 0.5000 0.8000
D -4.1899 -0.2840 3.0094 -0.0800
E 9.1272 4.0505 0.7222 0.1271
tr 0.99 4.678 6.008 1.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0 and 30.0 for each type
of characteristic. Take into account that between every two curves differentiated in 1.0 there are another 9 curves.
For the values of I/Io greater than 40, the trip time is the correspond time of I/Io=40.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.

User Manual 373
Normal inverse curve
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
  I − C 2 3 
 I   I − C  I − C 
2
 I  −1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
@Fig.174.png-H:54,7-W:250@ @Fig.175.png-H:61,65-W:143,4@
A = 0.0274, B = 2.2614, C = 0.3000, D = -4.1899, E = 9.1272 tr = 0.99
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 0.495 0.528 0.660 1.131 8.614 7.067 4.944 3.613 2.142 0.883 0.523 0.377 0.203 0.113 0.066 0.041
1.0 0.990 1.056 1.320 2.263 17.229 14.134 9.888 7.226 4.284 1.766 1.047 0.754 0.407 0.226 0.133 0.082
2.0 1.980 2.112 2.640 4.526 34.457 28.268 19.775 14.452 8.568 3.531 2.094 1.508 0.814 0.452 0.265 0.164
3.0 2.970 3.168 3.960 6.789 51.686 42.402 29.663 21.678 12.853 5.297 3.140 2.262 1.220 0.678 0.398 0.246
4.0 3.960 4.224 5.280 9.051 68.915 56.536 39.550 28.904 17.137 7.062 4.187 3.016 1.627 0.904 0.530 0.327
5.0 4.950 5.280 6.600 11.314 86.144 70.670 49.438 36.131 21.421 8.828 5.234 3.770 2.034 1.130 0.663 0.409
6.0 5.940 6.336 7.920 13.577 103.372 84.804 59.325 43.357 25.705 10.594 6.281 4.524 2.441 1.356 0.796 0.491
7.0 6.930 7.392 9.240 15.840 120.601 98.938 69.213 50.583 29.989 12.359 7.328 5.277 2.848 1.582 0.928 0.573
8.0 7.920 8.448 10.560 18.103 137.830 113.072 79.100 57.809 34.274 14.125 8.374 6.031 3.254 1.808 1.061 0.655
9.0 8.910 9.504 11.880 20.366 155.059 127.206 88.988 65.035 38.558 15.890 9.421 6.785 3.661 2.034 1.193 0.737
10.0 9.900 10.560 13.200 22.629 172.287 141.340 98.875 72.261 42.842 17.656 10.468 7.539 4.068 2.260 1.326 0.818
11.0 10.890 11.616 14.520 24.891 189.516 155.474 108.763 79.487 47.126 19.422 11.515 8.293 4.475 2.486 1.458 0.900
12.0 11.880 12.672 15.840 27.154 206.745 169.608 118.650 86.713 51.410 21.187 12.562 9.047 4.881 2.712 1.591 0.982
13.0 12.870 13.728 17.160 29.417 223.974 183.742 128.538 93.939 55.694 22.953 13.608 9.801 5.288 2.938 1.724 1.064
14.0 13.860 14.784 18.480 31.680 241.202 197.876 138.425 101.165 59.979 24.719 14.655 10.555 5.695 3.164 1.856 1.146
15.0 14.850 15.840 19.800 33.943 258.431 212.010 148.313 108.392 64.263 26.484 15.702 11.309 6.102 3.390 1.989 1.228
16.0 15.840 16.896 21.120 36.206 275.660 226.144 158.200 115.618 68.547 28.250 16.749 12.063 6.509 3.616 2.121 1.310
17.0 16.830 17.952 22.440 38.469 292.889 240.278 168.088 122.844 72.831 30.015 17.796 12.817 6.915 3.842 2.254 1.391
18.0 17.820 19.008 23.760 40.731 310.117 254.412 177.975 130.070 77.115 31.781 18.842 13.571 7.322 4.068 2.387 1.473
19.0 18.810 20.064 25.080 42.994 327.346 268.546 187.863 137.296 81.400 33.547 19.889 14.324 7.729 4.294 2.519 1.555
20.0 19.800 21.120 26.400 45.257 344.575 282.680 197.750 144.522 85.684 35.312 20.936 15.078 8.136 4.520 2.652 1.637
21.0 20.790 22.176 27.720 47.520 361.803 296.814 207.638 151.748 89.968 37.078 21.983 15.832 8.543 4.746 2.784 1.719
22.0 21.780 23.232 29.040 49.783 379.032 310.948 217.525 158.974 94.252 38.843 23.030 16.586 8.949 4.972 2.917 1.801
23.0 22.770 24.288 30.360 52.046 396.261 325.082 227.413 166.200 98.536 40.609 24.076 17.340 9.356 5.198 3.050 1.883
24.0 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 413.490 339.216 237.300 173.426 102.821 42.375 25.123 18.094 9.763 5.424 3.182 1.964
25.0 24.750 26.400 33.000 56.571 430.718 353.350 247.188 180.653 107.105 44.140 26.170 18.848 10.170 5.650 3.315 2.046
26.0 25.740 27.456 34.320 58.834 447.947 367.484 257.075 187.879 111.389 45.906 27.217 19.602 10.576 5.876 3.447 2.128
27.0 26.730 28.512 35.640 61.097 465.176 381.618 266.963 195.105 115.673 47.671 28.264 20.356 10.983 6.102 3.580 2.210
28.0 27.720 29.568 36.960 63.360 482.405 395.752 276.850 202.331 119.957 49.437 29.310 21.110 11.390 6.328 3.713 2.292
29.0 28.710 30.624 38.280 65.623 499.633 409.886 286.738 209.557 124.242 51.203 30.357 21.864 11.797 6.554 3.845 2.374
30.0 29.700 31.680 39.600 67.886 516.862 424.020 296.625 216.783 128.526 52.968 31.404 22.618 12.204 6.780 3.978 2.455

User Manual 374

User Manual 375
Very inverse curve
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
  − C
I 2 3 
 I   I − C  I − C 
2
 I  −1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
@Fig.176.png-H:54,7-W:250@ @Fig.177.png-H:61,65-W:143,4@
A = 0.0615, B = 0.7989, C = 0.3400, D = -0.2840, E = 4.0505 tr = 4.678
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 2.339 2.495 3.119 5.346 5.970 4.924 3.487 2.582 1.567 0.663 0.386 0.268 0.130 0.073 0.051 0.041
1.0 4.678 4.990 6.237 10.693 11.940 9.848 6.975 5.164 3.134 1.325 0.772 0.537 0.260 0.146 0.102 0.082
2.0 9.356 9.980 12.475 21.385 23.881 19.696 13.949 10.327 6.268 2.650 1.545 1.074 0.520 0.291 0.204 0.163
3.0 14.034 14.970 18.712 32.078 35.821 29.544 20.924 15.491 9.402 3.976 2.317 1.611 0.780 0.437 0.306 0.245
4.0 18.712 19.959 24.949 42.770 47.762 39.393 27.898 20.655 12.537 5.301 3.090 2.148 1.040 0.583 0.408 0.326
5.0 23.390 24.949 31.187 53.463 59.702 49.241 34.873 25.819 15.671 6.626 3.862 2.685 1.299 0.728 0.510 0.408
6.0 28.068 29.939 37.424 64.155 71.642 59.089 41.848 30.982 18.805 7.951 4.635 3.221 1.559 0.874 0.612 0.489
7.0 32.746 34.929 43.661 74.848 83.583 68.937 48.822 36.146 21.939 9.276 5.407 3.758 1.819 1.020 0.714 0.571
8.0 37.424 39.919 49.899 85.541 95.523 78.785 55.797 41.310 25.073 10.602 6.179 4.295 2.079 1.165 0.815 0.652
9.0 42.102 44.909 56.136 96.233 107.464 88.633 62.771 46.474 28.207 11.927 6.952 4.832 2.339 1.311 0.917 0.734
10.0 46.780 49.899 62.373 106.926 119.404 98.481 69.746 51.637 31.341 13.252 7.724 5.369 2.599 1.457 1.019 0.815
11.0 51.458 54.889 68.611 117.618 131.344 108.330 76.721 56.801 34.475 14.577 8.497 5.906 2.859 1.602 1.121 0.897
12.0 56.136 59.878 74.848 128.311 143.285 118.178 83.695 61.965 37.610 15.902 9.269 6.443 3.119 1.748 1.223 0.978
13.0 60.814 64.868 81.085 139.003 155.225 128.026 90.670 67.128 40.744 17.228 10.041 6.980 3.379 1.893 1.325 1.060
14.0 65.492 69.858 87.323 149.696 167.165 137.874 97.645 72.292 43.878 18.553 10.814 7.517 3.638 2.039 1.427 1.141
15.0 70.170 74.848 93.560 160.389 179.106 147.722 104.619 77.456 47.012 19.878 11.586 8.054 3.898 2.185 1.529 1.223
16.0 74.848 79.838 99.797 171.081 191.046 157.570 111.594 82.620 50.146 21.203 12.359 8.591 4.158 2.330 1.631 1.304
17.0 79.526 84.828 106.035 181.774 202.987 167.419 118.568 87.783 53.280 22.528 13.131 9.127 4.418 2.476 1.733 1.386
18.0 84.204 89.818 112.272 192.466 214.927 177.267 125.543 92.947 56.414 23.853 13.904 9.664 4.678 2.622 1.835 1.468
19.0 88.882 94.807 118.509 203.159 226.867 187.115 132.518 98.111 59.549 25.179 14.676 10.201 4.938 2.767 1.937 1.549
20.0 93.560 99.797 124.747 213.851 238.808 196.963 139.492 103.275 62.683 26.504 15.448 10.738 5.198 2.913 2.039 1.631
21.0 98.238 104.787 130.984 224.544 250.748 206.811 146.467 108.438 65.817 27.829 16.221 11.275 5.458 3.059 2.141 1.712
22.0 102.916 109.777 137.221 235.237 262.689 216.659 153.441 113.602 68.951 29.154 16.993 11.812 5.718 3.204 2.243 1.794
23.0 107.594 114.767 143.459 245.929 274.629 226.507 160.416 118.766 72.085 30.479 17.766 12.349 5.977 3.350 2.344 1.875
24.0 112.272 119.757 149.696 256.622 286.569 236.356 167.391 123.930 75.219 31.805 18.538 12.886 6.237 3.496 2.446 1.957
25.0 116.950 124.747 155.933 267.314 298.510 246.204 174.365 129.093 78.353 33.130 19.310 13.423 6.497 3.641 2.548 2.038
26.0 121.628 129.737 162.171 278.007 310.450 256.052 181.340 134.257 81.487 34.455 20.083 13.960 6.757 3.787 2.650 2.120
27.0 126.306 134.726 168.408 288.699 322.391 265.900 188.314 139.421 84.622 35.780 20.855 14.497 7.017 3.933 2.752 2.201
28.0 130.984 139.716 174.645 299.392 334.331 275.748 195.289 144.584 87.756 37.105 21.628 15.034 7.277 4.078 2.854 2.283
29.0 135.662 144.706 180.883 310.085 346.271 285.596 202.264 149.748 90.890 38.431 22.400 15.570 7.537 4.224 2.956 2.364
30.0 140.340 149.696 187.120 320.777 358.212 295.444 209.238 154.912 94.024 39.756 23.173 16.107 7.797 4.370 3.058 2.446

User Manual 376

User Manual 377
Extremely inverse curve
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
  − C
I 2 3 
 I   I − C  I − C   I  −1
2
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
A = 0.0399, B = 0.2294, C = 0.5000, D = 3.0094, E = 0.7222 tr = 6.008
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 3.004 3.204 4.005 6.866 7.373 6.063 4.307 3.220 2.000 0.872 0.499 0.330 0.124 0.049 0.030 0.024
1.0 6.008 6.409 8.011 13.733 14.746 12.125 8.615 6.439 4.001 1.744 0.997 0.659 0.247 0.098 0.060 0.048
2.0 12.016 12.817 16.021 27.465 29.492 24.250 17.230 12.879 8.002 3.489 1.994 1.319 0.495 0.196 0.119 0.095
3.0 18.024 19.226 24.032 41.198 44.239 36.376 25.844 19.318 12.003 5.233 2.992 1.978 0.742 0.295 0.179 0.143
4.0 24.032 25.634 32.043 54.930 58.985 48.501 34.459 25.758 16.004 6.977 3.989 2.638 0.990 0.393 0.239 0.191
5.0 30.040 32.043 40.053 68.663 73.731 60.626 43.074 32.197 20.004 8.722 4.986 3.297 1.237 0.491 0.298 0.238
6.0 36.048 38.451 48.064 82.395 88.477 72.751 51.689 38.636 24.005 10.466 5.983 3.956 1.484 0.589 0.358 0.286
7.0 42.056 44.860 56.075 96.128 103.224 84.876 60.303 45.076 28.006 12.210 6.981 4.616 1.732 0.688 0.418 0.334
8.0 48.064 51.268 64.085 109.861 117.970 97.002 68.918 51.515 32.007 13.955 7.978 5.275 1.979 0.786 0.477 0.381
9.0 54.072 57.677 72.096 123.593 132.716 109.127 77.533 57.954 36.008 15.699 8.975 5.934 2.227 0.884 0.537 0.429
10.0 60.080 64.085 80.107 137.326 147.462 121.252 86.148 64.394 40.009 17.443 9.972 6.594 2.474 0.982 0.597 0.476
11.0 66.088 70.494 88.117 151.058 162.208 133.377 94.763 70.833 44.010 19.188 10.969 7.253 2.722 1.081 0.656 0.524
12.0 72.096 76.902 96.128 164.791 176.955 145.502 103.377 77.273 48.011 20.932 11.967 7.913 2.969 1.179 0.716 0.572
13.0 78.104 83.311 104.139 178.523 191.701 157.628 111.992 83.712 52.012 22.676 12.964 8.572 3.216 1.277 0.776 0.619
14.0 84.112 89.719 112.149 192.256 206.447 169.753 120.607 90.151 56.013 24.421 13.961 9.231 3.464 1.375 0.835 0.667
15.0 90.120 96.128 120.160 205.989 221.193 181.878 129.222 96.591 60.013 26.165 14.958 9.891 3.711 1.474 0.895 0.715
16.0 96.128 102.537 128.171 219.721 235.940 194.003 137.837 103.030 64.014 27.909 15.956 10.550 3.959 1.572 0.955 0.762
17.0 102.136 108.945 136.181 233.454 250.686 206.128 146.451 109.470 68.015 29.654 16.953 11.210 4.206 1.670 1.014 0.810
18.0 108.144 115.354 144.192 247.186 265.432 218.254 155.066 115.909 72.016 31.398 17.950 11.869 4.453 1.768 1.074 0.858
19.0 114.152 121.762 152.203 260.919 280.178 230.379 163.681 122.348 76.017 33.142 18.947 12.528 4.701 1.866 1.134 0.905
20.0 120.160 128.171 160.213 274.651 294.924 242.504 172.296 128.788 80.018 34.887 19.944 13.188 4.948 1.965 1.194 0.953
21.0 126.168 134.579 168.224 288.384 309.671 254.629 180.910 135.227 84.019 36.631 20.942 13.847 5.196 2.063 1.253 1.001
22.0 132.176 140.988 176.235 302.117 324.417 266.754 189.525 141.666 88.020 38.375 21.939 14.506 5.443 2.161 1.313 1.048
23.0 138.184 147.396 184.245 315.849 339.163 278.879 198.140 148.106 92.021 40.120 22.936 15.166 5.691 2.259 1.373 1.096
24.0 144.192 153.805 192.256 329.582 353.909 291.005 206.755 154.545 96.022 41.864 23.933 15.825 5.938 2.358 1.432 1.144
25.0 150.200 160.213 200.267 343.314 368.655 303.130 215.370 160.985 100.022 43.608 24.931 16.485 6.185 2.456 1.492 1.191
26.0 156.208 166.622 208.277 357.047 383.402 315.255 223.984 167.424 104.023 45.353 25.928 17.144 6.433 2.554 1.552 1.239
27.0 162.216 173.030 216.288 370.779 398.148 327.380 232.599 173.863 108.024 47.097 26.925 17.803 6.680 2.652 1.611 1.286
28.0 168.224 179.439 224.299 384.512 412.894 339.505 241.214 180.303 112.025 48.841 27.922 18.463 6.928 2.751 1.671 1.334
29.0 174.232 185.847 232.309 398.245 427.640 351.631 249.829 186.742 116.026 50.586 28.920 19.122 7.175 2.849 1.731 1.382
30.0 180.240 192.256 240.320 411.977 442.387 363.756 258.444 193.182 120.027 52.330 29.917 19.782 7.422 2.947 1.790 1.429

User Manual 378

User Manual 379
Moderate inverse curve
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
  − C
I 2  3
 I   I − C  I − C  2
 I  −1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0  
 0
A = 0.1735, B = 0.6791, C = 0.8000, D = -0.0800, E = 0.1271 tr = 1.2
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 0.600 0.640 0.800 1.371 4.872 3.128 1.679 1.114 0.675 0.379 0.286 0.239 0.166 0.123 0.104 0.095
1.0 1.200 1.280 1.600 2.743 9.744 6.256 3.357 2.229 1.351 0.757 0.571 0.478 0.332 0.247 0.209 0.191
2.0 2.400 2.560 3.200 5.486 19.489 12.511 6.714 4.457 2.702 1.515 1.142 0.955 0.665 0.493 0.417 0.382
3.0 3.600 3.840 4.800 8.229 29.233 18.767 10.072 6.686 4.053 2.272 1.713 1.433 0.997 0.740 0.626 0.572
4.0 4.800 5.120 6.400 10.971 38.977 25.023 13.429 8.914 5.404 3.030 2.285 1.910 1.329 0.986 0.835 0.763
5.0 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 48.722 31.278 16.786 11.143 6.755 3.787 2.856 2.388 1.662 1.233 1.043 0.954
6.0 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 58.466 37.534 20.143 13.371 8.106 4.544 3.427 2.866 1.994 1.479 1.252 1.145
7.0 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 68.210 43.790 23.500 15.600 9.457 5.302 3.998 3.343 2.327 1.726 1.461 1.335
8.0 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 77.954 50.045 26.857 17.828 10.807 6.059 4.569 3.821 2.659 1.972 1.669 1.526
9.0 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 87.699 56.301 30.215 20.057 12.158 6.817 5.140 4.298 2.991 2.219 1.878 1.717
10.0 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 97.443 62.557 33.572 22.285 13.509 7.574 5.712 4.776 3.324 2.465 2.087 1.908
11.0 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 107.187 68.813 36.929 24.514 14.860 8.332 6.283 5.253 3.656 2.712 2.295 2.099
12.0 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 116.932 75.068 40.286 26.742 16.211 9.089 6.854 5.731 3.988 2.958 2.504 2.289
13.0 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 126.676 81.324 43.643 28.971 17.562 9.846 7.425 6.209 4.321 3.205 2.713 2.480
14.0 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 136.420 87.580 47.001 31.199 18.913 10.604 7.996 6.686 4.653 3.451 2.921 2.671
15.0 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 146.165 93.835 50.358 33.428 20.264 11.361 8.567 7.164 4.986 3.698 3.130 2.862
16.0 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 155.909 100.091 53.715 35.656 21.615 12.119 9.139 7.641 5.318 3.945 3.339 3.052
17.0 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 165.653 106.347 57.072 37.885 22.966 12.876 9.710 8.119 5.650 4.191 3.547 3.243
18.0 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 175.398 112.602 60.429 40.113 24.317 13.633 10.281 8.597 5.983 4.438 3.756 3.434
19.0 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 185.142 118.858 63.787 42.342 25.668 14.391 10.852 9.074 6.315 4.684 3.965 3.625
20.0 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 194.886 125.114 67.144 44.570 27.019 15.148 11.423 9.552 6.647 4.931 4.173 3.815
21.0 25.200 26.880 33.600 57.600 204.630 131.369 70.501 46.799 28.370 15.906 11.994 10.029 6.980 5.177 4.382 4.006
22.0 26.400 28.160 35.200 60.343 214.375 137.625 73.858 49.027 29.720 16.663 12.565 10.507 7.312 5.424 4.591 4.197
23.0 27.600 29.440 36.800 63.086 224.119 143.881 77.215 51.256 31.071 17.421 13.137 10.985 7.645 5.670 4.799 4.388
24.0 28.800 30.720 38.400 65.829 233.863 150.136 80.572 53.484 32.422 18.178 13.708 11.462 7.977 5.917 5.008 4.579
25.0 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 243.608 156.392 83.930 55.713 33.773 18.935 14.279 11.940 8.309 6.163 5.217 4.769
26.0 31.200 33.280 41.600 71.314 253.352 162.648 87.287 57.941 35.124 19.693 14.850 12.417 8.642 6.410 5.425 4.960
27.0 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 263.096 168.903 90.644 60.170 36.475 20.450 15.421 12.895 8.974 6.656 5.634 5.151
28.0 33.600 35.840 44.800 76.800 272.841 175.159 94.001 62.398 37.826 21.208 15.992 13.373 9.306 6.903 5.843 5.342
29.0 34.800 37.120 46.400 79.543 282.585 181.415 97.358 64.627 39.177 21.965 16.564 13.850 9.639 7.149 6.051 5.532
30.0 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 292.329 187.671 100.716 66.855 40.528 22.722 17.135 14.328 9.971 7.396 6.260 5.723

User Manual 380

User Manual 381
27.2.1 Battery voltage curves

Only available in CB models

User Manual 382
27.3 IEC 60255-151 CURVES6
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to IEC 60255-151, which correspond to the following types:
❑ IEEE Moderate Inverse

❑ IEEE Very Inverse
❑ IEEE Extremely Inverse
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
𝑇 = 𝑀[ 𝐼 𝛼
+ 𝑐] 𝑇𝐷𝑅𝑂𝑃 = 𝑀 [ 𝐼 2
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
in which:

❑ M : multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.025 to 15.0, in steps of 0.005
❑ K, , tr, c: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants IEEE Moderte Inverse IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Extremely Inverse
K 0.0515 19.61 28.2
 0.02 2 2
c 0.114 0.491 0.1217
tr 4.85 21.6 29.1
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for
each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except
between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are another 4.
6
Avaliable from firmware version 6.0.8.2 and ICD version 8.2.0.0.

User Manual 383
IEEE Moderate Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
+ 𝑐] 𝑇𝑅𝐸𝐶𝐴𝐼𝐷𝐴 = 𝑀 [ 𝐼 2
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 0,0515,  = 0,02, c = 0,114, tr = 4,85
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.243 0.259 0.323 0.554 2.643 1.355 0.711 0.495 0.322 0.190 0.145 0.122 0.084 0.060 0.047 0.039
0.06 0.291 0.310 0.388 0.665 3.172 1.626 0.853 0.594 0.386 0.228 0.174 0.146 0.101 0.072 0.057 0.047
0.340 0.362 0.453 0.776 3.701 1.897 0.995 0.693 0.451 0.266 0.203 0.170 0.118 0.084 0.066 0.055
0.07
0.08 0.388 0.414 0.517 0.887 4.229 2.168 1.137 0.792 0.515 0.304 0.232 0.195 0.135 0.097 0.076 0.063
0.09 0.437 0.466 0.582 0.998 4.758 2.439 1.279 0.891 0.580 0.342 0.261 0.219 0.152 0.109 0.085 0.071
0.485 0.517 0.647 1.109 5.287 2.711 1.421 0.990 0.644 0.380 0.290 0.243 0.169 0.121 0.095 0.079
0.10
0.11 0.534 0.569 0.711 1.219 5.815 2.982 1.563 1.089 0.708 0.418 0.319 0.268 0.186 0.133 0.104 0.087
0.12 0.582 0.621 0.776 1.330 6.344 3.253 1.705 1.188 0.773 0.456 0.348 0.292 0.203 0.145 0.114 0.094
0.631 0.673 0.841 1.441 6.872 3.524 1.848 1.287 0.837 0.494 0.377 0.316 0.219 0.157 0.123 0.102
0.13
0.14 0.679 0.724 0.905 1.552 7.401 3.795 1.990 1.386 0.901 0.532 0.406 0.341 0.236 0.169 0.133 0.110
0.15 0.728 0.776 0.970 1.663 7.930 4.066 2.132 1.485 0.966 0.570 0.435 0.365 0.253 0.181 0.142 0.118
0.776 0.828 1.035 1.774 8.458 4.337 2.274 1.584 1.030 0.609 0.464 0.389 0.270 0.193 0.152 0.126
0.16
0.17 0.825 0.879 1.099 1.885 8.987 4.608 2.416 1.683 1.095 0.647 0.493 0.413 0.287 0.205 0.161 0.134
0.18 0.873 0.931 1.164 1.995 9.516 4.879 2.558 1.783 1.159 0.685 0.522 0.438 0.304 0.217 0.171 0.142
0.922 0.983 1.229 2.106 10.044 5.150 2.700 1.882 1.223 0.723 0.551 0.462 0.321 0.229 0.180 0.149
0.19
0.20 0.970 1.035 1.293 2.217 10.573 5.421 2.842 1.981 1.288 0.761 0.580 0.486 0.338 0.241 0.190 0.157
0.25 1.213 1.293 1.617 2.771 13.216 6.776 3.553 2.476 1.610 0.951 0.725 0.608 0.422 0.302 0.237 0.197
1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 15.860 8.132 4.263 2.971 1.932 1.141 0.870 0.730 0.506 0.362 0.284 0.236
0.30
0.35 1.698 1.811 2.263 3.880 18.503 9.487 4.974 3.466 2.254 1.331 1.015 0.851 0.591 0.422 0.332 0.275
0.40 1.940 2.069 2.587 4.434 21.146 10.842 5.685 3.961 2.576 1.521 1.159 0.973 0.675 0.483 0.379 0.315
2.183 2.328 2.910 4.989 23.789 12.197 6.395 4.456 2.898 1.711 1.304 1.094 0.760 0.543 0.427 0.354
0.45
0.50 2.425 2.587 3.233 5.543 26.433 13.553 7.106 4.951 3.220 1.902 1.449 1.216 0.844 0.603 0.474 0.393
0.55 2.668 2.845 3.557 6.097 29.076 14.908 7.816 5.447 3.541 2.092 1.594 1.338 0.929 0.664 0.521 0.433
2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 31.719 16.263 8.527 5.942 3.863 2.282 1.739 1.459 1.013 0.724 0.569 0.472
0.60
0.65 3.153 3.363 4.203 7.206 34.362 17.618 9.238 6.437 4.185 2.472 1.884 1.581 1.097 0.784 0.616 0.511
0.70 3.395 3.621 4.527 7.760 37.006 18.974 9.948 6.932 4.507 2.662 2.029 1.703 1.182 0.845 0.664 0.551
3.638 3.880 4.850 8.314 39.649 20.329 10.659 7.427 4.829 2.852 2.174 1.824 1.266 0.905 0.711 0.590
0.75
0.80 3.880 4.139 5.173 8.869 42.292 21.684 11.369 7.922 5.151 3.043 2.319 1.946 1.351 0.965 0.758 0.629
0.85 4.123 4.397 5.497 9.423 44.935 23.040 12.080 8.417 5.473 3.233 2.464 2.067 1.435 1.026 0.806 0.669
4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 47.579 24.395 12.790 8.913 5.795 3.423 2.609 2.189 1.519 1.086 0.853 0.708
0.90
0.95 4.608 4.915 6.143 10.531 50.222 25.750 13.501 9.408 6.117 3.613 2.754 2.311 1.604 1.146 0.901 0.747
1.00 4.850 5.173 6.467 11.086 52.865 27.105 14.212 9.903 6.439 3.803 2.899 2.432 1.688 1.207 0.948 0.787
1.05 5.093 5.432 6.790 11.640 55.509 28.461 14.922 10.398 6.761 3.993 3.044 2.554 1.773 1.267 0.995 0.826
1.5 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 79.298 40.658 21.317 14.854 9.659 5.705 4.348 3.648 2.532 1.810 1.422 1.180
2.5 12.125 12.933 16.167 27.714 132.163 67.763 35.529 24.757 16.098 9.508 7.246 6.081 4.221 3.017 2.370 1.967
4.0 19.400 20.693 25.867 44.343 211.461 108.421 56.847 39.611 25.756 15.213 11.594 9.729 6.753 4.827 3.792 3.146
6.0 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 317.192 162.632 85.270 59.417 38.634 22.819 17.391 14.593 10.130 7.241 5.688 4.720
10.0 48.500 51.733 64.667 110.857 528.653 271.053 142.117 99.029 64.390 38.032 28.986 24.322 16.883 12.068 9.481 7.866
15.0 72.750 77.600 97.000 166.286 792.979 406.580 213.175 148.543 96.585 57.049 43.479 36.483 25.325 18.101 14.221 11.799

User Manual 384

User Manual 385
IEEE Very Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 19,61,  = 2, c = 0,491, tr = 21,6
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 1.080 1.152 1.440 2.469 9.590 4.694 2.253 1.446 0.809 0.351 0.211 0.147 0.065 0.034 0.027 0.025
0.06 1.296 1.382 1.728 2.962 11.508 5.632 2.704 1.735 0.971 0.422 0.254 0.177 0.078 0.041 0.032 0.030
1.512 1.613 2.016 3.456 13.427 6.571 3.154 2.024 1.133 0.492 0.296 0.206 0.092 0.048 0.038 0.035
0.07
0.08 1.728 1.843 2.304 3.950 15.345 7.510 3.605 2.313 1.294 0.562 0.338 0.235 0.105 0.055 0.043 0.040
0.09 1.944 2.074 2.592 4.443 17.263 8.448 4.055 2.602 1.456 0.632 0.380 0.265 0.118 0.062 0.049 0.045
2.160 2.304 2.880 4.937 19.181 9.387 4.506 2.891 1.618 0.703 0.423 0.294 0.131 0.069 0.054 0.050
0.10
0.11 2.376 2.534 3.168 5.431 21.099 10.326 4.957 3.180 1.780 0.773 0.465 0.324 0.144 0.076 0.059 0.055
0.12 2.592 2.765 3.456 5.925 23.017 11.265 5.407 3.469 1.941 0.843 0.507 0.353 0.157 0.083 0.065 0.060
2.808 2.995 3.744 6.418 24.935 12.203 5.858 3.758 2.103 0.914 0.549 0.382 0.170 0.090 0.070 0.065
0.13
0.14 3.024 3.226 4.032 6.912 26.853 13.142 6.308 4.048 2.265 0.984 0.592 0.412 0.183 0.096 0.076 0.070
0.15 3.240 3.456 4.320 7.406 28.771 14.081 6.759 4.337 2.427 1.054 0.634 0.441 0.196 0.103 0.081 0.075
3.456 3.686 4.608 7.899 30.689 15.020 7.209 4.626 2.589 1.124 0.676 0.471 0.209 0.110 0.086 0.081
0.16
0.17 3.672 3.917 4.896 8.393 32.607 15.958 7.660 4.915 2.750 1.195 0.718 0.500 0.222 0.117 0.092 0.086
0.18 3.888 4.147 5.184 8.887 34.525 16.897 8.111 5.204 2.912 1.265 0.761 0.530 0.235 0.124 0.097 0.091
4.104 4.378 5.472 9.381 36.444 17.836 8.561 5.493 3.074 1.335 0.803 0.559 0.249 0.131 0.103 0.096
0.19
0.20 4.320 4.608 5.760 9.874 38.362 18.774 9.012 5.782 3.236 1.406 0.845 0.588 0.262 0.138 0.108 0.101
0.25 5.400 5.760 7.200 12.343 47.952 23.468 11.265 7.228 4.045 1.757 1.057 0.736 0.327 0.172 0.135 0.126
6.480 6.912 8.640 14.811 57.542 28.162 13.518 8.673 4.854 2.108 1.268 0.883 0.392 0.207 0.162 0.151
0.30
0.35 7.560 8.064 10.080 17.280 67.133 32.855 15.771 10.119 5.663 2.460 1.479 1.030 0.458 0.241 0.189 0.176
0.40 8.640 9.216 11.520 19.749 76.723 37.549 18.024 11.565 6.472 2.811 1.690 1.177 0.523 0.276 0.216 0.201
9.720 10.368 12.960 22.217 86.314 42.242 20.277 13.010 7.281 3.162 1.902 1.324 0.589 0.310 0.243 0.226
0.45
0.50 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 95.904 46.936 22.530 14.456 8.090 3.514 2.113 1.471 0.654 0.345 0.270 0.252
0.55 11.880 12.672 15.840 27.154 105.494 51.630 24.783 15.901 8.898 3.865 2.324 1.618 0.719 0.379 0.297 0.277
12.960 13.824 17.280 29.623 115.085 56.323 27.036 17.347 9.707 4.217 2.536 1.765 0.785 0.413 0.324 0.302
0.60
0.65 14.040 14.976 18.720 32.091 124.675 61.017 29.288 18.792 10.516 4.568 2.747 1.912 0.850 0.448 0.351 0.327
0.70 15.120 16.128 20.160 34.560 134.266 65.710 31.541 20.238 11.325 4.919 2.958 2.060 0.916 0.482 0.378 0.352
16.200 17.280 21.600 37.029 143.856 70.404 33.794 21.683 12.134 5.271 3.170 2.207 0.981 0.517 0.405 0.377
0.75
0.80 17.280 18.432 23.040 39.497 153.446 75.098 36.047 23.129 12.943 5.622 3.381 2.354 1.046 0.551 0.432 0.403
0.85 18.360 19.584 24.480 41.966 163.037 79.791 38.300 24.575 13.752 5.974 3.592 2.501 1.112 0.586 0.459 0.428
19.440 20.736 25.920 44.434 172.627 84.485 40.553 26.020 14.561 6.325 3.804 2.648 1.177 0.620 0.486 0.453
0.90
0.95 20.520 21.888 27.360 46.903 182.218 89.178 42.806 27.466 15.370 6.676 4.015 2.795 1.243 0.655 0.513 0.478
1.00 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 191.808 93.872 45.059 28.911 16.179 7.028 4.226 2.942 1.308 0.689 0.540 0.503
1.05 22.680 24.192 30.240 51.840 201.398 98.566 47.312 30.357 16.988 7.379 4.438 3.089 1.373 0.724 0.567 0.528
1.5 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 287.712 140.808 67.589 43.367 24.269 10.542 6.339 4.413 1.962 1.034 0.810 0.755
2.5 54.000 57.600 72.000 123.429 479.520 234.680 112.648 72.278 40.448 17.569 10.566 7.356 3.270 1.723 1.350 1.258
4.0 86.400 92.160 115.200 197.486 767.232 375.488 180.237 115.645 64.716 28.111 16.905 11.769 5.232 2.756 2.161 2.013
6.0 129.600 138.240 172.800 296.229 1150.848 563.232 270.355 173.468 97.074 42.166 25.357 17.654 7.849 4.134 3.241 3.020
10.0 216.000 230.400 288.000 493.714 1918.081 938.720 450.592 289.113 161.790 70.277 42.262 29.423 13.081 6.891 5.401 5.033
15.0 324.000 345.600 432.000 740.571 2877.121 1408.079 675.888 433.669 242.685 105.415 63.394 44.134 19.621 10.336 8.102 7.549

User Manual 386

User Manual 387
IEEE Extremely Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 28,2,  = 2, c = 0,1217, tr = 29,1
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 13.762 6.720 3.211 2.050 1.134 0.476 0.275 0.182 0.065 0.020 0.010 0.007
0.06 1.746 1.862 2.328 3.991 16.515 8.064 3.853 2.459 1.361 0.571 0.330 0.219 0.078 0.024 0.012 0.008
2.037 2.173 2.716 4.656 19.267 9.409 4.495 2.869 1.588 0.667 0.385 0.255 0.091 0.028 0.013 0.010
0.07
0.08 2.328 2.483 3.104 5.321 22.019 10.753 5.137 3.279 1.815 0.762 0.439 0.292 0.104 0.033 0.015 0.011
0.09 2.619 2.794 3.492 5.986 24.772 12.097 5.779 3.689 2.041 0.857 0.494 0.328 0.117 0.037 0.017 0.013
2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 27.524 13.441 6.421 4.099 2.268 0.952 0.549 0.365 0.130 0.041 0.019 0.014
0.10
0.11 3.201 3.414 4.268 7.317 30.277 14.785 7.063 4.509 2.495 1.047 0.604 0.401 0.143 0.045 0.021 0.015
0.12 3.492 3.725 4.656 7.982 33.029 16.129 7.706 4.919 2.722 1.143 0.659 0.438 0.156 0.049 0.023 0.017
3.783 4.035 5.044 8.647 35.782 17.473 8.348 5.329 2.949 1.238 0.714 0.474 0.169 0.053 0.025 0.018
0.13
0.14 4.074 4.346 5.432 9.312 38.534 18.817 8.990 5.739 3.175 1.333 0.769 0.511 0.182 0.057 0.027 0.020
0.15 4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 41.287 20.161 9.632 6.149 3.402 1.428 0.824 0.547 0.195 0.061 0.029 0.021
4.656 4.966 6.208 10.642 44.039 21.505 10.274 6.559 3.629 1.523 0.879 0.583 0.207 0.065 0.031 0.022
0.16
0.17 4.947 5.277 6.596 11.307 46.791 22.849 10.916 6.969 3.856 1.619 0.934 0.620 0.220 0.069 0.033 0.024
0.18 5.238 5.587 6.984 11.973 49.544 24.193 11.558 7.378 4.083 1.714 0.989 0.656 0.233 0.073 0.035 0.025
5.529 5.898 7.372 12.638 52.296 25.537 12.200 7.788 4.310 1.809 1.044 0.693 0.246 0.077 0.037 0.026
0.19
0.20 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 55.049 26.881 12.843 8.198 4.536 1.904 1.099 0.729 0.259 0.081 0.038 0.028
0.25 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 68.811 33.602 16.053 10.248 5.670 2.380 1.373 0.912 0.324 0.102 0.048 0.035
8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 82.573 40.322 19.264 12.297 6.805 2.857 1.648 1.094 0.389 0.122 0.058 0.042
0.30
0.35 10.185 10.864 13.580 23.280 96.335 47.043 22.474 14.347 7.939 3.333 1.923 1.276 0.454 0.142 0.067 0.049
0.40 11.640 12.416 15.520 26.606 110.097 53.763 25.685 16.397 9.073 3.809 2.197 1.459 0.519 0.163 0.077 0.056
13.095 13.968 17.460 29.931 123.860 60.483 28.896 18.446 10.207 4.285 2.472 1.641 0.584 0.183 0.087 0.063
0.45
0.50 14.550 15.520 19.400 33.257 137.622 67.204 32.106 20.496 11.341 4.761 2.747 1.823 0.648 0.203 0.096 0.070
0.55 16.005 17.072 21.340 36.583 151.384 73.924 35.317 22.545 12.475 5.237 3.021 2.006 0.713 0.224 0.106 0.077
17.460 18.624 23.280 39.909 165.146 80.644 38.528 24.595 13.609 5.713 3.296 2.188 0.778 0.244 0.115 0.084
0.60
0.65 18.915 20.176 25.220 43.234 178.908 87.365 41.738 26.644 14.743 6.189 3.571 2.370 0.843 0.264 0.125 0.091
0.70 20.370 21.728 27.160 46.560 192.671 94.085 44.949 28.694 15.877 6.665 3.845 2.553 0.908 0.285 0.135 0.098
21.825 23.280 29.100 49.886 206.433 100.806 48.159 30.743 17.011 7.141 4.120 2.735 0.973 0.305 0.144 0.105
0.75
0.80 23.280 24.832 31.040 53.211 220.195 107.526 51.370 32.793 18.145 7.617 4.395 2.917 1.037 0.325 0.154 0.111
0.85 24.735 26.384 32.980 56.537 233.957 114.246 54.581 34.843 19.279 8.093 4.669 3.100 1.102 0.346 0.164 0.118
26.190 27.936 34.920 59.863 247.719 120.967 57.791 36.892 20.414 8.570 4.944 3.282 1.167 0.366 0.173 0.125
0.90
0.95 27.645 29.488 36.860 63.189 261.481 127.687 61.002 38.942 21.548 9.046 5.218 3.464 1.232 0.386 0.183 0.132
1.00 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 275.244 134.407 64.213 40.991 22.682 9.522 5.493 3.647 1.297 0.407 0.192 0.139
30.555 32.592 40.740 69.840 289.006 141.128 67.423 43.041 23.816 9.998 5.768 3.829 1.362 0.427 0.202 0.146
1.05
1.5 43.650 46.560 58.200 99.771 412.865 201.611 96.319 61.487 34.023 14.283 8.240 5.470 1.945 0.610 0.289 0.209
2.5 72.750 77.600 97.000 166.286 688.109 336.019 160.532 102.478 56.704 23.804 13.733 9.117 3.242 1.016 0.481 0.348
4.0 116.400 124.160 155.200 266.057 1100.975 537.630 256.850 163.965 90.727 38.087 21.973 14.587 5.187 1.626 0.770 0.557
6.0 174.600 186.240 232.800 399.086 1651.462 806.444 385.276 245.948 136.090 57.130 32.959 21.880 7.780 2.439 1.154 0.836
10.0 291.000 310.400 388.000 665.143 2752.437 1344.074 642.126 409.913 226.817 95.217 54.931 36.467 12.967 4.065 1.924 1.393
15.0 436.500 465.600 582.000 997.714 4128.655 2016.111 963.189 614.869 340.226 142.826 82.397 54.701 19.451 6.098 2.886 2.090

User Manual 388

User Manual 389
27.4 USER CURVES
The user can programme FOUR curves by entering the desired points into the “User curve 1” to “User curve 4” user curve nodes.
The time corresponding to each I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020 seconds. These times correspond to the
curve of index 1, but as in curves IEC, the user can programme a time index between 0.05 and 1.09 in the overcurrent protection
settings.
It is not necessary to programme all the points on the curve, the unit will assign the time of the first programmed point to all those I/Ia
of a lower value and the last programmed time to all those of a higher I/Ia, that is to say, the graph will generally start and finish with
straight, horizontal lines. The points between the two programmed points will be calculated by the console as a lineal interpolation.
I/Ia values for times which are superior to that which corresponds to an inferior I/Ia are not admitted, that is to say, ascendant straight
lines are not allowed.
The nodes for the configuration of the curves are:
❑ PROT/RUSC1 user curve 1

Each node uses 3 settings frames, into which the milliseconds of activation for each I/IAJ are entered, with a range of 20 to 600,000
milliseconds.
❑ Crv0 (Low Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 1.03 and 1.05 I/IAJ ratios.
❑ Crv1 (Medium Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 1.1 and 4 I/IAJ ratios, with steps of 0.1.
❑ Crv1 (High Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 4 and 20 I/IAJ ratios, with steps of 0.5.
The programming carried out via PacFactory is done using the programming screen shown in Figure 150, in which:
❑ The times of the curves different points are entered (left table) and the curve’s graph is displayed (right table).
❑ Interpolate points of the curve and enter the known points. By clicking on “Calculate Curve Values”, the missing values are
calculated for the curve.
❑ Reset the curve values “Reset PC column”.
❑ “Save values”. Saves the values entered in order to send them to unit.
❑ “Close”. Returns to the general settings screen, from where they can be sent to the unit.

User Manual 390
Figure 150. User curve configuration screen
An example is shown below
I/Ia 2 4 8 12 15
T (s) 200 100 70 50 5

User Manual 391
MEASUREMENT LIST 
28. MEASUREMENT LIST

The following tables show the list of available measurements. If the model doesn´t have a function, the measurements of that unit are no
available.
Table 159. General measurements
Measurement Node Instance Data Attribute Refresh (ms)

VA MMXU 1 PhV phsA 100
VB MMXU 1 PhV phsB 100
VC MMXU 1 PhV phsC 100
VN MMXU 1 PhV neut 100
AVERAGE V MMXU 1 PhV net 100
VAB MMXU 1 PPV phsAB 100
VBC MMXU 1 PPV phsBC 100
VCA MMXU 1 PPV phsCA 100
AVERAGE U MMXU 1 PPV (PPVm in Ed2) net 100
IN MMXU 1 A neut 100
IA MMXU 1 A phsA 100
IB MMXU 1 A phsB 100
IC MMXU 1 A phsC 100
AVERAGE I MMXU 1 A net 100
ACTIVE POWER P MMXU 1 TotW mag 100
REACTIVE POWER Q MMXU 1 TotVAr mag 100
POWER S MMXU 1 TotVA mag 100
Frequency MMXU 1 Hz net 2
Phase A Active Power MMXU 1 W phsA 100
Phase B Active Power MMXU 1 W phsB 100
Phase C Active Power MMXU 1 W phsC 100
Phase A Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsA 100
Phase B Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsB 100
Phase C Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsC 100
Phase A S Power MMXU 1 VA phsA 100
Phase B S Power MMXU 1 VA phsB 100
Phase C S Power MMXU 1 VA phsC 100
Fault phase A Current MMXU 1 FltA phsA 1000
Fault phase B Current MMXU 1 FltA phsB 1000
Fault phase C Current MMXU 1 FltA phsC 1000
Fault Neutral Current MMXU 1 FltA neut 1000
Max. fault phase A Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsA 1000
Max. fault phase B Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsB 1000
Max. fault phase C Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsC 1000
Max. fault Neutral Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA neut 1000
Cosine phi rms phase A MMXU 1 PF phsA 100
Cosine phi rms phase B MMXU 1 PF phsB 100
Cosine phi rms phase C MMXU 1 PF phsC 100
Cosine phi rms average MMXU 1 PF net 100
Average Power Factor MMXU 1 TotPF mag 100

Table 160. Fundamental measurements

IA fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsA 100
IB fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsB 100
IC fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsC 100
IN fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA neut 100
VA fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsA 100
VB fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsB 100
VC fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsC 100
VN fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV neut 100
Cosine phi phase A (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsA 100
Cosine phi phase B (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsB 100
Cosine phi phase C (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsC 100
Cosine phi average (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF net 100
ACTIVE POWER P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotW mag 100
REACTIVE POWER Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotVAr mag 100
POWER S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotVA mag 100
Phase A Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsA 100
Phase B Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsB 100
Phase C Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsC 100
Phase A Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsA 100
Phase B Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsB 100
Phase C Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsC 100
Phase A S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsA 100
Phase B S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsB 100
Phase C S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsC 100
Table 161. Instantaneous Fundamental measurements

Analog 1 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor1 phsA 100
Analog 2 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor2 phsB 100
Analog 3 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor3 phsC 100
Analog 4 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor4 neut 100
Analog 8 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor8 neut 100
Analog 12 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor12 net 100
Table 162. Energy counter

Active Energy Out MMTR 1 SupWh actVal 100
Active Energy In MMTR 1 DmdWh actVal 100
Reactive Energy Out MMTR 1 SupVArh actVal 100
Reactive Energy In MMTR 1 DmdVArh actVal 100

Table 163. Sequences

I0 MSQI 1 SeqA c1 2
V0 MSQI 1 SeqV c1 2
I1 MSQI 1 SeqA c2 2
V1 MSQI 1 SeqV c2 2
I2 MSQI 1 SeqA c3 2
V2 MSQI 1 SeqV c3 2
Table 164. THD

THD phase A Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsA 100
THD phase B Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsB 100
THD phase C Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsC 100
THD Neutral Current MHAI 1 ThdA neut 100
THD Average Current MHAI 1 ThdA net 100
THD phase A Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsA 100
THD phase B Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsB 100
THD phase C Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsC 100
THD Neutral Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV neut 100
THD Averagel Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV net 100
Table 165. Historic Edition 1

Imax Historic phase A MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsA 1000
Imin Historic phase A MSTA 1 MinAmps phsA 1000
Imax Historic phase B MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsB 1000
Imin Historic phase B MSTA 1 MinAmps phsB 1000
Imax Historic phase C MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsC 1000
Imin Historic phase C MSTA 1 MinAmps phsC 1000
Vmax Historic phase A MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsA 1000
Vmin Historic phase A MSTA 1 MinVolts phsA 1000
Vmax Historic phase B MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsB 1000
Vmin Historic phase B MSTA 1 MinVolts phsB 1000
Vmax Historic phase C MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsC 1000
Vmin Historic phase C MSTA 1 MinVolts phsC 1000
VAmax Historic MSTA 1 MaxVA net 1000
VAmin Historic MSTA 1 MinVA net 1000
Wmax Historic MSTA 1 MaxW net 1000
Wmin Historic MSTA 1 MinW net 1000
VAr max Historic MSTA 1 MaxVAr net 1000
VAr min Historic MSTA 1 MinVAr net 1000

Table 166. Historic Edition 2

Imax Historic phase A maxMMXU 1 A phsA.cVal 1000
Imin Historic phase A minMMXU 1 A phsA.cVal 1000
Imax Historic phase B maxMMXU 1 A phsB.cVal 1000
Imin Historic phase B minMMXU 1 A phsB.cVal 1000
Imax Historic phase C maxMMXU 1 A phsC.cVal 1000
Imin Historic phase C minMMXU 1 A phsC.cVal 1000
Vmax Historic phase A maxMMXU 1 PhV phsA.cVal 1000
Vmin Historic phase A minMMXU 1 PhV phsA.cVal 1000
Vmax Historic phase B maxMMXU 1 PhV phsB.cVal 1000
Vmin Historic phase B minMMXU 1 PhV phsB.cVal 1000
Vmax Historic phase C maxMMXU 1 PhV phsC.cVal 1000
Vmin Historic phase C minMMXU 1 PhV phsC.cVal 1000
VAmax Historic maxMMXU 1 TotVA mag.f 1000
VAmin Historic minMMXU 1 TotVA mag.f 1000
Wmax Historic maxMMXU 1 TotW mag.f 1000
Wmin Historic minMMXU 1 TotW mag.f 1000
VAr max Historic maxMMXU 1 TotVAr mag.f 1000
VAr min Historic minMMXU 1 TotVAr mag.f 1000

Table 167. Unbalanced neutral (edition 1)

Unbalanced neut.1 MMXU 1 A nd1 100
Table 168. Unbalanced neutral (edition 2)

Unbalanced neut.1 MMXU 1 Unbn1 net 100
Table 169. Individual harmonics
Measurement Node Instance Data Attribute Refresh (ms) Refresco (ms)

Harmonic 0 phsA current (%) Harmonics 2nd to 25th MHAI 1 HA phsAHar 100
Harmonic 0 phsB current (%) Harmonics 2nd to 25th MHAI 1 HA phsBHar 100
Harmonic 0 phsC current (%) Harmonics 2nd to 25th MHAI 1 HA phsCHar 100
Harmonic 0 phsA voltage (%) Harmonics 2nd to 25th MHAI 1 HPhV phsAHar 100
Harmonic 0 phsB voltage (%) Harmonics 2nd to 25th MHAI 1 HPhV phsBHar 100
Harmonic 0 phsC voltage (%) Harmonics 2nd to 25th MHAI 1 HPhV phsCHar 100
Table 170. Sag and swell

Event number QVVR 1 EvtNum mag 1000
Last event time QVVR 1 VVaTm mag 1000
Last event V variation QVVR 1 VVa mag 1000
Dip/Swell A start QVVR 1 DipSwlIniA mag 1000
Dip/Swell A end QVVR 1 DipSwlEndA mag 1000
Dip/Swell A max QVVR 1 DipSwlMaxA mag 1000
Dip/Swell A avg QVVR 1 DipSwlAvgA mag 1000
Dip/Swell B start QVVR 1 DipSwlIniB mag 1000
Dip/Swell B end QVVR 1 DipSwlEndB mag 1000
Dip/Swell B max QVVR 1 DipSwlMaxB mag 1000
Dip/Swell B avg QVVR 1 DipSwlAvgB mag 1000
Dip/Swell C start QVVR 1 DipSwlIniC mag 1000
Dip/Swell C end QVVR 1 DipSwlEndC mag 1000
Dip/Swell C max QVVR 1 DipSwlMaxC mag 1000
Dip/Swell C avg QVVR 1 DipSwlAvgC mag 1000

Table 171. Breaker Edition 1

Openings Counter B1 XCBR 1 OpCnt stVal 100
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsA 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsB 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsC 1000
Last Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsA 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsB 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsC 1000
Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsA 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsB 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsC 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsA 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsB 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsC 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsA 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsB 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsC 100
Table 172. Breaker Edition 2

Openings Counter B1 XCBR 1 OpCnt stVal 100
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsA 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsB 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsC 1000
Last Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsA 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsB 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsC 1000
Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 OpenCntA stVal 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 OpenCntB stVal 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 OpenCntC stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 TripCntA stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 TripCntB stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 TripCntC stVal 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 ClCntA stVal 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 ClCntB stVal 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 ClCntC stVal 100

Table 173. Breaker 1 - Operation supervision

Ki2 accumulated ph.A B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsA 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.B B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsB 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.C B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsC 1000
Max.Ki2 accumulated B1 CBOU 1 MaxKI2A general 1000
T.electric opening Br.1 A CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsA mag 1000
T.electric opening Br.1 B CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsB mag 1000
T.electric opening Br.1 C CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.1 A CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsA mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.1 B CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.1 C CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.1 AB CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsAB mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.1 BC CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsBC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.1 CA CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsCA mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.1 A CBOU 1 ElClsTmsA mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.1 B CBOU 1 ElClsTmsB mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.1 C CBOU 1 ElClsTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.1 A CBOU 1 MeClsTmsA mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.1 B CBOU 1 MeClsTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.1 C CBOU 1 MeClsTmsC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.1 AB CBOU 1 DiClsTmsAB mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.1 BC CBOU 1 DiClsTmsBC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.1 CA CBOU 1 DiClsTmsCA mag 1000
Inactive days Br.1 A CBOU 1 NoOpDayA mag 1000
Inactive days Br.1 B CBOU 1 NoOpDayB mag 1000
Inactive days Br.1 C CBOU 1 NoOpDayC mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 1 AB CBOU 1 MaxDiOpAB mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 1 BC CBOU 1 MaxDiOpBC mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 1 CA CBOU 1 MaxDiOpCA mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 1 AB CBOU 1 MaxDiClAB mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 1 BC CBOU 1 MaxDiClBC mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 1 CA CBOU 1 MaxDiClCA mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 1 AB CBOU 1 MedDiOpAB mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 1 BC CBOU 1 MedDiOpBC mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 1 CA CBOU 1 MedDiOpCA mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 1 AB CBOU 1 MedDiClAB mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 1 BC CBOU 1 MedDiClBC mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 1 CA CBOU 1 MedDiClCA mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 1 A CBOU 1 MedElOpAB mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 1 B CBOU 1 MedElOpBC mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 1 C CBOU 1 MedElOpCA mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 1 A CBOU 1 MedElClAB mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 1 B CBOU 1 MedElClBC mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 1 C CBOU 1 MedElClCA mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 1 A CBOU 1 MedMeOpAB mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 1 B CBOU 1 MedMeOpBC mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 1 C CBOU 1 MedMeOpCA mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 1 A CBOU 1 MedMeClAB mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 1 B CBOU 1 MedMeClBC mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 1 C CBOU 1 MedMeClCA mag 1000
Max.electric opening 1 A CBOU 1 MaxElOpAB mag 1000
Max.electric opening 1 B CBOU 1 MaxElOpBC mag 1000
Max.electric opening 1 C CBOU 1 MaxElOpCA mag 1000
Max.electric closing 1 A CBOU 1 MaxElClAB mag 1000
Max.electric closing 1 B CBOU 1 MaxElClBC mag 1000
Max.electric closing 1 C CBOU 1 MaxElClCA mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 1 A CBOU 1 MaxMeOpAB mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 1 B CBOU 1 MaxMeOpBC mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 1 C CBOU 1 MaxMeOpCA mag 1000
Max.mechanical closing 1 A CBOU 1 MaxMeClAB mag 1000
Max.mechanical closing 1 B CBOU 1 MaxMeClBC mag 1000

Max.mechanical closing 1 C CBOU 1 MaxMeClCA mag 1000

Br1 Pole wear A CBOU 1 BrWear phsA 1000
Br1 Pole wear B CBOU 1 BrWear phsB 1000
Br1 Pole wear C CBOU 1 BrWear phsC 1000
Table 174. Recloser

Total Reclose Counter RREC 1 RecCnt actVal 100
1st 3phase Reclose Counter RREC 1 Rec1P3Cnt actVal 100
Second Reclose Counter RREC 1 Rec2Cnt actVal 100
Third Reclose Counter RREC 1 Rec3Cnt actVal 100
Fourth Reclose Counter RREC 1 Rec4Cnt actVal 100

Table 175. Board 1 of RTD and analogue outputs

Temperature 1 RTDGGIO 1 Tmp1 mag 1000
Analog. output 1 RTDGGIO 1 OutAn1 mag 1000
Table 176. Board 2 of RTD and analogue outputs

Table 177. Temperature

Temperature CTSU 1 Temp net 1000
Table 178. Power supply

Power Supply GENLLN0 1 PSup net 1000
Power Supply 2 GENLLN0 1 PSup2 net 1000
Table 179. Internal battery

Internal battery LPHD 1 IntBat net 1000

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 
29. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The unit continually checks the various incorporated elements and cards. If an error is detected in any of the elements or cards, an
alarm is generated.
The available signals indicate faults in the card check, in the communications between the cards, in the unit’s configuration, etc.
The detected errors are shown in:
❑ Status report
❑ Incident report
❑ Sequence of events (SOE)
❑ Digital outputs and CPU hardware alarm output.
❑ IHMI leds and status leds
The errors can be critical and non critical, depending on the effect they have in the device.
Critical errors
Critical hardware error. Indicates that a critical error has been produced. In addition to this signal, the cause that produced the signal
will be indicated.
If the error affects the unit’s operation, a critical error is generated, which in addition to the signal acts on:
❑ Colour front LED. Non-configurable status LED, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is green, it indicates
that everything is correct, while if it is red it indicates a critical error in the unit.
❑ CPU Relay. Non-configurable 3-contact relay, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is active (common
terminal – NO), it indicates that everything is correct, while if it is deactivated (common terminal– NC) it indicates a critical
error in the unit. If the unit is switched off, the relay is deactivated.
The causes that produce errors are:
❑ CPU error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the CPU
❑ Analogue error. Indicates an error in transformers card.
❑ I/O micro error. Indicates an error in the I/O cards’ micro.
❑ Analogue connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and the
transformers card.
❑ I/O connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communication between the CPU and an I/O card.
Additionally, it will indicate the card which has suffered the failure:
 Error card address x. Indicates that there is a communication error with the card with the address x.
❑ Front connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and the unit’s
front card.
❑ Shared analogue memory error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the CPU
and the transformers card.
❑ Error shared I/O memory. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the CPU and
the I/O cards.
❑ Alarm settings. Indicates that errors have been detected in the storage of the unit’s settings.
❑ FW Alarm. Indicates that the relay firmware versions are incompatible.
❑ Memory check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the checking of the unit’s memory.
❑ Converter check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card AD converter.
❑ Converter voltage level alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card reference voltages..
❑ Relay activation alarm. Indicates that an error has been detected in the activation of at least one of the I/O cards’ relays.
❑ I/O configuration error. Indicates that the configuration of the I/O cards does not coincide with the unit’s correct
configuration.

❑ General Vdc error. Indicates a failure in the internal power supply levels.
❑ For each I/O card there is are 5 signals, indicating:
 Status OK. Indicates that the card is configured correctly and without errors
 Configured & No_detected. Indicates that the card is configured by the user, but not detected in the unit. This may be
because it is not assembled or because it has an error. Equivalent to the current communication error.
 Different configuration. The type indicated by the user and the type detected by the unit do not coincide.
 No_configured & detected. Indicates that card that has not been configured by the user has been detected in an
address.
 Internal card error. A card check error has been received (includes relay check).
Non critical errors
These errors have a limited effect on the device.
❑ RTC clock error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the real time clock.
❑ Continuous component monitoring alarm. Indicates that an error in the continuous measurement monitoring has been
detected in the transformers card.
❑ Frequency configuration error. This is not a unit failure, but rather a configuration failure. Indicates that the frequency
measurement of the signals being injected into the unit do not match the set measurement, that is, the unit is configured
as 50Hz and the signals which are being injected are greater than 55Hz; or that the unit is configured as 60 Hz and the
signals being injected are less than 55 Hz.
❑ Internal battery failure. Indicates that the data storage battery is below the security levels and that the data may be lost at
shutdown.
❑ Version compatibility error. Indicates that the versions of the unit's firmware are not correct.
❑ Time setting configuration alarm. Indicates that there is an error in the configuration of the unit’s time setting.
29.1 ERROR DETECTION
The error detection can be made by any of the indicated ways.
Status report:
Figure 151 shows the screen of the PacFactory that show the available check signals.
The example screen shows activation of critical error (HW error), generated by I/O configuration error (card 2 is not detected). It
also indicates Internal battery failure. On the other hand, it shows I/O card 1 is correct.
Incident reports and sequence of events:

The available check signals are shown in both messages.
Led and digital outputs:

The leds and digital output can be configured with any of the error signals
Status Led and critical error output:

Colour front LED and CPU relay are activated when a critical error is detected. They are not configurable.

Figure 151 Device checks screen
29.2 ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE
The procedure will depend on the detected error and the device status.
❑ If the device is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the device is well supplied, contact the technical service
❑ If the device is on but it shows failure, return to the events screen and check which type of error it is
 If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error persists after turning the unit off and on,
contact the technical service.
 If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements, and if they are correct, turn off and
on the unit; if the error does not disappear, contact the technical service.
 If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists, contact the technical service.
 If error in the setting is shown, send the settings again. If error persists contact the technical service

PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES 
30. PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES

These protection units receive samples of analog measurements using Sampled Values (SV) protocol, through an Ethernet network.
They can be connected to merging units or electronic transformers that follow IEC61850-9-2 or IEC61869-9 standards.
The device can communicate through two physical Ethernet interfaces RJ45 or optic fibre. PRP/HSR redundancy and Link failover
redundancy are available.
Available measures and their accuracy are determined by the accuracy of the external SV publishers. These publishers will be responsible
for capturing and sending analog measurements of the lines, generating SV frames through an Ethernet communications network. The
device will only subscribe, among all the available measures, to those that are necessary for their correct operation.
Local measures captured directly through current and / or voltage input channels are allowed. Therefore, some of the measures can be
local and some others sampled values. In order to operate correctly, the measures must be synchronized by GPS.
The following figures show, according to model encoding, the board position.
Figure 152 19” chassis and redundant communications
Figure 153 19” chassis and redundant power supply and communications

User Manual 404
30.1 DEVICE MODELS
There are multifunction protection (MD), distance (ZT), differential transformer (TD), line differential (LD) and control with measure
(CD). The detailed functions included in every family are explained in the user manual of the family.
The device model code includes three additional characters at the end of the model encoding to select the sampled values ports and
the type of measures (see chapter 1).
In these devices, the housing must be Chassis 19" 4U and I/O board 6, 7 and 8 are not available.
Figure 154 Sampled values options
CONTROL
HOUSING
ANALOG
MODEL
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM5
COM6
ETH1
ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
I/O 1
I/O 2
I/O 3
I/O 4
I/O 5
I/O 6
I/O 7
I/O 8
INGEPAC EF XX MODEL INGEPAC EF- - A - A - A
MSV COMMUNICATION PORT (Sample values)

E GFO ETH-1
F RJ45 ETH-2
L LC
O GFO (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch)
P RJ45 (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch)
- Nada
LOCAL ANALOG MEASURES

No local measures -
Configurable (All/None local) D
30.2 PUBLISHERS DECLARATION
It is necessary to have configuration files (CID) or configuration data of the SV publishers. If the subscription is made using PacFactory
configuration tool, it is mandatory to import the CID files of the publishers and receivers into the same installation.
For detailed information see the "Add-in of subscription" chapter.
30.3 SAMPLED VALUES SUBSCRIPTION
The sampled values subscription is performed according to the IEC61850 standard (edition 2).
The details of this functionality are:
❑ It is only allowed sampled values that comply with the recommended for protection and measurement, indicated in IEC61850-9-
2LE ("Implementation guideline for digital interface to instrument transformers using IEC 61850-9-2" of UCA International Users
Group) and IEC61869-9 ("Instrument transformers - Part 9: Digital interface for instrument transformers") standards, allowing the
subscription up to 8 publishers. All subscribed publishers must use the same standard. If it is subscribed to publishers with different
standards, the CID will be erased because of a non-valid configuration.
❑ After sending a configuration file, the subscription and reception remain operative until the CID has been parsed and fully
validated. Then, the new subscription settings are loaded.
❑ The subscription is made with EC61850 edition 2 and can be used with edition 1.
30.3.1 Configuration
According to IEC 61850 edition 2, the sampled values subscription uses the Inputs-ExtRef in the CID.
The Inputs section defines all external values that will be received from other computers. In this section each ExtRef element refers
to an external data and the element intAddr performs the mapping or association to a data of the device.
In the case of sampled values, the Inputs section is included in the logical node "PHSMMXU". This node has an "OpPhasor" element
associated with each analog measurement of the device. In this way, an external measurement, received through sampled values,
can be assigned to an internal measurement of the subscriber device.

User Manual 405
The CID file of an IED with subscriptions to configured SMV messages contains several sections of IEDs. The section of the IED itself
and sections of each merging unit IEDs that publishes the sampled values to which it is subscribed.
These sections of the external IEDs only contain the data model necessary to perform the subscription in order to reduce the size of
the CID file.
For more information about the sampled values subscription configuration process, refer to the configuration software tool's user
manual (energyFactorySuite/pacFactory).
30.3.2 ADD-IN of subscription

The configuration tool has an add-in that allows the relay to subscribe to the publishers of sampled values in an easy way. To access it,
it is necessary to access the 61850 configuration menu, as shown in Figure 155.
Once the 61850 configuration menu is selected, through the icon , the subscriptions configurator is accessed, valid both for
subscriptions to Gooses and to sampled values. In this case, "Sampled Values" option will be selected, as shown in Figure 156.
Configuration tool shows all the sampled values control blocks available in the installation, allowing a maximum of 8 subscriptions
(Figure 155).
It is also possible to monitor the subscriptions by using LSVS logical nodes.
"Data Binding" tab (Figure 158) shows the measurement channels used by the protection (depending on the model), and the current
and voltage measurements (TCTR and TVTR) available in the added control blocks. Each data channel of the protection can be assigned
a data, respecting the type of measurement of each channel, TCTR for intensities and TVTR for voltages.
Figure 155 Subscription menu selection

User Manual 406
Figure 156 Subscription configuration
Figure 157 Sampled values control blocks selection

User Manual 407
Figure 158 LSVS nodes assignment
Figure 1592 Channel assignment
30.3.3 Monitoring
The LSVS logical node of the data model is used to monitor subscriptions to SV messages. There are 8 instances of LSVS logical
nodes that allow to monitor up to 8 subscriptions to sampled values.
The configuration value in the LSVS logical node is the SvCBRef data (reference to the Sampled Values control block subscribed).
This reference must be filled out when doing the configuration of the subscription, additionally allows to be modified in execution
through an IEC 61850 client.
The values monitored in this logical node are:
❑ NdsCom: Subscription needs commissioning. When true, the received SV message does not correspond to the current
subscription settings. Verify that the configuration revision is correct.
❑ St: When true, the subscription is active. Otherwise it is inactive.
❑ SimSt: If true, subscribed SV messages with the simulation bit set are being received and accepted
❑ ConfRevNum: The expected configuration revision number in SV messages.
❑ RxConfRevNum: The configuration revision number received in SV messages.
All this data are mapped in the internal database of the device and can be used in logics of the device and in the local display.
The assigned Boolean signals are listed in the following table:

User Manual 408
Table 180. LSVS internal signals
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASOCIATED INTERNAL SIGNAL

St (Subscription status) 24960
LSVS1 NdsCom (Needs commissioning) 24961
SimSt (Simulation status) 24962
The following table, shows the integer signals. Internally they are mapped to counters
Table 181. LSVS counters
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASOCIATED INTERNAL COUNTER

ConfRevNum (ConfRev configured) 177
LSVS1
RxConfRevNum (ConfRev received) 178
LSVS2
LSVS3
LSVS4
LSVS5
LSVS6
LSVS7
LSVS8

User Manual 409
30.4 CONFIGURABLE LOCAL MEASURES
The device code selection has different options for the local measures.
In the "-" option, all measures are received through communications, using sampled values messages.
In the "D" option, depending on the binary file loaded on the analog card, or all the measurements are wired directly to the analog
card's measurement transformers (conventional wiring), or all of them are received by communications in the form of sampled
values. The options are:
❑ All measures received from local transformer.

 The signal "SV receiver device" is deactivated.
 The device´s version doesn´t include the SV board versions.
❑ All measures received from sampled values.

 The signal "SV receiver device" is activated.
 The device´s version includes the SV board versions.
30.5 SAMPLED VALUES SIMULATION
The device implements the simulation mode defined in the IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This mode allows the simulation of any SV that is present in the communication network so that two SV with the same information
data will be present at the same moment, the real one without the simulation bit active and the simulated one with the simulation bit
active. If the subscriber is in simulation mode, once it has received the first simulation SV its values will be used instead of the values of
the original SV. Therefore, if the device is in simulation mode, it still accepts 'original' SV messages, and only discards the 'original' SV
messages for those SVs which are simulated.
Simulation mode is enabled with the controllable data "Sim" included in the LPHD logical node in the GEN logical device.
In each LSVS logical node, used to monitor SV subscription, the SimSt status shows with TRUE value that subscribed SV messages with
the simulation bit set are being received and accepted.
When the subscriber is not in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=false) the simulated SVs are ignored. The device keep on using
the "real" SV messages.
When the subscriber is in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=true) the simulated SVs are used for operational purposes. The device
ignores the "real" SV messages after a first simulated one has been received. The corresponding LSVS.SimSt is set when the first
simulated message is received and only cleared when LPHD.Sim.stVal is set to false.
Once the device has received a simulated message for one of the subscribed SV messages, it will not process the real one until the
simulation mode of the device (LPHD.Sim.stVal) is set to false.

User Manual 410
30.6 TEST MODE FOR SAMPLED VALUES
The device implements the test mode for the SV reception.
If the device is in test mode for the SV, only the measurements received in the message of sampled values with the Quality bit of the
test mode active will be considered valid.
The device can be set to test mode for SV using the "SV test mode On" Setting, included in GEN/LPHD logical node.
Table 182. Test mode for sampled values setting

SVTestEna SV Test mode On NO/Yes enum
The signal "SV mode test Status" is activated when the device is in test mode for SV.
Table 183. Test mode for sampled values signal

SV mode test Status SVTestSt stVal
30.7 BEHAVIOUR WITH LOSS OF SYNCHRONIZATION
When a loss of synchronization is detected in the sampled value messages, the device can keep on protection or not depending on the
settings.
There is a setting that indicates how the device should operate when sampled values are not synchronized or when local
synchronization is used. It is included in the logical node GEN/LPHD.
❑ Lost SV synchronization. Indicates the behaviour of the device depending on the synchronization type received in the
sampled values messages. The available options are:
 Allow local. The device has to see the measures synchronized (Locally or globally) to consider them valid.
 Allow only global. The device has to see the measures with global synchronization to consider them valid.
Table 184. Behavior with loss of synchronization setting

Allow local (1)
SyncLostMod Lost SV synchronization enum
Allow only global (2)
A device subscribed to a single MU, even if the measures it receives are not synchronized, it treats them as measures with local
synchronization.

User Manual 411
Parque Tecnológico de Bizkaia • Edificio 110
48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain
Tel + 34 944 039 600
Fax +34 944 039 345
technology@ingeteam.com
Ingeteam Power Technology, S.A.

www.ingeteam.com

Ume Ingepac Ef CB Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ume Ingepac Ef CB Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAPACITOR BANK PROTECTION

© All rights reserved. No part of this publication

Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the right to

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 10

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

3.2.9 Undercurrent ...................................................................................................................................................... 70

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

5.2.16 Recloser statuses............................................................................................................................................. 144

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

10.3 LOADING FIREWALL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 194

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

17.7.3 Checked values ................................................................................................................................................ 238

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

21.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 289

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

25.4.2 Request for digital signals ............................................................................................................................... 333

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Table 1 shows the features available in each of the different models.

Table 1 Functions depending on model

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.2 MODEL ENCODING

EXTENDED CONTROL FUNCTIONS

POWER SUPPLY MODULE

REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS

REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORTS

I/O BOARD CONFIGURATION

Note 1: Only selectable with extended control functions.

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 1 Board position acording to model encoding 19” chassis

Figure 2 Board position acording to model encoding ½ 19” chassis”

I/O 1 XFA1 XB1

I/O 3 XA3 XB3

Figure 5 PRP Redundancy (2LC) Figure 6 PRP Redundancy (2RJ45 + 2LC)

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.3 USER INTERFACE

The front board is equipped with:

❑ 10-digit numerical keyboard with decimal point, plus R key

The rear communications could be:

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.4.2 Power supply

Figure 9 Simple power supply

Figure 10 Double power supply

1.4.3 Input/output cards

Figure 11 Module 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs

Figure 12 Module 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 13 Module 16 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs

❑ Module 4 (Figure 14): Equipped with 32 digital inputs grouped as follows:

Figure 14 Module 32 inputs

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Figure 15 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs

Standard configuration of analogue inputs

Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Figure 16 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated)

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 17 Módule 8 inputs, 4 outputs (hbco) and 4 digital outputs

Figure 18 Módule 8 inputs, 8 outputs

Figure 20 Module 8 inputs, 8 outputs (hbco)

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.4.4 Analogue inputs

Modelo CB0 Modelo CB1

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.